Introduction

This manual describes the specifications of MITSUBISHI CNC M70 Series.

To safely use this CNC unit, thoroughly study the "Precautions for Safety" on the next page before use.

Details described in this manual

At the beginning of each item, a table indicating it's specification according to the model.
○ : Standard
△ : Optional
□ : Selection
☆ : Planning

CAUTION
The items that are not described in this manual must be interpreted as "not possible".

This manual is written on the assumption that all option functions are added.

Some functions may differ or some functions may not be usable depending on the NC system (software)
version.

General precautions
(1) When the contents of this manual is updated, the version (A, B, ...) on the cover will be incremented.
Precautions for Safety

Always read this manual, related manuals and attached documents before installation, operation, programming,
maintenance or inspection to ensure correct use. Understand all the conditions described in this manual before using the
unit. We rank the safety precautions into "DANGER", "WARNING" and "CAUTION" for the manuals issued by Mitsubishi,
including this manual.

DANGER
When there is a great risk that the user could be subject to fatalities or serious injuries if handling is
mistaken.

WARNING
When the user could be subject to fatalities or serious injuries if handling is mistaken.

CAUTION
When the user could be subject to injuries or when physical damage could occur if handling is mistaken.

Note that even items ranked as " CAUTION", may lead to major results depending on the situation. In any case,
important information that must always be observed is described.

The following signs indicate prohibition and compulsory.

This sign indicates prohibited behavior (must not do).

For example, indicates "Keep fire away".

This sign indicated a thing that is pompously (must do).

For example, indicates "it must be grounded".

The meaning of each pictorial sign is as follows.

CAUTION rotated Danger Electric shock

CAUTION CAUTION HOT Danger explosive
object risk

Disassembly is
Prohibited KEEP FIRE AWAY General instruction Earth ground
prohibited
DANGER
Not applicable in this manual.

WARNING
Not applicable in this manual.

CAUTION
1. Items related to product and manual

The items that are not described in this manual must be interpreted as "not possible".

This manual is written on the assumption that all option functions are added.

Some functions may differ or some functions may not be usable depending on the NC system (software)
version.

2. Items related to start up and maintenance

Follow the power specifications (input voltage range, frequency range, momentary power failure time
range) described in this manual.

Follow the environment conditions (ambient temperature, humidity, vibration, atmosphere) described in
this manual.

Follow the remote type machine contact input/output interface described in this manual. (Connect a diode
in parallel with the inductive load or connect a protective resistor in serial with the capacitive load, etc.)

If the parameter is used to set the temperature rise detection function to invalid, overheating may occur,
thereby disabling control and possibly resulting in the axes running out of control, which in turn may result
in machine damage and/or bodily injury or destruction of the unit. It is for this reason that the detection
function is normally left "valid" for operation.The parameter for the temperature rise detection function will
be validated forcibly when the NC unit is turned ON.
Treatment of waste

The following two laws will apply when disposing of this product. Considerations must be made to each law.
The following laws are in effect in Japan. Thus, when using this product overseas, the local laws will have a
priority. If necessary, indicate or notify these laws to the final user of the product.

(1) Requirements for "Law for Promotion of Effective Utilization of Resources"

(a) Recycle as much of this product as possible when finished with use.
(b) When recycling, often parts are sorted into steel scraps and electric parts, etc., and sold to scrap
contractors. Mitsubishi recommends sorting the product and selling the members to appropriate
contractors.

(2) Requirements for "Law for Treatment of Waste and Cleaning"

(a) Mitsubishi recommends recycling and selling the product when no longer needed according to item
(1) above. The user should make an effort to reduce waste in this manner.
(b) When disposing a product that cannot be resold, it shall be treated as a waste product.
(c) The treatment of industrial waste must be commissioned to a licensed industrial waste treatment
contractor, and appropriate measures, including a manifest control, must be taken.
(d) Batteries correspond to "primary batteries", and must be disposed of according to local disposal
laws.
Disposal

(Note) This symbol mark is for EU countries only.

This symbol mark is according to the directive 2006/66/EC Article 20 Information for end-
users and Annex II.

Your MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC product is designed and manufactured with high quality materials and
components which can be recycled and/or reused.
This symbol means that batteries and accumulators, at their end-of-life, should be disposed of
separately from your household waste.
If a chemical symbol is printed beneath the symbol shown above, this chemical symbol means that the
battery or accumulator contains a heavy metal at a certain concentration. This will be indicated as
follows:
Hg: mercury (0,0005%), Cd: cadmium (0,002%), Pb: lead (0,004%)
In the European Union there are separate collection systems for used batteries and accumulators.
Please, dispose of batteries and accumulators correctly at your local community waste collection/
recycling centre.

Please, help us to conserve the environment we live in!

Trademarks

MELDAS, MELSEC, EZSocket, EZMotion, iQ Platform, MELSOFT, GOT, CC-Link, CC-Link/LT and CC-Link
IE are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation in Japan and/or other
countries.

Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Microsoft® and Windows® are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
CompactFlash and CF are either trademarks or registered trademarks of SanDisk Corporation in the United
States and/or other countries.
UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and/or other countries.
Intel® and Pentium® are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation in the United States
and/or other countries.
Other company and product names that appear in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of the
respective companies.
本製品の取扱いについて

( 日本語 /Japanese)
本製品は工業用 ( クラス A) 電磁環境適合機器です。販売者あるいは使用者はこの点に注意し、住商業環境以外で
の使用をお願いいたします。

Handling of our product

(English)
This is a class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the
user may be required to take adequate measures.

본 제품의 취급에 대해서

( 한국어 /Korean)
이 기기는 업무용 (A 급 ) 전자파적합기기로서 판매자 또는 사용자는 이 점을 주의하시기 바라며 가정외의 지역에
서 사용하는 것을 목적으로 합니다 .
WARRANTY

Please confirm the following product warranty details before using MITSUBISHI CNC.

1. Warranty Period and Coverage

Should any fault or defect (hereafter called "failure") for which we are liable occur in this product during the warranty period,
we shall provide repair services at no cost through the distributor from which the product was purchased or through a
Mitsubishi Electric service provider. Note, however that this shall not apply if the customer was informed prior to purchase of
the product that the product is not covered under warranty. Also note that we are not responsible for any on-site readjustment
and/or trial run that may be required after a defective unit is replaced.

[Warranty Term]
The term of warranty for this product shall be twenty-four (24) months from the date of delivery of product to the end user,
provided the product purchased from us in Japan is installed in Japan (but in no event longer than thirty (30) months,
Including the distribution time after shipment from Mitsubishi Electric or its distributor).
Note that, for the case where the product purchased from us in or outside Japan is exported and installed in any country
other than where it was purchased; please refer to "2. Service in overseas countries" as will be explained.

[Limitations]
(1) The customer is requested to conduct an initial failure diagnosis by him/herself, as a general rule. It can also be carried
out by us or our service provider upon the customer’s request and the actual cost will be charged.
(2) This warranty applies only when the conditions, method, environment, etc., of use are in compliance with the terms and
conditions and instructions that are set forth in the instruction manual, user’s manual, and the caution label affixed to the
product, etc.
(3) Even during the term of warranty, repair costs shall be charged to the customer in the following cases:
(a) a failure caused by improper storage or handling, carelessness or negligence, etc., or a failure caused by the
customer’s hardware or software problem
(b) a failure caused by any alteration, etc., to the product made by the customer without Mitsubishi Electric’s approval
(c) a failure which may be regarded as avoidable, if the customer’s equipment in which this product is incorporated is
equipped with a safety device required by applicable laws or has any function or structure considered to be
indispensable in the light of common sense in the industry
(d) a failure which may be regarded as avoidable if consumable parts designated in the instruction manual, etc. are duly
maintained and replaced
(e) any replacement of consumable parts (including a battery, relay and fuse)
(f) a failure caused by external factors such as inevitable accidents, including without limitation fire and abnormal
fluctuation of voltage, and acts of God, including without limitation earthquake, lightning, and natural disasters
(g) a failure which is unforeseeable under technologies available at the time of shipment of this product from our company
(h) any other failures which we are not responsible for or which the customer acknowledges we are not responsible for

2. Service in Overseas Countries

If the customer installs the product purchased from us in his/her machine or equipment, and export it to any country other
than where he/she bought it, the customer may sign a paid warranty contract with our local FA center.
This falls under the case where the product purchased from us in or outside Japan is exported and installed in any country
other than where it was purchased.
For details please contact the distributor from which the customer purchased the product.

3. Exclusion of Responsibility for Compensation against Loss of Opportunity, Secondary Loss, etc.
Whether during or after the term of warranty, we assume no responsibility for any damages arising from causes for which we
are not responsible, any losses of opportunity and/or profit incurred by the customer due to a failure of this product, any
damages, secondary damages or compensation for accidents arising under specific circumstances that either foreseen or
unforeseen by Mitsubishi Electric, any damages to products other than this product, or compensation for any replacement
work, readjustment and startup test run of on-site machines or any other operations conducted by the customer.

4. Changes in Product Specifications

Specifications shown in our catalogs, manuals or technical documents are subject to change without notice.

5. Product Application
(1) For the use of this product, its applications should be those that may not result in a serious damage even if any failure or
malfunction occurs in the product, and a backup or fail-safe function should operate on an external system to the product
when any failure or malfunction occurs.
(2) Mitsubishi CNC is designed and manufactured solely for applications to machine tools to be used for industrial purposes.
Do not use this product in any applications other than those specified above, especially those which are substantially
influential on the public interest or which are expected to have significant influence on human lives or properties.
CONTENTS

I General Specifications
1 System Basic Configuration Drawing .................................................................................................... I - 1
2 General Connection Diagram.................................................................................................................. I - 3
2.1 Without Touch Panel.......................................................................................................................... I - 4
2.2 With Touch Panel............................................................................................................................... I - 5
3 List of Configuration................................................................................................................................ I - 7
3.1 List of Units ........................................................................................................................................ I - 8
3.2 Durable Parts ................................................................................................................................... I - 11
3.3 Replacements .................................................................................................................................. I - 11
3.4 List of Cables ................................................................................................................................... I - 12
4 Environment Conditions ....................................................................................................................... I - 15
5 Hardware Specifications ....................................................................................................................... I - 19
5.1 Control Unit ...................................................................................................................................... I - 20
5.2 Display Unit...................................................................................................................................... I - 31
5.3 Keyboard Unit .................................................................................................................................. I - 34
5.4 Operation Panel I/O Unit.................................................................................................................. I - 42
5.5 Remote I/O Unit ............................................................................................................................... I - 53
5.6 Scan I/O Unit.................................................................................................................................... I - 60
5.7 External Power Supply Unit ............................................................................................................. I - 71
5.8 Manual Pulse Generator .................................................................................................................. I - 73
5.9 Synchronous Feed Encoder ............................................................................................................ I - 75
5.10 Optical Communication Repeater Unit (FCU7-EX022).................................................................. I - 76
5.11 MITSUBISHI CNC Machine Operation Panel ................................................................................ I - 79
5.11.1 MITSUBISHI CNC Machine Operation Panel A..................................................................... I - 79
5.11.2 MITSUBISHI CNC Machine Operation Panel B..................................................................... I - 86
5.12 Exclusive CF Cards for MITSUBISHI CNC.................................................................................... I - 90
5.12.1 Precautions for Use of Commercially Available CF Cards..................................................... I - 90
II Functional Specifications
MITSUBISHI CNC M70V Series Specifications List
○: Standard　△: Option　□: Selection
M70V Series
Class M system L system Page
M70V Type B M70V Type A M70V Type B M70V Type A
1 Control Axes II - 1
1.1 Control Axes II - 2
1.1.1 Number of Basic Control Axes (NC Axes) ○ 3 ○ 3 ○ 2 ○ 2 II - 2
1.1.2 Max. Number of Axes (NC Axes + Spindles + PLC Axes) 9 11 9 11 II - 2
1.1.2.1 Max. Number of NC Axes (In Total for All the Part Systems) 5 8 5 9 II - 2
1.1.2.2 Max. Number of Spindles 2 2 3 4 II - 2
1.1.2.3 Max. Number of PLC Axes 6 6 6 6 II - 2
1.1.4 Max. Number of PLC Indexing Axes 4 4 4 4 II - 3
1.1.5 Number of Simultaneous Contouring Control Axes 4 4 4 4 II - 3
1.1.6 Max. Number of NC Axes in a Part System 5 8 5 8 II - 3
1.2 Control Part System II - 4
1.2.1 Standard Number of Part Systems 1 1 1 1 II - 4
1.2.2 Max. Number of Part Systems ○1 ○2 ○1 ○2 II - 4
1.3 Control Axes and Operation Modes II - 5
1.3.1 Tape (RS-232C Input) Mode ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 5
1.3.2 Memory Mode ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 5
1.3.3 MDI Mode ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 5
1.3.5 Front IC Card Mode ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 5
2 Input Command II - 7
2.1 Data Increment II - 8
2.1.1 Least Command Increment II - 8
2.1.1.1 Least Command Increment 1 μm ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 8
2.1.1.2 Least Command Increment 0.1 μm ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 8
2.1.2 Least Control Increment II - 9
2.1.2.1 Least Control Increment 0.01μm (10nm) ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 9
2.1.2.2 Least Control Increment 0.001μm (1nm) ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 9
2.2 Unit System II - 10
2.2.1 Inch/Metric Changeover ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 10
2.2.2 Input Command Increment Tenfold ○ ○ ― ― II - 10
2.3 Program Format II - 11
2.3.1 Program Format II - 11
2.3.1.1 Format 1 for Lathe (G Code List 2, 3) ― ― ○ ○ II - 11
2.3.1.2 Format 2 for Lathe (G Code List 4, 5) ― ― ○ ○ II - 11
2.3.1.3 Special Format for Lathe (G Code List 6, 7) ― ― ○ ○ II - 11
2.3.1.4 Format 1 for Machining Center ○ ○ ― ― II - 11
2.3.1.5 Format 2 for Machining Center (M2 Format) ○ ○ ― ― II - 11
2.3.1.6 MITSUBISHI CNC Special Format ― ― ○ ○ II - 11
2.4 Command Value II - 12
2.4.1 Decimal Point Input I, II ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 12
2.4.2 Absolute/Incremental Command ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 13
2.4.3 Diameter/Radius Designation ― ― ○ ○ II - 15
3 Positioning/Interpolation II - 17
3.1 Positioning II - 18
3.1.1 Positioning ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 18
3.1.2 Unidirectional Positioning ○ ○ ― ― II - 19
3.2 Linear/Circular Interpolation II - 20
3.2.1 Linear Interpolation ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 20
3.2.2 Circular Interpolation (Center/Radius Designation) ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 21
3.2.3 Helical Interpolation ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 23
3.2.4 Spiral/Conical Interpolation ― ○ ― ― II - 25
3.2.5 Cylindrical Interpolation ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 28
3.2.6 Polar Coordinate Interpolation ― ― ○ ○ II - 29
3.2.7 Milling Interpolation ― ― ― ○ II - 30
3.3 Curve Interpolation II - 31
3.3.3 Spline Interpolation (1st Part System Only) ― ○ ― ― II - 31
4 Feed II - 33
4.1 Feed Rate II - 34
4.1.1 Rapid Traverse Rate (m/min) 1000 1000 1000 1000 II - 34
4.1.2 Cutting Feed Rate (m/min) 1000 1000 1000 1000 II - 35
4.1.3 Manual Feed Rate (m/min) 1000 1000 1000 1000 II - 36
4.1.4 Rotary Axis Command Speed Tenfold ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 36
4.2 Feed Rate Input Methods II - 37
4.2.1 Feed per Minute (Asynchronous Feed) ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 37
4.2.2 Feed per Revolution (Synchronous Feed) ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 38
4.2.3 Inverse Time Feed ― ○ ― ― II - 39
4.2.4 F 1-digit Feed ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 40
4.2.5 Manual Speed Command ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 41
4.3 Override II - 42
4.3.1 Rapid Traverse Override ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 42
4.3.2 Cutting Feed Override ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 42
4.3.3 2nd Cutting Feed Override ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 42
4.3.4 Override Cancel ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 43
4.4 Acceleration/Deceleration II - 44
4.4.1 Automatic Acceleration/Deceleration after Interpolation ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 44
4.4.2 Rapid Traverse Constant Inclination Acceleration/Deceleration ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 46
4.4.3 Rapid Traverse Constant Inclination Multi-step Acceleration/Deceleration (1st Part System Only) ○ ○ ― ― II - 50
○: Standard　△: Option　□: Selection
M70V Series
Class M system L system Page
M70V Type B M70V Type A M70V Type B M70V Type A
4.5 Thread Cutting II - 52
4.5.1 Thread Cutting (Lead/Thread Number Designation) ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 52
4.5.2 Variable Lead Thread Cutting ― ― ○ ○ II - 54
4.5.3 Synchronous Tapping II - 55
4.5.3.1 Synchronous Tapping Cycle ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 55
4.5.3.2 Pecking Tapping Cycle ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 57
4.5.3.3 Deep-hole Tapping Cycle ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 59
4.5.4 Chamfering ― ― ○ ○ II - 61
4.5.8 High-speed Synchronous Tapping (OMR-DD) ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 61
4.6 Manual Feed II - 62
4.6.1 Manual Rapid Traverse ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 62
4.6.2 Jog Feed ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 63
4.6.3 Incremental Feed ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 64
4.6.4 Handle Feed ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 64
4.6.5 Manual Feed Rate B ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 65
4.7 Dwell II - 66
4.7.1 Dwell (Time-based Designation) ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 66
5 Program Memory/Editing II - 67
5.1 Memory Capacity II - 68
5.1.1 Memory Capacity (Number of Programs Stored) II - 68
5.1.1.6 500kB [1280 m] (1000 Programs) ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 68
5.1.1.8 2000kB [5120 m] (1000 Programs) ― △(*1) ― △(*1) II - 68
5.2 Editing II - 69
5.2.1 Program Editing ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 69
5.2.2 Background Editing ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 70
5.2.3 Buffer Correction ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 71
6 Operation and Display II - 73
6.1 Structure of Operation/Display Panel II - 74
6.1.1 Color Display (8.4-type LCD TFT) □ □ □ □ II - 74
6.1.2 Color Display (10.4-type LCD TFT) □ □ □ □ II - 74
6.1.7 Color Touch-panel Display (10.4-type LCD TFT) □ □ □ □ II - 74
6.2 Operation Methods and Functions II - 75
6.2.1 Operation Input ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 75
6.2.2 Absolute/Incremental Value Setting ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 75
6.2.5 Displayed Part System Switch ― ○ ― ○ II - 75
6.2.6 Menu List ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 76
6.2.7 Display Switch by Operation Mode ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 76
6.2.8 External Signal Display Switch ― ○ ― ○ II - 76
6.2.10 Screen Saver ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 76
6.2.11 Parameter/Operation Guidance ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 76
6.2.12 Alarm Guidance ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 77
6.2.15 Screen Capture ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 77
6.2.16 User Selectable Menu Configuration ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 77
6.2.18 Device Open Parameter ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 77
6.2.19 SRAM Open Parameter ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 77
6.2.20 MTB Selectable Menu Configuration ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 78
6.3 Display Methods and Contents II - 79
6.3.1 Status Display ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 79
6.3.2 Clock Display ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 79
6.3.3 Monitor Screen Display ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 79
6.3.4 Setup Screen Display ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 80
6.3.5 Edit Screen Display ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 80
6.3.6 Diagnosis Screen Display ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 80
6.3.7 Maintenance Screen Display ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 80
6.3.8 Additional Language II - 81
6.3.8.1 Japanese □ □ □ □ II - 81
6.3.8.2 English ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 81
6.3.8.3 German □ □ □ □ II - 81
6.3.8.4 Italian □ □ □ □ II - 81
6.3.8.5 French □ □ □ □ II - 81
6.3.8.6 Spanish □ □ □ □ II - 81
6.3.8.7 Chinese II - 82
6.3.8.7.1 Chinese (Traditional Chinese Characters) □ □ □ □ II - 82
6.3.8.7.2 Chinese (Simplified Chinese Characters) □ □ □ □ II - 82
6.3.8.8 Korean □ □ □ □ II - 82
6.3.8.9 Portuguese □ □ □ □ II - 82
6.3.8.10 Hungarian □ □ □ □ II - 82
6.3.8.11 Dutch □ □ □ □ II - 82
6.3.8.12 Swedish □ □ □ □ II - 82
6.3.8.13 Turkish □ □ □ □ II - 82
6.3.8.14 Polish □ □ □ □ II - 83
6.3.8.15 Russian □ □ □ □ II - 83
6.3.8.16 Czech □ □ □ □ II - 83
○: Standard　△: Option　□: Selection
M70V Series
Class M system L system Page
M70V Type B M70V Type A M70V Type B M70V Type A
7 Input/Output Functions and Devices II - 85
7.1 Input/Output Data II - 86
7.1.1 Machining Program Input / Output ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 86
7.1.2 Tool Offset Data Input / Output ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 86
7.1.3 Common Variable Input / Output ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 86
7.1.4 Parameter Input / Output ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 86
7.1.5 History Data Output ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 86
7.1.7 System Configuration Data Output ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 86
7.2 Input/Output I/F II - 87
7.2.1 RS-232C I/F ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 87
7.2.2 IC Card I/F II - 87
7.2.2.2 Front IC Card I/F ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 87
7.2.3 Ethernet I/F ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 87
7.2.6 USB Memory I/F [Up to 2GByte] ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 87
7.3 Computer Link II - 88
7.3.1 Computer Link B ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 88
8 Spindle, Tool and Miscellaneous Functions II - 89
8.1 Spindle Functions (S) II - 90
8.1.1 Spindle Control Functions II - 90
8.1.1.1 Spindle Digital I/F ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 91
8.1.1.2 Spindle Analog I/F ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 91
8.1.1.3 Coil Switch ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 91
8.1.1.4 Automatic Coil Switch ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 91
8.1.1.5 Encoder Input I/F ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 92
8.1.2 S Code Output ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 93
8.1.3 Constant Surface Speed Control ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 94
8.1.4 Spindle Override ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 95
8.1.5 Multiple-spindle Control II - 96
8.1.5.1 Multiple-spindle Control I ― ― ○ ○ II - 97
8.1.5.2 Multiple-spindle Control II ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 97
8.1.6 Spindle Orientation ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 98
8.1.7 Spindle Position Control (Spindle/C Axis Control) ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 99
8.1.8 Spindle Synchronization II - 100
8.1.8.1 Spindle Synchronization I ― ― ○ ○ II - 100
8.1.8.2 Spindle Synchronization II ― ― ○ ○ II - 100
8.1.9 Tool Spindle Synchronization I (Polygon) II - 101
8.1.9.1 Tool Spindle Synchronization IA (Spindle-Spindle Polygon) ― ― ○ ○ II - 101
8.1.9.2 Tool Spindle Synchronization IB (Spindle-Spindle Polygon) ― ― ○ ○ II - 102
8.1.9.3 Tool Spindle Synchronization IC (Spindle-NC Axis Polygon) ― ― ― ○ II - 103
8.1.10 Tool Spindle Synchronization II (Hobbing) ― ― ― ○ II - 104
8.1.11 Spindle Speed Clamp ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 105
8.2 Tool Functions (T) II - 106
8.2.1 Tool Functions (T Command) ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 106
8.3 Miscellaneous Functions (M) II - 107
8.3.1 Miscellaneous Functions ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 107
8.3.2 Multiple M Codes in 1 Block ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 108
8.3.3 M Code Independent Output ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 108
8.3.4 Miscellaneous Function Finish ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 109
8.3.5 M Code Output during Axis Traveling ― ― ― ○ II - 110
8.3.6 Miscellaneous Function Command High-speed Output ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 111
8.4 2nd Miscellaneous Functions (B) II - 113
8.4.1 2nd Miscellaneous Functions ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 113
9 Tool Compensation II - 115
9.1 Tool Length/Tool Position II - 116
9.1.1 Tool Length Compensation ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 116
9.1.2 Tool Position Offset ○ ○ ― ― II - 119
9.1.3 Tool Compensation for Additional Axes ― ― ○ ○ II - 119
9.2 Tool Radius II - 120
9.2.1 Tool Radius Compensation ○ ○ ― ― II - 120
9.2.3 Tool Nose Radius Compensation (G40/41/42) ― ― ○ ○ II - 122
9.2.4 Automatic Decision of Nose Radius Compensation Direction (G46/40) ― ― ○ ○ II - 123
9.2.5 Tool Radius Compensation Diameter Designation ○ ○ ― ― II - 123
9.3 Tool Offset Amount II - 124
9.3.1 Number of Tool Offset Sets II - 124
9.3.1.3 80 Sets ― ― ○ ○ II - 124
9.3.1.5 400 Sets ○ ○ ― ― II - 124
9.3.2 Offset Memory II - 125
9.3.2.1 Tool Shape/Wear Offset Amount ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 125
○: Standard　△: Option　□: Selection
M70V Series
Class M system L system Page
M70V Type B M70V Type A M70V Type B M70V Type A
10 Coordinate System II - 129
10.1 Coordinate System Type and Setting II - 130
10.1.1 Machine Coordinate System ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 131
10.1.2 Coordinate System Setting ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 132
10.1.3 Automatic Coordinate System Setting ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 134
10.1.4 Workpiece Coordinate System Selection II - 135
10.1.4.1 Workpiece Coordinate System Selection (6 Sets) ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 135
10.1.4.2 Extended Workpiece Coordinate System Selection (48 Sets) G54.1P1 to P48 ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 137
10.1.5 External Workpiece Coordinate Offset ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 138
10.1.6 Workpiece Coordinate System Preset (G92.1) ― ― ○ ○ II - 139
10.1.7 Local Coordinate System ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 140
10.1.8 Coordinate System for Rotary Axis ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 141
10.1.9 Plane Selection ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 142
10.1.10 Origin Set/Origin Cancel ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 143
10.1.11 Counter Set ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 145
10.2 Return II - 146
10.2.1 Manual Reference Position Return ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 146
10.2.2 Automatic 1st Reference Position Return ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 147
10.2.3 2nd, 3rd, 4th Reference Position Return ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 149
10.2.4 Reference Position Check ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 150
10.2.5 Absolute Position Detection ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 151
10.2.6 Tool Exchange Position Return ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 152
11 Operation Support Functions II - 153
11.1 Program Control II - 154
11.1.1 Optional Block Skip ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 154
11.1.2 Optional Block Skip Addition ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 154
11.1.3 Single Block ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 155
11.2 Program Test II - 156
11.2.1 Dry Run ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 156
11.2.2 Machine Lock ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 156
11.2.3 Miscellaneous Function Lock ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 157
11.2.4 Graphic Check II - 158
11.2.4.1 Graphic Check ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 158
11.2.4.2 3D Solid Program Check ― ○ ― ― II - 158
11.2.4.3 Graphic Check Rotary Axis Drawing ― ― ― △(*3) II - 159
11.2.5 Graphic Trace II - 160
11.2.5.1 Graphic Trace ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 160
11.2.5.2 Graphic Trace Rotary Axis Drawing ― ― ― △(*3) II - 160
11.2.6 Machining Time Computation ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 161
11.3 Program Search/Start/Stop II - 162
11.3.1 Program Search ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 162
11.3.2 Sequence Number Search ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 162
11.3.3 Verification Stop ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 163
11.3.4 Program Restart ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 164
11.3.5 Automatic Operation Start ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 164
11.3.6 NC Reset ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 165
11.3.7 Feed Hold ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 165
11.3.8 Search & Start ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 166
11.4 Interrupt Operation II - 167
11.4.1 Manual Interruption ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 167
11.4.2 Automatic Operation Handle Interruption ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 168
11.4.3 Manual Absolute Switch ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 169
11.4.4 Thread Cutting Cycle Retract ― ― ○ ○ II - 170
11.4.5 Tapping Retract ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 171
11.4.6 Manual Numerical Value Command ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 172
11.4.7 Arbitrary Reverse Run ― ○ ― ― II - 173
11.4.8 MDI Interruption ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 174
11.4.9 Simultaneous Operation of Manual and Automatic Modes ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 174
11.4.10 Simultaneous Operation of JOG and Handle Modes ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 174
11.4.11 Reference Position Retract ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 175
11.4.13 Skip Retract ○ ○ ― ― II - 175
11.4.14 PLC Interruption ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 175
○: Standard　△: Option　□: Selection
M70V Series
Class M system L system Page
M70V Type B M70V Type A M70V Type B M70V Type A
12 Program Support Functions II - 177
12.1 Machining Method Support Functions II - 178
12.1.1 Program II - 178
12.1.1.1 Subprogram Control ○8layers ○8layers ○8layers ○8layers II - 178
12.1.1.3 Scaling ○ ○ ― ― II - 180
12.1.1.4 Axis Name Switch ― ― ○ ○ II - 181
12.1.2 Macro Program II - 182
12.1.2.1 User Macro ○4layers ○4layers ○4layers ○4layers II - 182
12.1.2.2 Machine Tool Builder Macro ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 184
12.1.2.3 Macro Interruption ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 185
12.1.2.4 Variable Command II - 186
12.1.2.4.4 600 Sets ― ― ○ ― II - 187
12.1.2.4.5 700 Sets ○ ○ ― ○ II - 187
12.1.2.4.6 8000 Sets ― △(*1) ― △(*1) II - 187
12.1.2.4.11 (600+100 × Number of Part Systems) Sets ― ○ ― ○ II - 187
12.1.2.4.12 (7900+100 x Number of Part Systems) Sets ― △(*1) ― △(*1) II - 187
12.1.3 Fixed Cycle II - 188
12.1.3.1 Fixed Cycle for Drilling ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 189
12.1.3.2 Fixed Cycle for Drilling (Type II) ― ― ○ ○ II - 194
12.1.3.3 Special Fixed Cycle ○ ○ ― ― II - 195
12.1.3.4 Fixed Cycle for Turning Machining ― ― ○ ○ II - 200
12.1.3.5 Compound Type Fixed Cycle for Turning Machining ― ― ○ ○ II - 205
12.1.3.6 Compound Type Fixed Cycle for Turning Machining (Type II) ― ― ○ ○ II - 214
12.1.3.7 Small-diameter Deep-hole Drilling Cycle ○ ○ ― ― II - 215
12.1.4 Mirror Image II - 216
12.1.4.1 Mirror Image by Parameter Setting ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 216
12.1.4.2 Mirror Image by External Input ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 216
12.1.4.3 Mirror Image by G Code ○ ○ ― ― II - 217
12.1.4.4 Mirror Image for Facing Tool Posts ― ― ― ○ II - 218
12.1.4.5 T Code Mirror Image for Facing Tool Posts ― ― ― ○ II - 219
12.1.5 Coordinate System Operation II - 219
12.1.5.1 Coordinate Rotation by Program ○ ○ ― ○ II - 219
12.1.6 Dimension Input II - 221
12.1.6.1 Corner Chamfering/Corner R ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 221
12.1.6.2 Linear Angle Command ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 228
12.1.6.3 Geometric Command ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 229
12.1.6.4 Polar Coordinate Command ○ ○ ― ― II - 232
12.1.7 Axis Control II - 233
12.1.7.1 Chopping II - 233
12.1.7.1.1 Chopping ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 233
12.1.7.2 Normal Line Control ― ○ ― ― II - 235
12.1.7.3 Circular Cutting ○ ○ ― ― II - 236
12.1.8 Multi-part System Control II - 237
12.1.8.1 Timing Synchronization between Part Systems ― ○ ― ○ II - 237
12.1.8.2 Start Point Designation Timing Synchronization ― ○ ― ○ II - 238
12.1.8.3 Mixed Control (Cross Axis Control) II - 240
12.1.8.3.1 Mixed Control (Cross Axis Control) I ― ― ― ○ II - 240
12.1.8.3.2 Mixed Control (Cross Axis Control) II ― ― ― ○ II - 240
12.1.8.5 Control Axis Synchronization across Part Systems II - 241
12.1.8.5.1 Control Axis Synchronization Across Part System I ― ― ― ○ II - 241
12.1.8.5.2 Control Axis Synchronization Across Part System II ― ― ― ○ II - 241
12.1.8.6 Balance Cut ― ― ― ○ II - 242
12.1.8.7 Common Memory for Part Systems ― ― ― ○ II - 243
12.1.8.8 2-part System Synchronous Thread Cutting ― ― ― ○ II - 244
12.1.8.9 Multi-part System Program Management ― ○ ― ○ II - 246
12.1.9 Data Input by Program II - 248
12.1.9.1 Parameter Input by Program ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 248
12.1.9.2 Compensation Data Input by Program ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 250
12.1.10 Machining Modal II - 252
12.1.10.1 Tapping Mode ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 252
12.1.10.2 Cutting Mode ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 252
12.2 Machining Accuracy Support Functions II - 253
12.2.1 Automatic Corner Override ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 253
12.2.2 Deceleration Check II - 254
12.2.2.1 Exact Stop Check Mode ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 255
12.2.2.2 Exact Stop Check ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 255
12.2.2.3 Error Detection ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 256
12.2.2.4 Programmable In-position Check ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 256
12.3 High-speed and High-accuracy Functions [kBPM:k Block per Minute] II - 257
12.3.1 High-speed Machining Mode I (G05P1) Max.[kBPM] ○8.4 ○16.8 ― ― II - 257
12.3.2 High-speed Machining Mode II (G05 P2) Max.[kBPM] ― ○33.7 ― ― II - 258
12.3.3 High-speed High-accuracy Control 1 (G05.1Q1) Max.[kBPM] (1st Part System Only) ○16.8 ○16.8 ― ― II - 260
12.3.4 High-speed High-accuracy Control 2 (G5P10000) Max.[kBPM] (Limited to 1-part System Configuration ― ○33.7 ― ― II - 261
12.3.5 High-accuracy Control 1 (G61.1/G08) (1st Part System Only) ○ ○ ― ― II - 264
12.3.6 High-accuracy Spline Interpolation1 (G61.2)(1st Part System Only) ― ○ ― ― II - 268
12.3.8 SSS Control II - 269
12.3.8.1 SSS Control (1st Part System Only) ― △(*4) ― ― II - 269
12.3.10 Machining Condition Selection I (1st Part System Only) ○ ○ ― ― II - 271
12.3.13 High-accuracy Control in 2 Part Systems ― △(*4) ― ― II - 271
12.4 Programming Support Functions II - 272
12.4.1 Playback ○ ○ ― ― II - 272
12.4.3 Simple Programming ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 272
12.4.4 G code Guidance ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 272
○: Standard　△: Option　□: Selection
M70V Series
Class M system L system Page
M70V Type B M70V Type A M70V Type B M70V Type A
13 Machine Accuracy Compensation II - 273
13.1 Static Accuracy Compensation II - 274
13.1.1 Backlash Compensation ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 274
13.1.2 Memory-type Pitch Error Compensation ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 274
13.1.3 Memory-type Relative Position Error Compensation ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 275
13.1.4 External Machine Coordinate System Compensation ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 276
13.1.5 Circular Error Radius Compensation ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 276
13.1.6 Ball Screw Thermal Expansion Compensation ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 277
13.1.8 Position-dependent Gradually Increasing-type Backlash Compensation ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 279
13.1.9 Two-way Pitch Error Compensation ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 280
13.2 Dynamic Accuracy Compensation II - 281
13.2.1 Smooth High-gain (SHG) Control ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 281
13.2.2 Dual Feedback ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 283
13.2.3 Lost Motion Compensation ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 284
13.2.4 OMR II (Backlash with Filter) ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 284
14 Automation Support Functions II - 285
14.1 Measurement II - 286
14.1.1 Skip II - 286
14.1.1.1 Skip ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 286
14.1.1.2 Multiple-step Skip ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 288
14.1.1.4 PLC Skip ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 289
14.1.2 Automatic Tool Length Measurement ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 289
14.1.3 Manual Tool Length Measurement 1 ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 292
14.1.4 Manual Tool Length Measurement 2 ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 297
14.1.5 Workpiece Coordinate Offset Measurement ― ― ○ ○ II - 299
14.1.6 Workpiece Position Measurement ○ ○ ― ― II - 300
14.1.7 Rotation Measurement ○ ○ ― ― II - 303
14.2 Tool Life Management II - 304
14.2.1 Tool Life Management II - 304
14.2.1.1 Tool Life Management I ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 304
14.2.1.2 Tool Life Management II ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 304
14.2.1.3 Tool Life Management III ○ ○ ― ― II - 305
14.2.2 Number of Tool Life Management Sets II - 305
14.2.2.1 80 Sets ― ― ○ ○ II - 305
14.2.2.2 200 Sets ○ ○ ― ― II - 305
14.3 Others II - 306
14.3.1 Programmable Current Limitation ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 306
15 Safety and Maintenance II - 307
15.1 Safety Switches II - 308
15.1.1 Emergency Stop ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 308
15.1.2 Data Protection Key ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 308
15.2 Display for Ensuring Safety II - 309
15.2.1 NC Warning ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 309
15.2.2 NC Alarm ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 309
15.2.3 Operation Stop Cause ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 310
15.2.4 Emergency Stop Cause ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 310
15.2.5 Thermal Detection ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 311
15.2.6 Battery Alarm/Warning ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 312
15.3 Protection II - 313
15.3.1 Stroke End (Over Travel) ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 313
15.3.2 Stored Stroke Limit II - 313
15.3.2.1 Stored Stroke Limit I/II ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 314
15.3.2.2 Stored Stroke Limit IB ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 316
15.3.2.3 Stored Stroke Limit IIB ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 317
15.3.2.4 Stored Stroke Limit IC ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 317
15.3.3 Stroke Check before Travel ○ ○ ― ― II - 318
15.3.4 Chuck/Tailstock Barrier Check ― ― ○ ○ II - 319
15.3.5 Interlock ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 320
15.3.6 External Deceleration ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 320
15.3.9 Door Interlock II - 321
15.3.9.1 Door Interlock I ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 321
15.3.9.2 Door Interlock II ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 322
15.3.10 Parameter Lock ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 323
15.3.11 Program Protection (Edit Lock B, C) ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 323
15.3.12 Program Display Lock ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 324
15.3.13 Safety Observation ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 325
15.3.14 Vertical Axis Pull-up ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 326
15.4 Maintenance and Troubleshooting II - 327
15.4.1 Operation History ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 327
15.4.2 Data Sampling ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 328
15.4.3 NC Data Backup ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 328
15.4.5 Servo Tuning Support Tool II - 329
15.4.5.1 MS Configurator ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 329
15.4.5.2 NC Analyzer ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 331
15.4.6 Automatic Backup ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 331
15.4.7 System Setup ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 331
15.4.13 Parameter Setup Support Tool II - 332
15.4.13.1 NC Configurator2 ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 332
○: Standard　△: Option　□: Selection
M70V Series
Class M system L system Page
M70V Type B M70V Type A M70V Type B M70V Type A
16 Drive System II - 333
16.1 Servo/Spindle II - 334
16.1.1 Feed axis
16.1.1.1 MDS-D-V1/D-V2 (200V)
16.1.1.1.1 Servo motor: HF**-A48 (260kp/rev) □ □ □ □
16.1.1.1.2 Servo motor: HF**-A51 (1000kp/rev) □ □ □ □
16.1.1.1.3 Servo motor: HF**-A74/A74N (16000kp/rev) □ □ □ □
16.1.1.1.4 Servo motor: HP**-A51 (1000kp/rev) □ □ □ □
16.1.1.1.5 Servo motor: HP**-A74/A74N (16000kp/rev) □ □ □ □
16.1.1.1.6 Servo motor: HF-KP**J*(260kp/rev) □ □ □ □
16.1.1.2 MDS-DH-V1/DH-V2 (400V)
16.1.1.2.1 Servo motor: HF**-A48 (260kp/rev) □ □ □ □
16.1.1.2.2 Servo motor: HF-H**-A51 (1000kp/rev) □ □ □ □
16.1.1.2.3 Servo motor: HF-H**-A74/A74N (16000kp/rev) □ □ □ □
16.1.1.2.4 Servo motor: HP-H**-A51 (1000kp/rev) □ □ □ □
16.1.1.2.5 Servo motor: HP-H**-A74/A74N (16000kp/rev) □ □ □ □
16.1.1.3 MDS-D-SVJ3/SVJ3NA(200V)
16.1.1.3.1 Servo motor: HF**-A48(260kp/rev) □ □ □ □
16.1.1.3.2 Servo motor: HF**-A51(1000kp/rev) □ □ □ □
16.1.1.3.3 Servo motor: HF-KP**J*(260kp/rev) □ □ □ □
16.1.1.4 MDS-DM-V3/SPV2/SPV3(200V)
16.1.1.4.1 Servo motor: HF**-A48(260kp/rev) □ □ □ □
16.1.1.4.2 Servo motor: HF**-A51(1000kp/rev) □ □ □ □
16.1.1.4.3 Servo motor: HF-KP**J*(260kp/rev) □ □ □ □
16.1.1.5 MDS-D2-V1/D2-V2/D2-V3(200V)
16.1.1.5.1 Servo motor: HF**-A48(260kp/rev) □ □ □ □
16.1.1.5.2 Servo motor: HF**-A51(1000kp/rev) □ □ □ □
16.1.1.5.3 Servo motor: HF**-A74/A74N(16000kp/rev) □ □ □ □
16.1.1.5.4 Servo motor: HP**-A51(1000kp/rev) □ □ □ □
16.1.1.5.5 Servo motor: HP**-A74/A74N(16000kp/rev) □ □ □ □
16.1.1.5.6 Servo motor: HF-KP**J*(260kp/rev) □ □ □ □
16.1.1.6 MDS-DH2-V1/DH2-V2(400V)
16.1.1.6.1 Servo motor: HF**-A48(260kp/rev) □ □ □ □
16.1.1.6.2 Servo motor: HF-H**-A51(1000kp/rev) □ □ □ □
16.1.1.6.3 Servo motor: HF-H**-A74/A74N(16000kp/rev) □ □ □ □
16.1.1.6.4 Servo motor: HP-H**-A51(1000kp/rev) □ □ □ □
16.1.1.6.5 Servo motor: HP-H**-A74/A74N(16000kp/rev) □ □ □ □
16.1.1.7 MDS-DJ-V1(200V)
16.1.1.7.1 Servo motor: HF**-A48(260kp/rev) □ □ □ □
16.1.1.7.2 Servo motor: HF**-A51(1000kp/rev) □ □ □ □
16.1.1.7.3 Servo motor: HF-KP**J*(260kp/rev) □ □ □ □
16.1.1.8 MDS-DM-V3/SPV2/SPV3(200V)
16.1.1.8.1 Servo motor: HF**-A48(260kp/rev) □ □ □ □
16.1.1.8.2 Servo motor: HF**-A51(1000kp/rev) □ □ □ □
16.1.1.8.3 Servo motor: HF-KP**J*(260kp/rev) □ □ □ □
16.1.2 Spindle
16.1.2.1 MDS-D-SP (200V) □ □ □ □
16.1.2.2 MDS-DH-SP (400V) □ □ □ □
16.1.2.3 MDS-D-SPJ3/SPJ3NA(200V) □ □ □ □
16.1.2.4 MDS-D-SP2(200V) □ □ □ □
16.1.2.5 MDS-DM-SPV2/SPV3(200V) □ □ □ □
16.1.2.6 MDS-D2-SP(200V) □ □ □ □
16.1.2.7 MDS-DH2-SP(400V) □ □ □ □
16.1.2.8 MDS-D2-SP2(200V) □ □ □ □
16.1.2.9 MDS-DJ-SP(200V) □ □ □ □
16.1.2.10 MDS-DM2-SPV2/SPV3/SPHV3(200V) □ □ □ □
16.1.4 Power supply
16.1.4.1 Power supply: MDS-D-CV (200V) □ □ □ □
16.1.4.2 Power supply: MDS-DH-CV (400V) □ □ □ □
16.1.4.3 Power supply: MDS-D2-CV (200V) □ □ □ □
16.1.4.4 Power supply: MDS-DH2-CV (400V) □ □ □ □
16.1.4.5 AC reactor for power supply □ □ □ □
16.1.4.6 Ground plate □ □ □ □
○: Standard　△: Option　□: Selection
M70V Series
Class M system L system Page
M70V Type B M70V Type A M70V Type B M70V Type A
17 Machine Support Functions II - 335
17.1 PLC II - 336
17.1.1 Built-in PLC Processing Mode ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 336
17.1.2 PLC Functions II - 336
17.1.2.1 Built-in PLC Basic Function ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 336
17.1.2.2 PLC Exclusive Instruction ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 337
17.1.3 PLC Support Functions II - 342
17.1.3.1 Alarm Message Display ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 342
17.1.3.2 Operator Message Display ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 342
17.1.3.3 Memory Switch (PLC Switch) II - 342
17.1.3.3.1 PLC Switch 32 Points ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 342
17.1.3.4 Load Meter Display ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 342
17.1.3.5 User PLC Version Display ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 343
17.1.3.6 Multi-ladder Program Register and Execution ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 343
17.1.3.7 Ladder Program Writing during RUN ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 343
17.1.3.8 PLC Protection ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 343
17.1.4 Built-in PLC Capacity [Steps] II - 344
17.1.4.1 Standard PLC Capacity ○20000 ○32000 ○20000 ○32000 II - 344
17.1.5 Machine Contact Input/Output I/F ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 344
17.1.6 Ladder Monitor ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 344
17.1.7 PLC Development II - 345
17.1.7.1 On-board Development ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 345
17.1.7.2 MELSEC Development Tool (GX Developer) ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 345
17.1.8 PLC Parameter II - 345
17.1.8.1 PLC Constant (150 Points) ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 345
17.1.11 Additional PLC Engine ― ○ ― ○ II - 345
17.2 Machine Construction II - 346
17.2.1 Servo OFF ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 346
17.2.2 Axis Detachment ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 347
17.2.3 Synchronous Control ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 348
17.2.4 Inclined Axis Control ― ― ○ ○ II - 351
17.2.5 Position Switch ○24 ○24 ○24 ○24 II - 352
17.2.7 Index Table Indexing ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 353
17.3 PLC Operation II - 354
17.3.1 Arbitrary Feed in Manual Mode ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 354
17.3.3 PLC Axis Control ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 355
17.3.5 PLC Axis Indexing ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 356
17.4 PLC Interface II - 358
17.4.1 CNC Control Signal ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 358
17.4.2 CNC Status Signal ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 359
17.4.3 PLC Window ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 361
17.4.4 External Search ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 362
17.5 Machine Contact I/O II - 363
17.5.1 Additional DI/DO (DI: 32/DO: 32) □ □ □ □ II - 363
17.5.2 Additional DI/DO (DI: 64/DO: 64) □ □ □ □ II - 363
17.5.3 Remote IO 32/32 □ □ □ □ II - 363
17.5.4 Remote IO 64/48 □ □ □ □ II - 363
17.5.5 MITSUBISHI CNC Machine Operation Panel △ △ △ △ II - 364
17.6 External PLC Link II - 365
17.6.3 CC-Link (Master/Local) □(*7) □(*7) □(*7) □(*7) II - 365
17.7 Installing S/W for Machine Tools II - 372
17.7.1 Customization (NC Designer) ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 372
3 3 3 3
17.7.1.1 Customization Data Storage Capacity [MByte] II - 373
△6(*1) △6(*1) △6(*1) △6(*1)
17.7.1.2 Customization Workpiece Data Size [MByte] 3 3 3 3 II - 373
17.7.3 EZSocket I/F ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 373
17.7.4 APLC Release ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 374
17.7.5 Custom API Library ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 375
17.8 Others II - 376
17.8.1 System Lock ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 376
17.8.2 CNC Remote Operation Tool II - 376
17.8.2.1 NC Monitor ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 376
17.8.2.2 NC Explorer ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 376
17.8.3 Automatic Operation Lock ○ ○ ○ ○ II - 376

(*1) When HN754 is installed.

(*3) When HN721/HN722 is installed.
(*4) When HN722 is installed.
(*7) When HN746 is installed.
I General Specifications
1
System Basic Configuration Drawing

I-1
MITSUBISHI CNC
I General Specifications

Keyboard unit
Display unit

Remote I/O
unit

Control unit

Manual pulse
generator
Operation panel
I/O unit

Remote I/O
unit

Manual pulse
Synchronous feed generator
encoder
Servo/Spindle drive units

Motors

(Note 1) Control unit is mounted on the back side of the display unit.
(Note 2) Operation panel I/O unit is mounted on the back side of the keyboard unit.
(Note 3) For the drive unit configuration, refer to the Instruction Manual of the drive unit you use.

I-2
2
General Connection Diagram

I-3
MITSUBISHI CNC
I General Specifications

2.1 Without Touch Panel

Dotted lines indicate the sections prepared by the machine tool builder.
<> Angle brackets indicates attached cable of unit.
L1 L2 L3
CNC control unit
No-fuse breaker (NFB) FCU7-MU55x
<8.4-type : G097/G497>
EMG <10.4-type : G098/G492/G499>
F120 LCD
EMG <CCFL : F480>
Main card HN76x <8.4-type : F480/G488>
<LED : G488> <10.4-type : G482/G484>
INV
ON OFF <LED : G487>
G300/G301 Memory card
Ethernet device LAN
MC HN45x CCFL : Backlight inverter Display unit
LED : HN281 8.4-type
USB memory FCU7-DU120-12
MC
Expansion card Front I/F (Note1) 10.4-type
F070 (Option) FRONT memory
DCIN FCU7-DU140-12
MC HN7xx I/F card CF card
I/F (VGA:640×480)

24VDC stabilized SIO

power supply MENUKEY
SKIP OPT ENC RIO1 CG71 Menu keys
DCOUT 24VDC
ACIN Keyboard unit
FG
FCU7-KB0xx
CP/NFB
FG Operation panel Machine operation panel
USER 2ch I/O unit made by the machine tool builder
Circuit protector (CP) 1ch: F034 FCU7-DX7xx
2ch: F035 G011
CG71
max. 0.5m CG3x
RS232C device F351
F221
CP/NFB max.30m
AO NCKB <G402>
RIO3 MPG
Manual pulse
AC reactor generator
D-AL
(Note3) 2ch
12V:F320/F321
Skip signal input General-purpose 5V:F023/F024
FCUA-R030 inverter
Max. 8 points
Remote I/O unit
Contactor
24VDC
DCIN
MC F070
FCUA-DX1xx
1ch Machine
G395/G396/G380 control relay/
DI-L/R
FCUA- contact
RIO1 RIO2 R300
ENC /R301

Drive units Select FCUA-R211

/SH41 To the next remote I/O
or terminator
Manual pulse
generator
2ch Spindle motor

5V:G023/G024

Remote I/O unit Remote I/O unit

24VDC 24VDC
DCIN DCIN
FCUA-R050/054 F070 FCUA-DX1xx F070 FCUA-DX1xx
Machine
DI-L/R control relay/
Synchronous feed contact
encoder FCUA-
RIO1 RIO2 RIO1 RIO2 R300
/R301
1ch

FCUA-R211 FCUA-R211 To the next remote I/O

/SH41 /SH41 or terminator

(Note1) USB I/F is mounted only for FCU7-MU556/MU557.

(Note2) For information on how to connect the drive unit, refer to the drive unit's manual.
(Note3) When connecting analog spindle.

I-4
M70V Series Specifications Manual
2 General Connection Diagram

2.2 With Touch Panel

Dotted lines indicate the sections prepared by the machine tool builder.
<> Angle brackets indicates attached cable of unit.
L1 L2 L3
CNC control unit
No-fuse breaker (NFB) FCU7-MU55x

EMG <G098/G492/G499>
F120 LCD
EMG
Main card HN76x
<F480> <G482/G484>
INV
ON OFF
G300/G301 Memory card Backlight
Ethernet device LAN inverter
MC HN45x USB
memory
Front I/F (Note1)
HN244
memory Touch panel display unit
MC
Expansion card I/F card CF card FCU7-DU140-32
F070 (Option) FRONT I/F
DCIN TPIN
MC HN7xx (10.4-type VGA: 640×480)
TESTIN
24VDC stabilized SIO
power supply MENUKEY
SKIP OPT ENC RIO1 CG71 Menu keys
DCOUT 24VDC
ACIN Keyboard unit
FG
FCU7-KB0xx
CP/NFB
FG Operation panel Machine operation panel
USER 2ch I/O unit made by the machine tool builder
Circuit protector (CP) 1ch: F034 FCU7-DX7xx
2ch: F035 G011
CG71
max. 0.5m CG3x
RS232C device F351
F221
CP/NFB max.30m
AO NCKB <G402>
RIO3 MPG
Manual pulse
AC reactor generator
D-AL
(Note3) 2ch
12V:F320/F321
Skip signal input General-purpose 5V:F023/F024
FCUA-R030 inverter
Max. 8 points
Remote I/O unit
Contactor
24VDC
DCIN
MC F070
FCUA-DX1xx
1ch Machine
G395/G396/G380 control relay/
DI-L/R
FCUA- contact
RIO1 RIO2 R300
ENC /R301

Drive units Select FCUA-R211

/SH41 To the next remote I/O
or terminator
Manual pulse
generator
2ch Spindle motor

5V:G023/G024

Remote I/O unit Remote I/O unit

24VDC 24VDC
DCIN DCIN
FCUA-R050/054 F070 FCUA-DX1xx F070 FCUA-DX1xx
Machine
DI-L/R control relay/
Synchronous feed contact
encoder FCUA-
RIO1 RIO2 RIO1 RIO2 R300
/R301
1ch

FCUA-R211 FCUA-R211 To the next remote I/O

/SH41 /SH41 or terminator

(Note1) USB I/F is mounted only for FCU7-MU556/MU557.

(Note2) For information on how to connect the drive unit, refer to the drive unit's manual.
(Note3) When connecting analog spindle.

I-5
MITSUBISHI CNC
I General Specifications

I-6
3
List of Configuration

I-7
MITSUBISHI CNC
I General Specifications

3.1 List of Units

Classification Type Components Remarks
[Control unit]
NC functions Main control card Export Tarde Control Order and Foreign
and display controller FCU7-MU556 Memory card Exchange Order noncompliant unit
For M70V TypeB system Front side memory I/F card With USB memory I/F
NC functions Main control card Export Tarde Control Order and Foreign
and display controller FCU7-MU557 Memory card Exchange Order noncompliant unit
For M70V TypeA system Front side memory I/F card With USB memory I/F
NC functions Main control card
Export Tarde Control Order and Foreign
and display controller FCU7-MU551 Memory card
Exchange Order noncompliant unit
For M70V TypeB system Front side memory I/F card
NC functions Main control card
Export Tarde Control Order and Foreign
and display controller FCU7-MU552 Memory card
Exchange Order noncompliant unit
For M70V TypeA system Front side memory I/F card
[Display unit]
[CCFL backlight type]
LCD panel
Backlight inverter
Menu keys
Inverter cable
LCD cable
8.4-type color TFT Front side memory I/F is normally equipped with
FCU7-DU120-12 [LED backlight type]
(VGA:640*480) the control unit
LCD panel
Backlight driver
Menu keys
Driver cable
LED backlight cable
LCD cable
LCD panel
Backlight inverter
10.4-type color TFT Menu keys Front side memory I/F is normally equipped with
FCU7-DU140-12
(VGA:640*480) Inverter cable the control unit
LCD cable
Backlight cable
LCD panel
Backlight inverter
Menu keys
Touch panel
10.4-type color TFT touch panel Front side memory I/F is normally equipped with
FCU7-DU140-32 Touch panel control card
(VGA:640*480) the control unit
Touch panel cable
Inverter cable
LCD cable
Backlight cable
[Keyboard unit]
Keyboard for 8.4-type display unit Escutcheon, key switch
FCU7-KB024 ONG layout (for M system/L system, XYZ)
Sheet keys G402 cable
Keyboard for 8.4-type display unit Escutcheon, key switch
FCU7-KB025 ONG layout (for L system, XZF)
Lathe system sheet keys G402 cable
Keyboard for 8.4-type display unit Escutcheon, key switch
FCU7-KB026 ONG layout (for M system/L system, XYZ)
Clear keys G402 cable
Keyboard for 8.4-type display unit Escutcheon, key switch ONG layout (for M system/L system, XYZ)(in
FCU7-KB029
Sheet keys G402 cable tandem)
Keyboard for 10.4-type display unit Escutcheon, key switch
FCU7-KB044 ONG layout (for M system/L system, XYZ)
Sheet keys G402 cable
Keyboard for 10.4-type display unit Escutcheon, key switch
FCU7-KB046 ONG layout (for M system/L system, XYZ)
Clear keys G402 cable
Keyboard for 10.4-type display unit Escutcheon, key switch
FCU7-KB047 Full keyboard (for M system/L system)(in tandem)
Clear keys G402 cable
Keyboard for 10.4-type display unit Escutcheon, key switch
FCU7-KB048 ABC layout (for M system/L system)
Clear keys G402 cable

I-8
M70V Series Specifications Manual
3 List of Configuration

Classification Type Components Remarks

[Operation panel I/O unit]
DI: 64-points 24V/0V common type
DO: 64-points sink type
DI 24V/0V common input Base card
FCU7-DX710 MPG:2ch
DO Sink output Terminator (R-TM)
Occupied stations (fixed): 1, 2, 7, 8
RIO3 extensible stations: 3, 4, 5, 6
DI: 96-points 24V/0V common type
DO: 80-points sink type
DI 24V/0V common input Base card
MPG:2ch
DO Sink output FCU7-DX720 Terminator (R-TM)
AO: 1 point
AO Analog output Add-on card
Occupied stations (fixed): 1, 2, 3, 7, 8
RIO3 extensible stations: 4, 5, 6
DI: 96-points 24V/0V common type
Base card DO: 96-points sink type
DI 24V/0V common input
FCU7-DX730 Terminator (R-TM) MPG: 2ch
DO Sink output
Add-on card Occupied stations (fixed): 1, 2, 3, 7, 8
RIO3 extensible stations: 4, 5, 6
DI: 64-points 24V/0V common type
DO: 64-points source type
DI 24V/0V common input Base card
FCU7-DX711 MPG:2ch
DO Source output Terminator (R-TM)
Occupied stations (fixed): 1, 2, 7, 8
RIO3 extensible stations: 3, 4, 5, 6
DI: 96-points 24V/0V common type
DO: 80-points source type
DI 24V/0V common input Base card
MPG:2ch
DO Source output FCU7-DX721 Terminator (R-TM)
AO: 1 point
AO Analog output Add-on card
Occupied stations (fixed): 1, 2, 3, 7, 8
RIO3 extensible stations: 4, 5, 6
DI: 96-points 24V/0V common type
Base card DO: 96-points source type
DI 24V/0V common input
FCU7-DX731 Terminator (R-TM) MPG:2ch
DO Source output
Add-on card Occupied stations (fixed): 1, 2, 3, 7, 8
RIO3 extensible stations: 4, 5, 6
[Remote I/O unit]
DI: 32-points 24V/0V common type
DI 24V/0V common input (photo coupler insulation)
FCUA-DX100 RX311
DO Sink output DO: 32-points sink type (non-insulation)
Number of occupied stations: 1
DI: 64-points 24V/0V common type
DI 24V/0V common input (photo coupler insulation)
FCUA-DX110 RX311+RX321-1
DO Sink output DO: 48-points sink type (non-insulation)
Number of occupied stations: 2
DI: 64-points 24V/0V common type
DI 24V/0V common input (photo coupler insulation)
DO Sink output FCUA-DX120 RX311+RX321 DO: 48-points sink type (non-insulation)
AO Analog output AO: 1 point
Number of occupied stations: 2
DI: 32-points 24V/0V common type
DI 24V/0V common input (photo coupler insulation)
DO Sink output DO: 32-points sink type (non-insulation)
FCUA-DX140 RX311+RX341
AI Analog input AI: 4 points
AO Analog output AO: 1 point
Number of occupied stations: 2
DI: 32-points 24V/0V common type
DI 24V/0V common input (photo coupler insulation)
FCUA-DX101 RX312
DO Source output DO: 32-points source type (non-insulation)
Number of occupied stations: 1
DI: 64-points 24V/0V common type
DI 24V/0V common input (photo coupler insulation)
FCUA-DX111 RX312+RX322-1
DO Source output DO: 48-points source type (non-insulation)
Number of occupied stations: 2
DI: 64-points 24V/0V common type
DI 24V/0V common input (photo coupler insulation)
DO Source output FCUA-DX121 RX312+RX322 DO: 48-points source type (non-insulation)
AO Analog output AO: 1 point
Number of occupied stations: 2
DI: 32-points 24V/0V common type
DI 24V/0V common input (photo coupler insulation)
DO Source output DO: 32-points source type (non-insulation)
FCUA-DX141 RX312+RX341
AI Analog input AI: 4 points
AO Analog output AO: 1 point
Number of occupied stations: 2
[Scan I/O card]
Scan DI/DO = 64 points/64 points
Sink type HR347 HR347
DI/DO = 32 points/32 points
Scan DI/DO = 64 points/64 points
Source type HR357 HR357
DI/DO = 32 points/32 points

I-9
MITSUBISHI CNC
I General Specifications

Classification Type Components Remarks

[External power supply unit]
External power supply with power supply Power supply card Input 200VAC
PD25
ON/OFF function Case set Output 24VDC (3A)
[Manual pulse generator]
UFO-01-2Z9 Input 5VDC
5V Manual pulse generator UFO-01-2Z9
(Produced by NIDEC NEMICON) 100pulse/rev
Input 12VDC
12V Manual pulse generator HD60C HD60C
25pulse/rev
[Encoder]
Input 5VDC
Synchronous feed encoder OSE1024-3-15-68 OSE1024-3-15-68
1024pulse/rev
[CC-Link unit]
CC-Link FCU7-HN746 HN746 CC-Link x 1ch
[External PLC Link]
DeviceNet/FL-net FCU7-HN747 HN747 DeviceNet/FL-net
[Memory expansion unit]
Memory expansion FCU7-HN754 HN754 Memory expansion
[Optical communication repeater unit]
Using up to two units, relay of the total length of up
Optical communication repeater unit FCU7-EX022 FCU7-EX022
to 90m can be performed.
[MITSUBISHI CNC machine operation panel]
MITSUBISHI CNC machine operation Escutcheon, key switch
FCU7-KB921 Mitsubishi standard 55 key
panel A control card
MITSUBISHI CNC machine operation
FCU7-KB926 Escutcheon, Switch
panel B
[Function expansion unit]
Function expansion FCU7-HN721 HN721 Normal option
Function expansion FCU7-HN722 HN722 Full option
[Cable connector sets]
Connector (10120-3000VE,2pcs),
For ENC,SKIP,SIO,MPG,AO FCUA-CS000
Shell kit (10320-52F0-008,2pcs)
Connector (7940-6500SC,4pcs.),
For RIO FCUA-CS301
Strain relief (3448-7940,2pcs.)
Connector (2-178128-3),
For PD25/PD27 ACIN FCUA-CN200
Contact (1-175218-5,3pcs.)
3-178127-6 Connector (3-178127-6),
For PD25/PD27 DCOUT
1-175218-5 Contact (1-175218-5,6pcs.)
1-178288-5 Connector (1-178288-5),
For PD25/PD27 ON/OFF
1-175218-5 Contact (1-175218-5,6pcs.)
005057-9403 Connector (005057-9403),
For EMG F120
0016020103 Contact (0016020103,3pcs.)
Connector (1-178288-3),
For RIO FCUA-CN211
Contact (1-175218-2,3pcs.)
Connector (2-178288-3),
For DCIN,F070 FCUA-CN220
Contact (1-175218-5,3pcs)
For DIO FCUA-CN300 Connector (7940-6500SC,2pcs.)
[Original manufactured memory card]
Exclusive CF cards for MITSUBISHI CNC
FCU7-CF256M FCU7-CF256M 256MB capacity
256MB
Exclusive CF cards for MITSUBISHI CNC
FCU7-CF002G FCU7-CF002G 2GB capacity
2GB

(Note 1) Operation panel I/O unit can be mounted on the back side of the keyboard unit.
(Note 2) Operation panel I/O units for 700 Series (FCU7-DX67x/ FCU7-DX77x) are not available.
(Note 3) DI: Digital input signals, DO: Digital output signals, AI: Analog input signals, AO: Analog output signals

I - 10
M70V Series Specifications Manual
3 List of Configuration

3.2 Durable Parts

Durable parts Part type
Control unit battery Q6BAT
84LHS06(for MADE IN JAPAN and unit version "*" to "C")
Backlight for FCU7-DU120-12(*) 84LHS16(for MADE IN JAPAN and unit version "D" and later)
84LHS16(for MADE IN CHINA)
104LHS39 (for unit version "*")
Backlight for FCU7-DU140-12/32(*)
104LHS52 (for unit version "A" and later)
Touch panel protective sheet for FCU7-DU140-32 N939B036G51
Key sheet for FCU7-KB024/44 N330B532G51
Key sheet for FCU7-KB025 N330B532G52
Key sheet for FCU7-KB029 N330A565G51
(*) Contact the Service Center, Service Station, Sales Office or delayer for repairs or part replacement.

3.3 Replacements
Replacements Part type
Protection fuse LM40
Front memory I/F card CF-700(*) FCU7-HN791
Front memory I/F card CF-700 (with USB) (*) FCU7-HN793
(*) Contact the Service Center, Service Station, Sales Office or delayer for repairs or part replacement.

I - 11
MITSUBISHI CNC
I General Specifications

3.4 List of Cables

Length (m) of cables provided Max. cable
Type Application
by Mitsubishi length
Motor side PLG cable
CNP2E-1-xM Spindle side accuracy detector 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30 30m
TS5690 cable
Spindle side detector cable
CNP3EZ-2P-xM 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30 30m
OSE-1024 cable
Spindle side detector cable
CNP3EZ-3P-xM 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30 30m
OSE-1024 cable
For HF-KP (Servo) Motor side detector relay cable (motor side)
CNV22J-K1P-0.3M Lead out in direction of motor shaft 0.3 0.3m
Compatible with only IP65
For HF-KP (Servo) Motor side detector relay cable (motor side)
CNV22J-K2P-0.3M Lead out in opposite direction of motor shaft 0.3 0.3m
Compatible with only IP65
Motor side detector cable (for A51/A74N(/A74)) /
CNV2E-6P-xM 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30 30m
Ball screw side detector cable
Motor side detector cable (for A51/A74N(/A74)) /
CNV2E-7P-xM 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30 30m
Ball screw side detector cable
For HF/HF-H, HF-KP (Tool spindle) Motor side detector cable (for A48/
CNV2E-8P-xM A51/A74N(/A74)) / 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30 30m
For HF-KP (Servo) Motor side detector relay cable (Drive unit side)
For HF/HF-H, HF-KP (Tool spindle) Motor side detector cable (for A48/
CNV2E-9P-xM 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30 30m
A51/A74N(/A74))
CNV2E-D-xM MDS-B-SD unit cable 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30 30m
CNV2E-HP-xM MDS-B-HR unit cable 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30 30m
For HF-KP (Servo) Motor side detector cable
CNV2E-K1P-xM Lead out in direction of motor shaft 2, 3, 5, 7, 10 10m
Compatible with only IP65
For HF-KP (Servo) Motor side detector cable
CNV2E-K2P-xM Lead out in opposite direction of motor shaft 2, 3, 5, 7, 10 10m
Compatible with only IP65
Battery cable
DG21-xM 0.3, 0.5, 1, 5 5m
(For drive unit - battery unit)
Battery cable
(For drive unit - drive unit)
DG22-xM 0.3, 0.5, 1, 2, 3, 5, 7, 10 10m
(Note) This cable is required to supply the power from the battery unit to
multiple drive units.
Battery cable
(For drive unit - battery box)
DG23-xM 0.3, 0.5, 1, 2, 3, 5, 7, 10 10m
(Note) The battery box side is connected using a bare conductor or a
terminal bar.
5V supply / DO output cable
(For drive unit - battery box)
DG24-xM 0.3, 0.5, 1, 2, 3, 5, 7, 10 10m
(Note) The battery box side is connected using a bare conductor or a
terminal bar.
Manual pulse generator cable (5V): 1ch
F023 LxM 1, 2, 3, 5, 8, 10, 15, 20 20m
(for connection to operation panel I/O unit)
Manual pulse generator cable (5V): 2ch
F024 LxM 1, 2, 3, 5, 8, 10, 15, 20 20m
(for connection to operation panel I/O unit)
F034 LxM RS-232C I/F cable: 1ch (for control unit) 0.5, 1, 2, 3, 5, 8, 10 15m (*)
F035 LxM RS-232C I/F cable: 2ch (for control unit) 0.5, 1, 2, 3, 5, 8, 10 15m (*)
F070 LxM 24VDC power cable 0.5, 1.5, 3, 5, 8, 10, 15, 20 30m
F110 LxM 24VDC power cable for PD25/PD27 0.5, 1.5, 3, 5, 8, 10, 15 15m
F120 LxM Emergency stop cable 0.5, 1.5, 3, 5, 8, 10, 15, 20 30m
F170 LxM ON/OFF switch cable for PD25/PD27 0.5, 1.5, 3, 5, 8, 10, 15 15m
F221 LxM Analog output cable 1, 2, 3, 5, 8, 10, 15, 20 30m
Manual pulse generator cable (12V): 1ch
F320 LxM 1, 2, 3, 5, 8, 10, 15, 20 50m
(for connection to operation panel I/O unit)
Manual pulse generator cable (12V): 2ch
F321 LxM 1, 2, 3, 5, 8, 10, 15, 20 50m
(for connection to operation panel I/O unit)
DI/DO cable (one side connector)
F351 3 50m
(for operation panel I/O unit)
FCUA-R030-xM SKIP input cable 3, 7 20m
FCUA-R031-xM Analog input/output cable (for remote I/O unit) 2, 3, 7 30m
FCUA-R050-xM Synchronous encoder - control unit (straight, with connector) 5 30m
FCUA-R054-xM Synchronous encoder - control unit (right angle, with connector) 3, 5, 10, 15, 20 30m

I - 12
M70V Series Specifications Manual
3 List of Configuration

Length (m) of cables provided Max. cable

Type Application
by Mitsubishi length
Remote I/O (with terminal block)
between remote I/O,
FCUA-R211-xM remote I/O - CNC control unit, 0.3, 1, 2, 3, 5, 8, 10, 15, 20 30m (*)
remote I/O - Operation panel I/O unit,
remote I/O - MITSUBISHI CNC machine operation panel A
DI/DO cable (one side connector)
FCUA-R300 3 50m
(for remote I/O unit)
DI/DO cable (both side connectors)
FCUA-R301-xM 1, 2, 3, 5 50m
(for remote I/O unit)
G011 LxM Operation panel I/O interface cable 0.5 0.5m
Manual pulse generator cable (5V): 1ch
G023 LxM 1, 2, 3, 5, 8, 10, 15, 20 20m (*)
(for connection to control unit)
Manual pulse generator cable (5V): 2ch
G024 LxM 1, 2, 3, 5, 8, 10, 15, 20 20m (*)
(for connection to control unit)
G071 LxM DC24V relay cable for MITSUBISHI CNC machine operation panel 0.5 0.5m
LAN cross cable
G300 LxM 1, 3, 5, 10 10m
(Shielded cable is recommended when the length will be 1m or more)
LAN straight cable
G301 LxM 1 1m
(Shielded cable is recommended when the length will be 1m or more)
Optical communication cable
G380 LxM For wiring between drive units (outside panel) 5, 10, 12, 15, 20, 25, 30 30m
For optical communication repeater unit
Optical communication cable
G395 LxM For wiring between drive units (outside panel) 3, 5, 7, 10 10m
For wiring between NC-drive units
Optical communication cable
G396 LxM 0.3, 0.5, 1, 2, 3, 5 10m
For wiring between drive units (inside panel)
Cable between MITSUBISHI CNC machine operation panel A and
G460 LxM 0.5 0.5m
MITSUBISHI CNC machine operation panel B
<200V Series>
MR-BKS1CBLxM-
Brake cable for HF-KP 2, 3, 5, 7, 10 10m
A1-H
Lead out in direction of motor shaft
<200V Series>
MR-BKS1CBLxM-
Brake cable for HF-KP 2, 3, 5, 7, 10 10m
A2-H
Lead out in opposite direction of motor shaft
<200V Series>
MR-PWS1CBLxM-
Power cable for HF-KP 2, 3, 5, 7, 10 10m
A1-H
Lead out in direction of motor shaft
<200V Series>
MR-PWS1CBLxM- Power cable for HF-KP
2, 3, 5, 7, 10 10m
A2-H (Note) It can not be used with HF-KP13.
Lead out in opposite direction of motor shaft
R-TM Terminator for remote I/O interface - -
Power supply communication cable 0.35, 0.5, 0.7, 1, 1.5, 2, 2.5, 3,
SH21 LxM Power backup unit communication cable 3.5, 4, 4.5, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 15, 20, 30m
Cable for Auxiliary axis/Servo drive unit 30
Remote I/O cable
between remote I/O,
remote I/O - CNC control unit,
SH41 LxM 0.3, 0.5, 0.7 1m (*)
remote I/O - Operation panel I/O unit,
remote I/O - MITSUBISHI CNC machine operation panel A
(between remote I/O units in a panel)

(Note 1) "x" in type columns indicate cable length (unit: m).

(Note 2) Lengths indicated with an asterisk (*) in the max. cable length column indicate the maximum cable length
when connecting via other unit.

I - 13
MITSUBISHI CNC
I General Specifications

I - 14
4
Environment Conditions

I - 15
MITSUBISHI CNC
I General Specifications

Operation panel Machine operation

Unit name Control unit Display unit Keyboard unit
I/O unit panel
Item
FCU7-MU556/557/ FCU7-DU120-12/ FCU7-KB024/025/026/
Type FCU7-DX71x/72x/73x FCU7-KB921/926
551/552 140-x2 029/044/046/047/048
During
0 to 55C°
Ambient operation
temperature During
-20 to 60C°
storage

Genera Ambient Long term 10 to 75% RH (with no dew condensation)

l humidity Short term 10 to 95% RH (with no dew condensation) (Note 1)
Specifi Vibration
cations 4.9m/s2 or less (during operation)
resistance
Shock
29.4m/s2 or less (during operation)
resistance
Working
No corrosive gases, dust or oil mist
atmosphere
24VDC ±5% 3.3V/12VDC 5VDC 3.3V/5VDC
Requir Power voltage Ripple noise 200mV 24VDC ±5%(Note 7)
(P-P) (Provided by the control unit)
ed
power -
Power capacity 24V 2.5A - - 0.25A(Note 7)
specifi (Note 2)
cations Instantaneous stop
20ms - 20ms(min)(Note 7)
tolerance time
FCU7-DU120-12:
10.0W Control section: 5.0W
Heating value (max.) 12.0W 1.0W 6W
FCU7-DU140-x2: (Note 3)
12.0W
FCU7-KB024/025/029/
FCU7-DU120-12:
044:0.8
1.5 FCU7-KB921:1.2
Mass (kg) 1.0 FCU7-KB026/046:0.9 0.4
FCU7-DU140-x2: FCU7-KB926:0.5
FCU7-KB047:1.2
2.0
FCU7-KB048:1.5
Others FCU7-KB024/025/26:
140(width) x 200(height)
FCU7-DU120-12: FCU7-KB029:
235(width) x
260(width) x 260(width) x 140(height) FCU7-KB921:
173(height) x
Outline 200(height) FCU7-KB044/46: 120(width) x 260(W) x 140(H)
(mm) 73(depth)
dimension FCU7-DU140-x2: 140(width) x 220(height) 180(height) FCU7-KB926:
(Depth from the plate
290(width) x FCU7-KB047: 140(W) x 140(H)
mounting surface: 60)
220(height) 290(width) x 160(height)
FCU7-KB048:
230(width) x 220(height)

I - 16
M70V Series Specifications Manual
4 Environment Conditions

Unit name Remote I/O unit

Item
Type FCUA-DX10x FCUA-DX11x FCUA-DX12x FCUA-DX14x
During
0 to 55C°
Ambient operation
temperature During
-20 to 60C°
storage
General Long term 10 to 75% RH (with no dew condensation)
Ambient
Specificati Short
humidity 10 to 95% RH (with no dew condensation) (Note 1)
ons term
Vibration resistance 4.9m/s2 or less (during operation)
Shock resistance 29.4m/s2 or less (during operation)
Working atmosphere No corrosive gases or dust
Required Input power voltage 24VDC±5% Ripple noise 200mV (P-P)
power Power capacity 24V 0.7A (Note 4) 24V 1.5A (Note 4) 24V 0.7A (Note 4)
specificatio Instantaneous stop
ns -
tolerance time
Heating value (max.) 25W (Note 5) 30W (Note 5) 30W (Note 5)
Others
Mass 0.5kg 0.6kg 0.6kg 0.6kg

(Note 1) "Short term" means within one month.

(Note 2) For the current value of the I/O circuit, calculate with the number of points used and load.
(Note 3) For the heating value of the I/O circuit, calculate with the number of points used.
(Note 4) Allows only the amount to be consumed by control circuit.
(Note 5) Differs according to the number of machine input operation points and the load and number of points
connected to the machine output. The maximum value applies when all points are ON.
(Note 6) MITSUBISHI CNC M70V Series, which is an open equipment, must be installed within a sealed metal control
panel.
(Note 7) FCU7-KB926 does not need 24VDC power supply input.

I - 17
MITSUBISHI CNC
I General Specifications

I - 18
5
Hardware Specifications

I - 19
MITSUBISHI CNC
I General Specifications

5.1 Control Unit

Dimension and names of parts

[FCU7-MU556/ FCU7-MU557]

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)

235
100 214
21 52 208 6

6
156
168
173
(16)
(8) (9) (10)(11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (17) (18) (19)

I - 20
M70V Series Specifications Manual
5 Hardware Specifications

[FCU7-MU551 / FCU7-MU552]

(2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)

235
100 214
21 52 208 6

6
156
168
173
(16)
(8) (9) (10)(11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (17) (18) (19)

Connector Connector
No. Function No. Function
name name
(1) USB Front USB memory I/F (11) RIO1 Remote I/O unit I/F
(2) CF Front CF card I/F (12) MENUKEY Menu key I/F
Encoder input 1ch
Display unit backlight inverter I/F
(3) INV (13) ENC (5V manual pulse generator
or driver I/F
input 2ch)
(4) DCIN 24VDC input (14) SKIP Skip input 8ch
Serial communication (RS-
(5) EMG External emergency stop input (15) SIO
232C) I/F 2ch
(6) ADONCCB Expansion card slot (16) BAT Battery (Q6BAT) I/F
(7) LCD Display unit signal I/F (17) Touch panel I/F
(8) OPT Optical communication I/F (18) FG FG terminal
(9) LAN Ethernet I/F (19) LED
(10) CG71 Operation panel I/O unit I/F

(1) Front USB memory I/F (USB)

Do not connect devices other than USB memories.
When using a commercially available USB memory, performance check must be made by machine tool builder.

(2) Front CF card I/F (CF)

It is recommended to use CF cards of the original equipment manufactured parts. Mitsubishi is unable to guarantee
the machine operation when a commercially available CF card or SD memory card (SD-CF adapter is required) is
used. In that case, performance check must be made carefully by machine tool builder.

I - 21
MITSUBISHI CNC
I General Specifications

(3) Display unit backlight inverter I/F or driver I/F (INV)

(4) 24VDC input (DCIN)

1 3

1 I +24V
2 0V
3 FG
<Cable side connector type>
Connector: 2-178288-3
Contact: 1-175218-5 x3
Recommended manufacturer: Tyco Electronics

(a) Specifications of power supply

Consider the following characteristics when selecting the stabilized power supply (prepared by machine
tool builder). Use a power supply that complies with CE Marking or that follows the safety standards given
below.

[Stabilized power supply selection items]

Item Standard setting

Output Voltage fluctuation ±5% or less of 24VDC
Ripple noise 200mV (P-P)
Power capacity 2.5A or more
Output holding time 20ms
Overcurrent protection Required

[Standards]
Safety Standards: UL1950, CSA C22.2 No.234 approved, IEC950 compliant
Noise Terminal Voltage: FCC Class A, VCCI-Class A
High Harmonics Current Restrictions: IEC61000-3-2

(Note) 24VDC voltage may drop instantaneously due to rush current at the beginning of 24V power
supply to the control unit. The level of voltage drop depends on the capacity of the power
supply. Do not share the power supply with the devices that have alarms to warn the voltage
drop.

CAUTION
1. Using a stabilized power supply without overcurrent protection may cause the unit's failure due to miswiring of
24V.

I - 22
M70V Series Specifications Manual
5 Hardware Specifications

(5) External emergency stop input (EMG)

3 1

1 FG
2 I EMG IN
3 O +24V
* Be sure to connect EMG terminal cable (G123) to the connector when not used.

<Cable side connector type>

Connector: 005057-9403
Contact: 0016020103 x3
Recommended manufacturer: MOLEX

(6) Expansion card slot (ADONCCB)

(7) Display unit signal I/F (LCD)

(8) Optical communication I/F (OPT)

<Cable side connector type>

(PCF type)
Connector: CF-2D101-S
Recommended manufacturer: Japan Aviation Electronics

(POF type)
Connector: PF-2D101
Recommended manufacturer: Japan Aviation Electronics

I - 23
MITSUBISHI CNC
I General Specifications

(9) Ethernet I/F (LAN)

8 1

1 O TD+
2 O TD-
3 I RD+
4
5
6 I RD-
7
8
* Connect connector case with FG pattern.
* Use cross cable (G300) when directly connecting a device such as a personal computer to the unit.

<Cable side connector type>

Connector: 5-569550-3
Recommended manufacturer: Tyco Electronics

(10) Operation panel I/O unit I/F (CG71)

13 1

26 14

1 GND 14 GND
2 5V 15 5V
3 5V 16 3.3V
4 GND 17 GND
5 O KBCS0* 18 O KBCS1*
6 O KBCS2* 19 O KBAD0
7 O KBAD1 20 O KBAD2
8 I KBD0 21 I KBD1
9 I KBD2 22 I KBD3
10 O KBRES* 23 O RDYOUT*
11 O BUZOUT* 24 3.3V
12 I/O TXRX3 25 I/O TXRX3*
13 O SCAN36 26 O SCAN37

* Connect connector case with FG pattern.

<Cable side connector type>

Plug: 10126-3000VE
Shell: 10326-52F0-008
Recommended manufacturer: 3M

I - 24
M70V Series Specifications Manual
5 Hardware Specifications

(11) Remote I/O unit I/F (RIO1)

Up to eight remote I/O stations can be connected.

1 3

1 I/O TXRX1
2 I/O TXRX1*
3 0V
<Cable side connector type>
Connector: 1-178288-3
Contact: 1-175218-2 x3
Recommended manufacturer: Tyco Electronics

(12) Menu key I/F (MENUKEY)

(13) Encoder input 1ch/ 5V manual pulse generator input 2ch (ENC)
Synchronous feed encoder or 5V manual pulse generator can be connected to this connector.

10 1

20 11

1 0V 11 0V
2 I ENC1Z 12 I ENC1Z*
3 I ENC1B 13 I ENC1B*
4 I ENC1A 14 I ENC1A*
5 0V 15 0V
6 O 5V 16 O 5V
7 I HA2A 17 I HA2B
8 I HA1A 18 I HA1B
9 NC 19 NC
10 O 5V 20 O 5V
* Connect connector case with FG pattern.

<Cable side connector type>

Plug: 10120-3000VE
Shell: 10320-52F0-008
Recommended manufacturer: 3M

I - 25
MITSUBISHI CNC
I General Specifications

(a) Input for synchronous feed encoder

<Specification of input part>

Three phases (A phase, B phase, a phase difference 90 degrees,

Number of pulse phases
Z phase) (Refer to the waveform below.)
Signal output of the encoder Line driver output
Input voltage range 0V to 5.25V
Signal
Differential-input voltage VIT+ 0.2V to 5.25V
voltage
Differential-input voltage VIT- -5.25V to -0.2V
Power supply voltage 5VDC±10%
Current consumption 200mA or less
Number of pulses per rotation 1024 pulse/rev
Input frequency (rotation speed) 136kHz or less (8000r/min or less)
Cable length 50m or less

A phase
A* phase

B phase
B* phase

Z phase
Z* phase
a b c d e
T

a.b.c.d.e: A phase or B phase rising edge (falling edge) phase difference = T/4 ± T/10

(b) Input for 5V manual pulse generator

<Specification of input part>

Two phases (A phase, B phase, a phase difference 90 degrees)

Number of pulse phases
(Refer to the waveform below.)
Signal output of manual pulse generator Voltage output, open collector output
H level 3.5V to 5.25V
Signal voltage
L level 0V to 0.5V
Power supply voltage 5VDC±10%
Current consumption 100mA or less
Number of pulses per rotation 25 pulse/rev, 100 pulse/rev
1kHz or less
Input frequency (rotation speed)
(40r/s or less for 25pluse/rev, 10r/s or less for 100pluse/rev)
Cable length 20m or less

A(B) phase

B(A) phase
a b c d e

a.b.c.d.e: A phase or B phase rising edge (falling edge) phase difference = T/4 ± T/10
T: A or B phase cycle

I - 26
M70V Series Specifications Manual
5 Hardware Specifications

(c) 5V manual pulse generator input/output circuit

+5V

Connector
pin No.

HA1A 8
HA2A 7

Signal +5V
0V
input

HA1B 18
HA2B 17
Control
circuit

0V

+5V 10
+5V 20
Power
output 0V 1
0V 11

0V

When using the synchronous feed encoder and the manual pulse generator at the same time, connect
the manual pulse generator to the operation panel I/O unit or use a distribution cable made by the
machine tool builder.

(14) Skip input 8ch (SKIP)

10 1

20 11

1 COM 11 COM
2 I SKIP0 12 I SKIP1
3 I SKIP2 13 I SKIP3
4 NC 14 NC
5 COM 15 COM
6 NC 16 NC
7 I SKIP4 17 I SKIP5
8 I SKIP6 18 I SKIP7
9 NC 19 NC
10 NC 20 NC
* Connect connector case with FG pattern.

<Cable side connector type>

Plug: 10120-3000VE
Shell: 10320-52F0-008
Recommended manufacturer: 3M

I - 27
MITSUBISHI CNC
I General Specifications

(a) Skip signal input conditions

Use the input signal within the following condition ranges.

24V common 0V common

1 Input voltage at external contact ON 6V or less 18V or more, 25.2V or less
2 Input current at external contact ON 6mA or more
3 Input voltage at external contact OFF 20V or more, 25.2V or less 4V or less
4 Input current at external contact OFF 2mA or less
5 Input resistance Approx. 2.2kΩ
6 Input signal holding time (Ton) 2ms or more
7 Internal response time 0.08ms or less
8 Machine side contact capacity +30V or more, 16mA or more

Connection to 24V common Connection to 0V common

Ton Ton
External signal
+24V +24V

External signal
0V 0V

Connection to 24V common Connection to 0V common

(Machine side) (Machine side)

S K IP
24VDC S K IP 24VDC
Input
voltage

0V(RG) Input
voltage
Input
voltage
Control Control
0V(RG) circuit Input circuit
voltage

C OM C OM
0V(RG)

I - 28
M70V Series Specifications Manual
5 Hardware Specifications

(15) Serial communication (RS-232C) I/F 2ch (SIO)

10 1

20 11

1 0V 11 0V
2 I RD1(RXD1) 12 O SD1(TXD1)
3 I CS1(CTS1) 13 O RS1(RTS1)
4 O DR1(DSR1) 14 I ER1(DTR1)
5 0V 15 0V
6 NC 16 NC
7 I RD2(RXD2) 17 O SD2(TXD2)
8 I CS2(CTS2) 18 O RS2(RTS2)
9 O DR2(DSR2) 19 I ER2(DTR2)
10 NC 20 NC
* Connect connector case with FG pattern.

<Cable side connector type>

Plug: 10120-3000VE
Shell: 10320-52F0-008
Recommended manufacturer: 3M

(16) Battery (Q6BAT) I/F (BAT)

(17) Touch panel I/F

(18) FG terminal (FG)

I - 29
MITSUBISHI CNC
I General Specifications

(19) LED

Name

Name Function At fault Conditions

(1) Failure of DC24V input
24VDCIN DC24V input check Not lit
(2) Fuse is disconnected near DCIN connector
(1) Failure of internal voltage output in control unit
DCOUT Internal output voltage check Not lit
(2) Short circuit of DC5V output on CG71 or ENC or FAN connector
DC12V output voltage check
(1) Failure of DC12V output in control unit
LCDON for backlight inverter or Not lit
(2) 24VDC input voltage is +20V or less
backlight driver
External emergency stop
PSEMG Lit (Red) External emergency stop signal has inputted
status display
(1) Failure of control unit
WDER System error display Lit (Red)
(2) SRAM data is broken
BATALM Battery voltage drop Lit (Red) Battery voltage has dropped to 2.7V or less

I - 30
M70V Series Specifications Manual
5 Hardware Specifications

5.2 Display Unit

Outline dimension

[FCU7-DU120-12 (8.4-type)]

260 20 110(Space required for wiring)

200

(Note 1) The above side view shows the state with the control unit mounted.
(Note 2) Consider the minimum radius value of optical communication cable for the bottom space.

<Panel cut dimension drawing>

260 ( Unit outline )

250 ± 0.3

244
200 ( Unit outline )

(Square hole)
190 ± 0.3

184

4- M3 Screw

I - 31
MITSUBISHI CNC
I General Specifications

[FCU7-DU140-12 (10.4-type)]

290 20 110( Space required for wiring)

220

(Note 1) The above side view shows the state with the control unit mounted.
(Note 2) Consider the minimum radius value of optical communication cable for the bottom space.

<Panel cut dimension drawing>

290 ( Unit outline )

280 ± 0.3

274
220 ( Unit outline )

210 ± 0.3

204

(Square hole)

4- M3 Screw

I - 32
M70V Series Specifications Manual
5 Hardware Specifications

[FCU7-DU140-32 (10.4-type with touch panel)]

290 20 110(Space required for wiring)

220

(Note 1) The above side view shows the state with the control unit mounted.
(Note 2) Consider the minimum radius value of optical communication cable for the bottom space.

<Panel cut dimension drawing>

290 ( Unit outline )

280 ± 0.3

274
220 ( Unit outline )

210 ± 0.3

204

(Square hole)

4- M3 Screw

I - 33
MITSUBISHI CNC
I General Specifications

5.3 Keyboard Unit

Outline dimension

[FCU7-KB024 (8.4-type)]

140 20 110 (Space required for wiring)

200

(Note) The above side view shows the state with the operation panel I/O unit FCU7-DX720/DX721 mounted.

<Panel cut dimension drawing>

140 (Unit outline)

13 0 0.3

(Square hole)
200 (Unit outline)

0.3

182
190

122

4-M3 Screw

I - 34
M70V Series Specifications Manual
5 Hardware Specifications

[FCU7-KB025 (8.4-type)]

200 140 20 110 (Space required for wiring)

(Note) The above side view shows the state with the operation panel I/O unit FCU7-DX721 mounted.

<Panel cut dimension drawing>

140 (Unit outline)

13 0 0.3

(Square hole)
200 (Unit outline)

0.3

182
190

122

4-M3 Screw

I - 35
MITSUBISHI CNC
I General Specifications

[FCU7-KB026 (Clear keys for 8.4-type)]

140 20 110 (Space required for wiring)

200

(Note) The above side view shows the state with the operation panel I/O unit FCU7-DX720/DX721 mounted.

<Panel cut dimension drawing>

140 (Unit outline)

13 0 0.3

(Square hole)
200 (Unit outline)

0.3

182
190

122

4-M3 Screw

I - 36
M70V Series Specifications Manual
5 Hardware Specifications

[FCU7-KB029 (In tandem for 8.4-type)]

260 17 110 (Space required for wiring)

140

(Note) The above side view shows the state with the operation panel I/O unit FCU7-DX720/DX721 mounted.

<Panel cut dimension drawing>

260 (Unit outline)

250 0.3
140 (Unit outline)

0.3

122

(Square hole)
130

242

4-M3 Screw

I - 37
MITSUBISHI CNC
I General Specifications

[FCU7-KB044 (10.4-type)]

140 20 110 (Space required for wiring)

220

(Note) The above side view shows the state with the operation panel I/O unit FCU7-DX720/DX721 mounted.

<Panel cut dimension drawing>

140 (Unit outline)

13 0 0.3

(Square hole)
220 (Unit outline)

0.3

202
210

122

4-M3 Screw

I - 38
M70V Series Specifications Manual
5 Hardware Specifications

[FCU7-KB046 (Clear keys for 10.4-type)]

140 20 110 (Space required for wiring)

220

(Note) The above side view shows the state with the operation panel I/O unit FCU7-DX720/DX721 mounted.

<Panel cut dimension drawing>

140 (Unit outline)

13 0 0.3

(Square hole)
220 (Unit outline)

0.3

202
210

122

4-M3 Screw

I - 39
MITSUBISHI CNC
I General Specifications

[FCU7-KB047 (Clear keys for 10.4-type/ QWERTY assignment)]

290 17 110 (Space required for wiring)

160

(Note) The above side view shows the state with the operation panel I/O unit FCU7-DX720/DX721 mounted.

<Panel cut dimension drawing>

290 (Unit outline)

280 0.3
144

(Square hole)
0.3
160 (Unit outline)

150

274

4-M3 Screw

I - 40
M70V Series Specifications Manual
5 Hardware Specifications

[FCU7-KB048 (Clear keys for 10.4-type)]

230 20 110 (Space required for wiring)

220

(Note) The above side view shows the state with the operation panel I/O unit FCU7-DX720/DX721 mounted.

<Panel cut dimension drawing>

230 (Unit outline)

220 0.3

212
220 (Unit outline)

0.3

(Square hole)
202
210

4-M3 Screw

I - 41
MITSUBISHI CNC
I General Specifications

5.4 Operation Panel I/O Unit

Characteristics of operation panel I/O unit are as follows.

(1) Number of DI/DO points that can be mounted on the machine operation panel is 64/64 as standard and 96/96 at the
maximum. Both sink and source types are available.
Operation panel I/O unit DI/DO uses equivalent serial link connections as those used for remote I/O.
(2) Remote I/O interface --- 1ch
Remote I/O unit, scan I/O card, etc. can be extended up to 4 stations.
(a) When FCU7-DX710/711 are used: Up to 4 stations, 128 points/128 points in total, are available.
(b) When FCU7-DX720/721/730/731 are used: Up to 3 stations, 96 points/96 points in total, are available.
(Note) The maximum number of stations that can be extended is described above whether DI/DO of the
operation panel I/O unit is used or not.
(3) Manual pulse generator --- 2ch
5V and 12V manual pulse generators can be connected.
(4) Installation on the back side of the keyboard unit is possible. Allows space saving inside the operation panel.
Classification Type Components Remarks
DI: 64-points 24V/0V common type
DO: 64-points sink type
DI 24V/0V common input Base card
FCU7-DX710 MPG:2ch
DO Sink output Terminator (R-TM)
Occupied stations (fixed): 1, 2, 7, 8
RIO3 extensible stations: 3, 4, 5, 6
DI: 96-points 24V/0V common type
DO: 80-points sink type
DI 24V/0V common input Base card
MPG:2ch
DO Sink output FCU7-DX720 Terminator (R-TM)
AO: 1 point
AO Analog output Add-on card
Occupied stations (fixed): 1, 2, 3, 7, 8
RIO3 extensible stations: 4, 5, 6
DI: 96-points 24V/0V common type
Base card DO: 96-points sink type
DI 24V/0V common input
FCU7-DX730 Terminator (R-TM) MPG: 2ch
DO Sink output
Add-on card Occupied stations (fixed): 1, 2, 3, 7, 8
RIO3 extensible stations: 4, 5, 6
DI: 64-points 24V/0V common type
DO: 64-points source type
DI 24V/0V common input Base card
FCU7-DX711 MPG:2ch
DO Source output Terminator (R-TM)
Occupied stations (fixed): 1, 2, 7, 8
RIO3 extensible stations: 3, 4, 5, 6
DI: 96-points 24V/0V common type
DO: 80-points source type
DI 24V/0V common input Base card
MPG:2ch
DO Source output FCU7-DX721 Terminator (R-TM)
AO: 1 point
AO Analog output Add-on card
Occupied stations (fixed): 1, 2, 3, 7, 8
RIO3 extensible stations: 4, 5, 6
DI: 96-points 24V/0V common type
Base card DO: 96-points source type
DI 24V/0V common input
FCU7-DX731 Terminator (R-TM) MPG:2ch
DO Source output
Add-on card Occupied stations (fixed): 1, 2, 3, 7, 8
RIO3 extensible stations: 4, 5, 6

(Note 1) The station Nos. occupied by the operation panel I/O unit cannot be changed. If the unit has rotary switches,
do not change the switch settings when shipped.
(Settings when shipped: CS1 -> 0/ CS2 -> 1/ CS3 -> 6)
(Note 2) Set the number of DI points that are simultaneously turned ON to be less than half of the total points. If many
points are set to be simultaneously turned ON in high temperature, operation panel I/O unit may be
deteriorated due to the heat.

I - 42
M70V Series Specifications Manual
5 Hardware Specifications

Dimension and names of parts

[FCU7-DX710/ FCU7-DX711]

(1) (2)
116 110 ( Space required for wiring)

(10)
179

(11)

(12)

(4) (5) (7) (8)

(13)

<Dimension drawing for installing on the panel> <Installation on the back side of the keyboard>
116 ( Unit outline ) Operation panel I/O unit can be installed on the back side
of the keyboard.
106 ± 0.3
Fixing screw (4 pcs.) M3x25
(with plain washer and spring washer)
179 ( Unit outline )

171 ± 0.3

4- M3 Screw

NCKB Connector

(Note) Use M3x25 screws (with spring washer and plain washer) when mounting the operation panel I/O unit.

I - 43
MITSUBISHI CNC
I General Specifications

[FCU7-DX720/ FCU7-DX721/ FCU7-DX730/ FCU7-DX731]

(1) (2) (3)

116 110 ( Space required for wiring)

(9)

(10)
179

(11)

(12)

(4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

(13)

(Note) (9) is not available for FCU7-DX731.

<Dimension drawing for installing on the panel> <Installation on the back side of the keyboard>
116 ( Unit outline ) Operation panel I/O unit can be installed on the back side
of the keyboard.
106 ± 0.3
Fixing screw (4 pcs.) M3x25
(with plain washer and spring washer)
179 ( Unit outline )

171 ± 0.3

4- M3 Screw

NCKB Connector

(Note) Use M3x25 screws (with spring washer and plain washer) when mounting the operation panel I/O unit.

I - 44
M70V Series Specifications Manual
5 Hardware Specifications

(1) Machine input (CG31)

Digital input 32 points (1st station)
(2) Machine input (CG33)
Digital input 32 points (2nd station)
(Note) This is not available for FCU7-DX711.
(3) Machine input (CG35)
Digital input 32 points (3rd station)

B1 B20

A1 A20

<Cable side connector type>

Connector: 7940-6500SC
Strain relief: 3448-7940
Recommended manufacturer: 3M

CG31 CG33 CG35

B A B A B A
20 I X200 20 I X210 20 I X220 20 I X230 20 I X240 20 I X250
19 I X201 19 I X211 19 I X221 19 I X231 19 I X241 19 I X251
18 I X202 18 I X212 18 I X222 18 I X232 18 I X242 18 I X252
17 I X203 17 I X213 17 I X223 17 I X233 17 I X243 17 I X253
16 I X204 16 I X214 16 I X224 16 I X234 16 I X244 16 I X254
15 I X205 15 I X215 15 I X225 15 I X235 15 I X245 15 I X255
14 I X206 14 I X216 14 I X226 14 I X236 14 I X246 14 I X256
13 I X207 13 I X217 13 I X227 13 I X237 13 I X247 13 I X257
12 I X208 12 I X218 12 I X228 12 I X238 12 I X248 12 I X258
11 I X209 11 I X219 11 I X229 11 I X239 11 I X249 11 I X259
10 I X20A 10 I X21A 10 I X22A 10 I X23A 10 I X24A 10 I X25A
9 I X20B 9 I X21B 9 I X22B 9 I X23B 9 I X24B 9 I X25B
8 I X20C 8 I X21C 8 I X22C 8 I X23C 8 I X24C 8 I X25C
7 I X20D 7 I X21D 7 I X22D 7 I X23D 7 I X24D 7 I X25D
6 I X20E 6 I X21E 6 I X22E 6 I X23E 6 I X24E 6 I X25E
5 I X20F 5 I X21F 5 I X22F 5 I X23F 5 I X24F 5 I X25F
4 NC 4 NC 4 NC 4 NC 4 NC 4 NC
3 COM 3 COM 3 COM 3 COM 3 COM 3 COM
2 I +24V 2 0V 2 I +24V 2 0V 2 I +24V 2 0V
1 I +24V 1 0V 1 I +24V 1 0V 1 I +24V 1 0V
Each station has fixed input/output assignments. Refer to "PLC Interface Manual" for details.

I - 45
MITSUBISHI CNC
I General Specifications

(a) Outline of digital signal input circuit

Both 24V common and 0V common connections are allowed in the digital signal input circuit.
Follow the wiring diagram below for each type.
Input circuit

24V common 0V common

CG31/CG33/CG35 CG31/CG33/CG35
(Machine side) (Machine side)
Input resistor Input resistor
External contact R 3.3 k External contact R 3.3k

Input voltage Input voltage

Control Control
Stabilized circuit Stabilized circuit
power supply power supply
24VDC(+) 24VDC(+)
COM COM
0V 0V
FG A3,B3 A3,B3
FG

Input conditions
The input signals must be used within the following condition ranges.

24V common 0V common

1 Input voltage at external contact ON 6V or less 18V or more, 25.2V or less
2 Input current at external contact ON 9mA or more
3 Input voltage at external contact OFF 20V or more, 25.2V or less 4V or less
4 Input current at external contact OFF 2mA or less
5 Input resistance Approx. 3.3kΩ
6 Tolerable chattering time (T1) 3ms
7 Input signal holding time (T2) 40ms or more (Note)
input circuit operation delay time
8 3 to 16ms
(T3 and T4)
9 Machine side contact capacity 30V or more, 16mA or more
(Note) Input signal holding time: The guide is 40ms or more. The input signal will not be
recognized unless it is held for the ladder processing cycle time or longer.

Connection to 24V common input Connection to 0V common input

T2 T2
(E) T1 T1 (E) T1 T1
+24V +24V

GND GND
(I) (I)

T3 T4 T3 T4

(E) : External signal, (I):Internal signal

I - 46
M70V Series Specifications Manual
5 Hardware Specifications

(4) Machine output (CG32)

Digital output 32 points (1st station)
(5) Machine output (CG34)
Digital output 32 points (2nd station)
(Note) This is not available for FCU7-DX711.
(6) Machine output (CG36)
FCU7-DX730/DX731: Digital output 32 points (3rd station)
FCU7-DX720/DX721: Digital output 16 points (3rd station) (with analog output)

B1 B20

A1 A20

<Cable side connector type>

Connector: 7940-6500SC
Strain relief: 3448-7940
Recommended manufacturer: 3M

CG32 CG34 CG36 (Note 1)

B A B A B A
20 O Y200 20 O Y210 20 O Y220 20 O Y230 20 O Y240 20 O Y250
19 O Y201 19 O Y211 19 O Y221 19 O Y231 19 O Y241 19 O Y251
18 O Y202 18 O Y212 18 O Y222 18 O Y232 18 O Y242 18 O Y252
17 O Y203 17 O Y213 17 O Y223 17 O Y233 17 O Y243 17 O Y253
16 O Y204 16 O Y214 16 O Y224 16 O Y234 16 O Y244 16 O Y254
15 O Y205 15 O Y215 15 O Y225 15 O Y235 15 O Y245 15 O Y255
14 O Y206 14 O Y216 14 O Y226 14 O Y236 14 O Y246 14 O Y256
13 O Y207 13 O Y217 13 O Y227 13 O Y237 13 O Y247 13 O Y257
12 O Y208 12 O Y218 12 O Y228 12 O Y238 12 O Y248 12 O Y258
11 O Y209 11 O Y219 11 O Y229 11 O Y239 11 O Y249 11 O Y259
10 O Y20A 10 O Y21A 10 O Y22A 10 O Y23A 10 O Y24A 10 O Y25A
9 O Y20B 9 O Y21B 9 O Y22B 9 O Y23B 9 O Y24B 9 O Y25B
8 O Y20C 8 O Y21C 8 O Y22C 8 O Y23C 8 O Y24C 8 O Y25C
7 O Y20D 7 O Y21D 7 O Y22D 7 O Y23D 7 O Y24D 7 O Y25D
6 O Y20E 6 O Y21E 6 O Y22E 6 O Y23E 6 O Y24E 6 O Y25E
5 O Y20F 5 O Y21F 5 O Y22F 5 O Y23F 5 O Y24F 5 O Y25F
COM COM COM COM COM COM
4 4 4 4 4 4
(Note 2) (Note 2) (Note 2) (Note 2) (Note 2) (Note 2)
COM COM COM COM COM COM
3 3 3 3 3 3
(Note 2) (Note 2) (Note 2) (Note 2) (Note 2) (Note 2)
GND GND GND
2 I 24VDC 2 2 I 24VDC 2 2 I 24VDC 2
(0V) (0V) (0V)
GND GND GND
1 I 24VDC 1 1 I 24VDC 1 1 I 24VDC 1
(0V) (0V) (0V)
(Note 1) FCU7-DX720/DX721 uses 16 points of digital outputs, Y240 to Y24F.
(Note 2) COM (3A, 3B, 4A, and 4B) is connected to 24VDC or GND (0V) inside the unit depending on
the output type.
Sink type output (FCU7-DX710/DX720/DX730): GND (0V)
Source type output (FCU7-DX711/DX721/DX731): 24VDC

Each station has fixed input/output assignments. Refer to "PLC Interface Manual" for details.

I - 47
MITSUBISHI CNC
I General Specifications

(a) Outline of digital signal output circuit

The digital signal output circuit uses a sink type (DX7x0) or source type (DX7x1).
Use within the specification ranges shown below.

Output circuit

(Macine side) CG32/CG34/CG36

24VDC(+)

RA

Control
R Circuit
PL

Sink type (DX7x0)

(Macine side) CG32/CG34/CG36

24VDC(+)

RA
Control
Circuit
R
PL

Source type (DX7x1)

RA : Relay
PL : Pilot lamp

Output conditions

Insulation method Insulation

Rated load voltage 24VDC
Max. output current 60mA/point
Output delay time 40μs

(Note 1) When using an inductive load such as a relay, always connect a diode (voltage resistance
100V or more, 100mA or more) in parallel to the load.
(Note 2) When using a capacitive load such as a lamp, always connect a protective resistor (R=150Ω)
serially to the load to suppress rush currents. (Make sure that the current is less than the
above tolerable current including the momentary current.)

CAUTION
1. When using an inductive load such as a relay, always connect a diode in parallel to the load.
2. When using a capacitive load such as a lamp, always connect a protective resistor serially to the load to
suppress rush currents.

I - 48
M70V Series Specifications Manual
5 Hardware Specifications

(7) Keyboard I/F (NCKB)

(8) FG terminal (FG)

(9) Analog output 1ch (AO)

(Note) This is not available for FCU7-DX731.
10 1

20 11

1 AO* 11 NC
2 NC 12 NC
3 NC 13 NC
4 NC 14 NC
5 NC 15 NC
6 NC 16 NC
7 O AO 17 NC
8 NC 18 NC
9 NC 19 NC
10 NC 20 NC
* Connect connector case with FG pattern.

<Cable side connector type>

Plug: 10120-3000VE
Shell: 10320-52F0-008
Recommended manufacturer: 3M

Output circuit

R
R
AO DAC

AO*
0V

Output conditions

Output voltage 0V to ±10V (±5%)

Resolution 12bit (±10V × n/4096) (Note)
Load conditions 10kΩ load resistance
Output impedance 220Ω

(Note) n=(20 to 211)

Connector pin assignment

1 AO* GND
7 AO Analog voltage output

I - 49
MITSUBISHI CNC
I General Specifications

(10) Manual pulse generator input 2ch (5V and 12V) (MPG)
5V manual pulse generator and 12V manual pulse generator can be connected to this connector.
Connect the synchronous feed encoder to the ENC connector of the control unit.

10 1

20 11

1 GND 11 GND
2 reserve 12 reserve
3 I HA2A 13 I HA2B
4 I HA1A 14 I HA1B
5 GND 15 GND
6 O 12VDC 16 O 12VDC
7 reserve 17 reserve
8 reserve 18 reserve
9 reserve 19 reserve
10 O 5VDC 20 O 5VDC
* Connect connector case with FG pattern.

<Cable side connector type>

Plug: 10120-3000VE
Shell: 10320-52F0-008
Recommended manufacturer: 3M

<Specification of input part>

5V manual pulse generator 12V manual pulse generator

Two phases (A phase, B phase, a phase difference 90 degrees)
Number of pulse phases
(Refer to the waveform below.)
Signal output of manual pulse
Voltage output, open collector output Open collector output
generator
H level 3.5V to 5.25V
Signal voltage
L level 0V to 0.5V
Power supply voltage 5VDC±10% 12VDC±10%
Current consumption 100mA or less
Number of pulses per rotation 25 pulse/rev,100 pulse/rev
Input frequency (rotation speed) 1kHz or less (40r/s or less for 25pluse/rev, 10r/s or less for 100pluse/rev)
Cable length 20m or less 50m or less

A(B) phase

B(A) phase
a b c d e

a.b.c.d.e: A phase or B phase rising edge (falling edge) phase difference = T/4 ± T/10
T: A or B phase cycle

I - 50
M70V Series Specifications Manual
5 Hardware Specifications

<Input/output circuit>

+5V

Connector
pin No.
HA1A 4
HA2A 3

+5V
Signal 0V
input

HA1B 14
HA2B 13
Control
unit

0V

+12V 6
+12V 16

12V +5V 10
Power +5V 20
output 5V
Power
output
0V 1
0V 11

0V

(11) Remote I/O unit I/F (RIO3)

1 3

1 I/O TXRX3
2 I/O TXRX3*
3 0V(GND)
<Cable side connector type>
Connector: 1-178288-3
Contact: 1-175218-2 x3
Recommended manufacturer: Tyco Electronics

Refer to the following chart for the maximum number of connecting stations and I/O points.

Max. number of stations Max. number of I/O points

Operation panel I/O unit type
(RIO3 connection) (RIO3 connection)
4 stations
FCU7-DX710/DX711 128 points/128 points
(stations 3rd to 6th can be used)
3 stations
FCU7-DX720/DX721/DX730/DX731 96 points/96 points
(stations 4th to 6th can be used)

(12) Control unit I/F (CG71)

I - 51
MITSUBISHI CNC
I General Specifications

(13) LED

Name Function At fault Conditions

3VON DC3V input check Not lit (1) Disconnection between control unit and operation panel I/O unit
(1) Disconnection between control unit and operation panel I/O unit
5VON DC5V input check Not lit
(2) Short circuit of manual pulse generator cable
RIO communication
PACKETNG Lit (Red)
status check (1) Partial disconnection between control unit and operation panel I/O unit
RIO communication (2) Miswiring of extended I/O unit to RIO3
RIO1 Not lit
status check
For manual pulse
12VON Not lit Short circuit of manual pulse generator cable
generator
(1) Disconnection of 24V input
DC24V input check
DOCOM Not lit (2) Disconnection of protection fuse on the operation panel I/O unit
(for source output)
(Note) Sink output type does not have the LED for DOCOM.

I - 52
M70V Series Specifications Manual
5 Hardware Specifications

5.5 Remote I/O Unit

The following eight types of signals can be input/output from the remote I/O unit (FCUA-DX1xx) according to the type
and No. of contacts. Use serial link connections to connect the unit with the control unit or the operation panel I/O unit.
Multiple remote I/O units can be used as long as the total number of occupied stations is eight or less.
Classification Type Components Remarks
DI: 32-points 24V/0V common type
DI 24V/0V common input (photo coupler insulation)
FCUA-DX100 RX311
DO Sink output DO: 32-points sink type (non-insulation)
Number of occupied stations: 1
DI: 64-points 24V/0V common type
DI 24V/0V common input (photo coupler insulation)
FCUA-DX110 RX311+RX321-1
DO Sink output DO: 48-points sink type (non-insulation)
Number of occupied stations: 2
DI: 64-points 24V/0V common type
DI 24V/0V common input (photo coupler insulation)
DO Sink output FCUA-DX120 RX311+RX321 DO: 48-points sink type (non-insulation)
AO Analog output AO: 1 point
Number of occupied stations: 2
DI: 32-points 24V/0V common type
DI 24V/0V common input (photo coupler insulation)
DO Sink output DO: 32-points sink type (non-insulation)
FCUA-DX140 RX311+RX341
AI Analog input AI: 4 points
AO Analog output AO: 1 point
Number of occupied stations: 2
DI: 32-points 24V/0V common type
DI 24V/0V common input (photo coupler insulation)
FCUA-DX101 RX312
DO Source output DO: 32-points source type (non-insulation)
Number of occupied stations: 1
DI: 64-points 24V/0V common type
DI 24V/0V common input (photo coupler insulation)
FCUA-DX111 RX312+RX322-1
DO Source output DO: 48-points source type (non-insulation)
Number of occupied stations: 2
DI: 64-points 24V/0V common type
DI 24V/0V common input (photo coupler insulation)
DO Source output FCUA-DX121 RX312+RX322 DO: 48-points source type (non-insulation)
AO Analog output AO: 1 point
Number of occupied stations: 2
DI: 32-points 24V/0V common type
DI 24V/0V common input (photo coupler insulation)
DO Source output DO: 32-points source type (non-insulation)
FCUA-DX141 RX312+RX341
AI Analog input AI: 4 points
AO Analog output AO: 1 point
Number of occupied stations: 2

I - 53
MITSUBISHI CNC
I General Specifications

Dimension and names of parts

[Front view]
40 40 40

(1) (1) (2) (1) (5)

(11) (11) (11)

168
168
168

(6) (6) (7) (6) (7)

(7) (7) (7)

(3) (3) (4) (3)

(DX10x) (DX11x/DX12x) (DX14x)

135
[Bottom view] (Front) [Side view]

(8)
135

168
(9)

(10)

(Rear)
6

<Installation dimension drawing>

Top
100

135

Mounting hole

2-M5 screw
6
168

156

6
150

70
6

34 6

Bottom

I - 54
M70V Series Specifications Manual
5 Hardware Specifications

(1) Machine input (DI-L)

(2) Machine input (DI-R)

Both 24V common and 0V common connections are allowed in the digital signal input circuit.
Follow the wiring diagram below for each type.
Input circuit
24V common 0V common
DI-L / DI-R DI-L / DI-R
(Machine side) (Machine side)
Input resistor Input resistor
External contact R 2.2k External contact R 2.2k

Input voltage Input voltage

Control Control
Stabilized circuit Stabilized circuit
power supply power supply
24VDC(+) 24VDC(+)
COM COM
0V 0V
FG A3,B3 A3,B3
FG

Input conditions
The input signals must be used within the following condition ranges.

24V common 0V common

1 Input voltage at external contact ON 6V or less 18V or more, 25.2V or less
2 Input current at external contact ON 9mA or more
3 Input voltage at external contact OFF 20V or more, 25.2V or less 4V or less
4 Input current at external contact OFF 2mA or less
5 Input resistance Approx. 2.2kΩ
6 Tolerable chattering time (T1) 3ms
7 Input signal holding time (T2) 40ms or more (Note)
input circuit operation delay time (T3
8 3 to 16ms
and T4)
9 Machine side contact capacity 30V or more, 16mA or more
(Note) Input signal holding time: The guide is 40ms or more. The input signal will not be recognized unless
it is held for the ladder processing cycle time or longer.

Connection to 24V common input Connection to 0V common input

T2 T2
(E) T1 T1 (E) T1 T1
+24V +24V

GND GND
(I) (I)

T3 T4 T3 T4

(E) : External signal, (I) : Internal signal

I - 55
MITSUBISHI CNC
I General Specifications

(3) Machine output (DO-L)

(4) Machine output (DO-R)

The digital signal output circuit uses a sink type (DX1x0) or source type (DX1x1).
Use within the specification ranges shown below.
Output circuit

(Machine side) DO-L/DO-R

24VDC(+)

RA

Control
R circuit
PL

Sink type (DX1x0)

DO-L/DO-R

(Machine side)
24VDC(+)

RA Control
circuit

R
PL

Source type (DX1x1)

Output conditions

Insulation method Non-insulation

Rated load voltage 24VDC
Max. output current 60mA/point
Output delay time 40μs

(Note 1) When using an inductive load such as a relay, always connect a diode (voltage resistance 100V or more,
100mA or more) in parallel to the load.
(Note 2) When using a capacitive load such as a lamp, always connect a protective resistor (R=150Ω) serially to
the load to suppress rush currents. (Make sure that the current is less than the above tolerable current
including the momentary current.)

I - 56
M70V Series Specifications Manual
5 Hardware Specifications

[Analog signal input/output (AIO)]

The analog signal output circuit can be used only for FCUA-DX120/DX121.

Output circuit

R
220 R
AO DAC

AO*
0V(RG)

Output conditions

Output voltage 0V to ±10V (±5%)

Resolution 12bit (±10V × n/4096) (Note)
Load conditions 10kΩ load resistance
Output impedance 220Ω

(Note) n=(20 to 211)

CAUTION
1. When using an inductive load such as a relay, always connect a diode in parallel to the load.
2. When using a capacitive load such as a lamp, always connect a protective resistor serially to the load to
suppress rush currents.

I - 57
MITSUBISHI CNC
I General Specifications

(5) Analog signal input/output (AIO)

(a) Outline of analog signal output circuit

The analog signal output circuit can be used only for FCUA-DX140/DX141.

Output circuit

R
220 R
AO DAC

AO*
0V(RG)

Output conditions

Output voltage 0V to ±10V (±5%)

Resolution 12bit (±10V × n/4096) (Note)
Load conditions 10kΩ load resistance
Output impedance 220Ω

(Note) n=(20 to 211)

(b) Outline of analog signal input circuit

The analog signal input circuit can be used only for FCUA-DX140/DX141.

Input circuit

150 ADC
AI

AI*
0V(RG)

Input conditions

Max. input rating ±15V

Resolution |-10 to +10V| / 4096 = 4.88mV
Precision Within ±25mV
AD input sampling time 14.2ms(AI0)/ 42.6ms(AI1 to 3)

I - 58
M70V Series Specifications Manual
5 Hardware Specifications

(6) Transfer speed changeover switch (DS)

Not used
Not used

(7) Station No. changeover switch (CS)

3 4 5
2 6
1
7
0
F
8 Selection of station No.
9
E
D A
C B

(8) Remote I/O unit I/F #1 (RIO1)

(9) Remote I/O unit I/F #2 (RIO2)

1 3

1 I/O TXRX
2 I/O TXRX*
3 0V
<Cable side connector type>
Connector: 1-178288-3
Contact: 1-175218-2 x3
Recommended manufacturer: Tyco Electronics

(10) 24VDC input (DCIN)

1 3

1 I +24V
2 0V
3 FG
<Cable side connector type>
Connector: 2-178288-3
Contact: 1-175218-5 x3
Recommended manufacturer: Tyco Electronics

(11) LED

Name Function At fault Conditions

(1) Failure of 24VDC input
POWER Internal output
Not lit (2) Fuse is disconnected
Green (UP) voltage(5VDC) check
(3) Failure of internal voltage output in I/O unit
ALM RIO communication (1) Partial disconnection between control unit and remote I/O unit
Lit
Red (DOWN) status check (2) Miswiring of connected remote I/O unit

I - 59
MITSUBISHI CNC
I General Specifications

5.6 Scan I/O Unit

The HR347/357 card is the machine operation panel input/output card. It has a digital input/output and scan input/output,
and is connected to the machine operation panel and other devices.

Item HR347 HR357

Number of points 64 points
Configuration 8 common × 8 data matrix
Rated voltage 5VDC
Input
Max. current 80mA/point
Input cycle 1.46ms cycle, 11.68ms cycle
Scan Input signal holding time 11.68ms or more (*1)
Number of points 64 points
Configuration 4 common × 8 data + 4 common × 8 data matrix
Output Rated load voltage 5VDC
Max. output current 200mA/point
Output cycle 1.46ms cycle, 5.84ms cycle
Number of points 32 points
Type 24V common/ 0V common
Input voltage at external contact ON 6V or less 18V or more, 25.2V or less
Input current at external contact ON 2mA or less 9mA or more
Input voltage at external contact OFF 20V or more, 25.2V or less 4V or less
Input
Input current at external contact OFF 9mA or more 2mA or less
Tolerable chattering time 2.2ms or less
Digital
Input signal holding time 40ms or more
Input circuit operation delay time 2.2ms ≤ T3 ≈ T4 ≤ 11ms
Machine side contact capacity 30V or more, 16mA or more
Number of points 32 points
Rated load voltage 24VDC
Output
Max. output current 60mA/point
Type Sink Source
(*1) Input signal holding time: The guide is 11.68ms or more. The input signal will not be recognized unless it is
held for the ladder processing cycle time or longer.

I - 60
M70V Series Specifications Manual
5 Hardware Specifications

Dimension and names of parts

[HR347/ HR357]

(1) (2) (3)

25 1 ISP DIO SCAN2 SCAN1

8 1
A

20
(Scan DI/DO : 64/64)
B
CF35

ALM1
5OUT
ALM3
24IN

ALM2
RIO3 DCIN

(6)

B A
(7)
(8)

110 0.3
150
4.5

CF31 CF33

20
(DO : 32) (DO : 32)
20 1 20 1
7 166 0.3 7
180 4-C2

(4) (5)

I - 61
MITSUBISHI CNC
I General Specifications

(1) Scan type input/output (CF35)

B1 B25

A1 A25

CF35
B A
25 GND 25 GND
24 O LC3B 24 O LC3A
23 O LC2B 23 O LC2A
22 O LC1B 22 O LC1A
21 O LC0B 21 O LC0A
20 I LD7B* 20 I LD7A*
19 I LD6B* 19 I LD6A*
18 I LD5B* 18 I LD5A*
17 I LD4B* 17 I LD4A*
16 I LD3B* 16 I LD3A*
15 I LD2B* 15 I LD2A*
14 I LD1B* 14 I LD1A*
13 I LD0B* 13 I LD0A*
12 GND 12
11 11
10 10
9 O KYC7* 9 O KYC6*
8 O KYC5* 8 O KYC4*
7 O KYC3* 7 O KYC2*
6 O KYC1* 6 O KYC0*
5 I KYD7* 5 I KYD6*
4 I KYD5* 4 I KYD4*
3 I KYD3* 3 I KYD2*
2 I KYD1* 2 I KYD0*
1 1 GND

(Note) The GND pin is normally unused.

Do not connect the GND pin to the frame ground.

<Cable side connector type>

Connector: 7950-6500SC
Strain relief: 3448-7950
Recommended manufacturer: 3M

LCxA/B Common signals for scan DO

LDxA/B* Data signals for scan DO
KYCx* Common signals for scan DI
KYDx* Data signals for scan DI

* This is an example when SCAN1 is set to "0", SCAN2 to "1", and DIO to "2".
Refer to "PLC Interface Manual" for details.

I - 62
M70V Series Specifications Manual
5 Hardware Specifications

(a) Scan input

An example is shown of a scan input circuit manufactured by the machine manufacturer.
CF35
KYCO*
X07 X06 X05 X04 X03 X02 X01 X00
KYC1*
X0F X0E X0D X0C X0B X0A X09 X08
KYC2*
X17 X16 X15 X14 X13 X12 X11 X10
KYC3*
X1F X1E X1D X1C X1B X1A X19 X18
KYC4*
X27 X26 X25 X24 X23 X22 X21 X20
KYC5*
X2F X2E X2D X2C X2B X2A X29 X28
KYC6*
X37 X36 X35 X34 X33 X32 X31 X30
KYC7*
X3F X3E X3D X3C X3B X3A X39 X38

KYD7*
KYD6*
KYD5*
KYD4*
KYD3*
KYD2*
KYD1*
KYD0*

<Example of a circuit manufactured by the machine tool builder>

(Note) To scan input, connect a sneak path prevention diode as shown in the following drawing. The
unit may not be able to read the correct input signals without a sneak path prevention diode
installed.

KYCO*
to KYC7*
Sneak path
prevention diode
KYDO*
to KYD7*

The common signals are changed over with scan input as shown in the following drawing. Key input data
can be received when the common signal is LOW. The common signal changeover cycle is 11.68ms, but
the input signal will not be recognized unless it is held for the ladder processing cycle time or longer. The
scan input is a 5V system.

KYCO*
KYC1*
KYC2*
KYC3*
KYC4*
KYC5*
KYC6*
KYC7*

1.46ms
11.68ms

I - 63
MITSUBISHI CNC
I General Specifications

(b) Scan output

An example is shown of a scan output circuit manufactured by the machine manufacturer.

CF35 CF35
LC3A LC3B
LC2A LC2B
LC1A LC1B
LC0A LC0B
Y00 Y20
LD0A* LD0B*
Y01 Y21
LD1A* LD1B*
Y02 Y22
LD2A* LD2B*
Y03 Y23
LD3A* LD3B*
Y04 Y24
LD4A* LD4B*
Y05 Y25
LD5A* LD5B*
Y06 Y26
LD6A* LD6B*
Y07 Y27
LD7A* LD7B*
Y08 Y28
Y09 Y29
Y0A Y2A
Y0B Y2B
Y0C Y2C
Y0D Y2D
Y0E Y2E
Y0F Y2F
Y10 Y30
Y11 Y31
Y12 Y32
Y13 Y33
Y14 Y34
Y15 Y35
Y16 Y36
Y17 Y37
Y18 Y38
Y19 Y39
Y1A Y3A
Y1B Y3B
Y1C Y3C
Y1D Y3D
Y1E Y3E
Y1F Y3F
<Example of a circuit manufactured <Example of a circuit manufactured
by the machine tool builder> by the machine tool builder>

Output circuit HR3x7

HR3 <Manufactured by the machine tool builder>
5V
CF35

LCnA/B
LDnA/B*
330

0V(RG)

The common signals are changed over with scan output as shown in the following drawing. The LED
outputs data, and lights only when the common signal is HIGH. The common signal changes to 4 signals
in succession, and light s once every 5.84ms for 1.46ms only. The scan output is a 5V system.
LC3A LC3B
LC2A LC2B
LC1A LC1B
LC0A LC0B

1.46ms 1.46ms
5.84ms 5.84ms

I - 64
M70V Series Specifications Manual
5 Hardware Specifications

(2) LED

Status
LED Function Color Remedy
Normal At fault
24IN 24VDC input check Green Lit Not lit 24VDC voltage check
5OUT Internal output voltage check Green Lit Not lit Contact the MITSUBISHI service dept.
Communication error of the station Check the station No. designation by the rotary
ALM1 Red Not lit Lit
designated by rotary switch "SCAN1" switch of the remote I/O unit.
Communication error of the station Check the station No. designation by the rotary
ALM2 Red Not lit Lit
designated by rotary switch "SCAN2" switch of the remote I/O unit.
Communication error of the station Check the station No. designation by the rotary
ALM3 Red Not lit Lit
designated by rotary switch "DIO" switch of the remote I/O unit.

(3) Rotary switch

Set the address (station No.) assignment in DI/DO: 32/32 point units. Set using SCAN1, SCAN 2 and DIO rotary
switches. The assignment address is changed with the rotary switch setting.

CF35

Scan DI:32 Scan DO:32

[Address] [Address]
0
X00 Y00

X1F Y1F SCAN1 Standard setting

SCAN1 0
Scan DI:32 Scan DO:32
SCAN2 1
[Address] [Address]
X20 Y20 0 DIO 2

X3F Y3F SCAN2

CF31 CF33
Digital DI:32 Digital DO:32
[Address] [Address]
X40 Y40 0

X5F Y5F DIO

Rotary switch Description

SCAN1 For scan input/output station No. setting 32points/32points (Normally set to "0")
SCAN2 For scan input/output station No. setting 32points/32points (Normally set to "1")
DIO For digital input/output station No. setting 32points/32points (Normally set to "2")

(Note) Set each different station Nos. for SCAN1, SCAN2 and DIO. Up to 8 stations can be used in a part
system. Set the Nos. from 0 to 7.

I - 65
MITSUBISHI CNC
I General Specifications

(4) Machine input (CF31)

Digital input

B1 B20

A1 A20

CF31
B A
20 I X40 20 I X50
19 I X41 19 I X51
18 I X42 18 I X52
17 I X43 17 I X53
16 I X44 16 I X54
15 I X45 15 I X55
14 I X46 14 I X56
13 I X47 13 I X57
12 I X48 12 I X58
11 I X49 11 I X59
10 I X4A 10 I X5A
9 I X4B 9 I X5B
8 I X4C 8 I X5C
7 I X4D 7 I X5D
6 I X4E 6 I X5E
5 I X4F 5 I X5F
4 4
3 I COM 3 I COM
2 I 24VDC 2 0V(RG)
1 I 24VDC 1 0V(RG)

<Cable side connector type>

Connector: 7940-6500SC
Strain relief: 3448-7940
Recommended manufacturer: 3M

* This is an example when SCAN1 is set to "0", SCAN2 to "1", and DIO to "2".
Refer to "PLC Interface Manual" for details.

Both 24V common and 0V common connections are allowed in the digital signal input circuit.

24V common 0V common

(Machine side) HR3x7 (Machine side) HR3x7

CF31 CF31
24VDC 24VDC
2.2k 2.2k

0V(RG)
Control Control
2.2k 2.2k
circuit circuit
0V(RG)

COM COM
0V(RG)

I - 66
M70V Series Specifications Manual
5 Hardware Specifications

Input conditions
The input signals must be used within the following condition ranges.

24V common 0V common

1 Input voltage at external contact ON 6V or less 18V or more, 25.2V or less
2 Input current at external contact ON 9mA or more
3 Input voltage at external contact OFF 20V or more, 25.2V or less 4V or less
4 Input current at external contact OFF 2mA or less
5 Input resistance Approx. 2.2kΩ
6 Tolerable chattering time (T1) 3ms
7 Input signal holding time (T2) 40ms or more (Note)
Input circuit operation delay time
8 3 to 16ms
(T3 and T4)
9 Machine side contact capacity 30V or more, 16mA or more
(Note) Input signal holding time: The guide is 40ms or more. The input signal will not be
recognized unless it is held for the ladder processing cycle time or longer.

[Connection to 24V common input]

(Machine side)
T2
Input resistor
External contact R T1 T1
External signal
+24V
Input voltage
GND
Control
Stabilized circuit
power supply Internal signal
24VDC(+)
COM
0V
T3 T4
FG

[Connection to 0V common input]

(Machine side)
Input resistor
T2
External contact R T1 T1
External signal
+24V
Input voltage
Control GND
Stabilized circuit
power supply Internal signal
24VDC(+)
COM
0V
T3 T4
FG

I - 67
MITSUBISHI CNC
I General Specifications

(5) Machine output (CF33)

Digital output

B1 B20

A1 A20

CF33
B A
20 O Y40 20 O Y50
19 O Y41 19 O Y51
18 O Y42 18 O Y52
17 O Y43 17 O Y53
16 O Y44 16 O Y54
15 O Y45 15 O Y55
14 O Y46 14 O Y56
13 O Y47 13 O Y57
12 O Y48 12 O Y58
11 O Y49 11 O Y59
10 O Y4A 10 O Y5A
9 O Y4B 9 O Y5B
8 O Y4C 8 O Y5C
7 O Y4D 7 O Y5D
6 O Y4E 6 O Y5E
5 O Y4F 5 O Y5F
4 4
3 3
2 I 24VDC 2 0V(RG)
1 I 24VDC 1 0V(RG)

<Cable side connector type>

Connector: 7940-6500SC
Strain relief: 3448-7940
Recommended manufacturer: 3M

* This is an example when SCAN1 is set to "0", SCAN2 to "1", and DIO to "2".
Refer to "PLC Interface Manual" for details.

I - 68
M70V Series Specifications Manual
5 Hardware Specifications

The HR357 output circuit is a source type (source output).

Source type

FCU6-HR3x7
CF33 24VDC

(Machine side)

RA

Control
circuit

R
PL

0V(RG)

CAUTION
1. Do not apply any voltage to the connector other than that specified in this manual. Failure to observe this
could cause bursting, damage, etc.

Output conditions

Insulation method Non-insulation

Rated load voltage 24VDC
Max. output current 60mA/point
Saturation voltage 1.6V (standard)
Output delay time 40μs

(Note 1) When using an inductive load such as a relay, always connect a diode (voltage resistance
100V or more, 100mA or more) in parallel to the load.
(Note 2) When using a capacitive load such as a lamp, always connect a protective resistor (R=150Ω)
serially to the load to suppress rush currents. (Make sure that the current is less than the
above tolerable current including the momentary current.)

I - 69
MITSUBISHI CNC
I General Specifications

(6) 24VDC input (DCIN)

1 3

1 I +24V
2 0V
3 FG
<Cable side connector type>
Connector: 2-178288-3
Contact: 1-175218-5 x3
Recommended manufacturer: Tyco Electronics

(7) Remote I/O unit I/F (RIO3A)

(8) Remote I/O unit I/F (RIO3B)

1 3

1 I/O TXRX1
2 I/O TXRX1*
3 0V
<Cable side connector type>
Connector: 1-178288-3
Contact: 1-175218-2 x3
Recommended manufacturer: Tyco Electronics

I - 70
M70V Series Specifications Manual
5 Hardware Specifications

5.7 External Power Supply Unit

Item PD25
200 to 230VAC
Input power voltage +10%-15%
50/60Hz±1Hz
Output current 3A
Dimension 130mm × 65mm × 230mm
Mass 1.5kg
Output holding time 300ms
(Note 1) PD25 will not be turned ON by the ON/OFF switch immediately after the power OFF. Wait at least 2
seconds, and then turn the power ON.
(Note 2) The power supply configuration for NC devices depends on the machine. Appropriate circuit protector
must be selected by machine builder according to the load of the machine.
(Note 3) PD25 does not comply with 100VAC.

Dimension and names of parts

[PD25]
65

AC IN (1)

(2)
230
220

ON/OFF SW
230
208

ON/OFF (3)

FAN ALARM
POWER (4)
DC OUT (5)
3
R
2-

6 6
30 130

<Mounting direction and clearance>

Mount the external power supply unit vertically and so that it is visible from the front. Provide space for heat
dissipation and ventilation.

100mm

20mm 20mm

100mm

I - 71
MITSUBISHI CNC
I General Specifications

(1) AC power input (ACIN)

1 2 3

1 I ACIN N
2 I ACIN H
3 FG
<Cable side connector type>
Connector: 2-178128-3
Contact: 1-175218-5 × 3
Recommended manufacturer: Tyco Electronics

(2) ON/OFF switch (ON/OFF SW)

Switch ON (upward): 24VDC output
Switch OFF (downward): 24VDC output OFF

(3) ON/OFF input (ON/OFF)

1 5

1 NC
2 I P-OFF
3 0V
4 0V
5 I P-ON
<Cable side connector type>
Connector: 1-178288-5
Contact: 1-175218-5 × 4
Recommended manufacturer: Tyco Electronics

(4) LED (POWER)

Green light at +24V output

(5) 24VDC output (DCOUT)

B1 B3

A1 A3

1A O ACFAIL 1B O +24V
2A 0V 2B 0V
3A NC 3B FG
<Cable side connector type>
Connector: 3-178127-6
Contact: 1-175218-5 (for AWG16) × 3, 1-175217-5 (for AWG22) × 2
Recommended manufacturer: Tyco Electronics

I - 72
M70V Series Specifications Manual
5 Hardware Specifications

5.8 Manual Pulse Generator

[UFO-01-2Z9]
5V Manual Pulse Generator (100 pulse/rev)

<Outline dimension drawing>

Index Gasket 3- M4 stud
Panel cut diameter
72 at equal pitch

Above size only

<Panel cut drawing>
at equal pitch

Produced by NIDEC NEMICON CORPORATION

I - 73
MITSUBISHI CNC
I General Specifications

[HD60C]
12V Manual Pulse Generator (25 pulse/rev)

3.6 Packing t 2.0 3-M4 stud bolt  L10

77 0.5 80 1

12V 0V A B

Installation of screws
other than M3 x 6
8.89 7.60 not possible
60 0.5 16 24 27 0.5 60 0.5

<Panel cut dimension drawing>

3 - 4. 8
(Divide equally
by three)
+2
120° 62 0

72 0. 2

I - 74
M70V Series Specifications Manual
5 Hardware Specifications

5.9 Synchronous Feed Encoder

Dimension and names of parts

[OSE-1024-3-15-68]

68
Caution plate 56

- 0. 009
- 0. 025

56
68
68
50

4 - 5. 4 hole

20

2 28

5 3
19. 5

102 33
135

0
14. 3 - 0. 11
2 15 -- 0.0. 006
017 5 -- 0.0. 012
042

16
3 +0.0 1

+0. 14 +0. 14
1. 15 0 1. 15 0
50-- 0.0. 009 Cross section BB
26 025
Valid depth of key groove is 21mm
2
Enlarged drawing of key

Connector pin assignment

A
Pin Function Pin Function
A phase 0V
L M B C
A K
B Z phase L -
N C B phase M -
K T P D D - N A phase
E Case grounding P Z phase
S R F - R B phase
J G E
G - S -
H F H +5V T -
J -

I - 75
MITSUBISHI CNC
I General Specifications

5.10 Optical Communication Repeater Unit (FCU7-EX022)

When the distance of the optical communication cable between NC control unit and drive unit is over 30m, the
communication can be performed by relaying the optical signal.
Using up to two units, relay of the total length of up to 90m can be performed.

<Product features>
(a) When the distance of the optical communication cable between NC control unit and drive unit is over 30m, the
communication can be performed by relaying the optical signal.
(b) If the distance between NC control unit and drive unit is even within 30m, the cable can be divided by the relay in
transporting the machine.
(c) Same mounting dimension as the remote I/O unit (DX unit).

CAUTION
This unit cannot be used between drive units.

Dimension and Names of parts

2-M5-0.8 screw
5 40 135

6
OPT1IN

OPT1OUT
168

OPT2IN
156
OPT2OUT

FUSE

DCOUT

FG
6

34 6

DCIN

ACFAIL

I - 76
M70V Series Specifications Manual
5 Hardware Specifications

(1) Optical communication I/F (OPT1IN, OPT1OUT, OPT2IN, OPT2OUT)

<Cable side connector type>

(PCF type)
Connector : CF-2D101-S
Recommended manufacturer: Japan Aviation Electronics
(POF type)
Connector :PF-2D101
Recommended manufacturer: Japan Aviation Electronics

(2) 24VDC input (DCIN)

1 3

1 I +24V
2 0V(RG)
3 FG
<PCB side connector type>
Connector: 2-178293-5
Recommended manufacturer: Tyco Electronics
<Cable side connector type>
Connector: 2-178288-3
Contact: 1-175218-5
Recommended manufacturer: Tyco Electronics

(3) 24VDC output (DCOUT)

B1 B3

A1 A3

A1 O ACFAIL B1 O +24V
A2 COM B2 0V(RG)
A3 NC B3 FG
<PCB side connector type>
Connector : 3-178137-5
Recommended manufacturer: Tyco Electronics
<Cable side connector type>
Connector: 2-178127-6
Contact: 1-175218-5
Recommended manufacturer: Tyco Electronics

I - 77
MITSUBISHI CNC
I General Specifications

(4) Power OFF input (CF01)

2 1

1 COM
2 I ACFAIL
<PCB side connector type>
Connector: 53103-0230
Recommended manufacturer: MOLEX
<Cable side connector type>
connector: 005057-9402
Contact: 0016020103
Recommended manufacturer: MOLEX

(5) FG terminal (FG)

FG

<Cable side faston terminal type name>

Type name : 175022-1(For AWG20-14 250 series)
Recommended manufacturer: Tyco Electronics
Terminal protection tube: 174817-2 (Yellow)

Φ2.0
6.2

5.0
0.9
9.6
0.8±0.025

Unit side tab terminal shape

(Note) The faston terminal "175022-1" of the cable side is a simple lock type. Make sure to insert until the
simple lock pin is in the Φsecond hole. Firmly press the simple lock release tab when unplugging it.

I - 78
M70V Series Specifications Manual
5 Hardware Specifications

5.11 MITSUBISHI CNC Machine Operation Panel

5.11.1 MITSUBISHI CNC Machine Operation Panel A

Outline dimension

[FCU7-KB921 (MITSUBISHI CNC machine operation panel A)]

60
260 17 (Space required for wiring)
140

<Panel cut dimension drawing>

260 (Unit outline)

250 0.3
140 (Unit outline)

0.3

(Square hole)
124
130

244

4-M3 Screw

I - 79
MITSUBISHI CNC
I General Specifications

Connector

(1) (2) (3) (4)

(5) (6)

No. Connector name Function No. Connector name Function

(1) DCIN 24VDC input (4) FG FG terminal
(2) DCOUT 24VDC output (5) EXT Relay wiring
Mahine operation panel B
(3) RIOIN Remote I/O (6) SUBP
switch

(1)(2) 24VDC input/output (DCIN/DCOUT)

1 3

1 I/O +24V
2 - 0V
3 - FG

<Cable side connector type>

Connector: 2-178288-3
Contact: 1-175218-5 x3
Recommended manufacturer: Tyco Electronics

I - 80
M70V Series Specifications Manual
5 Hardware Specifications

(3) Remote I/O connected connector (RIOIN)

1 3

1 I/O TXRX
2 I/O TXRX*
3 - 0V

<Cable side connector type>

Connector: 1-178288-3
Contact: 1-175218-2 x3
Recommended manufacturer: Tyco Electronics

(4) FG terminal (FG)

(5) Relay wiring (EXT)

A5 A1

B5 B1

B05 - A05 -
B04 O Relay EMGCOM A04 O Relay EMG
B03 O Relay 6 A03 O Relay 5
B02 O Relay 4 A02 O Relay 3
B01 O Relay 2 A03 O Relay 1

<Cable side connector type>

Connector: HIF3BA-10D-2.54C
Contact: HIF3-2428SC
Recommended manufacturer: Hirose Electric

I - 81
MITSUBISHI CNC
I General Specifications

(6) Machine operation panel B switch (SUBP)

A20 A1

B20 B1

B20 I Relay EMGCOM A20 I Relay EMG

B19 I Relay 6 A19 I Relay 5
B18 I Relay 4 A18 I Relay 3
B17 I Relay 2 A17 I Relay 1
B16 - 0V A16 I Spare SW(X75)
B15 - 0V A15 I Spare SW(X74)
B14 - 0V A14 I Spare SW(X73)
B13 - 0V A13 I Selector SW(X72)
B12 - A12 I G(X71)
B11 I F(X6D) A11 I E(X6F)
B10 I D(0V) A10 I C(X70)
B09 I B(X6E) A09 I A(X6C)
B08 - A08 I G(X6B)
B07 I F(X67) A07 I E(X66)
B06 I D(0V) A06 I C(X6A)
B05 I B(X68) A05 I A(X66)
B04 - A04 I G(X65)
B03 I F(X61) A03 I E(X63)
B02 I D(0V) A02 I C(X64)
B01 I B(X62) A01 I A(X60)

<Cable side connector type>

Connector: HIF3BA-40D-2.54C
Contact:HIF3-2428SC
Recommended manufacturer: Hirose Electric

I - 82
M70V Series Specifications Manual
5 Hardware Specifications

(a) Wiring of machine operation panel B

<Wiring of rotary switch (SUBP)>

Machine Operation Panel

I/F PCB HN232
+5V Machine operation panel B
R 1kΩ [SUBP] (FCU7-KB926)
A01 Rotary Switch
X60 A (RSW1)
R
B03 (For cutting override)
X61 F 21 position
R Real gray code
B01
X62 B
R
A03
X63 E
R
A02
X64 C
R
A04
X65 G
B02
D

+5V
R
A05 Rotary Switch
X66 R A (RSW2)
B07 (For spindle override)
X67 F 8 position
R
B05 Real gray code
X68 B
R
A07
X69 E
R
A06
X6A C
R
A08
X6B G
B06
D

+5V
R
A09
X6C A
R
B11
X6D F Rotary Switch
R
B09 (Spare)
X6E B
R
A11
X6F E
R
A10
X70 C
R
A12
X71 G
B10
D

(Note1) Use the special lead wire with a connector for wiring of rotary switch.
Lead wire with a connector: ACX011-705 (7 terminals, 0.5m) Fuji Electric
(Note2) A09 to 12 and B09 to 11 of SUBP are spares, so they do not need wiring.
(Note3) Select a rotary switch which guarantees 5V/1mA.
(Note4) Length of cables must be 0.5m or shorter.
(Note5) The numbers in the above diagram do not indicate the actual device numbers.

I - 83
MITSUBISHI CNC
I General Specifications

<Wiring of other switches (SUBP)>

Machine Operation Panel

I/F PCB HN232
+5V
[SUBP] Machine operation panel B
R 1kΩ
A13 (FCU7-KB926)
X72
B13
R
A14 Selector Switch
X73 (For memory protection)
2 notch Key shape
B14 2c Manual return type
R
A15
X74
Switch input spare
B15 (3 points)
R
A16
X75
B16

[EXT]
A01 A17

B01 B17

A02 A18
Spare for signal relay
B02 B18

A03 A19 Push down switch

(For emergency stop)
B03 B19 Push Lock -
Turn Reset
2a2b contact
A04 A20
EMG
B04 B20

A05

B05

(Note1) Wirings for selector switches must be directly soldered to terminals or use tab terminals (110
series).
(Note2) When wiring the emergency stop switch, the crimp terminal must be fastened with thread.
(Note3) For NCs whose control unit and display unit are integrated, wire the emergency stop switch
directly to the EMG connector of the control unit. (Use F120 cable)
And for NCs whose control unit and display are separated, relay it by the machine operation
panel I/F PCB HN232.
(Note4) Select a rotary switch which guarantees 5V/1mA.
(Note5) Length of cables must be 0.5m or shorter.
(Note6) The numbers in the above diagram do not indicate the actual device numbers.

I - 84
M70V Series Specifications Manual
5 Hardware Specifications

<Connection when the selector SW has 3 notches>

+5V
R [SUBP]
A13
X72
B13
R
A14
X73
B14
R Selector SW
A15 3 notch
X74
2a2b Manual return type
B15
R
A16
X75
B16

<Connection when relaying wiring to control panel>

[EXT]
A01 A17
PON
PONCOM B01 B17 P-ON
(0V) Connection with
A02 A18 P-ON/OFF Switch
POFF
POFFCOM B02 B18 P-OFF
(0V)

A03 A19
EMG
EMGCOM B03 B19
Connection using two contacts
(24VDC)
A04 A20 of emergency switch
EMG
EMGCOM B04 B20
(24VDC) Push button SW
A05
(For emergency stop)
B05 Push Lock -
Turn Reset
2a2b contact

I - 85
MITSUBISHI CNC
I General Specifications

5.11.2 MITSUBISHI CNC Machine Operation Panel B

Outline dimension

[FCU7-KB926 (MITSUBISHI CNC machine operation panel B)]

32

140 2 70 (Space required for wiring)

48
140

<Panel cut drawing>

140 (Unit outline)

130 0.3
140 (Unit outline)
0.3

(Square hole)
124
130

124
4-M3 Screw

I - 86
M70V Series Specifications Manual
5 Hardware Specifications

Connector

(1) (2)

(3) (4)

No. Switch No. Switch

(1) Memory protection switch (3) Spindle override (RSW2)
(2) Emergency stop button (4) Cutting override (RSW1)

(1) Memory protection switch

<Contact configuration>

Contact 2 Contact 1

C - Contact 1(Common)
NO O Contact 1(A contact)
NC O Contact 1(B contact)
C - Contact 2(Common)
NO O Contact 2(A contact)
NC O Contact 2(B contact)

<Switch type>
Switch: HA1K-2C2B
Recommended manufacturer: IDEC
Connection: Terminal (#110 type)

I - 87
MITSUBISHI CNC
I General Specifications

(2) Emergency stop button

13 O Contact 1(A contact)

14 O Contact 1(A contact)
21 O Contact 2(B contact)
22 O Contact 2(B contact)
33 O Contact 3(A contact)
34 O Contact 3(A contact)
41 O Contact 4(B contact)
42 O Contact 4(B contact)

<Switch type>
Switch: XA1E-BV422MR
Recommended manufacturer: IDEC
Connection: Thread terminal (M3)

(3) Spindle override (RSW2)

A G

A O Output signal 1
B O Output signal 3
C O Output signal 5
D - Common terminal
E O Output signal 4
F O Output signal 2
G - -

<Switch type>
Switch: AC09-GX0/7L3B02
Recommended manufacturer: Fuji Electric
Connection: Connector

<Switch side connector type>

Connector: IL-7P-S3EN2
Recommended manufacturer: Japan Aviation Electronics

<Cable side connector type>

Connector: IL-7S-S3L-(N)
Contact: L-C2-10000
Recommended manufacturer: Japan Aviation Electronics

I - 88
M70V Series Specifications Manual
5 Hardware Specifications

(4) Cutting override (RSW1)

A G

A O Output signal 1
B O Output signal 3
C O Output signal 5
D - Common terminal
E O Output signal 4
F O Output signal 2
G O Output signal 6

<Switch type>
Switch: AC09-GY0/20L3B02
Recommended manufacturer: Fuji Electric
Connection: Connector

<Switch side connector type>

Connector: IL-7P-S3EN2
Recommended manufacturer: Japan Aviation Electronics

<Cable side connector type>

Connector: IL-7S-S3L-(N)
Contact: IL-C2-10000
Recommended manufacturer: Japan Aviation Electronics

I - 89
MITSUBISHI CNC
I General Specifications

5.12 Exclusive CF Cards for MITSUBISHI CNC

Item FCU7-CF256M FCU7-CF002G
Capacity 256MB 2GB
Operation-guaranteed
-40 ℃ to +85 ℃
temperature
NAND Flash SLC (Note)

(Note) SLC stands for Single Level Cell, and it stores one bit data in each memory cell.
This provides longer life span and high product reliability in comparison with MLC (Multi Level Cell), which is
commonly applied to CF cards.

5.12.1 Precautions for Use of Commercially Available CF Cards

Mitsubishi is unable to guarantee the machine operation when a commercially available CF card or SD memory card
(SD-CF adapter is required) is used. In that case, performance check must be made carefully by machine tool builder.

(1) Commercially available CF cards may not be compatible with MITSUBISHI units or suitable FA environment for
temperature- or noise-wise. In case of using it, careful performance check must be required by the machine tool
builder.
(2) When inserting/removing a commercially available CF card, turn the MITSUBISHI device’s power OFF to avoid any
troubles. If a card must be inserted and removed while the power is ON, make sure to take sufficient time (approx.
ten seconds or more) between the insertion and removal.
(3) Do not pull out the card or turn OFF the power during access to the CF card. Failure to observe this could cause the
memory contents to be erased. In case of emergency, always perform backups by having your important data
duplicated, etc. as MITSUBISHI will not guarantee the broken or lost data.

I - 90
II Functional Specifications
1
Control Axes

II - 1
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

1.1 Control Axes

The NC axis, spindle, PLC axis and auxiliary axis are generically called the control axis.
The NC axis is an axis that can be manually operated, or automatically operated with the machining program. X, Y, Z, U,
V, W, A, B and C axis can be used.
The PLC axis is an axis that can be controlled from the PLC ladder.

1.1.1 Number of Basic Control Axes (NC Axes)

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○3 ○3
L system ○2 ○2

1.1.2 Max. Number of Axes (NC Axes + Spindles + PLC Axes)

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system 9 11
L system 9 11

A number of axes that are within the maximum number of axes, and that does not exceed the maximum
number given for the NC axis, spindle and PLC axis can be used.
Connection specifications of NC axis, PLC axis and spindle:
NC axes, PLC axes and spindles (except for analog spindles) are connected to the optical servo channel
(OPT).
Refer to the Connection Manual for details.

1.1.2.1 Max. Number of NC Axes (In Total for All the Part Systems)
M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system 5 8
L system 5 9

1.1.2.2 Max. Number of Spindles

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system 2 2
L system 3 4

Includes analog spindles.

1.1.2.3 Max. Number of PLC Axes

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system 6 6
L system 6 6

II - 2
M70V Series Specifications Manual
1 Control Axes

1.1.4 Max. Number of PLC Indexing Axes

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system 4 4
L system 4 4

PLC axis indexing function: This function is used to move the PLC axis to the positioning destination or an arbitrary
coordinate position.

1.1.5 Number of Simultaneous Contouring Control Axes

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system 4 4
L system 4 4

Simultaneous control of all axes is possible as a principle in the same part system.
However, for actual use, the machine tool builder specification will apply.

1.1.6 Max. Number of NC Axes in a Part System

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system 5 8
L system 5 8

Listed are the maximum number of axes which can be controlled in a part system. Follow the specifications by each
machine tool builder for actual use.

II - 3
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

1.2 Control Part System

1.2.1 Standard Number of Part Systems

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system 1 1
L system 1 1

1.2.2 Max. Number of Part Systems

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○1 ○2
L system ○1 ○2

For actual use, the machine tool builder specification will apply.

II - 4
M70V Series Specifications Manual
1 Control Axes

1.3 Control Axes and Operation Modes

1.3.1 Tape (RS-232C Input) Mode

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

In this mode, operation is performed using the machining program data from the RS-232C interface built in the CNC unit.
A paper tape reader must be provided if machining programs on paper tape are to be run.

1.3.2 Memory Mode

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

The machining programs stored in the memory of the CNC unit are run.

1.3.3 MDI Mode

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

The MDI data stored in the memory of the CNC unit is executed. Once executed, the MDI data is set to the "setting
incomplete" status, and the data will not be executed unless the "setting completed" status is established by screen
operations.

1.3.5 Front IC Card Mode

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

The machining program stored in a compact flash card can be operated by installing a compact flash card on the front of
control unit.
When a machining program stored in a compact flash card is searched while "Memory Card" is selected for device
during operation search, the machining program in a compact flash card can be operated as a main program. (The
operation mode is "memory mode".)
Also, when "M98 Pp ,Dd;" ("d" for designating a unit) is commanded in the main program, the machining program in a
compact flash card can be called and operated as a sub program.
Macros such as WHILE, IF and GOTO can be used. Also, calling the sub program and macro program stored in memory
or a compact flash card is possible.

II - 5
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

II - 6
2
Input Command

II - 7
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

2.1 Data Increment

2.1.1 Least Command Increment

The data increment handled in the controller includes the input setting increment and command increment. Each type is
set with parameters.
(1) The input setting increment indicates the increment handled in the internal processing of the controller. The
counter and tool compensation data, etc., input from the screen is handled with this increment. This increment
is applied per part system (1st to 4th part system, PLC axis).

Input setting Metric unit system Inch unit system

increment Linear axis Rotary axis Linear axis Rotary axis
(parameter) (Unit = mm) (Unit = °) (Unit = inch) (Unit = °)
1μm (B) 0.001 0.001 0.0001 0.001
0.1μm (C) 0.0001 0.0001 0.00001 0.0001
(Note) The inch and metric systems cannot be used together.

(2) The command increment indicates the command increment of the movement command in the machining
program. This can be set per axis.

Command Metric unit system Inch unit system

increment Linear axis Rotary axis Linear axis Rotary axis
(parameter) (Unit = mm) (Unit = °) (Unit = inch) (Unit = °)
0 Accordance with #1003 iunit.
1 0.0001 0.0001 0.00001 0.0001
10 0.001 0.001 0.0001 0.001
100 0.01 0.01 0.001 0.01
1000 0.1 0.1 0.01 0.1
10000 1.0 1.0 0.1 1.0
(Note) The inch and metric systems cannot be used together.

2.1.1.1 Least Command Increment 1 μm (Input Setting Increment 1μm)

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

It is possible to command 0.001mm for the linear axis and 0.001° for the rotation axis.

2.1.1.2 Least Command Increment 0.1 μm (Input Setting Increment 0.1μm)

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

It is possible to command 0.0001mm for the linear axis and 0.0001° for the rotation axis.

II - 8
M70V Series Specifications Manual
2 Input Command

2.1.2 Least Control Increment

The least control increment determines the CNC's internal operation accuracy.

2.1.2.1 Least Control Increment 0.01μm (10nm)

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

2.1.2.2 Least Control Increment 0.001μm (1nm)

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

II - 9
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

2.2 Unit System

2.2.1 Inch/Metric Changeover

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

The unit systems of the data handled in the controller include the metric unit system and inch unit system. The unit (inch/
mm) for the setting and display, as well as for the handle/incremental feed can be switched with either the parameters or
machining program (G20/G21 command).
An option is required when the unit is switched with the machining program command.

Unit system Length data Meaning

Metric unit system 1.0 1.0mm
Inch unit system 1.0 1.0inch
(Note) For the angle data, 1.0 means 1 degree (°) regardless of the unit system.

Data
Screen data (Compensation amount, user
Parameter Machine parameter /
Machining program parameter, counter, etc.) /
PLC interface machine position, etc.
Feedrate of handle, etc.
G20 Inch unit system
0 Metric unit system
G21 Metric unit system
A Not affected
G20 Inch unit system
1 Inch unit system
G21 Metric unit system
0 Metric unit system
B Not affected Not affected
1 Inch unit system
(Note 1) The parameter changeover is valid after the power is turned ON again.
(Note 2) The unit system for the PLC axis can be switched with a parameter different from the one used with the NC
axis.
The PLC axis unit system cannot be switched with the machining program (G20/G21 command).
(Note 3) When the power is turned ON or resetting is performed, the command increment depends on the parameter
setting.

2.2.2 Input Command Increment Tenfold

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ― ―

The program's command increment can be multiplied by an arbitrary scale with the parameter designation.
This function is valid when a decimal point is not used for the command increment.

For example, this function allows a CNC unit, for which the command increment is set to 1μm, to run a machining
program, which has been created with a 10μm input command increment, as same as before.
The scale is set with the parameters.

(Note 1) This function cannot be used for the dwell function G04_X_(P_);.
(Note 2) This function cannot be used for the compensation amount of the tool offset input.
(Note 3) This function can be used when decimal point type I is valid, but cannot be used when decimal point type II is
valid.
(Note 4) This function cannot be used for a tool shape setting command (in G10L100 format).

II - 10
M70V Series Specifications Manual
2 Input Command

2.3 Program Format

2.3.1 Program Format

This is G code (program) format.

The G-code of lathe system is selected by parameter.
This manual explains the G function with G-code list 3 as standard.

2.3.1.1 Format 1 for Lathe (G Code List 2, 3)

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ― ―
L system ○ ○

2.3.1.2 Format 2 for Lathe (G Code List 4, 5)

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ― ―
L system ○ ○

2.3.1.3 Special Format for Lathe (G Code List 6, 7)

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ― ―
L system ○ ○

2.3.1.4 Format 1 for Machining Center

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ― ―

2.3.1.5 Format 2 for Machining Center (M2 Format)

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ― ―

2.3.1.6 MITSUBISHI CNC Special Format

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ― ―
L system ○ ○

The formats of the turning fixed cycles (G77 to G79), multiple repetitive turning fixed cycles (G71 to G76) and drilling
fixed cycles (G80 to G89) can be switched to the MITSUBISHI CNC special formats.
(Note) There is a specification (zigzag thread cutting ) for specific machine tool builder.

II - 11
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

2.4 Command Value

2.4.1 Decimal Point Input I, II

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

There are two types of the decimal point input commands and they can be selected by parameter.

(1) Decimal point input type I

When axis coordinates and other data are issued in machining program commands, the assignment of the program
data can be simplified by using a decimal point. The minimum digit of a command not using a decimal point is the
same as the least command increment.
The decimal point can be applied not only to axis coordinate position but also to speed commands and dwell
commands.
The decimal point position serves as the millimeter unit in the metric mode, as the inch unit in the inch mode and as
the second unit in a time designation of dwell command.
(2) Decimal point input type II
As opposed to type I, the minimum digit of a command without a decimal point serves as the millimeter unit in the
metric mode, as the inch unit in the inch mode and as the second unit in the time designation.
The "." (point) must be added when commands below the decimal point are required.

Unit interpretation (for metric system)

Type I Type II
G00 X100. Y-200.5 X100mm, Y-200.5mm <-
G1 X100 F20. X100μm, F20mm/min X100mm, F20mm/min
G1 Y200 F100 (*1) Y200μm, F100mm/min Y200mm, F100mm/min
G4 X1.5 Dwell 1.5s <-
G4 X2 Dwell 2ms Dwell 2s
(*1) The F unit is mm/min for either type (inch system : inch/min).

II - 12
M70V Series Specifications Manual
2 Input Command

2.4.2 Absolute/Incremental Command

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

(1) M system
When axis coordinate data is issued in a machining program command, either the incremental command method
(G91) that commands a relative distance from the current position or the absolute command method (G90) that
moves to a designated position in a predetermined coordinate system can be selected.
The absolute and incremental commands can be both used in one block, and are switched with G90 or G91.
However, the arc radius designation (R) and arc center designation (I, J, K) always use incremental designations.
G90 ... Absolute command (absolute command)
G91 ... Incremental command (incremental command)
These G codes can be commanded multiple times in one block.

Example

G90 X100. G91 Y200. G90 Z300. ;

Absolute position Incremental position Absolute position
(Note 1) As with the memory command, if there is no G90/G91 designation in the MDI command, the
previously executed modal will be followed.

(Incremental command) (Absolute command)

G91 X100. Y100. G90 X100. Y100.

(E)

Y100. Y100. (E)

Y100.

(C) X100. (C)

(a)
(0,0) X100. (0,0) X100.

(a) Program coordinate

(C) Current position
(E) End point

II - 13
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

(2) L system
When axis coordinate data is issued in a machining program command, either the incremental command method
that commands a relative distance from the current position or the absolute command method that moves to a
designated position in a predetermined coordinate system can be selected.
When issuing an incremental command, register the axis address to be commanded as the incremental axis name
in the parameter. However, the arc radius designation (R) and arc center designation (I, J, K) always use
incremental designations.
Absolute command (absolute command) ... X, Z
Incremental command (incremental command) ... U, W

Example

G00 X100. W200. ;

Absolute position Incremental position

(Incremental command) (Absolute command)

G00 U- u1 W- w1 G00 Xx1 Zz1

(C)
X X (C)

(E)
u1
2
x1

(E) w1

z1
Z
(0,0)

(a) Program coordinate

(C) Current position
(E) End point

The above drawing shows the case for the diameter command.

(Note) Absolute command and incremental command can be switched by the parameter. In addition to the command
method using the axis addresses as indicated above, a command method using G code (G90/G91) may be
selected.

II - 14
M70V Series Specifications Manual
2 Input Command

2.4.3 Diameter/Radius Designation

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ― ―
L system ○ ○

For axis command value, the radius designation or diameter designation can be changed over with parameters.
When the diameter designation is selected, the scale of the length of the selected axis is doubled.
(Only the half (1/2) of the commanded amount moves.)
This function is used when programming the workpiece dimensions on a lathe as diameters.
Changing over from the diameter designation to the radius designation or vice versa can be set separately for each axis.

When the tool is to be moved from point P1 to point P2

P1

r2

SP
P2 r1
Z

SP Spindle

Radius and diameter commands

X command U command Remarks
Radius Diameter Radius Diameter Even when a diameter command has been selected, only
the U command can be made a radius command by
X = r1 X = 2r1 U = r2 U = 2r2
parameter.

II - 15
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

II - 16
3
Positioning/Interpolation

II - 17
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

3.1 Positioning

3.1.1 Positioning
M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

This function carries out high-speed positioning following the movement command given in a program.

G00 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 ;(Also possible for additional axes A, B, C, U, V, W simultaneously)
Xx1, Yy1, Zz1 :Position data
The above command positions the tool with rapid traverse rate. The tool path takes the shortest distance to the end point
in the form of a straight line.
For details on the rapid traverse feed rate of the NC, refer to the section entitled "Rapid Traverse Rate".
Since the actual rapid traverse feed rate depends on the machine, refer to the specifications of the machine concerned.

(1) The rapid traverse feed rate can be set for each axis with parameters.
(2) The number of axes which can be commanded simultaneously depends on the specifications (number of
simultaneously controlled axes). The axes can be used in any combination within this range.
(3) The feed rate is controlled within the range that it does not exceed the rapid traverse rate of each axis and so that
the shortest time is taken. (Linear type)
Parameter setting enables movement at the rapid traverse rates of the respective axes independently for each axis.
In this case, the tool path does not take the form of a straight line to the end point. (Non-Linear type)
(Example) Linear type (Moves linearly to the end (Example) Non-linear type
point.) (Each axis moves at each parameter speed.)
G00 G91 X100. Y100. ; G00 G91 X100. Y100. ;

Y (E) Y
(E)

100. 100.

(C) 100.
(C) 100.

X X

(C) Current position

(E) End point

(4) The tool is always accelerated at the start of the program command block and decelerated at the end of the block.

II - 18
M70V Series Specifications Manual
3 Positioning/Interpolation

3.1.2 Unidirectional Positioning

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ― ―

The G60 command always moves the tool to the final position in a direction determined with parameters.
The tool can be positioned without backlash.

G60 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 ;(Also possible for additional axes A, B, C, U, V, W simultaneously)
Xx1,Yy1,Zz1 :Position data
With the above command, the tool is first moved to a position distanced from the end point by an amount equivalent to
the creep distance (parameter setting) with rapid traverse and then moved to its final position.
For details on the rapid traverse feed rate of the NC, refer to the section entitled "Rapid Traverse Rate".
Since the actual rapid traverse feed rate depends on the machine, refer to the specifications of the machine concerned.
Positioning to the final point is shown below (when this positioning is in the "+" direction.)

+ -

(Example)
G60 G91 X100. Y100. ;

(a)

(E)

Y100.
The rapid traverse rate for each axis is the value set with parameters as the G00
speed.
The vector speed to the interim point is the value produced by combining the
(C)
X100. distance and respective speeds.
The creep distance between the interim and end points can be set
independently for each axis by parameters.

(a) Interim point

(C) Current position
(E) End point

(Note 1) The processing of the above pattern will be followed even for the machine lock and Z-axis command cancel.
(Note 2) On the creep distance, the tool is moved with rapid traverse.
(Note 3) G60 is valid even for positioning in drilling in the fixed cycle.
(Note 4) When the mirror image function is on, the tool will be moved in the reverse direction by mirror image as far as
the interim position, but operation over the creep distance with the final advance will not be affected by the
mirror image.

II - 19
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

3.2 Linear/Circular Interpolation

3.2.1 Linear Interpolation

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

Linear interpolation is a function that moves a tool linearly by the movement command value supplied in the program at
the cutting feed rate designated by the F code.

G01 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Ff1 ; (Also possible for additional axes A, B, C, U, V, W simultaneously)
Xx1,Yy1,z1 :Position data
Ff1 :Feed rate data
Linear interpolation is executed by the above command at the f1 feed rate. The tool path takes the shortest distance to
the end point in the form of a straight line.
For details on the f1 command values for NC, refer to the section entitled "Cutting Feed Rate".
Since the actual cutting feed rate depends on the machine, refer to the specifications of the machine concerned.

(Example)
G01 G91 X100. Y100. F120 ;

Y (E)

(a)
100. The cutting feed rate command moves the
120mm/min
(85 mm/min) tool in the vector direction.
The component speeds of each axis are
determined by the proportion of respective
command values.
(C) 100. ( 85mm/min)

(a) Cutting feed rate

(C) Current position
(E) End point

(1) The number of axes which can be commanded simultaneously depends on the specifications (number of
simultaneously controlled axes). The axes can be used in any combination within this range.
(2) The feed rate is controlled so that it does not exceed the cutting feed rate clamp of each axis.
(3) When a rotary axis has been commanded in the same block, it is treated as a linear axis in degree(°) units (1° =
1mm), and linear interpolation is performed.

II - 20
M70V Series Specifications Manual
3 Positioning/Interpolation

3.2.2 Circular Interpolation (Center/Radius Designation)

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

(1) Circular interpolation with I, J, K commands

This function moves a tool along a circular arc on the plane selected by the plane selection G code with movement
command supplied in the program.

G02(G03) Xx1 Yy1 Ii1 Jj1 Ff1 ; (Also possible for additional axes A, B, C, U, V, W)
G02,G03 : Arc rotation direction
Xx1,Yy1 : End point coordinate
Ii1,Jj1 : Arc center
Ff1 : Feed rate
The above commands move the tool along the circular arc at the f1 feed rate. The tool moves along a circular path,
whose center is the position from the start point designated by distance "i1" in the X-axis direction and distance "j1"
in the Y-axis direction, toward the end point.
The direction of the arc rotation is specified by G02 or
G03.
G02: Clockwise (CW)
G03: Counterclockwise (CCW)
The plane is selected by G17, G18 or G19.
Y G17 X G18
G17: XY plane
G18: ZX plane G02
G02
G19: YZ plane
(Example) See below for examples of circular
commands. G03 G03
X Z
Y
Z
(S) G19

F G02

G03
I,J (E)
Y
(a)

(a) Center
(E) End point
(S) Start point

(a) The axes that can be commanded simultaneously are the two axes for the selected plane.
(b) The feed rate is controlled so that the tool always moves at a speed along the circumference of the circle.
(c) Circular interpolation can be commanded within a range extending from 0° to 360° .
(d) The max. value of the radius can be set up to six digits above the decimal point.

(Note 1) The arc plane is always based on the G17, G18 or G19 command. If a command is issued with two
addresses which do not match the plane, an alarm will occur.
(Note 2) The axes configuring a plane can be designated by parameters. Refer to the section entitled "Plane
Selection".

II - 21
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

(2) R-specified circular interpolation

Besides the designation of the arc center coordinates using the above-mentioned I, J and K commands, arc
commands can also be issued by designating the arc radius directly.

G02(G03) Xx1 Yy1 Rr1 Ff1 ; (Also possible for additional axes A, B, C, U, V, W )
G02,G03 : Arc rotation direction
Xx1,Yy1 : End point coordinate
Rr1 : Arc radius
Ff1 : Feed rate
G02 or G03 is used to designate the direction of the arc rotation.
The arc plane is designated by G17, G18 or G19.

The arc center is on the bisector which orthogonally intersects the segment connecting the start and end points, and
the point of intersection with the circle, whose radius has been designated with the start point serving as the center,
is the center coordinate of the arc command.
When the sign of the value of R in the command program is positive, the command will be for an arc of 180 or less;
when it is negative, it will be for an arc exceeding 180 .

(Example)
G02 G91 X100. Y100. R100. F120 ;

(E)
(a) (X,Y)
120mm/min

R100.

(C)

(a) Feed rate

(C) Current position (arc start point)
(E) Arc end point

(a) The axes that can be commanded simultaneously are the two axes for the selected plane.
(b) The feed rate is controlled so that the tool always moves at a speed along the circumference of the circle.

(Note 1) The arc plane is always based on the G17, G18 or G19 command. If a command is issued with two
addresses which do not match the plane, an alarm will occur.

II - 22
M70V Series Specifications Manual
3 Positioning/Interpolation

3.2.3 Helical Interpolation

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

With this function, any two of three axes intersecting orthogonally are made to perform circular interpolation while the
third axis performs linear interpolation in synchronization with the arc rotation. This simultaneous 3-axis control can be
exercised to machine large-diameter screws or 3-dimensional cams.

G17 G02(G03) Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Ii1 Jj1 Pp1 Ff1 ; (Specify arc center)
G17 G02(G03) Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Rr1 Ff1 ; (Specify arc radius "R")
G17 : Arc plane
G02,G03 : Arc rotation direction
Xx1,Yy1 : End point coordinate values for arc
Zz1 : End point coordinate value of linear axis
Ii1,Jj1 : Arc center coordinate values
Pp1 : Number of pitches
Ff1 : Feed rate
Rr1 : Arc radius
(1) The arc plane is designated by G17, G18 or G19.
(2) G02 or G03 is used to designate the direction of the arc rotation.
(3) Absolute or incremental values can be assigned for the arc end point coordinates and the end point
coordinates of the linear axis, but incremental values must be assigned for the arc center coordinates.
(4) The linear interpolation axis is the other axis which is not included in the plane selection.
(5) Command the speed in the component direction that represents all the axes combined for the feed rate.
Pitch l1 is obtained by the formula below.
l1 = z1/((2π*p1+θ)/2π)
θ = θe-θs = arctan(ye/xe)-arctan(ys/xs)
Where xs, ys are the start point coordinates (0 ≦ θ<2π)
xe, ye are the end point coordinates
The combination of the axes which can be commanded simultaneously depends on the specifications. The
axes can be used in any combination under the specifications.
The feed rate is controlled so that the tool always moves at a speed along the circumference of the circle.

II - 23
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

(Example)
G91 G17 G02 X0. Y200. Z100. I-100. J100. F120 ;
Z

(a)
Y

(E)
(E) X

W J100
I-100
(S) Y
(S)

(b)
X
(a) Command program path
(b) XY plane projection path in command program
(S) Start point
(E) End point

(Note 1) Helical shapes are machined by assigning linear commands for one axis which is not a circular
interpolation axis using an orthogonal coordinate system. It is also possible to assign these commands to
two or more axes which are not circular interpolation axes.

When a simultaneous 4-axis command is used with the V axis as the axis parallel to the Y axis, helical
interpolation will be carried out for a cylinder which is inclined as shown in the figure on the right. In other
words, linear interpolation of the Z and V axes is carried out in synchronization with the circular interpolation on
the XY plane.

Z
●
V (E)

● Y
(S)
X

(E) Start point

(S) End point

II - 24
M70V Series Specifications Manual
3 Positioning/Interpolation

3.2.4 Spiral/Conical Interpolation

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ― ○
L system ― ―

This function interpolates arcs where the start point and end point are not on the circumference of the same circle into
spiral shapes.
There are two types of command formats which can be changed with the parameters.
(1) For command format type 1
(a) Spiral interpolation

G17 G02.1(G03.1) Xx1 Yy1 Ii1 Jj1 Pp1 Ff1 ;

G17 : Arc plane
G02.1,G03.1 : Arc rotation direction
Xx1,Yy1 : End point coordinate
Ii1,Jj1 : Arc center
Pp1 : Number of pitches
Ff1 : Feed rate
The circular interpolation operation is performed at the feed rate f1 by the commands listed above. The tool
draws a spiral arc path whose center is at the position from the start point which is designated by distance i1
for the X-axis direction and distance j1 for the Y-axis direction as the tool moves toward the end point.
The arc plane is designated by G17, G18 or G19.
G17……………XY plane
G18……………ZX plane
G19……………YZ plane
The direction of the arc rotation is designated by G02.1 or G03.1.
G02.1……………Clockwise (CW)
G03.1……………Counterclockwise (CCW)
The number of pitches (number of rotations) is designated by p1.
By assigning zero to p1, the pitch designation can be omitted in this case, the interpolation is obtained as a
spiral rotation of less than one full turn. Assigning 1 to p1 yields a spiral rotation of more than one full turn but
less than two full turns.

II - 25
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

(Example)
Y

G91 G17 G01 X60. F500 ;

Y140. ;
(E)
G2.1 X60. Y0 I100. P1 F300 ; 140. (a)
G01 X-120 ; (S)
G90
G17 G01 X60. F500;
Y140.;
X60.
G2.1 X120. Y140. I100. P1 F300 ;
I 100.

W 60. 160. X
(a) Center
(E) End point
(S) Start point
- The combination of the axes which can be commanded simultaneously depends on the specifications.
Any combination can be used within the specified range.
- The feed rate is a constant tangential rate.

(Note 1) This function cannot be used in combination with a tool radius compensation command (G41, G42).
(Note 2) The arc plane is always based on the G17, G18 or G19 command. Arc control is performed on a plane by
the G17, G18 or G19 command even when two addresses which are not on the selected plane are
designated.

II - 26
M70V Series Specifications Manual
3 Positioning/Interpolation

(b) Conical interpolation

Y
When an axis other than the ones for (a)
the spiral interpolation plane has been
designated at the same time, the other
X
axis will also be interpolated in W
synchronization with the spiral
interpolation.
G17 G91 G02.1 X100. Z150. I150．
P3 F500; Z Z (b)
In the example given above, truncated
cone interpolation is performed.
X X
W

(a) XY plane
(b) XZ plane

(2) For command format type 2

(a) Spiral interpolation

G17 G02(G03) Xx1 Yy1 Ii1 Jj1 Qq1/Ll1 Ff1 ;

G17 : Arc plane
G02,G03 : Arc rotation direction
Xx1,Yy1 : End point coordinate
Ii1,Jj1 : Arc center
Qq1 : Incremental/decremental amount of radius per spiral rotation
Ll1 : Number of pitches
Ff1 : Feed rate
- Relation between Q and L
L = ｜ (arc end point radius - arc start point radius) ｜ / ｜ Q ｜
- Q takes precedence if both Q and L have been designated at the same time.

(b) Conical interpolation

G17 G02(G03) Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Ii1 Jj1 Kk1 /Qq /Ll1 Ff1 ;
G17 : Arc plane
G02,G03 : Arc rotation direction
Zz1 : End point coordinate in height direction
Ii1,Jj1 : Arc center
Kk1 : Amount by which height is incremented or decremented per spiral rotation
Qq1 : Amount by which radius is incremented or decremented per spiral rotation
Ll1 : Number of pitches
Ff1 : Feed rate
- Relation between L and (I, J) K
L = ｜ Height ｜ / ｜ Amount by which height is incremented or decremented (I,J,K) ｜
- Q takes precedence over K which in turn takes precedence over L if Q, K and L have been designated at
the same time.
- The tolerable error range (absolute position) for when the commanded end point position is deviated from
the end point position obtained from the number of pitches and increment/decrement amount is set with
the parameters.

II - 27
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

3.2.5 Cylindrical Interpolation

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

This function transfers the shape that is on the cylinder's side surface (shape yielded by the cylindrical coordinate
system) onto a plane, and when the transferred shape is designated in the program in the form of plane coordinates, the
shape is converted into a movement along the linear and rotary axes of the original cylinder coordinates, and the
contours are controlled by means of the CNC unit during machining.
Since the programming can be performed for the shapes produced by transferring the side surfaces of the cylinders, this
function is useful when it comes to machining cylindrical cams and other such parts.
This function can be used only with the G code list 6 or 7.

(a)

C
X
C
(b)

Z
(c)

(a) Program coordinate plane

(b) Cylindrical interpolation machining
(c) Cylinder radius value

(1) Cylindrical interpolation mode start

(G07.1 name of rotary axis cylinder radius value;)
Cylindrical interpolation is performed between the rotary axis designated in the G07.1 block and any other
linear axis.
(a) Linear interpolation or circular interpolation can be designated in the cylindrical interpolation mode.
However, assign the G19 command (plane selection command) immediately before the G07.1 block.
(b) The coordinates can be designated with either absolute command or incremental command.
(c) Tool radius compensation can be applied to the program commands. Cylindrical interpolation is
performed for the path after tool radius compensation.
(d) For the feed rate, designate a tangential rate over the cylinder transfer surface using the F command.
The F rate is in either mm/min or inch/mm units.

(2) Cylindrical interpolation mode cancel

(G07.1 name of rotary axis 0;)
If "C" is the name of the rotary axis, the cylindrical interpolation cancel mode is established with the command
below.
G07.1 C0;

II - 28
M70V Series Specifications Manual
3 Positioning/Interpolation

3.2.6 Polar Coordinate Interpolation

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ― ―
L system ○ ○

This function converts the commands programmed by the orthogonal coordinate axes into linear axis movements (tool
movements) and rotary axis movements (workpiece rotation) to control the contours. It is useful for cutting linear cutouts
on the outside diameter of the workpiece, grinding cam shafts, etc.
This function can be used only with the G code list 6 or 7.

(b)
(a)
(a) Hypothetical axis
(b) Polar coordinate interpolation plane (G17 plane)

(1) Polar coordinate interpolation mode

(G12.1)
The polar coordinate interpolation mode is established by designating the G12.1 command.
Polar coordinate interpolation plane consists of a linear axis and a hypothetical axis, which are at right angles
to each other.
Polar coordinate interpolation is performed on this plane.
(a) Linear interpolation and circular interpolation can be designated in the polar coordinate interpolation
mode.
(b) Either absolute command or incremental command can be issued.
(c) Tool radius compensation can be applied to the program commands. Polar coordinate interpolation is
performed for the path after tool radius compensation.
(d) For the feed rate, designate a tangential rate on the polar coordinate interpolation plane (orthogonal
coordinate system) using the F command.
The F rate is in either mm/min or inch/mm units.

(2) Polar coordinate interpolation cancel mode

(G13.1)
The polar coordinate interpolation cancel mode is established by designating the G13.1 command.

II - 29
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

3.2.7 Milling Interpolation

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ― ―
L system ― ○

When a lathe with linear axes (X, Z axes) and rotary axis (C axis) serving as the control axes is to perform milling at a
workpiece end face or in the longitudinal direction of the workpiece, this function uses the hypothetical axis Y which is at
right angles to both the X and Z axes to enables the milling shape to be programmed as the X, Y and Z orthogonal
coordinate system commands.
With this function, the workpiece can be treated as a cylinder with radius X, and commands can be designated on the
plane formed by transferring the cylinder side surface instead.
With milling interpolation, the commands programmed by the orthogonal coordinate system are converted into linear axis
and rotary axis movements (workpiece rotation) to control the contours.

Z
C

Y (a)

(a) (Hypothetical axis)

G12.1 ; Milling mode ON

G13.1 ; Milling mode OFF (Turning mode)

G16(Y-Z cylindrical plane) G17(X-Y plane) G19(Y-Z plane)

X X X

Z
Z Z

Y Y Y

Plane on which radius X cylinder is X-Y plane in XYZ orthogonal coordinate

Y-Z plane in XYZ orthogonal coordinate system.
developed. system.
Select this to machine a plane of a cylinder cut in
Select this to machine the cylindrical plane Select this to machine the workpiece end
the longitudinal direction.
of a workpiece. face.

II - 30
M70V Series Specifications Manual
3 Positioning/Interpolation

3.3 Curve Interpolation

3.3.3 Spline Interpolation (1st Part System Only)

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ― ○
L system ― ―

This function automatically generates spline curves that smoothly pass through rows of dots designated by a fine-
segment machining program, and performs interpolation for the paths along the curves. This enables high-speed and
high-accuracy machining to be achieved.

II - 31
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

II - 32
4
Feed

II - 33
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

4.1 Feed Rate

4.1.1 Rapid Traverse Rate (m/min)

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system 1000 1000
L system 1000 1000

[M system]
The rapid traverse rate can be set independently for each axis by the parameter.
The rapid traverse rate is effective for G00, G27, G28, G29, G30 and G60 commands.
Override can be applied to the rapid traverse rate using the external signal supplied.
If the high-accuracy control mode's rapid traverse rate is set, the axis will move at that feed rate during high-
accuracy control, high-speed high-accuracy control, high-accuracy spline control or SSS control.
- If the value set for the high-accuracy control mode rapid traverse rate is 0, the axis will move at the rapid
traverse rate.
- The high-accuracy control mode rapid traverse rate can be set independently for each axis.
- The high-accuracy control mode rapid traverse rate is effective for the G00, G27, G28, G29, G30 and G60
commands.
- Override can be applied on the high-accuracy control mode rapid traverse rate using the external signal
supplied.

Rapid traverse rate and high-accuracy control mode rapid traverse rate setting

Least command increment B C

Metric input (mm/min, °/min) 1 to 1000000 1 to 1000000
Inch input (inch/min) 1 to 100000 1 to 100000
Least command increment B : 0.001 mm (0.0001inch)
Least command increment C : 0.0001mm (0.00001inch)

[L system]
The rapid traverse rate can be set independently for each axis by the parameter.
The rapid traverse rate is effective for G00, G27, G28, G29, G30 and G53 commands.
Override can be applied to the rapid traverse rate using the external signal supplied.

Rapid traverse rate setting range

Least command increment B C

Metric input (mm/min, °/min) 1 to 1000000 1 to 1000000
Inch input (inch/min) 1 to 100000 1 to 100000
Least command increment B : 0.001mm (0.0001inch)
Least command increment C : 0.0001mm (0.00001inch)

II - 34
M70V Series Specifications Manual
4 Feed

4.1.2 Cutting Feed Rate (m/min)

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system 1000 1000
L system 1000 1000

[M system]
This function specifies the feed rate of the cutting commands, and a feed amount per spindle rotation or feed
amount per minute is commanded.
Once commanded, it is stored in the memory as a modal value. The feed rate modal value is cleared to zero only
when the power is turned ON.
The maximum cutting feed rate is clamped by the cutting feed rate clamp parameter (whose setting range is the
same as that for the cutting feed rate).
If the high-accuracy control mode's cutting clamp speed is set, the cutting feed rate will be clamped at that speed
during high-accuracy control, high-speed high-accuracy control, high-accuracy spline control or SSS control.
- If the value set for high-accuracy control mode cutting clamp speed is 0, the axis will be clamped at the cutting
feed clamp speed.
- High-accuracy control mode cutting clamp speed is set with the parameters.

Cutting feed rate setting range

Least command increment B C

Metric input (mm/min, °/
0.001 to 1000000 0.0001 to 1000000
min)
Inch input (inch/min) 0.0001 to 100000 0.00001 to 100000
Least command increment B : 0.001mm (0.0001inch)
Least command increment C : 0.0001mm (0.00001inch)
Least command increment D : 0.00001mm (0.000001inch)
Least command increment E : 0.000001mm (0.0000001inch)

- G code command for which the cutting feed rate is effective

For others such as G01,G02,G03,G02.1,G03.1,G33, etc., refer to the interpolation specifications.

[L system]
This function specifies the feed rate of the cutting commands, and a feed amount per spindle rotation or feed
amount per minute is commanded.
Once commanded, it is stored in the memory as a modal value. The feed rate modal is cleared to zero only when
the power is turned ON.
The maximum cutting feed rate is clamped by the cutting feed rate clamp parameter (whose setting range is the
same as that for the cutting feed rate).

Cutting feed rate setting range

Least command increment B C

Metric input (mm/min, °/
0.001 to 1000000 0.0001 to 1000000
min)
Inch input (inch/min) 0.0001 to 100000 0.00001 to 100000
Least command increment B : 0.001mm (0.0001inch)
Least command increment C : 0.0001mm (0.00001inch)
Least command increment D : 0.00001mm (0.000001inch)
Least command increment E : 0.000001mm (0.0000001inch)

- G code command for which the cutting feed rate is effective

For others such as G01,G02,G03,G02.1,G03.1,G33, etc., refer to the interpolation specifications.

II - 35
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

4.1.3 Manual Feed Rate (m/min)

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system 1000 1000
L system 1000 1000

The manual feed rates are designated as the feed rate in the jog mode or incremental feed mode for manual operation
and the feed rate during dry run ON for automatic operation. The manual feed rates are set with external signals.
The manual feed rate signals from the PLC include two methods, the code method and value setting method.
Which method to be applied is determined with a signal common to the entire system. The signals used by these
methods are common to all axes.

- Setting range under the code method

Metric input 0.00 to 14000.00 mm/min (31 steps)
Inch input 0.000 to 551.000 inch/min (31 steps)
- Setting range under the value setting method
Metric input 0 to 1000000.00 mm/min in 0.01 mm/min increments
Inch input 0 to 39370 inch/min in 0.001 inch/min increments
Multiplication factor PCF1 and PCF2 are available with the value setting method.

4.1.4 Rotary Axis Command Speed Tenfold

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

This function multiplies the rotary axis' command speed by 10 during initial inching.
The commanded speeds are as follow.

For the inch system, the rotary axis command speed is multiplied by 10.
For example, if the B axis is the rotary axis in the inch system and the following type
Automatic
Cutting feed rate of machining program is executed, the rotary axis command speed will be multiplied
operation
by 10, and the rotary axis will move at 1000 deg./min.
N1 G1 B100. F100.;
The rapid traverse rate is not multiplied by 10, and is the speed set in the
Rapid traverse rate
parameters.
The command speeds related to manual operation, such as JOG feed, are not
Manual operation
multiplied by 10. The display speed unit also remains as "deg./min".

II - 36
M70V Series Specifications Manual
4 Feed

4.2 Feed Rate Input Methods

4.2.1 Feed per Minute (Asynchronous Feed)

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

[M system]
By issuing the G94 command, the commands from that block are issued directly by the numerical value following F
as the feed rate per minute (mm/min, inch/min).
Metric input (mm)
Input
B(0.001mm) C(0.0001mm)
Setting unit
Command
F(mm/min) F(mm/min)
Address
Minimum
1(=1.00) 1(=1.000)
command
(1.=1.00) (1.=1.000)
unit
Command 0.01 - 0.001 -
range 1000000.00 1000000.000

Inch input (inch)

Input
B(0.0001inch) C(0.00001inch)
Setting unit
Command
F(inch/min) F(inch/min)
Address
Minimum
1(=1.000) 1(=1.0000)
command
(1.=1.000) (1.=1.0000)
unit
Command 0.001 - 0.0001 -
range 100000.000 100000.0000

[L system]
By issuing the G94 command, the commands from that block are issued directly by the numerical value following F
as the feed rate per minute (mm/min, inch/min).
Metric input (mm)
Input
B(0.001mm) C(0.0001mm)
Setting unit
Command
F(mm/min) F(mm/min)
Address
Minimum
1(=1.000) 1(=1.0000)
command
(1.=1.000) (1.=1.0000)
unit
Command 0.001 - 0.0001 -
range 1000000.000 1000000.0000

Inch input (inch)

Input
B(0.0001inch) C(0.00001inch)
Setting unit
Command
F(inch/min) F(inch/min)
Address
Minimum
1(=0.0100) 1(=0.01000)
command
(1.=1.0000) (1.=1.00000)
unit
Command 0.0001 - 0.00001 -
range 100000.0000 100000.00000

II - 37
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

4.2.2 Feed per Revolution (Synchronous Feed)

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

By issuing the G95 command, the commands from that block are issued directly by the numerical value following F as
the feed rate per spindle revolution (mm/revolution or inch/revolution).
The least command increment and command range of the feed rate designation F are as follows.
[M system]
Metric input (mm)
Input
B(0.001mm) C(0.0001mm)
Setting unit
Command
F(mm/rev) F(mm/rev)
Address
Minimum
1(=0.001) 1(=0.0001)
command
(1.=1.0) (1.=1.0)
unit
Command 0.001 - 0.0001 -
range 999.999 999.9999

Inch input (inch)

Input
B(0.0001inch) C(0.00001inch)
Setting unit
Command
F(inch/rev) F(inch/rev)
Address
Minimum
1(=0.00001) 1(=0.000001)
command
(1.=1.00) (1.=1.00)
unit
Command 0.00001 - 0.000001 -
range 99.99999 99.999999

[L system]
Metric input (mm)
Input
B(0.001mm) C(0.0001mm)
Setting unit
Command
F(mm/rev) F(mm/rev)
Address
Minimum
1(=0.0001) 1(=0.00001)
command
(1.=1.00) (1.=1.00)
unit
Command 0.0001 - 0.00001 -
range 999.9999 999.99999

Inch input (inch)

Input
B(0.0001inch) C(0.00001inch)
Setting unit
Command
F(inch/rev) F(inch/rev)
Address
Minimum
1(=0.000001) 1(=0.0000001)
command
(1.=1.000) (1.=1.000)
unit
Command 0.000001 - 0.0000001 -
range 99.999999 99.9999999

II - 38
M70V Series Specifications Manual
4 Feed

4.2.3 Inverse Time Feed

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ― ○
L system ― ―

During inside cutting when machining curved shapes with tool radius compensation applied, the machining speed on the
cutting surface becomes faster than the tool center feedrate. Therefore, problems such as reduced accuracy on the
cutting surface may occur.
This reduced accuracy can be prevented with inverse time feed. This function can, in place of normal feed commands,
issue one block of machining time (inverse) in F commands. The machining speed on the cutting surface is constantly
controlled, even if radius compensation is applied to the machining program that expresses the free curve surface with
fine segment lines.
Note that when the calculated machining time exceeds the cutting feed clamp speed, the F command value in the
inverse time feed follows the cutting feed clamp speed.
Regular F command Inverse time feed

(b) (b)
(c) (d)

(f)
(f)

(b) Actual machining speed (b) Same

(c) Large (f) F command
(d) Small
(f) F command

Command format is as shown below.

G93 ; Inverse time feed

Inverse time feed (G93) is a modal command and is valid until feed per minute (G94) or feed per revolution (G95) is
commanded.

G00 Xx1 Yy1 ;

G93 ; → Inverse time feed mode ON
G01 Xx2 Yy2 Ff2 ; → In inverse time feed mode
G02 Xx3 Yy3 Ii3 Jj3 Ff3 ; :
G94(G95) ; → Inverse time feed mode OFF
In movement blocks, since processing time is commanded to a line segment, command the feedrate "F" each time.

II - 39
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

4.2.4 F 1-digit Feed

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

The feed rate registered by parameter can be assigned by designating a single digit following address F.
There are six F codes: F0 and F1 to F5. The rapid traverse rate is applied when F0 is issued which is the same as the
G00 command.
When one of the codes F1 to F5 is issued, the cutting feedrate set to support the code serves as the valid rate command.
If F6 or larger value is command, the value is regarded as the cutting feedrate which has been directly commanded with
numerical values.
When an F 1-digit command has been issued, the external output signal is output.

When the programmed feed rate has been issued as an F 1-digit command, the feed rate can be increased or reduced
by turning the manual handle.
The feed rate cannot be changed by the 2nd and 3rd handles.
(1) Amount by which speed is varied by manual handle
Speed variation amount ΔF is expressed by the equation below:

FM
ΔF = ΔP ×
K
ΔP : Handle pulses (±)
FM : F1 to F5 upper limit (parameter setting)
K :Speed variation constant (parameter setting)

(Example) When the feed rate is to be increased or reduced by 10 mm/min per manual handle scale increment
If FM is 3600 mm/min, then:

3600
ΔF = 10 = 1×
K Therefore, K = 360.
(2) Conditions under which F1-digit feed is valid
(a) The automatic operation must be selected.
(b) Automatic start must be underway.
(c) Cutting feed must be underway, and the F 1-digit feed rate must be designated.
(d) The F 1-digit valid parameter must be ON.
(e) The F 1-digit feed rate change valid signal must be ON.
(f) A dry run must not be in progress.
(g) Machine lock must not be activated.

II - 40
M70V Series Specifications Manual
4 Feed

4.2.5 Manual Speed Command

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

In the memory or MDI mode, validate the manual speed command and select either handle feed or jog (manual) feed so
that the automatic operation is carried out at the feedrate.
With a command in the (-) direction, the program path can be reversed. Note that, however, program path can be
reversed only within the currently executing block and not beyond the block.
Whether or not to execute reverse run with a command in the (-) direction is set with the PLC interface.
Furthermore, by setting the parameter, handle, jog and manual feed speed can be executed at the feed speed according
to the ratio of program command speed of running block when issuing the manual speed command in multiple systems.

II - 41
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

4.3 Override

4.3.1 Rapid Traverse Override

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

(1) Type 1 (code method)

Four levels of override (1%, 25%, 50% and 100%) can be applied to manual or automatic rapid traverse using the
external input signal supplied.
(2) Type 2 (value setting method)
Override can be applied in 1% steps from 0% to 100% to manual or automatic rapid traverse using the external
input signal supplied.

(Note 1) Type 1 and type 2 can be selected by PLC processing.

(Note 2) A PLC must be built into the unit for type 2.

4.3.2 Cutting Feed Override

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

(1) Type 1 (code method)

Override can be applied in 10% steps from 0% to 300% to the feed rate command designated in the machining
program using the external input signal supplied.
(2) Type 2 (value setting method)
Override can be applied in 1% steps from 0% to 327% to the feed rate command designated in the machining
program using the external input signal supplied.

(Note 1) A PLC must be built into the unit for type 2.

4.3.3 2nd Cutting Feed Override

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

Override can be further applied in 0.01% steps from 0% to 327.67% as a second stage override to the feed rate after the
cutting feed override has been applied.

(Note 1) A PLC must be built into the unit for this function.

II - 42
M70V Series Specifications Manual
4 Feed

4.3.4 Override Cancel

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

By turning on the override cancel external signal, the override is automatically set to 100% for the cutting feed during an
automatic operation mode (tape, memory and MDI).

(Note 1) The override cancel signal is not valid for manual operation.
(Note 2) When the cutting feed override or second cutting feed override is 0%, the 0% override takes precedence and
the override is not canceled.
(Note 3) The override cancel signal is not valid for rapid traverse.

II - 43
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

4.4 Acceleration/Deceleration

4.4.1 Automatic Acceleration/Deceleration after Interpolation

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

Acceleration/deceleration is applied to all commands automatically. The acceleration/deceleration patterns are linear
acceleration/deceleration, soft acceleration/deceleration, exponent function acceleration/ deceleration, exponent
function acceleration/linear deceleration and any of which can be selected by using a parameter.
For rapid traverse feed or manual feed, acceleration/deceleration is always made for each block, and the time constant
can be set for each axis separately.

Rapid traverse Cutting feed

<Linear acceleration/deceleration> <Linear acceleration/deceleration>

) )

W W

*W/ *W/ *W/ *W/

<Primary delay> <Primary delay>

) )

W W

*W *W *W *W

<Exponential acceleration-Linear deceleration> <Exponential acceleration-Linear deceleration>

) )

W W

*W ™*W *W ™*W

<Soft acceleration/deceleration> <Soft acceleration/deceleration>

) )

W W
*W *W *W *W
*W *W *W *W

*W/ *W/ *W/ *W/

G0tL:G0 time constant(linear)

G0t1:G0 time constant(primary delay)/The 2nd step time constant of the soft acceleration/deceleration
G1tL:G1 time constant(linear)
G1t1:G1 time constant(primary delay)/The 2nd step time constant of the soft acceleration/deceleration

II - 44
M70V Series Specifications Manual
4 Feed

(Note 1) The rapid traverse feed acceleration/deceleration patterns are effective for the following:
G00, G27, G28, G29, G30, rapid traverse feed in manual run, JOG feed, incremental feed, return to reference
position.
It is invalid to G31 and handle feed.
(Note 2) Acceleration/deceleration in handle feed mode is usually performed according to the acceleration/deceleration
pattern for cutting feed. However, a parameter can be specified to select a pattern with no acceleration/
deceleration (step).
(Note 3) Acceleration/deceleration time of soft acceleration/deceleration can be changed by parameter as follows.

Total accelerating time:G0tL+G0t1

) S-pattern part time:G0t1
Linear part time:G0tL-G0t1

*W *W

*W/

*W/*W

A rapid traverse time constant can be switched by rapid traverse time constant changeover request signal.

X1 Y1 Z1

Basic rapid Rapid traverse Basic rapid Rapid traverse Basic rapid Rapid traverse
traverse time time constant traverse time time constant traverse time time constant
Set the rapid traverse time constant for switching constant for switching constant for switching
constant by axis
#2004 G0tL #2598 G0tL_2 #2004 G0tL #2598 G0tL_2 #2004 G0tL #2598 G0tL_2
#2005 G0t1 #2599 G0t1_2 #2005 G0t1 #2599 G0t1_2 #2005 G0t1 #2599 G0t1_2

Switch between basic rapid Rapid traverse time Rapid traverse time Rapid traverse time
traverse time constant and constant to use constant to use constant to use
rapid traverse time constant for
switching using the rapid
traverse time constant changeover
request signal

Rapid traverse Rapid traverse Rapid traverse

acceleration/deceleration acceleration/deceleration acceleration/deceleration

II - 45
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

4.4.2 Rapid Traverse Constant Inclination Acceleration/Deceleration

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

This function performs acceleration and deceleration at a constant inclination during linear acceleration/ deceleration in
the rapid traverse mode. Compared to the method of acceleration/deceleration after interpolation, the constant
inclination acceleration/deceleration method makes for improved cycle time.

Rapid traverse constant inclination acceleration/deceleration are valid only for a rapid traverse command. Also, this
function is effective only when the rapid traverse command acceleration/deceleration mode is linear acceleration and
linear deceleration.
The acceleration/deceleration patterns in the case where rapid traverse constant inclination acceleration/ deceleration
are performed are as follows.

(1) When the interpolation distance is long enough for the rapid traverse rate to be achieved

rapid

L
Next block

Ts Ts
Td
T

L
T= +Ts
rapid
Td = Ts + (0 WR 14 ms)

-1
rapid
θ = tan ( )
Ts

rapid : Rapid traverse rate

Ts : Acceleration/deceleration time constant
Td : Command deceleration check time
θ : Acceleration/deceleration inclination
T : Interpolation time
L : Interpolation distance

II - 46
M70V Series Specifications Manual
4 Feed

(2) When the interpolation distance is so short that the rapid traverse rate is not achieved

In case of time-constant acceleration/deceleration:

Speed

rapid

Next block

θ L

Ts1 Ts2 Time

Td
T1

In case of inclination-constant acceleration/deceleration:

Speed

rapid
T1 = Ts1 + Ts2

T2 = 2 × Ts1 × L
Next block rapid
L
θ Td = T2 2 + ( 0 to 14 ms)
Time
Ts1 tan−1 (rapid )
Td θ=
Ts2 Ts1
T2

rapid: Rapid traverse rate (Axis specification parameter #2001 rapid)

Ts1: Acceleration/deceleration time (Axis specification parameter #2004 G0tL)
Ts2: Acceleration/deceleration time to reach the maximum speed
Td: Command deceleration check time
θ: Acceleration/deceleration inclination
T1: Interpolation time (time-constant acceleration/deceleration)
T2: Interpolation time (inclination-constant acceleration/deceleration)
L: Interpolation distance

The time required to perform a command deceleration check during rapid traverse constant inclination acceleration/
deceleration is the longest value among the rapid traverse deceleration check times determined for each axis by the
rapid traverse rate of commands executed simultaneously, the rapid traverse acceleration/deceleration time
constant, and the interpolation distance, respectively.

II - 47
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

(3) 2-axis simultaneous interpolation (When linear interpolation is used, Tsx < Tsz, and Lx ≠ Lz)
When 2-axis simultaneous interpolation (linear interpolations) is performed during rapid traverse constant
inclination acceleration and deceleration, the acceleration (deceleration) time is the longest value of the
acceleration (deceleration) times determined for each axis by the rapid traverse rate of commands executed
simultaneously, the rapid traverse acceleration and deceleration time constant, and the interpolation distance,
respectively. Consequently, linear interpolation is performed even when the axes have different acceleration and
deceleration time constants.

Speed

rapid X

Lx Next block

X axis
Tsx Tsx Time
Tdx
rapid Z

Next block

Lz

Z axis
Tsz Time
Tsz
Tdz

When Tsz is greater than Tsx,

Tdz is also greater than Tdx, and
Td = Tdz in this block.

Tsx: X axis acceleration/deceleration time

Tsz: Z axis acceleration/deceleration time
Tdx: X axis commanded deceleration check time
Tdz: Z axis commanded deceleration check time
Lx : X axis interpolation distance
Lz : Z axis interpolation distance

The program format of G0 (rapid traverse command) when rapid traverse constant inclination acceleration/
deceleration are executed is the same as when this function is invalid (time constant acceleration/deceleration).
This function is valid only for G0 (rapid traverse).

II - 48
M70V Series Specifications Manual
4 Feed

(4) When the interpolation distance is so short that the acceleration/deceleration time is shorter than the
minimum time constant for constant inclination acceleration/deceleration
If a minimum time constant for inclination-constant acceleration/deceleration by the parameter, acceleration/
deceleration speed is adjusted to prevent the acceleration/deceleration time calculated by interpolation distance
from going below the minimum time constant.

Speed

rapid

Next block

Ts2 Time

Ts3
Ts1
Td

T = 2 × Ts2
Td = T + (0 to 14 ms)
2

rapid: Rapid traverse speed (Axis specification parameter #2001 rapid)

Ts1: Acceleration/deceleration time (Axis specification parameter #2004 G0tL)
Ts2: Acceleration/deceleration time to reach the maximum speed
Ts3: Minimum time for inclination-constant acceleration/deceleration (Axis specification parameter #2198
G0tMin)
Td: Command deceleration check time
T: Interpolation time
L: Interpolation distance

II - 49
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

4.4.3 Rapid Traverse Constant Inclination Multi-step Acceleration/Deceleration (1st Part System
Only)
M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ― ―

This function carries out the acceleration/deceleration according to the torque characteristic of the motor in the rapid
traverse mode during automatic operation. (This function is not available in manual operation.) The rapid traverse
constant inclination multi-step acceleration/deceleration method makes for improved cycle time because the positioning
time is shortened by using the motor ability to its maximum.
In general, the servomotor has the characteristic that the torque falls in the high-speed rotation range.
125

100

75
(b)

50

25

0
0 1000 2000 3000 3500
(a)

(a) Rotation speed [r/min]

(b) Torque [N*m]

(Note) This characteristic is data at input voltage 380VAC.

II - 50
M70V Series Specifications Manual
4 Feed

In the rapid traverse constant inclination acceleration/deceleration method, the acceleration has been treated constantly
because this torque characteristic is not considered. So, it is necessary to use a minimum acceleration within the used
speed range. Therefore, the margin of acceleration must be had in a low-speed range. Or if the acceleration is used to its
maximum, the upper limit of the rotation speed must be slowed.
Then, to use the servomotor ability to its maximum, acceleration/deceleration to which the torque characteristic is
considered is carried out by the rapid traverse constant inclination multi-step acceleration/deceleration method.
The acceleration/deceleration patterns in the case where rapid traverse constant inclination multi-step acceleration/
deceleration are performed are as follows.

Speed Speed

VC Time VD Time

Acceler- Number of steps is Acceler-

ation automatically adjusted ation
It was necessary to slow down the
by parameter setting.
acceleration for high speed rotation.

Time Time

(a) Rapid traverse constant inclination multi-step (b) Rapid traverse constant inclination
acceleration/deceleration acceleration/deceleration

II - 51
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

4.5 Thread Cutting

4.5.1 Thread Cutting (Lead/Thread Number Designation)

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

The thread cutting with designated lead can be performed. Inch threads are cut by designating the number of
threads per inch with the E address.
(1) Lead designation
The thread cutting with designated lead is performed based on the synchronization signals from the spindle
encoder.

G33 Zz1/Ww1 Xx1/Uu1 Qq1 Ff1/Ee1 ;

G33 : Thread cutting command
Zz1/Ww1,Xx1/Uu1 : Thread end point coordinates
Qq1 : Shift angle at start of thread cutting (0.000 to 360.000°)
Ff1 : Thread lead (normal lead threads)
Ee1 : Thread lead (precise lead threads)

(2) Thread number designation

Inch threads are cut by designating the number of threads per inch with the E address.
Whether the E command is a thread number designation or lead designation is selected with the parameters.

G33 Zz1/Ww1 Xx1/Uu1 Qq1 Ee1 ;

G33 : Thread cutting command
Zz1/Ww1,Xx1/Uu1 : Thread end point coordinates
Qq1 : Shift angle at start of thread cutting (0.000 to 360.000°)
Ee1 : Thread number per inch

[M system]
Thread cutting metric input
Input
B(0.001mm) C(0.0001mm)
setting unit
Command
F(mm/rev) E(mm/rev) E (ridges/inch) F(mm/rev) E(mm/rev) E (ridges/inch)
address
Least
1(=1.000) 1(=1.0000) 1(=1.00) 1(=1.0000) 1(=1.00000) 1(=1.000)
Command
(1.=1.000) (1.=1.0000) (1.=1.00) (1.=1.0000) (1.=1.00000) (1.=1.000)
Increments
Command 0.001 - 0.0001 - 0.03 - 0.0001 - 0.00001 - 0.026 -
range 999.999 999.9999 999.99 999.9999 999.99999 222807.017

Thread cutting inch input

Input
B(0.0001inch) C(0.00001inch)
setting unit
Command
F(inch/rev) E(inch/rev) E (ridges/inch) F(inch/rev) E(inch/rev) E (ridges/inch)
address
Least
1(=1.0000) 1(=1.00000) 1(=1.000) 1(=1.00000) 1(=1.000000) 1(=1.0000)
Command
(1.=1.0000) (1.=1.00000) (1.=1.000) (1.=1.00000) (1.=1.000000) (1.=1.0000)
Increments
Command 0.0001 - 0.00001 - 0.025 - 0.00001 - 0.000001 - 0.0254 -
range 39.3700 39.37007 9999.999 39.37007 39.370078 9999.9999

II - 52
M70V Series Specifications Manual
4 Feed

[L system]
Thread cutting metric input
Input
B (0.000mm) C (0.0001mm)
setting unit
Command
F (mm/rev) E (mm/rev) E (ridges/inch) F (mm/rev) E (mm/rev) E (ridges/inch)
address
Least
1(=1.0000) 1(=1.00000) 1(=1.00) 1(=1.00000) 1(=1.000000) 1(=1.000)
Command
(1.=1.0000) (1.=1.00000) (1.=1.00) (1.=1.00000) (1.=1.000000) (1.=1.000)
Increments
Command 0.0001 - 0.00001 - 0.03 - 0.00001 - 0.000001 - 0.026 -
range 999.9999 999.99999 999.99 999.99999 999.999999 222807.017

Thread cutting inch input

Input
B (0.0001inch) C (0.00001inch)
setting unit
Command
F (inch/rev) E (inch/rev) E (ridges/inch) F (inch/rev) E (inch/rev) E (ridges/inch)
address
Least
1(=1.00000) 1(=1.000000) 1(=1.000) 1(=1.000000) 1(=1.0000000) 1(=1.0000)
Command
(1.=1.00000) (1.=1.000000) (1.=1.000) (1.=1.000000) (1.=1.0000000) (1.=1.0000)
Increments
Command 0.00001 - 0.000001 - 0.025 - 0.000001 - 0.0000001 - 0.0254 -
range 39.37007 39.370078 9999.999 39.370078 39.3700787 9999.9999

II - 53
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

4.5.2 Variable Lead Thread Cutting

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ― ―
L system ○ ○

By commanding the lead increment/decrement amount per thread rotation, variable lead thread cutting can be done.
The machining program is commanded in the following manner.

G34 Xx1/Uu1 Zz1/Ww1 Ff1/Ee1 Kk1 ;

G34 : Variable lead thread cutting command
Xx1/Uu1 : Thread end point X coordinate
Zz1/Ww1 : Thread end point Z coordinate
Ff1/Ee1 : Thread's basic lead
Kk1 : Lead increment/decrement amount per thread rotation

(a)

(b)

F+3.5K F+2.5K F+1.5K F+0.5K

(c) F+3K F+2K F+K F

F+4K

(a) Non-lead axis

(b) Lead axis
(c) Lead speed

II - 54
M70V Series Specifications Manual
4 Feed

4.5.3 Synchronous Tapping

4.5.3.1 Synchronous Tapping Cycle

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

This function performs tapping through the synchronized control of the digital spindle and servo axis. This eliminates the
need for floating taps and enables tapping to be conducted at a highly precise tap depth.

(1) Tapping pitch assignment

G84(G74) Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Rr1 Dd1 Pp1 Ff1 Kk1 Ss1 ,Ss2 ,Rr2 ,Ii1 ,Jj1 Mm1 ;
G84 : Mode, forward tapping
G74 : Mode, reverse tapping
Xx1,Yy1 : Hole position data, hole drilling position
Zz1 : Hole machining data, hole bottom position
Rr1 : Hole machining data, point R position
Dd1 : Tool spindle number (d is 1 to number of spindles)
Depending on the parameter setting, command as "-d1" to carry out reverse tapping.
Pp1 : Hole machining data, dwell time at hole bottom
Ff1 : Z-axis feed amount (tapping pitch) per spindle rotation
Kk1 : Number of repetitions
Ss1 : Spindle speed
,Ss2 : Rotation speed of spindle during retract
,Rr2 : Synchronization method selection (r2=1 Synchronous, r2=0 Asynchronous)
,Ii1/,Jj1 : In-position width of positioning axis/hole drilling axis
Mm1 : M function designation

(2) Tapping thread number assignment

G84(G74) Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Rr1 Dd1 Pp1 Ee1 Kk1 Ss1 ,Ss2 ,Rr2 ,Ii1 ,Jj1 Mm1 ;
G84 : Mode, forward tapping
G74 : Mode, reverse tapping
Xx1,Yy1 : Hole position data, hole drilling position
Zz1 : Hole machining data, hole bottom position
Rr1 : Hole machining data, point R position
Dd1 : Tool spindle number (d is 1 to number of spindles)
Depending on the parameter setting, command as "-d1" to carry out reverse tapping.
Pp1 : Hole machining data, dwell time at hole bottom
Ee1 : Tap thread number per 1-inch feed of Z axis
Kk1 : Number of repetitions
Ss1 : Spindle speed
,Ss2 : Rotation speed of spindle during retract
,Rr2 : Synchronization method selection (r2=1 synchronous, r2=0 asynchronous)
,Ii1/,Jj1 : In-position width of positioning axis/hole drilling axis
Mm1 : M function designation

II - 55
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

(Note) The synchronous tapping cycle can be used for axes other than the Z axis with the plane selection.
Furthermore, in-position checks can be performed at the hole bottom or point R, etc. using the parameters.
The figure below shows the correlation between the in-position width and the movement of the tapping axis of
the synchronous tapping in-position check.

(+0
Hole bottom Point R

→
Feed
rate
Time T →

G0 feed
start to
In-position finish G1 deceleration G1 deceleration point R→
for G0 feed from start during start during
point R tapping cutting tapping retract
(4) (2) (3) (1)

(1) Section where in-position check is performed using servo in-position width
(2) Section where in-position check is performed using in-position width for tapping
(3) Section where in-position check is performed using in-position width for cutting feed (G1, G2, G3)
(4) Section where in-position check is performed using in-position width for rapid traverse (G0)

II - 56
M70V Series Specifications Manual
4 Feed

4.5.3.2 Pecking Tapping Cycle

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

The load applied to the tool can be reduced by designating the depth of cut per pass and cutting the workpiece to the
hole bottom for a multiple number of passes.
The amount retracted from the hole bottom is set to the parameters.
Select either the pecking tapping cycle or the deep-hole tapping cycle by parameter.
When the pecking tapping cycle is executed in the synchronous tapping mode, the synchronous tapping cycle option and
pecking tapping cycle option are required.
When "depth of cut per pass Q" is designated in the block containing the G84 or G74 command in the state where the
pecking tapping cycle is selected by parameter, the pecking tapping cycle is executed.
In the following cases, the normal tapping cycle is established.
When Q is not designated
When the command value of Q is zero
When there is no Pecking tapping cycle option

(1) M system

G84(G74) Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Rr1 Qq1 Ff1(Ee1) Pp1 Ss1 ,Ss2 ,Ii1 ,Jj1 ,Rr2 Ll1 ;
G84 : G84 forward tapping cycle
G74 : G74 reverse tapping cycle
Xx1,Yy1 : Hole drilling position
Zz1 : Hole bottom position
Rr1 : Point R position
Qq1 : Depth of cut per pass (designated as an incremental position)
Ff1 : During synchronous tapping: Designation of drilling axis feed amount (tapping pitch) per spindle revolution
(modal)
During asynchronous tapping: Designation of the feedrate for cutting feed (modal)
Ee1 : Tap thread number per 1-inch feed of Z axis
Pp1 : Dwell time at hole bottom position
Ss1 : Rotation speed of spindle
,Ss2 : Rotation speed of spindle during retract
,Ii2 : In-position width of positioning axis
,Jj2 : In-position width of hole drilling axis
,Rr2 : Synchronization method selection (r2=1 synchronous, r2=0 asynchronous)
Ll1 : Number of repetitions

II - 57
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

(2) L system

G84(G88, G84.1, G88.1) Xx1 Cc1 Zz1 Rr1 Qq1 Ff1(Ee1) Pp1 Ss1 ,Ss2 ,Ii ,Jj ,Rr2 Dd1 Ll1 Mm1 ;
G84 : G84 Face forward tapping cycle
G88 : G88 Side　forward tapping cycle
G84.1 : G84.1 Face reverse tapping cycle (It can be commanded by setting of parameter)
G88.1 : G88.1 Side reverse tapping cycle (It can be commanded by setting of parameter)
Xx1,Cc1,Zz1 : Hole position data and : hole bottom position
Rr1 : Point R position
Qq1 : Depth of cut per pass (designated as an incremental position)
Ff1 : During synchronous tapping: Designation of drilling axis feed amount (tapping pitch) per spindle revolution
(modal)
During asynchronous tapping: Designation of the feedrate for cutting feed (modal)
Ee1 : Tap thread number per 1-inch feed of Z axis
Pp1 : Dwell time at hole bottom position
Ss1 : Rotation speed of spindle
,Ss2 : Rotation speed of spindle
,Ii2 : In-position width of positioning axis
,Jj2 : In-position width of hole drilling axis
,Rr2 : Synchronization method selection (r2=1:synchronous、r2=0:asynchronous)
Dd1 : Tapping spindle number assignment
(By minus command, reverse tapping can be commanded by setting of parameter.
It can be commanded when it is multiple-spindle control Ⅰ .
Program error occurs when multiple-spindle control Ⅱ is commanded by D command.)
Ll1 : Number of repetitions
Mm1 : C axis clamp M code

① G0 Xx1 Yy1 ,Ii1

② G0 Zr1
x1, y1 ③ G1 Zq1 Ff1
④ M4
⑤ G1 Z-m Ff1
n7 r1 ⑥ M3
⑦ G1 Z(q1+m) Ff1
⑧ M4
q1 ⑨ G1 Z-m Ff1
m ⑩ M3
⑪ G1 Z(q1+m) Ff1
q1 :
m n1: G1 Z(z1-q1*n) Ff1
z1
n2: G4 Pp1
q1 n3: M4
n4: G1 Z-z1 Ff1 Ss2
n5: G4 Pp1
n6: M3
n7: G98 mode G0 Z-r1 ,Ij1/ G99
mode No movement
M3: Spindle forward rotation
M4: Spindle reverse rotation
※
1. m : Retract amount (parameter)
2. This program is for the G84 command. The spindle forward rotation (M3) and reverse rotation (M4) are reversed
with the G74 command.

II - 58
M70V Series Specifications Manual
4 Feed

4.5.3.3 Deep-hole Tapping Cycle

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

In the deep-hole tapping, the load applied to the tool can be reduced by designating the depth of cut per pass and cutting
the workpiece to the hole bottom for a multiple number of passes.
Adding this option, the pecking tapping cycle option is also added.
Under the deep-hole tapping cycle, the tool is retracted to the R-point every time.
Select either the pecking tapping cycle or the deep-hole tapping cycle by parameter.
When the deep-hole tapping cycle is executed in the synchronous tapping mode, the synchronous tapping cycle option
and deep-hole tapping cycle option are required.
When "depth of cut per pass Q" is designated in the block containing the G84 or G74 command in the state where the
deep-hole tapping cycle is selected by parameter, the deep-hole tapping cycle is executed.
In the following cases, the normal tapping cycle is established.
When Q is not designated
When the command value of Q is zero
When there is no deep tapping cycle option

(1) M system

G84(G74) Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Rr1 Qq1 Ff1(Ee1) Pp1 Ss1 ,Ss2 ,Ii ,Jj ,Rr2 Ll1 (Kk1) ;
G84 : G84 forward tapping cycle
G74 : G74 reverse tapping cycle
Xx1,Yy1 : Hole drilling position
Zz1 : Hole bottom position
Rr1 : Point R position
Qq1 : Depth of cut per pass (designated as an incremental position)
Ff1 : During synchronous tapping: Designation of drilling axis feed amount (tapping pitch) per spindle revolution
(modal)
During asynchronous tapping: Designation of the feedrate for cutting feed (modal)
Ee1 : Tap thread number per 1-inch feed of Z axis
Pp1 : Dwell time at hole bottom and point R return
Ss1 : Rotation speed of spindle
,Ss2 : Rotation speed of spindle during retract
,Ii2 : In-position width of positioning axis
,Jj2 : In-position width of hole drilling axis
,Rr2 : Synchronization method selection (r2=1 synchronous, r2=0 asynchronous)
Ll1 : Number of repetitions
Kk1 : Number of repetitions (It commanded by parameter)

II - 59
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

(2) L system

G84(G88, G84.1, G88.1) Xx1 Cc1 Zz1 Rr1 Qq1 Ff1(Ee1) Pp1 Ss1 ,Ss2 ,Ii ,Jj ,Rr2 Dd1 Ll1 Mm1 ;
G84 : G84 Face forward tapping cycle
G88 : G88 Side forward tapping cycle
G84.1 : G84.1 Face reverse tapping cycle (It can be commanded by setting of parameter)
G88.1 : G88.1 Side reverse tapping cycle (It can be commanded by setting of parameter)
Xx1,Cc1,Zz1 : Hole position data and : hole bottom position
Rr1 : Point R position
Qq1 : Depth of cut per pass (designated as an incremental position)
Ff1 : During synchronous tapping: Designation of drilling axis feed amount (tapping pitch) per spindle revolution
(modal)
During asynchronous tapping: Designation of the feedrate for cutting feed (modal)
Ee1 : Tap thread number per 1-inch feed of Z axis
Pp1 : Dwell time at hole bottom position
Ss1 : Rotation speed of spindle
,Ss2 : Rotation speed of spindle
,Ii2 : In-position width of positioning axis
,Jj2 : In-position width of hole drilling axis
,Rr2 : Synchronization method selection (r2=1:synchronous、r2=0:asynchronous)
Dd1 : Tapping spindle number assignment
Ll1 : Number of repetitions
Mm1 : C axis clamp M code

① G0 Xx1 Yy1
② G0 Zr1
Ԙ Z [
③ G9 G1 Zq1 Ff1
④ M4 (Spindle reverse rotation)
P T ⑤ G9 G1 Z-q1 Ff1
ԙ
⑥ G4 Pp1
R point ԝԞ ԣԤ P P P P
⑦ M3 (Spindle forward rotation)
ԟ ⑧ G1 Z(q1-c) Ff1
S Ԛ Ԝ
E ԥ ⑨ G9 G1 Z(q1+c) Ff1
Ԣ
⑩ M4 (Spindle reverse rotation)
ԛ
Ԡ ⑪ G9 G1 Z-(2*q1) Ff1
S
E ⑫ G4 Pp1
P P \
ԡ ⑬ M3 (Spindle forward rotation)
S Ԧ ⑭ G1 Z(2*q1-c) Ff1
⑮ G9 G1 Z(q1+c) Ff1
:
n1: G9 G1 Z(z1-q1*n+c) Ff1
P n2: G4 Pp1
※
n3: M4 (Spindle reverse rotation)
1. Clearance amount c : Retract amount (parameter) P P G98 G99 n4: G9 G1 Z-z1 Ff1
2. This program is for the G84 command. mode mode n5: G4 Pp1
 The spindle forward rotation (M3) and reverse n6: M3 (Spindle forward rotation)
 rotation (M4) are reversed with the G74 command.
n7: G98 mode G0 Z-r1
G99 mode No movement

II - 60
M70V Series Specifications Manual
4 Feed

4.5.4 Chamfering
M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ― ―
L system ○ ○

Chamfering can be validated during the thread cutting cycle by using external signals.
The chamfer amount and angle are designated with parameters.
(a)

(b)

(c)

(a) Thread cutting cycle

(b) Chamfer angle
(c) Chamfer amount

4.5.8 High-speed Synchronous Tapping (OMR-DD)

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

The servo axis directly detects and compensates of the spindle's delay in tracking by using the communication between
drive unit over the high-speed optical servo network. By minimizing the synchronization error, the accuracy of the
synchronous tapping is increased.

4000 4000
(a) (a)
3000 3000
2000 2000
1000 1000
Implement to
0 0
(b) increase the (b)
−1000 −1000
accuracy of
−2000 −2000
the synchronous
−3000 −3000
tapping
−4000 −4000
0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5
(sec) (sec)

Conventional (without OMR-DD control) MDS-D/DH Series (with DMR-DD control)

(a) Spindle rotation speed (a) Spindle rotation speed
(b) Synchronization error (b) Synchronization error

II - 61
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

4.6 Manual Feed

4.6.1 Manual Rapid Traverse

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

When the manual rapid traverse mode is selected, the tool can be moved at the rapid traverse rate for each axis
separately. Override can also be applied to the rapid traverse rate by means of the rapid traverse override function.
Rapid traverse override can be set for each part system respectively.

(R) (a)
(c)
× 25 × 50
× 1 × 100 CNC
(d)

X Y Z PLC (b)

- + - + - +
(R)

(a) Rapid traverse override

(b) Axis movement control
(c) Machine tool
(d) Tool
(R) Rapid traverse

II - 62
M70V Series Specifications Manual
4 Feed

4.6.2 Jog Feed

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

When the jog feed mode is selected, the tool can be moved in the axis direction (+ or -) in which the machine is to be
moved at the per-minute feed.
The jog feed rate can be set for each part system respectively.

(a) (b) (c)

(e)
CNC
(f)
0 3000 0 200

X Y Z PLC (d)
- + - + - +
(g)

(a) Jog
(b) Feed rate
(c) Override
(d) Axis movement control
(e) Machine tool
(f) Tool
(g) Manual cutting feed

II - 63
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

4.6.3 Incremental Feed

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

When the incremental feed mode is selected, the tool can be operated by an amount equivalent to the designated
amount (incremental value) in the axis direction each time the jog switch is pressed. The incremental feed amount is the
amount obtained by multiplying the least command increment that was set with the parameter by the incremental feed
magnification rate.
The incremental feed amount parameter and its magnification rate can be set for each part system respectively.

(a) (b)
(d)

1000 CNC
(e)

X Y Z (c)
PLC
- + - + - +
(f)

(a) Incremental
(b) Scale factor
(c) Axis movement control
(d) Machine tool
(e) Tool
(f) Step feed

4.6.4 Handle Feed

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

In the handle feed mode, the machine can be moved in very small amounts by rotating the manual pulse generator. The
scale can be selected from X1, X10, X100, X1000 or arbitrary value.
If the least command increment is 10nm or 1nm, the scale can be selected from X5000, X10000 or X100000, as well.
Individual axes can be moved in very small amounts either separately or simultaneously by rotating the manual pulse
generators installed on each of the axes.
(Note 1) The actual movement amount and scale may not match if the manual pulse generator is rotated quickly.

Up to three handles can be used with the Mitsubishi CNC.

II - 64
M70V Series Specifications Manual
4 Feed

4.6.5 Manual Feed Rate B

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

"Manual feedrate B" is a function that sets an arbitrary axis feedrate from the user PLC separately from the "manual
feedrate". The "manual feedrate B" feedrate setting can be selected from the feedrate common for all axes and the
feedrate independent of reach axis.
By combining the "manual feedrate B" function with the manual/automatic simultaneous function, an arbitrary axis can be
moved at the "manual feedrate B" independently of the machining program operation even during automatic operation.
Similarly, if the jog mode and other manual operation mode are set simultaneously, an arbitrary axis can be moved at a
speed independent from the "manual feedrate" even during the manual operation mode.

The "manual feedrate B" function can move an axis at a speed different from the "manual feedrate". This is not affected
by dry run, or by manual or cutting override, so an arbitrary axis can be moved independently even in operations during
automatic operation or override during manual axis movement.

The relation of the "manual feedrate B" and "manual feedrate" is shown below.

Manual override validity

Cutting override Dry run validity

Manual feedrate

Dry run speed

Each axis manual feedrate B X axis speed

speed 1st axis
Manual feedrate B speed

Each axis manual feedrate B Y axis speed

speed 2nd axis

Each axis manual feedrate B Z axis speed

speed 3rd axis

Each axis manual feedrate B B axis speed

speed 4th axis

Manual feedrate B valid

n-th axis
Validity
Each axis manual feedrate B valid
Validity

(Note) For the axis to which manual feedrate B is applied, the feedrate is not displayed on the screen.

II - 65
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

4.7 Dwell

4.7.1 Dwell (Time-based Designation)

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

The G04 command temporarily stops the machine movement and sets the machine standby status for the time
designated in the program.

(1) M system

G04 Xx1 ; or G04 Pp1 ;

G04 : Dwell
Xx1,Pp1 : Dwell time

The time-based dwell can be designated in the range from 0.001 to 99999.999 seconds.
(The input command increment for the dwell time depends on the parameter.)

(2) L system

(G94) G04 Xx1/Uu1 ; or (G94) G04 Pp1 ;

G94 : Asynchronous
G04 : Dwell command
Xx1,Uu1,Pp1 : Dwell time

The time-based dwell can be designated in the range from 0.001 to 99999.999 seconds. (The input command increment
for the dwell time depends on the parameter.)
U address can be used in the L system only.

II - 66
5
Program Memory/Editing

II - 67
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

5.1 Memory Capacity

Machining programs are stored in the NC memory and a memory card.

When using a memory card, mass-editing is possible.
The data size that can be handled in the mass-editing differs depending on the devices.

5.1.1 Memory Capacity (Number of Programs Stored)

(Note) The tape length for the multi-part system specifications is the total for all part systems.

5.1.1.6 500kB [1280 m] (1000 Programs)

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

5.1.1.8 2000kB [5120 m] (1000 Programs)

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ― △ (*1)
L system ― △ (*1)

(*1) When HN754 is installed.

II - 68
M70V Series Specifications Manual
5 Program Memory/Editing

5.2 Editing

5.2.1 Program Editing

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

The following editing functions are possible.

(1) Program erasing

(a) Machining programs can be erased individually or totally.

(2) Program filing

(a) This function displays a list of the machining programs stored (registered) in the controller memory.
(b) The programs are displayed in ascending order.
(c) Comments can be added to corresponding program numbers.

(3) Program copying

(a) Machining programs stored in the controller memory can be copied, condensed or merged.
(b) The program No. of the machining programs in the memory can be changed.

(4) Program editing

(a) Overwriting, inserting and erasing can be done per character.

(5) Mass editing

With mass-editing, up to 10 MB can be edited.
The specification and restrictions are different from those with the regular editing.
Mass-editing is applied when all of the following conditions are satisfied.
- When the storage destination for the program to be opened is a memory card.
- When a file size is 0.5 MB or larger.

II - 69
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

5.2.2 Background Editing

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

This function enables one machining program to be created or editing while another program is being run.

(a)
(b)

O1000

O2000
(c)
O3000 (d)

O4000

(e) (f)

(a) Prohibited
(b) Program registered in memory
(c) Editing
(d) Memory operation
(e) Program editing
(f) Machining with memory operation

(1) The data of the machining programs being used in memory operation can be displayed and scrolled on the
setting and display unit, but data cannot be added, revised or deleted.
(2) The editing functions mentioned in the preceding section can be used at any time for machining programs
which are not being used for memory operation.
This makes it possible to prepare and edit the next program for machining, and so the machining preparations
can be made more efficiently.
(3) The machining program will not be searched as the operation target even when searched in the edit screen.

II - 70
M70V Series Specifications Manual
5 Program Memory/Editing

5.2.3 Buffer Correction

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

During automatic operation (including memory, tape, memory card) or MDI operation, this function initiates single block
stop and enables the next command to be corrected or changed.
Only memory allows the changes with buffer corrections to be updated in the machining program.
When a program error has occurred, the function enables the block in which the error occurred to be corrected and
operation to be resumed without having to perform NC resetting.

(b)
(a)

(e) (f)
(d)
(g) (h)
(c)

MDI (i)
(j)

(k)

(a) Tape
(b) Tape mode
(c) Memory, memory card
(d) Memory mode
(e) Pre-read block
(f) Execution block
(g) NC operation
(h) Machine control
(i) MDI mode
(j) Setting and display unit
(k) Buffer correction

II - 71
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

II - 72
6
Operation and Display

II - 73
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

6.1 Structure of Operation/Display Panel

The setting and display unit is configured of the setting section and keyboard section.
Refer to "General Specifications" for details.

6.1.1 Color Display (8.4-type LCD TFT)

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system □ □
L system □ □

6.1.2 Color Display (10.4-type LCD TFT)

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system □ □
L system □ □

6.1.7 Color Touch-panel Display (10.4-type LCD TFT)

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system □ □
L system □ □

II - 74
M70V Series Specifications Manual
6 Operation and Display

6.2 Operation Methods and Functions

6.2.1 Operation Input

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

In addition to the method of directly inputting numeric data, a method to input the operation results using four rules
operators and function symbols can be used for specific data settings.

Numeric values, function symbols, operators and parentheses ( ) are combined and set in the data setting area.
The operation results appear when the INPUTkey is pressed. If the INPUT key is pressed again, the data is processed
and displayed on the screen. The contents in the data setting area are erased.

Examples of operator settings and results Function symbols, setting examples and results
Operation Function Operation
Operation Setting example Function Setting example
results symbol results
Absolute
Addition = 100+50 150.000 ABS = ABS(50-60) 10
value
Square
Subtraction = 100-50 50.000 SQRT = SQRT(3) 1.732
root
Multiplication = 12.3*4 49.200 Sine SIN = SIN(30) 0.5
Division = 100/3 33.333 Cosine COS = COS(15) 0.966
Tangent TAN = TAN(45) 1
Function = 1.2*(2.5+SQRT(4)) 5.4
Arc tangent ATAN = ATAN(1.3) 52.431

6.2.2 Absolute/Incremental Value Setting

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

When setting the data, the absolute/incremental setting can be selected from the menu.

The absolute/incremental settings can be selected on the following screens.

- Common variable screen
- Tool compensation amount screen
- Coordinate system offset screen

6.2.5 Displayed Part System Switch

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ― ○
L system ― ○

The part system displayed on the screen can be changed with the [$<->$] keys.
The number of displayed part systems is counted by one each time the [$<->$] keys are pressed. The screen
corresponding to that part system opens.
If the number of displayed part systems exceeds the valid number of part systems, the number of displayed part systems
will return to 1.

II - 75
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

6.2.6 Menu List

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

The menu list function displays the menu configuration of each screen as a list making it possible to directly select the
menu for other screens.
When the cursor is moved to the menu, the outline of that menu's functions will also appear. The menu can be selected
while checking the details of the menu.

6.2.7 Display Switch by Operation Mode

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

The screen display changes when the screen mode selection switch is changed.
The details corresponding to the operation mode are displayed.

6.2.8 External Signal Display Switch

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ― ○
L system ― ○

The screen display changes with the signal from PLC.

6.2.10 Screen Saver

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

The screen saver function protects the screen display unit by turning the backlight OFF after the time set in the
parameters has elapsed. The backlight is turned OFF after a certain period of time (automatic change function) or after
the key operations (manual change function).
The screen is displayed again by pressing any key, or by touching anywhere on the screen if the display unit carries a
touch-sensitive screen.

6.2.11 Parameter/Operation Guidance

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

The parameter/operation guidance function displays the details of the parameters or the operation methods according to
the state of the screen currently being displayed. The operation guidance can also be selected from the Contents and
displayed.

If the ? key is pressed on any screen, the parameter/operation guidance window will open. If a pop-up window other than
the parameter/operation guidance window is opened, the parameter/operation guidance window will open over the
currently opened pop-up window.

II - 76
M70V Series Specifications Manual
6 Operation and Display

6.2.12 Alarm Guidance

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

Guidance is displayed for the alarm currently issued.

By utilizing the guidance information, identify the cause from possible factors and determine the countermeasures.
When a multiple number of alarms are issued at the same time, guidance will be displayed for all the alarm issued.

6.2.15 Screen Capture

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

This function allows to output a bitmap file of a screen displayed on the setting and display unit.

6.2.16 User Selectable Menu Configuration

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

This function allows to change the display order of operations, procedure and edit screen, and to change display/non-
display selection.

6.2.18 Device Open Parameter

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

This function can set or change the user backed up area of the PLC device from the NC screen.
The following settings are available from the NC screen.
- Divide the device area accordance with the specifications of the machine maker and set and display for each
divided area.
- Switch the display format or data type for each divided area.

6.2.19 SRAM Open Parameter

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

This function can set or change the SRAM open area for the machine maker from the NC screen.
The following settings are available from the NC screen.
- Divide the SRAM area accordance with the specifications of the machine maker and set and display for each
divided area.
- Switch the display format or data type for each divided area.

II - 77
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

6.2.20 MTB Selectable Menu Configuration

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

Menu items on the "Monitor", "Setup", and "Edit" screens (of MITSUBISHI standard format) can be moved within a
screen or hidden as desired. The custom screen menu items added by machine tool builders, to the contrary, cannot be
moved or hidden.

II - 78
M70V Series Specifications Manual
6 Operation and Display

6.3 Display Methods and Contents

6.3.1 Status Display

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

The status of the program now being executed is indicated.

(1) Display of G, S, T, M commands and 2nd miscellaneous command modal values
(2) Feed rate display
(3) Tool compensation No. and compensation amount display
(4) Real speed display (*)
(*) The feed rate of each axis is converted from the final speed output to the drive unit, and is displayed.
However, during follow up, the speed is converted and displayed with the signals from the detector
installed on the servomotor.

6.3.2 Clock Display

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

The clock is built-in, and the date (year, month, date) and time (hour, minute, second) are displayed.
Once the time is set, it can be seen as a clock on the screen.

6.3.3 Monitor Screen Display

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

Various information related to operation, such as the axis counter, speed display and MSTB command are displayed on
the Monitor screen. The following operations regarding operation can be executed.

(1) Operation search

(2) Restart search
(3) Editing of searched machining program
(4) Trace (Display of machine movement path)
(5) Check (Display of NC program's tool movement path)
(6) Correction of running program's buffer
(7) Counter set
(8) Manual numeric command, etc.

II - 79
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

6.3.4 Setup Screen Display

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

Tool/workpiece related settings, user parameter settings, MDI editing, counter setting and manual numeric command
issuing can be carried out on the Preparation screen.

6.3.5 Edit Screen Display

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

Machining program editing (addition, deletion, change) and checking, simple program creation, and machining program
input/output can be carried out on the Edit screen.

6.3.6 Diagnosis Screen Display

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

The following operations related to the CNC diagnosis can be carried out on the Diagnosis screen.
(1) Display of hardware and software configuration
(2) Display of CNC options
(3) Diagnosis of PLC interface
(4) Display of drive unit information
(5) Display of alarm message / alarm history list etc.

6.3.7 Maintenance Screen Display

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

Parameter setting and display, and NC data input/output, etc., can be carried out on the Maintenance screen.

II - 80
M70V Series Specifications Manual
6 Operation and Display

6.3.8 Additional Language

A language of choice can be selected by parameter setting.

(Note) Guidance language data can be selected up to two languages besides English.

6.3.8.1 Japanese
M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system □ □
L system □ □

6.3.8.2 English
M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

6.3.8.3 German
M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system □ □
L system □ □

6.3.8.4 Italian
M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system □ □
L system □ □

6.3.8.5 French
M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system □ □
L system □ □

6.3.8.6 Spanish
M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system □ □
L system □ □

II - 81
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

6.3.8.7 Chinese

6.3.8.7.1 Chinese (Traditional Chinese Characters)

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system □ □
L system □ □

6.3.8.7.2 Chinese (Simplified Chinese Characters)

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system □ □
L system □ □

6.3.8.8 Korean
M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system □ □
L system □ □

6.3.8.9 Portuguese
M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system □ □
L system □ □

6.3.8.10 Hungarian
M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system □ □
L system □ □

6.3.8.11 Dutch
M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system □ □
L system □ □

6.3.8.12 Swedish
M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system □ □
L system □ □

6.3.8.13 Turkish
M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system □ □
L system □ □

II - 82
M70V Series Specifications Manual
6 Operation and Display

6.3.8.14 Polish
M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system □ □
L system □ □

6.3.8.15 Russian
M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system □ □
L system □ □

6.3.8.16 Czech
M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system □ □
L system □ □

II - 83
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

II - 84
7
Input/Output Functions and Devices

II - 85
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

7.1 Input/Output Data

Certain kinds of data handled by the NC system can be input and output between the NC system's memory and external
devices.

7.1.1 Machining Program Input / Output (Including User Macros and Fixed Cycle Macros)
M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

7.1.2 Tool Offset Data Input / Output

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

7.1.3 Common Variable Input / Output

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

7.1.4 Parameter Input / Output

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

7.1.5 History Data Output

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

7.1.7 System Configuration Data Output

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

II - 86
M70V Series Specifications Manual
7 Input/Output Functions and Devices

7.2 Input/Output I/F

7.2.1 RS-232C I/F

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

There are 2 ports (port 1/2) available with the RS-232C interface for control unit.

Control unit
Port Port 1/2
Baudrate Up to 19.2kbps
Handshake method DC code method, RTS/CTS method possible

Each port can be used for the following application.

Port 1: Input/Output, Tape operation
Port 2: Input/Output, Tape operation, GX Developer communication, computer link

7.2.2 IC Card I/F

7.2.2.2 Front IC Card I/F

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

Interface card to use a compact flash card can be attached in front of the NC control unit and used.

7.2.3 Ethernet I/F

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

Ethernet interface card can be attached onto the NC unit and used.

7.2.6 USB Memory I/F [Up to 2GByte]

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

A USB memory can be mounted.

II - 87
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

7.3 Computer Link

7.3.1 Computer Link B

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

Computer link B is a function that passes the data between host computer (hereafter abbreviated to "HOST") and CNC.
This function sends [DC1] to the HOST at the CNC cycle start, and it enables operation to be performed while the
machining programs are received from the HOST.
The computer link has a reception buffer so that operation will be less susceptible to the effects of the data transfer
status at the HOST end.
The high-speed machining mode option is required for high-speed fine-segment machining.
This function cannot be operated in the 2nd and following part systems.

CNC HOST

(a)
CNC RS - 232C
(b)

(c)

(a) Operation
(b) Command
(c) Machining program

II - 88
8
Spindle, Tool and Miscellaneous Functions

II - 89
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

8.1 Spindle Functions (S)

8.1.1 Spindle Control Functions

The spindle rotation speed is determined in consideration of the override and gear ratio for the S command commanded
in automatic operation or with manual numerical commands, and the spindle is rotated. The following diagram shows an
outline of the spindle control.

When an 8-digit number following address S (S0 to S±99999999) is commanded, a signed 32-bit binary data and start
signal, or a non-signed 32-bit binary data and start signal will be output to the PLC.
Up to 1 set of S commands can be commanded in one block.
Processing and complete sequences must be incorporated on the PLC side for all S commands.

NC PLC

S command value
S
command 8-digit
S command
analysis Start signal
(Machining program,
manual numerical
command) Spindle rotation 8-digit
command

BIN

Changeover
(Parameter)
Spindle rotation 8-digit BIN
command
Spindle controller Spindle output
MDS-D/DH-SP command Gear selection
series, etc. creation

Override
Remote I/O unit

D/A converter

Gear ratio
Max. rotation
speed

Analog spindle (Parameter)

(1) The override can be designated as 50% to 120% in 10% increments or 0% to 200% in 1% increments (with
built-in PLC specifications).
The override is not changed while the spindle stop input is ON, during the tapping mode, or during the thread
cutting mode.
(2) The number of gear steps can be commanded up to four steps.
(3) The max. spindle rotation speed can be set for each gear.

II - 90
M70V Series Specifications Manual
8 Spindle, Tool and Miscellaneous Functions

8.1.1.1 Spindle Digital I/F

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

This interface is used to connect the digital spindle (AC spindle motor and spindle driver).

8.1.1.2 Spindle Analog I/F

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

Spindle control can be executed using an analog spindle instead of the digital spindle.

8.1.1.3 Coil Switch

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

Constant output characteristics can be achieved across a broad spectrum down to the low-speed range by switching the
spindle motor connections.
This is a system under which commands are assigned from the PLC.

8.1.1.4 Automatic Coil Switch

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

Constant output characteristics can be achieved across a broad spectrum down to the low-speed range by switching the
spindle motor connections.
This is a system under which the NC unit switches the coils automatically in accordance with the motor speed.

II - 91
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

8.1.1.5 Encoder Input I/F

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

Encoder pulse input used to be fixed to 1024 pulse input on the conventional analogue interface. With this function,
arbitrary pulse can be input by parameters set in R register.
The maximum number of input pulse is 76800. Synchronous feed function can be activated with the arbitrary pulse if the
number of pulse to be used is set in R register and the external signal is turned ON.

Encoder arbitrary pulse input

(b)
(a)
NC
(c)

(e)
(d)
NC
(h) (g) (f)

(a) ENC interface

(b) Encoder
(c) 1024 pulse fixed
(d) ENC interface
(e) High resolution Encoder
(f) Max76800 pulse
(g) Input pulse
(h) R register

II - 92
M70V Series Specifications Manual
8 Spindle, Tool and Miscellaneous Functions

Two kinds of encoders can be switched over and connected. Encoder switch-over is possible, using PLC device.
Encoder changeover pulse input

(f)

(a)
NC
(h)
(c) (b)
(i)
(c) (b)
(g)

(a) ENC interface

(b) Input pulse
(c) R register
(f) Encoder1 (High resolution)
(g) Encoder2 (Low resolution)
(h) Switch with ladder
(i) Switch internally

8.1.2 S Code Output

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

When an 8-digit number following address S (S0 to S±99999999) is commanded, a signed 32-bit binary data and start
signal, or a non-signed 32-bit binary data and start signal will be output to the PLC.
One set of S commands can be issued in one block.
Processing and complete sequences must be incorporated on the PLC side for all S commands.

S function can be designated with any other kind of commands. In the case where a movement command is in the same
block, two different command sequences are available. Depending on user PLC specifications, either one of the
following two will be applied.
(1) S function is executed after the movement is completed.
(2) S function is executed at the same time as when the movement command is issued.

II - 93
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

8.1.3 Constant Surface Speed Control

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

With radial direction cutting, this function enables the spindle speed to be changed in accordance with changes in the
radial direction coordinates and the workpiece to be cut with the cutting point always kept at a constant speed (constant
surface speed).

G code Function
G96 Constant surface speed
G97 Constant surface speed cancel

The surface speed is commanded with an S code. For the metric designation, the speed is commanded with an m/min
unit, and for the inch designation, the speed is commanded with a feet/min unit.
In the constant surface speed cancel mode, the S code is a spindle rotation speed command.
The axis for which constant surface speed is controlled is generally the X axis. However, this can be changed with the
parameter settings or with address P in the G96 block.

(Note 1) Under the constant surface speed control (during G96 modal), if the axis targeted for the constant surface
speed control moves toward the spindle center, the spindle rotation speed will increase and may exceed the
allowable speed of the workpiece or chuck, etc. In this case, the workpiece, etc. may jump out during
machining, which may result in breakage of tools or machine or may cause damage to the operators. Thus
make sure to use this control while the "spindle speed clamp" is enabled. When the constant surface speed
control is commanded, keep enough distance from the program zero point.

(Note 2) If there is only one spindle, the spindle will not operate normally if the constant surface speed control
command, S command or spindle related M command is commanded randomly from each part system. These
commands must be commanded from only one certain part system, or commanded simultaneously with timing
synchronization function.
The controller will execute the following control for the constant surface speed control and S commands. The
part system from which an S command was issued last will have the spindle control rights. That part system
will judge whether the constant surface speed command mode is valid or canceled, and will execute spindle
control.

II - 94
M70V Series Specifications Manual
8 Spindle, Tool and Miscellaneous Functions

(g)

G97 S1000 S2000 G96 S200

(f)

G96 S100

(e)

1000r/min S2000r/min S100m/min S200m/min

(d)

(a) (b) (a)

(a) Part system 1

(b) Part system 2
(d) Spindle control rights
(e) Spindle speed
(f) Part system 2 program
(g) Part system 1 program

8.1.4 Spindle Override

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

This function applies override to the rotation speed of a spindle or mill spindle assigned by the machining program
command during automatic operation or by manual operation. There are two types of override.

(1) Type 1 (code method)

Using an external signal, override can be applied to the commanded rotation speed of a spindle or mill spindle
in 10% increments from 50% to 120%.
(2) Type 2 (value setting method)
Using an external signal, override can be applied to the commanded rotation speed of a spindle or mill spindle
in 1% increments from 0% to 200%.

(Note 1) Selection between type 1 and type 2 can be designated by user PLC processing.

II - 95
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

8.1.5 Multiple-spindle Control

Multiple-spindle control is a function that controls all the spindles except for the first spindle for a machine tool equipped
with second, third and fourth spindles (sub-spindles) in addition to the first spindle (main spindle).
Multiple-spindle control I can be switched to multiple-spindle control II or vice versa using a parameter and, by so doing,
the spindle control method changes.

Multiple-spindle
Control based on a spindle selection command (such as G43.1) and spindle control command ([S*****;] or
control I
[SO=*****;]), etc.
(L system only)

Control based on an external signal (spindle command selection signal, spindle selection signal) and spindle control
Multiple-spindle
command ([S*****;] only), etc.
control II
Spindle selection command and control command of [SO=*****;] cannot be used.

The figure below shows an example of the configuration for a machine which is equipped with second and third spindles.

(b)

(a)
(c)

(d)

(a) First spindle

(b) Tool spindle (third spindle)
(c) Second spindle
(d) Tool post 1

II - 96
M70V Series Specifications Manual
8 Spindle, Tool and Miscellaneous Functions

8.1.5.1 Multiple-spindle Control I

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ― ―
L system ○ ○

(1) Spindle selection command

Using the spindle selection command (such as G43.1 [G group 20]), this function makes it possible to switch
the spindle among the first through fourth spindles to which the subsequent S command (S*****) is to apply.

Command format

G43.1 ; First spindle control mode ON

G44.1 ; Selected spindle control mode ON; the selected spindle number is set using a parameter.
G47.1 ; All spindles simultaneous control mode ON

(2) Spindle control command (Using extended word address (S =****))

In addition to using the "S*****" S commands, it is also possible to assign commands which differentiate the
applicable spindle among the first through fourth spindles by using the S =*****.

Command format

S ○ =***** ;
:Number assigned as the spindle number (1: first spindle; 2: second spindle; 3: third spindle; 4:
○ fourth spindle); variables can be designated.
: Rotational speed or surface speed value assigned by 5-digit analog command; variables can be
*****
designated.

8.1.5.2 Multiple-spindle Control II

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

With this function, one S command is used to command to the spindle, and which spindle is selected is decided
depending on a signal from the PLC.
A parameter is used to switch between multi-spindle control II and the conventional multi-spindle control I function.

Spindle command selection, spindle selection

The S command for the spindle is output as the rotation speed command to the spindle which has been selected by
the spindle selection signal ON from the PLC. The selected spindle rotates at the rotation speed which was output.
The spindles which were de-selected by spindle selection signal OFF continue to rotate at the same rotation speed
as the speed immediately before their de-selection. As a result, each of the spindles can be made to rotate
simultaneously at a different rotation speed. The spindle command selection signal is used to select which of the
spindles is to receive the S command from which system.

II - 97
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

8.1.6 Spindle Orientation

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

This function stops the spindle rotation at a certain position.

When Z-phase has not yet been passed, pass Z-phase twice (excluding reciprocations within one rotation), and then
position to the orientation position.
When Z-phase has been passed already, immediately position to the orientation position.
The spindle does not rotate if Z-phase has been passed and the orientation position is already established when
orientation command is issued.
When the spindle has been rotating in the direction opposite from that of orientation rotation when the orientation
command is issued, orientation operation will be executed after decelerating to stop.

(a) Orientation
This function stops the spindle rotation at a certain position when using the digital spindle.
When the orientation command is used, the spindle will rotate several times and then stop at the orientation point.
The orientation position differs depending on the detector.
- When the encoder orientation (PLG and external encoder/ring sensor) is used:
…At the Z-phase position
- When the magnetic sensor (proximity switch) is used:
…At the magnetic sensor installation position

(b) Multi-point orientation

This function performs orientation to a position other than the Z-phase position by inputting a shift amount with the
parameter or PLC. The shift amount is 0 to 35999. (Unit: 360°/36000=0.01°)
(Note 1) Multi-point orientation cannot be executed when using the magnetic sensor.
(Note 2) Orientation is possible only when the gear ratio is 1:1 for the PLG orientation.
(The orientation is completed at the PLG encoder's Z-phase, so when using reduction gears, the
orientation points will be generated at several points during one spindle rotation.)

(c) Orientation imposition advance output

This function turns the spindle in-position signal ON as soon as the spindle reaches within the second in-position
width. Then, the spindle 2nd in-position signal is turned ON as soon as the spindle reaches within the in-position
width.
Since orientation completion can be predicted using this function, it is possible to eliminate the sequence delay
time, etc. for tool changes and other such operations, thereby achieving a faster tact time.

(d) Proximity switch orientation

Proximity switch orientation enables the spindle positioning by providing the proximity switch position installed on
the spindle side as the spindle position zero point.
When the spindle motor and the spindle are connected with V-belt, the spindle position zero point calculated from
the spindle motor position varies due to belt slipping, etc. Thus, the spindle position zero point must be detected
from the proximity switch signal every time orientation or zero point return is carried out.
In the conventional spindle position zero point detection method, the spindle position zero point is calculated from
the spindle drive unit and transmitted to NC when the position detector detects the one-time rotation signal (Z-
phase) for the first time after the system has been turned ON, and the zero point will not be changed thereafter.
In the case of proximity switch signal orientation, NC updates the spindle position zero point every time orientation
or zero point return is carried out.

II - 98
M70V Series Specifications Manual
8 Spindle, Tool and Miscellaneous Functions

8.1.7 Spindle Position Control (Spindle/C Axis Control)

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

This function enables one spindle drive unit to be used also as the C axis (rotary axis) using an external signal.
The C axis servo ON signal is used to switch between the spindle and C axis.

Spindle C axis Spindle

Servo OFF*
At servo OFF: ---------- Spindle (C axis cannot be controlled).
At servo ON: ----------- C axis (spindle cannot be controlled).

- Reference position return state

Reference position return is incomplete when the Z phase has not been passed.
Reference position return is complete when the Z phase has been passed.
- C axis potion data
The NC's internal C axis position data is updated even for the spindle rotation during spindle control.
The C axis coordinate position counter is held during spindle control, and is updated according to the amount
moved during spindle control when the C axis servo READY is turned ON. (The C axis position at servo ON may
differ from the position just before the previous servo OFF.)

II - 99
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

8.1.8 Spindle Synchronization

In a machine with two or more spindles, this function controls the rotation speed and phase of one selected spindle
(synchronized spindle) in synchronization with the rotation of the other selected spindle (basic spindle). This function can
be assigned by G code or by PLC.
It is used in cases where, for instance, workpiece clamped to the basic spindle is to be clamped to the synchronized
spindle instead or where the spindle rotation speed is to be changed while one workpiece remains clamped to both
spindles.

8.1.8.1 Spindle Synchronization I

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ― ―
L system ○ ○

The synchronous spindle is designated and the start/end of the synchronization are commanded with the G command in
the machining program.

Command format

Spindle synchronization control cancel (G113)

This command releases the state of synchronization between two spindles whose rotation has been synchronized by the
spindle synchronization command.

G113 ;

Spindle synchronization control ON (G114.1)

This command is used to designate the basic spindle and the spindle to be synchronized with the basic spindle, and it
places the two designated spindles in the synchronized state.
By designating the synchronized spindle phase shift amount, the phases of the basic spindle and synchronized spindle
can be aligned.

G114.1 Hh1 Dd1 Rr1 Aa1 ;

Hh1 :Selects the basic spindle.
Dd1 :Selects the spindle to be synchronized with the basic spindle.
Rr1 :Designates the synchronized spindle phase shift amount.
Aa1 :Designates the spindle synchronization acceleration/deceleration time constant.

8.1.8.2 Spindle Synchronization II

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ― ―
L system ○ ○

The selection of the spindles to be synchronized, the start of the synchronization and other settings are all designated
from the PLC.

The spindle synchronization control mode is established by inputting the spindle synchronization control signal. While
this mode is established, the synchronized spindle is controlled in synchronization with the rotation speed assigned for
the basic spindle.

II - 100
M70V Series Specifications Manual
8 Spindle, Tool and Miscellaneous Functions

8.1.9 Tool Spindle Synchronization I (Polygon)

8.1.9.1 Tool Spindle Synchronization IA (Spindle-Spindle Polygon)

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ― ―
L system ○ ○

With a machine equipped with two or more spindles under serial connection control, this function enables spindle-spindle
polygon machining (IA) by controlling the workpiece spindle rotation in synchronization with the rotary tool spindle
rotation. The rotary tool spindle and workpiece spindle are designated among the spindles subject to serial connection
control.

Serial connection control for the workpiece spindle and rotary tool spindle can be performed by MDS-*-SP.
This function can be used with the G code list 2 to 5.

Command format

Spindle-spindle polygon machining mode command (G114.2)

This command establishes the spindle-spindle polygon machining mode (IA) in which two spindles are rotated in
synchronization at two different speeds. It is required to designate the rotary tool spindle, workpiece spindle and the
rotational ratios (number of rotary tool teeth and number of work angles) of the two designated spindles.

G114.2 Hh1 Dd1 Ee1 Ll1 Rr1 ;

Hh1 : Selects the rotary tool spindle.
Dd1 : Selects the workpiece spindle.
Ee1 : Designates the rotary tool spindle rotational ratio.
Ll1 : Designates the workpiece spindle rotational ratio.
Rr1 : Synchronized spindle phase shift amount

Spindle-spindle polygon machining mode cancel command (G113)

This command releases the state of synchronization between two spindles whose rotation has been synchronized by the
spindle synchronization command.

G113 ;

II - 101
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

8.1.9.2 Tool Spindle Synchronization IB (Spindle-Spindle Polygon)

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ― ―
L system ○ ○

With a machine equipped with two or more spindles under serial connection control, this function enables spindle-spindle
polygon machining (IB) by controlling the rotary tool spindle rotation in synchronization with the workpiece spindle
rotation. The rotary tool spindle and workpiece spindle are designated among the spindles subject to serial connection
control.
A parameter is used to switch from spindle-spindle polygon machining (IB) to spindle-NC axis polygon machining (IC) or
vice versa.

Serial connection control for the workpiece spindle and rotary tool spindle can be performed by MDS-*-SP.
This function can be used with the G code list 6 and 7.

Command format

Spindle-spindle polygon machining mode ON (G51.2 or G251)

This command establishes the spindle-spindle polygon machining mode in which two spindles are rotated in
synchronization at two different speeds. It is required to designate the rotary tool spindle, workpiece spindle and the
rotational ratios (number of work angles and number of rotary tool teeth) of the two designated spindles.

G51.2 Hh1 Dd1 Pp1 Qq1 Rr1 ;

Hh1 : Selects the workpiece spindle (spindle).
Dd1 : Selects the rotary tool spindle (spindle).
Pp1 : Designates the workpiece spindle rotational ratio.
Qq1 : Designates the rotary tool spindle rotational ratio.
Rr1 : Synchronized spindle phase shift amount

Spindle-spindle polygon machining cancel command (G50.2)

G50.2 ;

II - 102
M70V Series Specifications Manual
8 Spindle, Tool and Miscellaneous Functions

8.1.9.3 Tool Spindle Synchronization IC (Spindle-NC Axis Polygon)

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ― ―
L system ― ○

This function controls so that the workpiece (spindle) and tool (NC axis) synchronously rotate at the commanded ratio
and allows polygon machining. Spindle-spindle polygon machining (IB) and spindle-NC axis polygonal machining (IC)
can be switched by the parameter.
This function can be used with the G code list 6 and 7.

Command format

Polygon machining mode ON (G51.2 or G251)

G51.2 Pp1 Qq1 ; Spindle synchronization start (Polygon machining mode start)
:Workpiece axis selection (spindle)
P: Spindle rotational ratio
Pp1
Q: Rotary tool axis rotational ratio
Qq1
Rotation direction is specified with a sign.
+: Forward run / -: Reverse run

Polygon machining mode OFF (G50.2)

G50.2 ; Spindle synchronization cancel (Polygon machining mode cancel)

II - 103
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

8.1.10 Tool Spindle Synchronization II (Hobbing)

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ― ―
L system ― ○

This function is to cut the gear with hob (hob cutter).

A spur gear can be machined by synchronizing and rotating the hob axis and the workpiece axis in a constant ratio.
A helical gear can be machined by compensating the workpiece axis according to the gear torsion angle for the Z axis
movement.

Spur gears Helical gears

By synchronizing and rotating the hob axis and the workpiece axis in a constant rotation ratio, a gear is machined so that
the cutter is engaged with gear.

(a)

(b)

(a) Hob
(b) Gear
Hob axis : Rotary tool axis on which a hob is mounted.
Workpiece axis : Rotary axis on which a workpiece is mounted.

II - 104
M70V Series Specifications Manual
8 Spindle, Tool and Miscellaneous Functions

8.1.11 Spindle Speed Clamp

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

This function is to limit the spindle rotation speed to the ranges between the maximum rotation speed and the minimum
rotation speed.
This function can be set by a parameter or a program.

G92 S__ Q__ ; Spindle clamp speed setting

S : Maximum clamp rotation speed
Q : Minimum clamp rotation speed

An alarm will occur if the constant surface speed control is conducted without issuing the spindle clamp speed command
(G92).

II - 105
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

8.2 Tool Functions (T)

8.2.1 Tool Functions (T Command)

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

The command is issued with an 8-digit number following address T (T0 - T99999999). The tool function is used to
command the tool No. In the lathe specification controller, the tool compensation (tool length compensation, tool nose
wear compensation) Nos. are also indicated.
(1) M system
Tool function, or T function, is used to designate the tool No. and tool compensation No.
This can be designated with an 8-digit number following address T (0 to 99999999). Up to four sets of T
commands can be issued in one block. Note that the number of T commands to be issued within the same
block is determined by parameter.
BCD output or binary output can be selected by parameter.
Output signal is 8-digit BCD code and start signal, signed 32-bit binary data and start signal, or non-signed 32-
bit binary data and start signal.
T function can be designated with any other kind of commands. In the case where a movement command is in
the same block, two different command sequences are available. Depending on user PLC specifications,
either one of the following two will be applied.

(a) T function is executed after the movement is completed.

(b) T function is executed at the same time as when the movement command is issued.

Processing and completion sequences are required for all the T commands.
(Note 1) In some setting and display units, there may be screens that cannot display all eight digits.

(2) L system
The command is issued with an 8-digit number following address T (T0 to T99999999). The high-order 6 digits
or 7 digits are designated as the tool No., and the low-order 2 digits or 1 digit are designated as the offset No.
Which method is to be used is designated with parameters.

6

Tool offset No.

Tool No.

6

Tool offset No.

Tool No.

The 6-digit (or 7-digit) tool No. code data and start signal will be output to the PLC.
All the other details are the same as in M system.

II - 106
M70V Series Specifications Manual
8 Spindle, Tool and Miscellaneous Functions

8.3 Miscellaneous Functions (M)

8.3.1 Miscellaneous Functions

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

Miscellaneous function, or M function, is used to command auxiliary functions for NC, such as rotating the spindle
forward/backward or stopping it, as well as turning the cooling oil ON/OFF.
This can be designated with an 8-digit number following address M (0 to 99999999). Up to four sets of M commands can
be issued in one block. Note that the number M commands to be issued within the same block is determined by
parameter.
BCD output or binary output can be selected by parameter.
Output signal is 8-digit BCD code and start signal, signed 32-bit binary data and start signal, or non-signed 32-bit binary
data and start signal.
(Example) G00 Xx1 Mm1 Mm2 Mm3 Mm4 ;
(1) When 5 or more sets are commanded in one block, only the last 4 sets are valid.
M00, M01, M02, M30, M98 and M99 are used only for some specific purposes and cannot be assigned as
regular M functions.
(2) Processing and completion sequences are required for all M functions except M98 and M99.
Refer to user PLC specification for the relationship between values and functions.
As for M00, M01, M02 and M30, next block is not read into pre-reading buffer due to ban on pre-reading
processing.
(3) Although M00, M01, M02, and M30 output an independent signal for each, the independent output of M00,
M01, M02 and M30 will be reset upon pressing a reset key.
(4) M command can be designated with other commands within the same block. In the case where a movement
command is in the same block, two different command sequences are available. Depending on user PLC
specifications, either one of the following two will be applied.
(a) M function is executed after the movement is completed.
(b) M function is executed at the same time as when the movement command is issued.
Processing and completion sequences are required for all the M commands except M98 and M99.
(Note 1) In some setting and display units, there may be screens that cannot display all eight digits.

II - 107
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

8.3.2 Multiple M Codes in 1 Block

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

Up to four sets of M commands can be issued in a block.

Respective processing and completion sequences are required for all M commands included in a block (except M98 and
M99).
(Note 1) This function requires a built-in PLC. In this case, the code data and start signals of all the M commands in the
same block are transferred simultaneously from the controller to the PLC, and so high-speed machine control
can be done by the PLC processing sequence.

8.3.3 M Code Independent Output

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

When the M00, M01, M02 or M30 command is assigned during an automatic operation (tape, memory, MDI) or by a
manual numerical command, the signal of this function is output. It is turned OFF after the miscellaneous function
finishes or by the reset & rewind signal.

Machining program M code independent output Response to controller

M00 M00 Fin1 or Fin2
M01 M01 Fin1 or Fin2
M02 M02 Reset & rewind
M30 M30 Reset & rewind

If movement or dwell command exists in the same block as these M commands, this signal is output upon completion of
the movement or dwell command.

II - 108
M70V Series Specifications Manual
8 Spindle, Tool and Miscellaneous Functions

8.3.4 Miscellaneous Function Finish

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

These signals inform the CNC system that a miscellaneous function (M), spindle function (S), tool function (T) or 2nd
miscellaneous function (A, B, C) has been assigned and that the PLC which has received it has completed the required
operation. They include miscellaneous function finish signal 1 (FIN1) and miscellaneous function finish signal 2 (FIN2).

Miscellaneous function finish signal 1 (FIN1)

When the controller checks that FIN1 is ON, it sets the function strobes OFF. Furthermore, when the PLC checks that
the function strobes are OFF, it sets FIN1 OFF. The controller checks that FIN1 is OFF and advances to the next block.
Below is an example of a time chart applying when a miscellaneous function has been assigned.
Command
Next block

Miscellaneous function strobe (MF)

Miscellaneous function finish signal

(FIN1)

Miscellaneous function finish signal 2 (FIN2)

When the controller checks that FIN2 is ON, it sets the function strobes OFF and simultaneously advances to the next
block. The PLC checks that the strobe signals are OFF and sets FIN2 OFF.
Below is an example of a time chart applying when a miscellaneous function has been assigned.

Command
Next block

Miscellaneous function strobe (MF)

Miscellaneous function finish signal

(FIN2)

II - 109
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

8.3.5 M Code Output during Axis Traveling

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ― ―
L system ― ○

This function controls the timing at which miscellaneous functions are output, and it outputs a miscellaneous function
when axis reaches at the designated position movement.

The command format is as follows.

G117 Xx1 Zz1 Cc1 □ □ □ □ ;

G117 : Command of M code output during axis traveling
Xx1,Zz1,Cc1 : Movement start points
□□□□ : Miscellaneous function

(1) This command is issued independently immediately before the block with the movement command that
activates the miscellaneous function.
(2) Single block stop does not apply to this command.
(3) The maximum number of groups to which the miscellaneous functions in the G117 block can be issued is as
follows:

M commands 4 sets
S commands 2 sets
T commands 1 set
2nd miscellaneous
1 set
function

(4) This command can be issued in up to two consecutive blocks.

When issued in three or more consecutive blocks, the last two blocks will be valid.
(Example) G117 Xx1 Zz1 Mm1 Mm2 Mm3 Mm4 ;
G117 Xx2 Zz2 Mm5 Mm6 Mm7 Mm8 ;
G01 X200 Z200 ;
:

Mm 1 (E) (200, 200)

Mm 2 (x 2 ,z 2 )
Mm 3
Mm 5
Mm 4
Mm 6
(x 1,z 1) Mm 7
(S)
Mm 8

(E) End point

(S) Start point

II - 110
M70V Series Specifications Manual
8 Spindle, Tool and Miscellaneous Functions

8.3.6 Miscellaneous Command High-speed Output

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

The miscellaneous command high-speed output shortens a processing time per miscellaneous function. There are two
functions that can be selected individually.

(1) Change miscellaneous command completion method

Select one of the following methods by the parameter.
High-speed method:
The controller inverts a strobe signal logically at the time of outputting a miscellaneous command. The PLC
performs the designated operation and logically inverts the high-speed miscellaneous function finish signal
(MFIN1 to 4, SFIN1 to 6, TFIN1 to 4, BFIN1 to 4). The controller completes the miscellaneous function when
the strobe signal and the high-speed miscellaneous function finish signal become the same logic level.
Normal method:
Conventional method (Refer to "8.3.4 Miscellaneous Function Finish" for details.)

(2) Selecting miscellaneous command completion method

Select whether or not to wait for a finish signal from the PLC using the parameter.
It can be selected for M, S, T or B individually.

II - 111
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

- High-speed method that waits for a finish signal from the PLC
The miscellaneous function completes by matching the logic level of the finish signal with that of the strobe signal.

Machining program Mxx Myy Next block

Mxx code Myy code

M code data data data

Mxx Myy
Strobe (MFn) strobe
strobe

MFINn

- High-speed method that does not wait for a finish signal from the PLC
When a series of miscellaneous commands is issued, the completion of the previous miscellaneous command is
waited.

Machining program Mxx Myy Next block

Mxx code
M code data data
Myy code data

Mxx
Strobe (MFn) Myy strobe
strobe

MFINn

- Normal method that waits for a finish signal from the PLC
Conventional method.

Machining program Mxx Myy Next block

Mxx code Myy code data

M code data
data

Strobe (MFn) Mxx Myy

strobe strobe

FIN2

- Normal method that does not wait for a finish signal from the PLC
When a series of miscellaneous commands is issued, the completion of the previous miscellaneous command is
waited.

Machining program Mxx Myy Next block

Mxx code Myy code data

M code data
data

Strobe (MFn) Mxx Myy

strobe strobe

FIN2

II - 112
M70V Series Specifications Manual
8 Spindle, Tool and Miscellaneous Functions

8.4 2nd Miscellaneous Functions (B)

8.4.1 2nd Miscellaneous Functions

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

The code data and start signals are output when an 8-digit number is assigned following the address code A, B or C -
whichever does not duplicate the axis name being used.
Processing and complete sequences must be incorporated on the PLC side for all 2nd miscellaneous commands.
(Note 1) This function requires a built-in PLC.
(Note 2) There are some screens in the setting and display unit that cannot display all eight digits.

II - 113
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

II - 114
9
Tool Compensation

II - 115
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

9.1 Tool Length/Tool Position

9.1.1 Tool Length Compensation

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

These commands make it possible to control the axis movement by compensating the position of the end point of the
movement command by a compensation amount set on the tool compensation screen.
Using this function, it is possible to compensate the difference in distance between the actual position of the machine's
tool nose and the program coordinate position made by the tool length and to enhance both the programming and
operational efficiency.

(1) M system

G43 Zz1 Hh1 ;

G44 Zz1 Hh1 ;
: Tool length compensation command + direction (z1+h1)
G43
: Tool length compensation command + direction (z1-h1)
G44
: Compensation axis. Tool length compensation can be provided not only for the Z axis but for all the other
Zz1
axes (X, Y, etc.) which can be controlled in the system.
Hh1
: Compensation No.

Compensation can be canceled by the following G commands.

G49 ;
G43 H0 ;
G44 H0 ;
(Note) When the tool length compensation axis is returned to the reference position, the compensation of that axis is
canceled.

(Example) Example of tool length compensation using a combination with tool length measurement type I

G28 X0 Y0 Z0
T01; Z + 2.0
T02 M06;
G91 G00 G43 M M H01 =
Z2.0 H01;
– 450.000

H01 =
(Note) The tool length
compensation amount is set – 450.000
Z 0.0 Z 2.0
as a negative value such as (a) (a)
H01 = -450.000.
(b) (b)

(a) Workpiece
(b) Table

II - 116
M70V Series Specifications Manual
9 Tool Compensation

(2) L system
(a) Shape compensation
Tool length is compensated in reference to the programmed base position. The programmed base position is
usually the center of the tool rest or the nose position of the base tool.
(h) (i)

(e)
(c)

(d) (b)

(d)

(a)

(a)

(a) Z-axis tool length compensation

(b) Tool used for machining
(c) Base tool
(d) X-axis tool length compensation
(e) Base position (base point)
(h) The programmed base position is the center of the tool rest:
(i) The programmed base position is the nose of the base tool:

(b) Wear compensation

The wear of a tool nose can be compensated.

X-axis tool nose wear

compensation amount Z

Z-axis tool nose wear compensation amount

II - 117
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

(c) Command format

Tool compensation is performed by a T command. It is specified in eight digits following address T. Tool
compensation is divided into two types: tool length compensation and tool nose wear compensation. The Nos.
of such two types of compensations are specified by a parameter. Also a parameter is used to specify whether
the compensation Nos. is specified by one or two low-order digits of a T command.

(i) Specifying tool length and wear compensation Nos. together using one or two low-order digits of the T
command

6
Tool length compensation No. and
tool nose wear compensation No.
Tool No.

6 Tool length compensation No. and

tool nose wear compensation No.
Tool No.

(ii) Specifying tool length and wear compensation Nos. separately

6
Tool nose wear compensation No.
Tool length compensation No.
Tool No.
6
Tool nose wear compensation No.
Tool length compensation No.
Tool No.

The tool compensation for the lathe is valid only for the X and Z axes. If an additional axis (Y axis) is added,
the tool compensation will be validated for the additional axis.
The additional axis is the third or fourth axis which is selected using a parameter.

II - 118
M70V Series Specifications Manual
9 Tool Compensation

9.1.2 Tool Position Offset

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ― ―

This function uses commands to control the movement by changing the positions of the end points of the movement
commands to positions which have been extended or reduced by an amount equivalent to the tool compensation
amount.
This function can be used to compensate for the difference in distance between the position where the tool on the
machine is actually mounted and the programmed coordinate position based on the tool position and thereby improve
the efficiency of both machining and operation.

G45 G00 Xx1 Yy1 Dd1 ;

G45 : Tool position offset command
Xx1,Yy1 : Movement axes
Dd1 : Offset No.

With tool position offset, the offset operation is performed only for blocks containing a G45 to G48 command.

G45 command G46 command G47 command G48 command

Extension by amount equivalent Reduction by amount equivalent Extension by twice the offset Reduction by twice the offset
to offset amount to offset amount amount amount

Program Program Program Program

command command command command

Actual move- Actual move- Actual move- Actual move-

ment amount ment amount ment amount ment amount

(1) If the start and end points are on an axis, the radius can be extended or reduced only for one-quarter, one-half and
three-quarter arcs.
(2) In the case of absolute commands, the position is extended or reduced in each axial direction from the end point of
the previous block along the line of the movement toward the position commanded in the block containing the G45
(or G46, G47 or G48) command.
(3) In the case of simultaneous n axes command, the same amount of offset is applied to all the axes that have the
command within the range of the number of the axes which can be simultaneously controlled. Tool position offset is
also valid for additional axes.

9.1.3 Tool Compensation for Additional Axes

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ― ―
L system ○ ○

The tool compensation for the lathe is valid for the X and Z axes. If an additional axis (Y axis) is added, the tool
compensation will be validated for the additional axis.

II - 119
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

9.2 Tool Radius

9.2.1 Tool Radius Compensation

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ― ―

These commands function to provide tool radius compensation. Through a combination with the G command and D
address assignment, they compensate for the actual tool center path either inside or outside the programmed path by an
amount equivalent to the tool radius.
The tool path is calculated by the intersection point arithmetic system and, as a result, excessive cut amounts on the
inside of corners are avoided.

G code Function
G38 Vector designation during tool radius compensation
G39 Corner arc during tool radius compensation
G40 Tool radius compensation cancel
G41 Tool radius compensation left command
G42 Tool radius compensation right command

(c)

r r

(a)
(b)

(a) r: Tool radius compensation amount

(b) Programmed path
(c) Tool center path

The tool radius compensation command controls the compensation from that block in which G41 or G42 is commanded.
In the tool radius compensation mode, the program is read up to five blocks ahead including blocks with no movement,
and interference check using tool radius is conducted up to three blocks ahead in any of those blocks with movement.

G17 G01 G41 Xx1 Yy1 Dd1 ;

G17 : Compensation plane
G01 : Cutting command
G41 : Tool radius compensation left command
Xx1,Yy1 : Movement axis
Dd1 : Compensation No.

The compensation plane, movement axes and next advance direction vector are based on the plane selection command
designated by G17 to G19.
G17: XY plane, X, Y, I, J
G18: ZX plane, Z, X, K, I
G19: YZ plane, Y, Z, J, K

II - 120
M70V Series Specifications Manual
9 Tool Compensation

An arc is inserted at the corner by the following command during tool radius compensation.

G39 Xx1 Yy1 ;

G39 : Corner arc during tool radius compensation
Xx1,Yy1 : Movement amount

(a) (b)

(c)

(a) Tool center path

(b) Arc inserted at corner
(c) Programmed path

The compensation vector can be changed in following two ways.

G38 Xx1 Yy1 ;

G38 : Vector designation for tool radius compensation
Xx1,Yy1 : Movement amount

The tool radius compensation vector amount and direction are retained.

G38 Xx1 Yy1 Ii1 Jj1 Dd1 ;

G38 : Vector designation for tool radius compensation
Xx1,Yy1 : Movement amount
Ii1,Jj1 : Compensation vector direction
Dd1 : Compensation vector length

The tool radius compensation vector direction is updated by I and J.

(b) (d)
(c)
N11 G01 Xx11;
N12 N13 N12 G38 Xx12 Yy12;
N11 N14 N13 G38 Xx13 Yy13;
N15 N14 G38 Xx14 Ii14 Ji14 Dd14;
(a)
N15 G40 Xx15 Yy15;

(a) Intersection point vector

(b) Tool center path
(c) Vector with length D (i14, j14)
(d) Holding of previous intersection point vector

II - 121
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

The tool radius compensation is canceled by the following command.

G40 Xx1 Yy1 Ii1 Jj1 ;

G40 : Tool radius compensation cancel
Xx1,Yy1 : Movement amount
Ii1,Jj1 : Compensation vector direction

The vector prior to canceling is prepared by calculating the intersection point with the I and J direction.

(b)
N14 (a) N11 G01 Xx11 ;
N12 Xx12 Yy12 ;
N12 N13 Xx13 Yy13 ;
N13
N11 N14 G40 Xx14 Ii14 Jj14 ;
(i14,J14)

(a) When i and j commands are assigned to G40

(b) Tool center path

9.2.3 Tool Nose Radius Compensation (G40/41/42)

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ― ―
L system ○ ○

Corresponding to the tool No., the tool nose is assumed to be a half circle of radius R, and compensation is made so that
the half circle touches the programmed path.

G code Function
G40 Nose R compensation cancel
G41 Nose R compensation left command
G42 Nose R compensation right command

(a)

(b)

(a) Compensated path

(b) Programmed path

Nose R interference check

In the nose radius compensation mode, the program is read up to five blocks ahead including blocks with no movement,
and an interference check using the nose radius is conducted up to three blocks ahead in any of those blocks with
movement.

II - 122
M70V Series Specifications Manual
9 Tool Compensation

9.2.4 Automatic Decision of Nose Radius Compensation Direction (G46/40)

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ― ―
L system ○ ○

The nose radius compensation direction is automatically determined from the tool nose point and the specified
movement vector.

G code Function
Nose radius compensation cancel
G40
Nose radius compensation ON (Automatic decision of compensation
G46
direction)

The compensation directions based on the movement vectors at the tool nose points are as follows:

Tool nose Tool nose

direction Tool
nose
point

direction Toolnose
point

Tool

Tool
nose nose

progress 1 2 3 4 progress

direction
5 6 7 8
direction

R R L L R L

R L L R R L
(tool nose points 1 to 4)

(tool nose points 5 to 8)

L R R L L R
Mouvement vectors

Mouvement vectors

L R L L R R

L L R R L R

L R R L L R

R L L R R L

R L R R L L
Range of each Range of each
tool nose point tool nose point
(1 to 4) (5 to 8)

9.2.5 Tool Radius Compensation Diameter Designation

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ― ―

Tool diameter designation handles the compensation amount as diameter value and compensates the amount set in the
tool compensation amount screen when tool radius compensation (G41/G42 command) is commanded.
Whether compensation amount is handled in radius value or diameter value is switched by the parameter.

II - 123
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

9.3 Tool Compensation Amount

9.3.1 Number of Tool Compensation Sets

The number of tool compensation sets is as follows.

<M system>

Independent for part systems

Common for part systems or 1-part
Function name and multi-part system
system specification
specification
Number of tool compensation sets (400 sets) 400 sets 200 sets/part system

<L system>

Independent for part systems

Common for part systems or 1-part
Function name and multi-part system
system specification
specification
Number of tool compensation sets (80 sets) 80 sets 40 sets/part system

(Note) Whether the tool compensation memory is provided commonly for the part systems or independently for the
part systems depends on the parameter settings.

9.3.1.3 80 Sets
M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ― ―
L system ○ ○

9.3.1.5 400 Sets

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ― ―

II - 124
M70V Series Specifications Manual
9 Tool Compensation

9.3.2 Compensation Memory

9.3.2.1 Tool Shape/Wear Compensation Amount

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

This function registers the tool shape compensation and wear compensation amounts. Compensation may encompass
two or more axes.
(1) Shape compensation amount
The tool length compensation amount, tool radius compensation amount, nose radius compensation amount,
nose radius imaginary tool tip point or tool width can be set as the shape compensation amount.
The compensation amount that can be set and used differs depending on whether compensation amount
setting type I,II or III is used.

(2) Wear compensation amount

When the tip of the tool used has become worn, the wear compensation amount is used to compensate this
wear. Types of wear compensation amounts include the tool length wear compensation amount, tool radius
wear compensation amount, and nose radius wear compensation amount.
The wear compensation amount can be used with compensation amount setting types II and III, and it is
added to the shape compensation amount for compensation.

II - 125
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

(a) Type I: 1-axis compensation amount [M system]

This is the value that is used by rotary tools.
As the tool length compensation amount, among the compensation amounts for the position of the tool
moving in the direction parallel to the control axis, the compensation amount in the longitudinal direction
of the rotary tool is registered. The tool length compensation amount is set as a minus value.
As the tool radius compensation amount, among the compensation amounts for the position of the tool
moving in the direction parallel to the control axis, the compensation amount in the radial direction of the
rotary tool is registered. The tool radius compensation amount is set as a plus value.
One compensation amount data is registered in one compensation No., and the compensation Nos. are
assigned using the address D or H commands. When a No. is assigned by a D address command,
compensation is provided in the form of the tool radius; when it is assigned by an H address command, it
is provided in the form of the tool length.

(b) Type II: 1-axis compensation amounts/with wear compensation [M system]

As with type I, type II is for the compensation amounts used by rotary tools.
With type II, four kinds of compensation amount data are registered in one compensation No.: the tool
length compensation amount, tool length wear compensation amount, tool radius compensation amount,
and tool radius wear compensation amount.
When a compensation No. is assigned by address D as the compensation amount, the tool radius is
compensated using the amount obtained by adding the shape compensation amount and tool radius
wear compensation amount. Further, the tool length is compensation using the amount obtained by
adding the shape compensation amount and tool length wear compensation amount.

Tool length compensation amount Wear compensation amount when

Compensation types I Compensation types I and II using type II

R R M

(a)
(a) (b)

(c)
(a)
(d) (d) (b)

(e) (e)

(a) Tool length compensation amount (a) Tool length wear compensation amount
(b) Shape compensation amount (b) Tool radius wear compensation amount
(c) Tool radius wear compensation amount
(d) Workpiece
(e) Table

II - 126
M70V Series Specifications Manual
9 Tool Compensation

(c) Type III: 2-axis compensation amounts [L system]

Type III is for the compensation amounts used by non-rotary tools.
As the compensation amounts, the tool length along the X, Y and Z axes and the wear amount along
each of these axes, the nose radius and nose radius wear amount, tool tip point P and tool width can be
registered.
Compensation is carried out in the directions of the X, Y and Z axes from the base position in the
program. Generally, the center of the tool rest or the tip of the base tool is used as the programmed base
position.
1. The programmed base position is the center of 2. The programmed base position is the tip of the
the tool rest: base tool:

(b) (e)
(b)
(a) (d)

(c)

(a)
(c)
(a) X-axis tool length compensation amount (a) Z-axis tool length compensation amount
(b) Base position (base point) (b)Tool used for machining
(c) Z-axis tool length compensation amount (c)X-axis tool length compensation amount
(d) Base position (base point)
(e) Base tool

The tool tip contour arc radius (nose radius) of a non-rotary tool with an arc (nose radius) at its tip is
registered as the nose radius compensation amount.

(b)
(b)

(c)
(a) Z
(a)
(c)

(a) Nose radius compensation amount (a) Z-axis tool length wear compensation amount
(b) Tool nose center (b) Tool nose
(c) Imaginary tool nose point (c) X-axis tool length wear compensation amount

The X-axis tool length compensation amount, Z-axis tool length compensation amount and nose radius
compensation amount are set as plus amounts.
The compensation type (I,II or III) is set using a parameter.

II - 127
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

II - 128
10
Coordinate System

II - 129
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

10.1 Coordinate System Type and Setting

The coordinate system handled by the NC is shown below.

The points that can be commanded with the movement command are points on the local coordinate system or machine
coordinate system.

L0

G52
L0

W G52
0 - 54

G54
G55 W
0 - 55

G92

EXT

M0

ref

L0 Local coordinate system zero point Offset set with parameters

G52 Local coordinate system offset (*1) Offset set with program
W0-54 Workpiece coordinate system zero point (G54) (0 when power is turned ON)
W0-55 Workpiece coordinate system zero point (G55)
G54 Workpiece coordinate system (G54) offset (*1) (*1) The G52 offset is available independently for
G55 Workpiece coordinate system (G55) offset G54 to G59.
G92 G92 coordinate system shift
EXT External workpiece coordinate offset
M0 Machine coordinate system zero point
ref Reference position

II - 130
M70V Series Specifications Manual
10 Coordinate System

10.1.1 Machine Coordinate System

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

The machine coordinate system is used to express the prescribed positions (such as the tool change position and stroke
end position) characteristic to the machine, and it is automatically set immediately upon completion of the first dog-type
reference position return after the power has been turned ON or immediately after the power has been turned ON if the
absolute position specifications apply.
The programming format for the commands to move the tool on the machine coordinate system is given below.

G53 (G90) (G00) Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 ;

G53 : Coordinate system selection
G90 : Incremental/absolute commands
G00 : Movement mode [M system]
Xx1,Yy1,Zz1 : End point coordinate on the machine coordinate system

If the incremental or absolute commands and movement mode have been omitted, operation complies with the modal
command that prevails at the time.
G53 (movement on machine coordinate system) is an unmodal command which is effective only in the block where it is
assigned. The workpiece coordinate system being selected is not changed by this command.

M R1
(b)

(a)

W1

G53 G90 G00 X0 Y0 ;

(a) Workpiece coordinate system 1(G54)

(b) Machine coordinate system(G53)
R1: 1st reference position

II - 131
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

10.1.2 Coordinate System Setting

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

Among the workpiece coordinate systems with the G92, the program coordinate system (the programmed zero point)
can be changed.
When a coordinate system setting is assigned using the G92 command, the G92 offset amount is applied so that the
machine position in the current workpiece coordinate system is set to the coordinate position assigned by the G92
command, as shown in the figure below, and the workpiece coordinate systems are shifted accordingly. The machine
does not run, and all the workpiece coordinate systems from G54 to G59 referenced to the machine coordinate system
(or the external workpiece coordinate system if the external workpiece coordinate offset has been set) are shifted.
Offset of coordinate system by G92 coordinate system setting

Example where W1 is shifted to new W1 when the machine was at the position (x0, y0) above W1 and the G92 Xx1
Yy1; command was assigned when the workpiece coordinate system W1 is modal
(external workpiece coordinate system offset = 0; interrupt amount offset = 0)

(b)
(a) X : x 0 - x1
Y : y 0 - y1
M
(d)

y1

W1
y0
x1
x0
(c)

(a) Machine coordinate system

(b) G92 offset amount
(c) Machine position
(d) New W1

The shifted coordinate system is returned to its original position by dog-type reference position return or the program.

II - 132
M70V Series Specifications Manual
10 Coordinate System

When the coordinate system setting is commanded by G92, all the workpiece coordinate systems from G54 through G59
referenced to the machine coordinate system undergo a shift.

(a) (b)

M M
(M) (M)

(d)
W1
y’ G92 y1 (c)
Xx1
x’ Yy1 x1
(e) (f)

(a) Coordinate system created by automatic coordinate system setting

(b) Coordinate system after coordinate system setting by G92
(c) Old W1
(d) New W1
(e) Tool position
(f) G92 command position
(M) Machine coordinate system

(1) All the workpiece coordinates from G54 to G59 move in parallel.
(2) There are two ways to return a shifted coordinate system to its original position.
(a) Carry out dog-type reference position return
(b) Move to machine coordinate system zero point and assign G92 and G53 commands in same block to set
the machine coordinate system.

Positioning at machine coordinate system
G90 G53 G00 X0 Y0 ; zero point.

G92 G53 X0 Y0 ; Coordinate system zero setting in machine

coordinate system.
This returns all the workpiece coordinates
from G54 to G59 to their original positions.

II - 133
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

10.1.3 Automatic Coordinate System Setting

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

After the power is turned ON, the basic machine coordinate system and the workpiece coordinate system are
automatically set without executing the zero point return.
The coordinate systems created are given below.
(1) Machine coordinate system corresponding to G53
(2) G54 to G59 workpiece coordinate system
(3) Local coordinate systems created under G54 to G59 workpiece coordinate systems
The distances from the zero point of G53 machine coordinate system are set to the controller coordinate related
parameters.

II - 134
M70V Series Specifications Manual
10 Coordinate System

10.1.4 Workpiece Coordinate System Selection

10.1.4.1 Workpiece Coordinate System Selection (6 Sets)

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

When a multiple number of workpieces with the same shape are to be machined, these commands enable the same
shape to be machined by executing a single machining program in the coordinate system of each workpiece.
Up to 6 workpiece coordinate systems can be selected.
The G54 workpiece coordinate system is selected when the power is turned ON or the reset signal which cancels the
modal information is input.

G code Function
G54 Workpiece coordinate system 1 (W1)
G55 Workpiece coordinate system 2 (W2)
G56 Workpiece coordinate system 3 (W3)
G57 Workpiece coordinate system 4 (W4)
G58 Workpiece coordinate system 5 (W5)
G59 Workpiece coordinate system 6 (W6)

The command formats to select the workpiece coordinate system and to move on the workpiece coordinate system are
given below.

(G90) G54 G00 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 ;

(G90) : (Absolute command)
G54 : Coordinate system selection
G00 : Movement mode
Xx1,Yy1,Zz1 : Coordinate position of end point

II - 135
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

The workpiece coordinate zero points are provided as distances from the zero point of the machine coordinate system.
Settings can be performed in one of the following three ways:
(1) Setting using the setting and display unit
(2) Setting using commands assigned from the machining program
(3) Setting from the user PLC

(b) M

W2 W1
(d) (c)

(a)

G90 G56 G00 X0 Y0 ;

W4 W3
(f) (e)

(a) Start
(b) Machine coordinate system (G53)
(c) Workpiece coordinate system 1 (G54)
(d) Workpiece coordinate system 2 (G55)
(e) Workpiece coordinate system 3 (G56)
(f) Workpiece coordinate system 4 (G57)

II - 136
M70V Series Specifications Manual
10 Coordinate System

10.1.4.2 Extended Workpiece Coordinate System Selection (48 Sets) G54.1P1 to P48
M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

When a multiple number of workpieces with the same shape are to be machined, these commands enable the same
shape to be machined by executing a single machining program in the coordinate system of each workpiece.
In addition to the six workpiece coordinate systems G54 to G59, 48 workpiece coordinate systems can be used by
assigning G54.1Pn command.
The command format to select the workpiece coordinate system using the G54.1Pn command and to move on the
workpiece coordinate system are given below.

(G90) G54.1Pn G00 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 ;

G90 : (Absolute command)
G54.1Pn : Coordinate system selection
G00 : Movement mode
Xx1,Yy1,Zz1 :Coordinate position of end point

The numerical value n of P following G54.1 indicates each workpiece coordinate system. Specify a value between 1 and
48.
The workpiece coordinate zero points are provided as distances from the zero point of the machine coordinate system.
Settings can be performed in one of the following three ways:
(a) Setting using the setting and display unit
(b) Setting using commands assigned from the machining program
(c) Setting from the user PLC

(Note) While the G54.1Pn (extended workpiece coordinate system selection) is modal, the local coordinate offset is
reduced to zero, and the G52 command cannot be used.

II - 137
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

10.1.5 External Workpiece Coordinate Offset

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

External workpiece coordinate offset that serves as the reference for all the workpiece coordinate systems is available
outside the workpiece coordinates.
By setting the external workpiece coordinate offset, the external workpiece coordinate system can be shifted from the
machine coordinate system, and all the workpiece coordinate systems can be simultaneously shifted by an amount
equivalent to the offset.
When the external workpiece coordinate offset is zero, the external workpiece coordinate systems coincide with the
machine coordinate system.
It is not possible to assign movement commands with the external workpiece coordinate selected.

(a) Workpiece coordinate 3 (G56)

(f) (e) (d)
(b) Workpiece coordinate 2 (G55)

(c) Workpiece coordinate 1 (G54)

(d) Workpiece coordinate 6 (G59)

(c) (b) (a) (e) Workpiece coordinate 5 (G58)

(f) Workpiece coordinate 4 (G57)

(M) (h) (g) Machine coordinate zero

point
(g)
(h) (= External workpiece
coordinate system)

(q) External workpiece

coordinate system
(f) (e) (d)
(M) Machine coordinate system

(c) (b) (a)

(q)

(p)
(M)

(g)

II - 138
M70V Series Specifications Manual
10 Coordinate System

10.1.6 Workpiece Coordinate System Preset (G92.1)

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ― ―
L system ○ ○

This function presets the workpiece coordinate system, which has been shifted by the programmed command or the
manual operation, as the workpiece coordinate system which has been offset by the programmed command (G92.1)
from the machine zero point by an amount equivalent to the workpiece coordinate offset amount.

The workpiece coordinate system is shifted from the machine coordinate system when the such operations or the
programmed commands as below have been performed.
- When manual intervention has occurred in the manual absolute OFF status
- When a movement command was performed in the machine lock status
- When movement was initiated by handle interrupt
- When a movement command was performed in the mirror image mode
- When a local coordinate system was set using the G52 command
- When a workpiece coordinate system was shifted using the G92 command
Just as when manual reference position return has been performed, this function presets the workpiece coordinate
system which has been shifted once to the workpiece coordinate system which has been offset from the machine zero
point by an amount equivalent to the workpiece coordinate offset amount.
Furthermore, whether to preset relative coordinates as well is selected with a parameter.

Command format

G92.1 (G50.3) X0 Y0 Z0 α0 ; (where α is an additional axis)

Designate the addresses of the axes to be preset.

Axes whose addresses have not designated will not be preset.
Depending on the command type, G50.3 command is used in stead.
A program error results when a value other than 0 is commanded.

II - 139
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

10.1.7 Local Coordinate System

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

This function is for assigning a coordinate system on the workpiece coordinate system now being selected. This enables
the workpiece coordinate system to be changed temporarily.
The local coordinate system can be selected independently on each workpiece coordinate system G54 to G59.

G code Function
G54 G52 Local coordinate system on the workpiece coordinate system 1
G55 G52 Local coordinate system on the workpiece coordinate system 2
G56 G52 Local coordinate system on the workpiece coordinate system 3
G57 G52 Local coordinate system on the workpiece coordinate system 4
G58 G52 Local coordinate system on the workpiece coordinate system 5
G59 G52 Local coordinate system on the workpiece coordinate system 6

The command format of the local coordinate system is given below.

(G54) G52 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 ;

(G54) : Workpiece coordinate system selection
G52 : Local coordinate system setting
Xx1,Yy1,Zz1 : Local coordinate offset amount
The local coordinate zero points are provided as distances from the zero point of the designated workpiece coordinate
system (local coordinate offset).
In the incremental position setting mode, the position obtained by adding the local coordinate offset amount to the
previously specified offset amount serves as the new local coordinate zero point.
If no workpiece coordinates are designated, the local coordinates will be created on the currently selected workpiece
coordinates.
This command is unmodal but the local coordinate system created by G52 is valid until the next G52 command is issued.
The local coordinate system is canceled by the input of the reset signal or by manual or automatic dog-type reference
position return.

(M) M
(G53)

L1

(a)
G54 G52

y1

W1

x1
(b)
(G54)

(a) Local coordinate

(M) Machine coordinate system
(b) Workpiece coordinate 1

II - 140
M70V Series Specifications Manual
10 Coordinate System

10.1.8 Coordinate System for Rotary Axis

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

The axis designated as the rotary axis with the parameters is controlled with the rotary axis' coordinate system.
The rotary axis includes the rotating type (short-cut valid/invalid) and linear type (workpiece coordinate position linear
type, all coordinate position linear type).
The workpiece coordinate position range is 0 to 359.999° for the rotating type, and 0 to 99999.999° for the linear type.
The machine position and relative position differ according to the parameters.
The rotary axis is commanded with a degree (°) unit regardless of the inch or metric designation.
The rotary axis type can be set with the parameters for each axis.

Rotary axis
Rotating type rotary axis Linear type rotary axis
Linear axis
Workpiece coordinate All coordinate position
Short-cut invalid Short-cut valid
position linear type linear type
Workpiece coordinate
Displayed in the range of 0° to 359.999°. Displayed in the range of 0° to 99999.999°.
position
Machine position/ Displayed in the range of 0° to
Displayed in the range of 0° to 359.999°.
relative position 99999.999°.
The incremental
amount from the end
point to the current
In the same manner as the normal linear axis, moves according to the
position is divided by Moves with a short-cut
ABS command sign by the amount obtained by subtracting the current position from
360, and the axis to the end point.
the end point (without rounding up to 360 degrees.).
moves by the
remainder amount
according to the sign.
Moves in the direction of the commanded sign by the commanded incremental amount starting at the current
INC command
position.
Follows the absolute/relative command for a movement to the interim position.

Reference position Moves and returns in the reference

return Returns to the reference position from the interim position within a 360 position direction for the difference
degree movement. from the current position to the
reference position.

II - 141
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

10.1.9 Plane Selection

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

G17, G18, and G19 are for specifying the planes for the arc, tool radius compensation, coordinate rotation and other
such commands.

G17; Xp-Yp plane designation

G18; Zp-Xp plane designation
G19; Yp-Zp plane designation

(1) A parameter can be used to set either the X, Y or Z axis to which the additional axis is to be parallel.
(2) A parameter can be used to set the initialization status (when the power has been turned ON or when the reset
status has been entered) to G17, G18 or G19.
(3) The movement commands have no connection with the plane selection.
(Example)

With these program commands, X100. is the axis which does not exist on the G19
G19 X100. ; (Yp, Zp) plane, Yp-Zp plane is selected by G19 and the X axis moves by 100. mm
separately from the plane selection.
With these program commands, the Xp-Yp plane is selected by G17 and the arc
G17 X100 . R50. ;
command is controlled on the X-Y plane by this command.

II - 142
M70V Series Specifications Manual
10 Coordinate System

10.1.10 Origin Set/Origin Cancel

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

(1) Origin set

Origin set is a function that shifts the coordinate system so that the current position is the zero point on the
workpiece coordinate system containing the workpiece coordinate system's offset value.
The relative position counter and workpiece coordinate counter are set to "0" with this operation. In other
words, this is the same as the coordinate system setting command "G92 X0;". (For target axis: X)

Current coordinate
(50, 30)

Workpiece coordinate
zero point

Workpiece offset (10, 15)

G92 offset (10, 15)

Machine zero
point

Execution of origin set

Current coordinate
(0, 30)

Workpiece
coordinate
zero point

Workpiece offset (10, 15)

Machine G92 offset (60, 15)

zero point

Items updated by origin set

II - 143
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

(2) Origin cancel

Origin cancel is a function that manually cancels all deviated amounts, and shifts to the designated zero point
with the workpiece offset.
The relative position counter and machine position counter are set to "0" with this operation. In other words,
this is the same "G92 G53 X0 ;". (For target axis: X)

G54 Workpiece G54 Current coordinates

coordinate zero point (30, 15)

G55 Current coordinates

G52G54 Local offset (30,15)
(20, 15)

G55 Workpiece coordinate

zero poin
G54 Workpiece
offset (10, 15)

G52G55 Local offset

(50,30)

G55 Workpiece offset (20, 0)

Machine G92 offset (10, 15)

zero point

Execution of origin cancel

G54 Current coordinates

(60,15)

G54 Workpiece
coordinate zero point G55 Current coordinates
(90,15)

G52G54 Local offset

(0,15)
G55 Workpiece
G54 Workpiece coordinate zero point
offset (10,15)
G52G55 Local offset
(0,30)

G55 Workpiece offset

Machine zero (20,0) : Items updated by origin
point G92 Offset (0,15) cancel

II - 144
M70V Series Specifications Manual
10 Coordinate System

10.1.11 Counter Set

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

The relative position counter can be set to an arbitrary value by operating the setting and display unit screens.

Select the axis and then input a value. Finally, press the INPUT key.
Only the [Relative Position] display field will change to the set value. The other coordinate positions displayed will not
change.
Up to 9 digits can be input in the integer section. The number of digits after the decimal point depends on the parameter
setting.

II - 145
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

10.2 Return

10.2.1 Manual Reference Position Return

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

This function enables the tool to be returned manually to the position (reference position) which is characteristic to the
machine.

(1) Return pattern to reference position

[Dog type]
When starting in same direction as final advance When starting in opposite direction as final
direction advance direction

(b)

(c)
(a)
(a)
R
R

(a) Dog (a) Dog

(b) Creep speed
(c) Reference position return speed

[High-speed type]

(b)

(a)
R

(a) Dog
(b) Rapid traverse rate

(2) Differences according to detection method

First return after power ON Second return and following

Incremental position detection
Dog-type High-speed type
method
Absolute position detection method High-speed type High-speed type

II - 146
M70V Series Specifications Manual
10 Coordinate System

10.2.2 Automatic 1st Reference Position Return

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

The machine can be returned to the first reference position by assigning the G28 command during automatic operation.
If the interim point is commanded, the machine is moved up to that point by rapid traverse so that it is positioned and
then returned separately for each axis to the first reference position.
Alternatively, by assigning the G29 command, the machine can be first positioned separately for each axis at the G28 or
G30 interim point, and then positioned at the assigned position.

G code Function
G28 Automatic 1st reference position return
Start position return (The tool first returns to the interim position from the 1st reference position, and
G29
then is positioned at the position assigned in the program.)

The G28 programming format is given below.

G28 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 ;

G28 : Return command
Xx1,Yy1,Zz1 : Return control axes (coordinate of interim point)

Tool is first positioned by rapid traverse to the assigned position (interim point) and then is returned to the 1st reference
position for each axis independently.

The G29 programming format is given below.

G29 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 ;

G29 : Return command
Xx1,Yy1,Zz1 : Return control axes (coordinate of assigned position)

The tool is first moved by rapid traverse for each axis to the interim position which is passed through with G28 or G30,
and is then positioned by rapid traverse at the position assigned by the program.

R1 R
-X

(a)
G28
G28

(b)
(c)
G29

(b)
G29 -Y

(a) Non-interpolation movement

(b) Interpolation or non-interpolation can be selected
(c) Interim point
R1 1st reference position

II - 147
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

If the position detector is for the incremental detection system, the first reference position return for the first time after the
NC power has been turned ON will be the dog-type. However, whether the second and subsequent returns are to be the
dog type or the high-speed type can be selected by designating a parameter.
The high-speed type is always used when the position detector is for the absolute position detection system.

(Note 1) The automatic 1st reference position return pattern is the same as for manual reference position return.
(Note 2) The number of axes for which reference position return can be performed simultaneously depends on the
number of simultaneously controlled axes.
(Note 3) If, at the time of the first reference position return, the tool radius compensation or nose radius compensation
has not been canceled, it will be temporarily canceled during the movement to the interim point. The
compensation is restored at the next movement after the return.
(Note 4) If, at the time of the reference position return, the tool length compensation has not been canceled, it will be
canceled and the compensation amount also cleared upon completion of reference position return. The tool
length compensation can also be canceled temporarily using a parameter. In this case, however, the tool
compensation is restored by the next movement command.
(Note 5) Interpolation or non-interpolation can be selected using a parameter for the movement up to the G28 interim
point or for the movement from the G29 interim point to the command point. Non-interpolation applies for
movement from the G28 interim point to the reference position and movement up to the G29 interim point.
(Note 6) When a single block operation is selected, it can be chosen by parameter setting whether or not to enable
interim point stop.

II - 148
M70V Series Specifications Manual
10 Coordinate System

10.2.3 2nd, 3rd, 4th Reference Position Return

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

As with automatic 1st reference position return, commanding G30Pn during automatic operation enables the tool to be
returned to the set points (2nd, 3rd or 4th reference positions) characteristic to the machine. The 2nd, 3rd and 4th
reference positions can be set by parameters.

G code Function
G30 P2 2nd reference position return
G30 P3 3rd reference position return
G30 P4 4th reference position return

The G30 programming format is given below.

G30 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Pp1 ;

G30 : Return command
Xx1,Yy1,Zz1 : Return control axes (coordinate of interim point)
Pp1 : Return position No.

The tool is first positioned by rapid traverse to the assigned interim point and then is returned to the reference position for
each axis independently.

R2
R1
-X

G 30 P 2

(a) (b)

G3 0 P3
G 30 P 4

R3

R4 -Y

(a) Start point

(b) Interim point
R1: 1st reference position
R2: 2nd reference position
R3: 3rd reference position
R4: 4th reference position

II - 149
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

(Note 1) The second reference position return is performed if the P address is omitted.
(Note 2) The number of axes for which reference position return can be performed simultaneously depends on the
number of simultaneously controlled axes.
(Note 3) If, at the time of the reference position return, the tool radius compensation or nose R compensation has not
been canceled, it will be temporarily canceled during the movement up to the interim point. The compensation
is restored at the next movement command after the return.
(Note 4) If, at the time of the reference position return, the tool length compensation has not been canceled, it will be
canceled and the compensation amount also cleared upon completion of reference position return. The tool
length compensation can also be canceled temporarily using a parameter. In this case, however, the tool
compensation is restored by the next movement command.
(Note 5) Whether interpolation or non-interpolation is to apply to the movement up to the interim point can be selected
using a parameter. Non-interpolation applies for movement from the interim point to each of the reference
positions.
(Note 6) When a single block operation is selected, it can be chosen by parameter setting whether or not to enable
interim point stop.

10.2.4 Reference Position Check

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

By commanding G27, a machining program, which has been prepared so that the tool starts off from the reference
position and returns to the reference position, can be checked to see whether the tool will return properly to the reference
position.

Command format

G27 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Pp1 ;

G27 : Check command
Xx1,Yy1,Zz1 : Return control axes
Pp1 : Check No.
P1:1st reference position check
P2: 2
P3: 3
P4: 4

The tool is first positioned by rapid traverse to the assigned position and then, if this is the reference position, the
reference position arrival signal is output.
When the address P is omitted, the first reference position verification will be applied.

(Note 1) The number of axes for which reference position check can be performed simultaneously depends on the
number of simultaneously controlled axes.
(Note 2) An alarm results unless the tool is positioned at the reference position upon completion of the command.
(Note 3) Whether interpolation or non-interpolation is to apply to the movement can be selected using a parameter.

II - 150
M70V Series Specifications Manual
10 Coordinate System

10.2.5 Absolute Position Detection

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

The absolute position detection function holds the relation of the actual machine position and the machine coordinates in
the controller with a battery even when the power is turned OFF. When the power is turned ON again, automatic
operation can be started without executing reference position return. (High-speed return will always be used for the
reference position return command.)
For the absolute position detection method, there are two methods such as the dog-type and dog-less type according to
how the zero point is established.

Adjustment of zero point

Method Details Establishment of zero point
position
Zero point is established with The value is set in the
Same method as incremental
Dog-type dog-type reference position parameter of zero point shift
detection dog-type
return completion. amount.
The zero point is established The value equivalent to the
Marked point The zero point position is set
by input from the zero point shift amount is set in the zero
method from the screen.
initialization screen. point initialization screen.

Dog-less type The zero point is established

Machine The zero point is established by when a torque limit is applied The value equivalent to the
stopper pressing the machine against a on the servo and the torque shift amount is set in the zero
method set point on the machine. limit is reached by pressing point initialization screen.
against the machine stopper.

(Note) This function is valid for the NC axis and the PLC axis. This function cannot be used for the spindle and the
auxiliary axis.

Diagnosis during absolute position detection

(1) The machine position at power OFF and ON can be confirmed on the absolute position monitor screen.
(2) If the amount that the axis is moved during power OFF exceeds the tolerable value (parameter), a warning
signal will be output.
(3) An alarm will be output if the absolute position information is lost.
(4) An alarm will be output if the voltage of the battery for backing up the absolute position data drops.

II - 151
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

10.2.6 Tool Exchange Position Return

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

By specifying the tool change position in a parameter and also assigning a tool change position return command in a
machining program, the tool can be changed at the most appropriate position.
The axes for which returning to the tool change position is performed and the order in which the axes begin to return can
be changed by commands.

G30.n ;
n = 1 to 6 : Specify the axes that return to the tool change position and the order in which they return. (For L system, n = 1 to 5)

Command and return order

[M system]

Command Return order

G30．1 Z axis → X axis / Y axis ( → additional axis)
G30．2 Z axis → X axis → Y axis ( → additional axis)
G30．3 Z axis → Y axis → X axis ( → additional axis)
G30．4 X axis → Y axis / Z axis ( → additional axis)
G30．5 Y axis → X axis / Z axis ( → additional axis)
G30．6 X axis / Y axis / Z axis ( → additional axis)

[L system]

Command Return order

G30．1 X axis only ( → additional axis)
G30．2 Z axis only ( → additional axis)
G30．3 X axis → Z axis ( → additional axis)
G30．4 Z axis → X axis ( → additional axis)
G30．5 X axis / Z axis ( → additional axis)

(Note 1) An arrow ( → ) indicates the order of axes that begin to return. A period (/) indicates that the axes begin to
return simultaneously.
Example : "Z axis → X axis" indicate that the Z axis returns to the tool change position, then the X axis does.
(Note 2) G30.6 is only for the M system.

The tool change position return ON/OFF for the additional axis can be set with parameter for the additional axis.
For the order to return to the tool change position, the axes return after the standard axis completes the return to the tool
change position (refer to above table).
The additional axis cannot return to the tool change position alone.

II - 152
11
Operation Support Functions

II - 153
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

11.1 Program Control

11.1.1 Optional Block Skip

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

It is possible to command to selectively ignore a part, from a "/" (slash) code to the end of the block, of a machining
program. When the optional block skip input signal from the external source is turned ON for automatic operation, the
block with the "/" code is skipped. If the optional block skip signal is turned OFF, the block with the "/" code will be
executed without being skipped.

Optional block skip

Programming example
Switch OFF Switch ON

N1 ; N1 N1

N2 ; N2 N2

N3 ; N3 N3

/ N4 ; N4

/ N5 ; N5

N6 ; N6 N6

N7 ; N7 N7

: :
:

Skipping from a "/" in the middle of a program to the end of the program can also be enabled by parameter setting.

11.1.2 Optional Block Skip Addition

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

When "/n (n:1 to 9)" (slant code) is programmed at the head of a block, and the optional block skip n input signal from the
external source is turned ON for automatic operation, the block with the "/n" code is skipped.
If the optional block skip n signal is turned OFF, the block with the "/n" code will be executed without being skipped.

II - 154
M70V Series Specifications Manual
11 Operation Support Functions

11.1.3 Single Block

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

The commands for automatic operation can be executed one block at a time (block stop) by turning ON the single block
input signal. When the single block input signal is turned ON temporarily during continuous operation, the machine will
stop after that block has been executed.
Even when operation is switched to another automatic operation mode (for example, memory operation mode to MDI
operation mode) during continuous operation, the machine will stop after that block has been executed.

Single block (SBK)

ьь

ьь
Automatic operation
start (ST)

ьь ьь
Movement block ):̖ )<̖ ьь )<̖

SBK ON at start SBK change during movement SBK ON after block completion
VALID
INVALID VALID VALID

As with the multi-part system specification, the following function can be selected instead.

Multi-part system single block (L system)

This function is for executing single block operation while maintaining the synchronization between the part
systems when two or more part systems are operated. When one part system has been stopped by single
block stop, the other part systems are stopped by feed hold.

II - 155
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

11.2 Program Test

11.2.1 Dry Run

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

F code feed commands for automatic operation can be switched to the manual feed rate data of the machine operation
board by turning ON the dry run input signal.

Dry run switch ON

Command
Rapid traverse selection switch OFF Rapid traverse selection switch ON
G00,G27,G28,G29,G30,G60 Manual feed rate Rapid traverse rate
G01,G02,G03 Manual feed rate Cutting clamp speed

11.2.2 Machine Lock

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

When the machine lock input signal is set to ON, the NC operations can be executed without assigning commands to the
NC axes.

The feed rate in the machine lock status is the command speed.
The M, S, T and B commands are executed as usual and operation is completed by returning the FIN signal.
(1) Reference position return (manual, G28, G29, G30) is controlled as far as the interim point in the machine lock
status but the block is completed when the interim point is reached.
(2) Machine lock is effective in the signal status applying when the axis has stopped.
(3) Block stop will be applied if the machine lock signal is turned ON to OFF or OFF to ON during automatic
operation.

II - 156
M70V Series Specifications Manual
11 Operation Support Functions

11.2.3 Miscellaneous Function Lock

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

The M, S, T and B (2nd miscellaneous function) output signals are not output to the machine or PLC when the
miscellaneous function lock signal of external input is turned ON. This function can be used when checking only the
movement commands in a program check.
The start signals of the M command are output for the M00, M01, M02 and M30 commands, and so a completion signal
must be returned.
(1) Fixed cycle spindle functions containing an S code and any M, S, T or B function assigned by a manual
numerical command or in automatic operation will not be executed. The code data and strobe (MF, SF, TF,
BF) outputs are stopped.
(2) If this signal is set ON after the code data has already been output, the output is executed as it would normally
be executed until the end (until FIN1 or FIN2 is received and the strobe is turned OFF).
(3) Even when this signal is ON, the M00, M01, M02 and M30 commands among the miscellaneous functions are
executed, and the decode signal, code data and strobe signals are also output as they would be normally.
(4) Any miscellaneous functions which are executed only inside the controller and not output (M96, M97, M98,
M99) are executed as they would be normally even if this signal is ON.

II - 157
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

11.2.4 Graphic Check

11.2.4.1 Graphic Check

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

This function traces the machining program movement path without executing automatic operation, and draws results of
the NC internal operation. The machining program can be checked while drawing the figure accurately at a high speed.
The drawing's viewpoint can be moved, enlarged and reduced while drawing. The three axes displayed are set with the
parameters.
(Note 1) This function is required when performing program check for 2D.
(Note 2) Automatic operation is disabled during graphic check.

11.2.4.2 3D Solid Program Check

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ― ○
L system ― ―

This function draws the workpiece shape and tool movement in the cutting process as a solid image without executing
automatic operation. The machining program can be checked while drawing the figure accurately at a high speed.
The workpiece shape's viewpoint can be moved, enlarged and reduced while drawing. The three axes displayed are set
with the parameters.
The workpiece shape and tool shape used for this function are set on this screen.
(Note) In the 3D check of M70V, the tool shape of the tap is not reflected.

II - 158
M70V Series Specifications Manual
11 Operation Support Functions

11.2.4.3 Graphic Check Rotary Axis Drawing

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ― ―
L system ― △ (*3)

(*3) When HN721/HN722 is installed.

When the rotary axis (C axis) is designated with the parameter in program check (2D), the path is drawn depending on
the rotary axis. The rotary axis can be set for each part system.
Refer to "11.2.4.1 Graphic Check" for details on the graphic check.
(Note 1) The option function of graphic check is also required to use this function.
(Note 2) When the control axis address other than C axis is designated with the parameter, the path corresponding to
the rotary axis is not drawn.
(Note 3) The workpiece coordinate system must be set so that the center of the rotary axis becomes the coordinate
system zero point.

Image of actual tool and workpiece Example of machining program

X

G83Z-20.R-5.Q5000F300 ;
G0C90. ;
G83Z-20.R-5.Q5000F300 ;
C
G0C180. ;
G83Z-20.R-5.Q5000F300 ;
G0C270. ;
G83Z-20.R-5.Q5000F300 ;
Y G80 ;
Z

Drawing image when the rotary axis Drawing image when the rotary axis
drawing is invalid drawing is valid

II - 159
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

11.2.5 Graphic Trace

11.2.5.1 Graphic Trace

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

This function draws the machine tool's machine position. The movement path following the actual automatic operation or
manual operation, or the tool tip movement path can be drawn, and the machine operation during machining can be
monitored.
For the display mode, 1-plane, 2-plane and 3-dimensional display are provided. In the 3-dimensional display mode, cubic
shapes can be rotated and tracing of the figure seen from the desired direction can be assigned.

11.2.5.2 Graphic Trace Rotary Axis Drawing

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ― ―
L system ― △ (*3)

(*3) When HN721/HN722 is installed.

When the rotary axis (C axis) is designated with the parameter in program trace, the path is drawn depending on the
rotary axis. The rotary axis can be set for each part system.
Refer to "11.2.5.1 Graphic Trace" for details on the graphic trace.
(Note 1) The option function of graphic trace is also required to use this function.
(Note 2) When the control axis address other than C axis is designated with the parameter, the path corresponding to
the rotary axis is not drawn.
(Note 3) The workpiece coordinate system must be set so that the center of the rotary axis becomes the coordinate
system zero point.

Image of actual tool and workpiece Example of machining program

X

G83Z-20.R-5.Q5000F300 ;
G0C90. ;
G83Z-20.R-5.Q5000F300 ;
C
G0C180. ;
G83Z-20.R-5.Q5000F300 ;
G0C270. ;
G83Z-20.R-5.Q5000F300 ;
Y G80 ;
Z

Drawing image when the rotary axis Drawing image when the rotary axis
drawing is invalid drawing is valid

II - 160
M70V Series Specifications Manual
11 Operation Support Functions

11.2.6 Machining Time Computation

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

This function analyzes the machining program without moving the axis and calculates the approximate time required for
machining.
The graphic check option is required to calculate the machining time.
The machining time is displayed as "hour: minute: second".
The miscellaneous function (M), spindle function (S), tool function (T) and 2nd miscellaneous function execution times
differ according to the sequence and each function, and are not included in the calculated machining time.

II - 161
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

11.3 Program Search/Start/Stop

11.3.1 Program Search

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

The program No. of the program to be operated automatically can be designated and called. Upon completion of search,
the head of the program searched is displayed.
Machining programs are stored in the memory inside the NC system.

11.3.2 Sequence Number Search

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

Blocks can be indexed by setting the program No., sequence No. and block No. of the program to be operated
automatically.
The searched program is displayed upon completion of the search.
Machining programs are stored in the memory inside the NC system.

II - 162
M70V Series Specifications Manual
11 Operation Support Functions

11.3.3 Verification Stop

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

This function enables the single block stop status to be established at any block without having to set the SINGLE
BLOCK switch to ON.
It can be used to readily check the machining shape up to the designated block and resume machining.
G91 ;
:
G00 Z-150. ;
N100 G81 X-100. Z-100. R-50. F100 ;
N101 X-100. ;
→ N102 X-100. ;
N103 Y100. ;
N104 X100. ;
N105 X-100. ;
:

4 5 6

Verification stop is executed when drilling of one hole is completed

3 2 1
(N100 block is completed) as shown on the left.
The hole depth is measured to confirm that the dimensions are
correct. If the dimensions are not correct, the tool compensation
amount is changed.
If machining is started from the head of the program, accurate hole
drilling can be carried out.

II - 163
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

11.3.4 Program Restart

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

When a machining program is to be resumed after it has been suspended midway due to tool damage or for some other
reason, this function searches the program and the block to be resumed and enables machining to be resumed from the
block.
There are two types of restart, type 1 and type 2.

Restart method Details

After machining is reset due to a tool breakage, etc., machining is restarted from the designated
sequence number and/or block number.
Restart type 1 Only the program which had been executed just before can be restarted.
Even after the power is turned ON again, the program can be restarted if the program has been
executed before the power supply is turned OFF.
After machining program is stopped due to a holiday, etc., and the power is turned OFF and ON,
machining is restarted from the designated sequence number and/or block number.
A top search must be executed from the screen. Then, command a
Automatic top search OFF
sequence No. and block No., and restart a program.
A top search may not be executed from the screen. A top search is
Restart type 2 automatically executed, so it is not necessary to execute a top search from
the screen. Command a sequence No. and block No., and restart a
Automatic top search ON machining.
An arbitrary program can be restarted by designating the program No.
When a program No. is omitted, the program currently searched is
restarted.

The validity of the automatic top search can be changed with control parameter.

11.3.5 Automatic Operation Start

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

With the input of the automatic operation start signal (change from ON to OFF), the automatic operation of the program
that has been operation searched is started by the controller (or the halted program is restarted).

Automatic operation
start (ST)

Movement block ):̖ )<̖

Automatic operation startup is performed on a part system by part system basis.

II - 164
M70V Series Specifications Manual
11 Operation Support Functions

11.3.6 NC Reset
M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

This function enables the controller to be reset.

Reset 1 Reset 2 Reset & Rewind

1 G command modals Retained Initialized Initialized
Tool compensation Canceled
2 Retained Canceled
data (no operations)
3 Memory indexing Executed Not executed Executed
4 Errors/alarms Reset Reset Reset
M, S and T code
5 Retained Retained Retained
outputs
M code independent
6 OFF OFF OFF
output
7 Control axis moving Decelerated and stopped Decelerated and stopped Decelerated and stopped
"In reset" signal
8 Output signals "In reset" signal "In reset" signal
"In rewind" signal

11.3.7 Feed Hold

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

When the feed hold signal is set ON during automatic operation, the machine feed is immediately decelerated and
stopped. The machine is started again by the "Automatic operation start (cycle start)" signal.

(1) When the feed hold mode is entered during automatic start, the machine feed is stopped immediately, but the
M, S, T and B commands in the same block are still executed as programmed.
(2) When the mode is switched during automatic operation to manual operation (such as jog feed, handle feed or
incremental feed), the feed hold stop mode is entered.
(3) An interrupt operation based on manual operation (such as jog feed, handle feed or incremental feed) can be
executed during feed hold.

Atomatic operation start

Feed hold

Axis movement state

II - 165
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

11.3.8 Search & Start

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

If the search & start signal is input in a status where the memory mode is selected, the designated machining program is
searched and executed from its head.
If the search & start signal has been input during automatic operation in the memory mode, search & start is executed
after resetting.

II - 166
M70V Series Specifications Manual
11 Operation Support Functions

11.4 Interrupt Operation

11.4.1 Manual Interruption

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

Manual interrupt is a function that enables manual operations to be performed during automatic operation.
The methods to select the operation mode are as follows:
- Initiates the interrupt by switching from the automatic mode to manual mode
- Initiates the interrupt by selecting the manual mode at the same time as the automatic mode
(Refer to "11.4.9 Simultaneous Operation of Manual and Automatic Modes".)
Whether the manual interrupt amount is to be retained and automatic operation is to be continued is determined by
setting manual absolute mode ON or OFF (refer to "11.4.3 Manual Absolute Switch").

II - 167
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

11.4.2 Automatic Operation Handle Interruption

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

The handle command can interrupt and be superimposed onto a command without suspending automatic operation and
the machine can be moved by rotating the manual pulse generator during automatic operation.
If the spindle load is greatly exceeded when cutting a workpiece as per the machining program due to a high rough
cutting amount in face machining, for instance, automatic handle interrupt makes it possible to raise the Z surface and
reduce the load easily without suspending feed in the automatic operation mode.
Automatic handle interrupt is conducted by setting the "automatic handle interrupt" valid switch which is provided
separately from the "manual operation mode". The axis selection, pulse scale factor and operation are conducted as for
manual handle feed.
Whether, after an interrupt, to return to the path of the machining program by automatic operation or remain offset by the
amount equivalent to the interrupt amount is determined using a parameter.

Y (b)
X Z

(a)
10
1 100
(d)
(c)

(e)
~

G01 Z _ F_;
X_Y_ ;
X _ Y_ ;
Z _Y_ ;
~

(f)

(a) Interrupt
(b) Tool
(c) Handle feed
(d) Workpiece
(e) Automatic feed
(f) Feed path with automatic feed and handle feed superimposed

II - 168
M70V Series Specifications Manual
11 Operation Support Functions

11.4.3 Manual Absolute Switch

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

The program absolute positions are updated by an amount equivalent to the distance by which the tool is moved by hand
when the manual absolute switch signal is turned ON.
In other words, the coordinate system based on the original program will not shift even if the tool (machine) is moved by
hand. Thus, if automatic operation is started in this case, the tool will return to the path before manual movement.

M0
X
W
(a) (b)

(c)

(d)
(e)

-Y
(f)

(a) Feed hold stop

(b) Programmed path (absolute command)
(c) Manual interrupt (The coordinate system W is not shifted)
(d) Path after manual interrupt
(e) Tool passes along same path as that programmed
(f) With manual absolute signal ON

II - 169
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

(a) (b)

M0
X
W
(c) (d)
W
(e)

(f)

(g)

-Y
(h)

(a) Manual interrupt (The coordinate system W is shifted)

(b) Manual interrupt amount
(c) Feed hold stop
(d) Programmed path (absolute command)
(e) Manual interrupt (The coordinate system W is shifted)
(f) Path after manual interrupt
(g) Path is shifted by an amount equivalent to manual interrupt value (Zero point of the coordinate system W
moves)
(h) With manual absolute signal OFF

The manual absolute ON state will be entered when the power is turned ON.

11.4.4 Thread Cutting Cycle Retract

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ― ―
L system ○ ○

This function suspends the thread cutting cycle if a feed hold signal has been input during thread cutting in a thread
cutting cycle.
If a feed hold signal is input during chamfering or thread cutting without chamfering, operation stops at the position where
the block following the thread cutting is completed.

(a)
(c)

(b)

(d)

(e)
(a) Position where the block following the thread cutting is completed
(b) Chamfering angle
(c) Suspension position
(d) Feed hold
(e) Period when thread cutting is performed

II - 170
M70V Series Specifications Manual
11 Operation Support Functions

11.4.5 Tapping Retract

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

If tapping is interrupted by a reset or emergency stop signal that is input during tapping and the tap is left engaged inside
the workpiece, the tap tool engaged inside the workpiece can be rotated in the reverse direction so that it will be
disengaged by inputting the tap retract signal.

Z SP

(a) (b)

(c)

(d)

(a) Tap feed (spindle forward)

SP (spindle)
(b) Tap retract (spindle reverse)
(c) Retract signal
(d) Tap bottom

This function can be used when the machining was interrupted upon reset, emergency stop or power OFF during tapping
cycle.
(Note that "power OFF" is applied only when the absolute position detection system is valid.)
A return is made to the initial point by tap retract.

II - 171
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

11.4.6 Manual Numerical Value Command

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

On the screen of the setting and display unit, the M, S and T (and B when 2nd miscellaneous function is valid)
commands can be executed by setting numerical values and pressing [INPUT].
This enables operations such as spindle speed changing, starting, stopping, calling and selecting assigned tools and
replacing of the spindle tools to be done easily without having to prepare or revise the machining program. Even in an
automatic operation mode, these operations can be conducted with block stop.
Furthermore, the M and T commands can be issued even on the tool compensation amount setting and display screen,
therefore at the manual tool length measurement, the tools can be called successively to the spindle and measured very
simply without having to change the screen page.

(d)
S 3600 PLC
(g) (a)
T 12 (e)

M 5 (b)
(f)

S 7 8 9
T 4 5 6
(h)
M 1 2 3 (c)

- 0 .

(a) sequence
(b) processing
(c) Input
(d) S command value
(e) T command value
(f) M command value
(g) Manual numerical value
(h) (Note) The input operation starts the execution of the M, S or T command.

II - 172
M70V Series Specifications Manual
11 Operation Support Functions

11.4.7 Arbitrary Reverse Run

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ― ○
L system ― ―

This function allows a program to run the executed blocks backward (hereinafter called "reverse run") after the block stop
in the automatic operation.
The following steps are available:
- Execute the reverse run to the point to go back,
- Run the reversed blocks again following the program (hereinafter called "forward run") and
- Continue the remaining blocks from the point of the interruption.
Maximum 200 blocks can be executed in the reverse run.
Only the 1st to 3rd axes of each part system can be used for this function.
(Example 1) Reverse run

N01 G90 G54 X0 Y0 ;

N02 G91 G01 X-50. F500 ;
N03 Y-20. ;
N04 X20. ;
(a) N05 G02 Y-50. R25. ;
N06 G03 Y-50. R25. ;
N07 G01 X30. ;
M02 ;

(b)

(a) Reverse run

(b) Block stop

(Example 2) Forward run after the reverse run

(b)

N01 G90 G54 X0 Y0 ;

N02 G91 G01 X-50. F500 ;
(c) N03 Y-20. ;
N04 X20. ;
N05 G02 Y-50. R25. ;
N06 G03 Y-50. R25. ;
N07 G01 X30. ;
(a) M02 ;

(a) Reverse run

(b) Block stop
(c) Forward run

II - 173
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

11.4.8 MDI Interruption

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

This function enables MDI programs to be executed during automatic operation in the single block stop status. When the
modal status is changed in the MDI program, the modal status in the automatic operation mode is also changed.

11.4.9 Simultaneous Operation of Manual and Automatic Modes

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

This function enables manual operations to be performed during automatic operation by selecting an automatic
operation mode (tape, MDI or memory) and manual mode (handle, step, jog or manual reference position return)
simultaneously.
(Arbitrary feed based on the PLC is also possible.)

The feed rates for the axes subject to automatic commands and the feed rates for axes subject to manual command are
set separately. The acceleration/deceleration modes (rapid traverse, cutting feed) are also set separately. Rapid traverse
override, cutting feed override and second cutting feed override are valid both for axes subject to automatic commands
and manual commands. Override cancel is valid for axes subject to automatic commands.
Manual interlock is applied to axes subject to manual commands; automatic interlock is applied to axes subject to
automatic commands.

11.4.10 Simultaneous Operation of JOG and Handle Modes

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

When executing the jog feed and handle feed, both these feeds are available without changing the mode each time by
inputting the jog mode signal and simultaneous operation of jog and handle modes signal to the control unit. However,
while axis is moving in one of the two modes, the feed in the other mode is not valid.

II - 174
M70V Series Specifications Manual
11 Operation Support Functions

11.4.11 Reference Position Retract

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

When the retract signal is turned ON during the automatic and manual operation, this function can retract the tool
immediately to a set reference position.
The reference position to be retracted to can be selected from the 1st reference position to 4th reference position with 2-
bit input signal.
Set the retracting order of axes with parameter.
(1) Other operations
(a) When the retract signal is turned ON, the control unit is reset, the operation is interrupted, and the
machining program is indexed.
(b) When the rapid traverse input signal is input, the rapid traverse rate is applied. When the rapid traverse
input signal is not input, the manual feed rate is applied.
(c) If the retract signal is input during execution of a tapping cycle, the operation will be the tapping retract,
and the normal reference position retract will be executed from the end point of tapping retract operation.
(d) Even if the retract signal is input during the thread cutting cycle, it will be invalid. However, if the retract
signal is input in a block other than the thread cutting block, the retracting operation will be executed.
(e) If the retract signal is turned OFF midway during retracting, the operation will decelerate and stop.
However, since the machining program is indexed, the block can not be resumed.
(f) The retract signal is invalid if the coordinate system is not established. An operation error will occur when
the retract signal is input in such case.

11.4.13 Skip Retract

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ― ―

This function is used to return to the opposite advance direction when the skip signal is input during G31 command.

11.4.14 PLC Interruption

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

The interrupt program set with the R register is executed with the signals from the PLC during single block stop in
program operation or during the manual mode.

II - 175
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

II - 176
12
Program Support Functions

II - 177
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

12.1 Machining Method Support Functions

12.1.1 Program

12.1.1.1 Subprogram Control

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ 8 layers ○ 8 layers
L system ○ 8 layers ○ 8 layers

When the same pattern is repeated during machining, the machining pattern can be registered as one subprogram and
the subprogram can be called from the main program as required, thereby realizing the same machining easily. Efficient
use of program can be made. The subprogram is called with the program No. and sequence No. or the file name and
sequence No.

(1) Calling the subprogram with M98 command

M98 Pp1 Hh1 Ll1 ,Dd1 ;

or, M98 <File name> Hh1 Ll1 ,Dd1 ;
M98 : Subprogram call command
Pp1 : Program No. in subprogram to be called. (Own program if omitted.)
Note that P can be omitted only during memory operation and MDI operation.
(Max. 8-digit value)
A four-digit or eight-digit program No. starting with O No. can be called by the parameter.
<File name> : A file name can be designated instead of the program No. In this case, enclose the file name with
brackets <>.
(The file name can have up to 32 characters, including the extension.)
(Example) M98 <PARTS-12.RAF>;
Hh1 : Sequence No. in subprogram to be called (Head block if omitted)
(Max. 6-digit value)
Ll1 : Number of subprogram repetitions
(If omitted, this is handled as L1. When L0 is set, the subprogram is not called.)
(1 to 9999 times set with 4-digit value.)
,Dd1 : Device No. where subprogram is stored. (0 to 4)
If ,D is omitted, the subprogram in the memory will be used.
The device No. is set with the machining parameters.

Subprograms can be nested up to eight levels deep.

Main program: Subprogram: Subprogram: Subprogram:

Level 0 (P1000) Level 1 (P1) Level 2 (P2) Level 8 (P8)

P1000 P2 P8
P1
࣭
8-level nesting

M98 P1 ;
M98 P2 ;
M98 P3 ;
࣭ M99 ;
M99 ; ࣭
M99 ;
M02/M30 ;

II - 178
M70V Series Specifications Manual
12 Program Support Functions

A subprogram branch destination or repetition of a subprogram can be specified.

Specifying a subprogram branch destination Specifying repetition of a subprogram

(a) (b) (a) (b)

P1 0 0 0 P1 P1 0 0 0 P1
N1 ;
(d)
M 9 8 P1 H1 ;
M99 ;
M9988 P1 L 5 ;
N 10 0 ;
M 9 8 P1 H1 0 0 ;
M9 9 ;
M99 ; (c)
M02 / M30 ; M002 / M330 ;

(2) Calling the subprogram with M198 command

A program registered in the front IC card (CF card) can be called out as a subprogram.
To call a program in the CF card as the subprogram, command as shown below in the main program.

M198 Pp1 Ll1 ;

or, M198 <File name> Ll1 ;
M198 : Call command
Pp1 : Program No. in CF card to be called as subprogram (Max. 8 digits)
A four-digit or eight-digit program No. starting with O No. can be called by the parameter.
<File name> : A file name can be designated instead of the program No. In this case, enclose the file name with
brackets <>.
(The file name can have up to 32 characters, including the extension.)
Ll1 : Number of subprogram repetitions (Max. 4 digits)
This can be omitted. (If omitted, this is handled as L1.)
When L0 is set, the subprogram is not called.

(Note 1) Sequence No. call (M198 H****) is not possible.

(Note 2) Calling of the subprogram with the M198 command is limited to once in the subprogram nest.
The subprogram can be called only from the memory or MDI program.
(Note 3) The data from the head of the program to the first LF (lien feed code. 0x0A as hexadecimal) is invalid, and
cannot be run or displayed. Note that if the head starts from an O number (program No.), the program is valid
from the head.

II - 179
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

12.1.1.3 Scaling
M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ― ―

The shape commanded by the program can be extended or reduced to the desired size by applying a scale factor to the
movement axis command position.

Gcode Function
G50 Scaling cancel
G51 Scaling ON

The program format is given below.

G51 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Pp1 ;

G51 : Call command
Xx1,Yy1,Zz1 : Scaling center coordinate position
Pp1 : Scale factor

The scale factor ranges from 0.000001 to 99.999999 times.

Y
sc s1 p1
y1
sc : (a)
p1, p2,p3 : (b)
s1,s2,s3 : (c)
s3
s2

p2

p3
X
x1

(a) Scaling center

(b) Programmed shape
(c) Shape after scaling

(Note 1) Scaling cannot be applied to compensation amount for tool radius compensation, tool position offset, or tool
length compensation, etc. (The compensation and offset are calculated for the scaled shape.)
(Note 2) Scaling applies only to the axes commanded with G51 block; it does not apply to axes which have not been
commanded.
When the scale factor is not assigned, the parameter setting applies instead.

II - 180
M70V Series Specifications Manual
12 Program Support Functions

12.1.1.4 Axis Name Switch

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ― ―
L system ○ ○

The axis name switch function switches the name of command axis and control axis.

G111 Axis name1 Axis name2 ;

: Axis name switch command
G111
: Axes to be performed the name switch command
Axis name 1,2
When the axis name switch command is canceled, assign only "G111;" command.

When switching the name of X-axis and Y-axis by axis name switch command, the machine performs as follow.
<Before axis name
<After axis name switch>
switch>
Command axis name Control axis Command axis name Control axis
X Xaxis -> X Yaxis
Y Yaxis Y Xaxis

(Example)
G111 X Y ;
G01 X100. ; (Y axis moves to 100.mm)
G01 Y100. ; (X axis moves to 100.mm)

II - 181
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

12.1.2 Macro Program

12.1.2.1 User Macro

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ 4 layers ○ 4 layers
L system ○ 4 layers ○ 4 layers

(1) Macro commands 1 ; G65 to G67

In order to carry through one integrated function, a group of control and arithmetic instructions can be used
and registered as a macro program. Furthermore, subprograms with a high degree of expandability can be
configured by setting these macro programs as types which are capable of conducting control and arithmetic
operations using variable commands.

G code Function
G65 Macro call (Sample call)
G66 Macro modal call A
G66.1 Macro modal call B
G67 Macro modal call cancel

The program formats are given below

G65 Pp1 Ll1 --Argument--;or,G65 <File name> Ll1 --Argument--;

G65 : Call command
Pp1 : Program No.
A four-digit or eight-digit program No. starting with O No. can be called by the parameter.
<File name> : File name
When designating the file name, enclose the file name with brackets < >.
Ll1 : Number of repetitions
Argument : Variable data assignment

The macro program is called immediately by this command

G66 Pp1 Ll1 --Argument--;or,G66 <File name> Ll1 --Argument--;

G66 : Call command
Pp1 : Program No.
A four-digit or eight-digit program No. starting with O No. can be called by the parameter.
<File name> : File name
When designating the file name, enclose the file name with brackets < >.
Ll1 : Number of repetitions
Argument : Variable data assignment

The macro program is executed from the block with the axis command following this command.

G66.1 Pp1 Ll1 --Argument--;or, G66.1 <File name> Ll1 --Argument--;

G66.1 : Call command
Pp1 : Program No.
A four-digit or eight-digit program No. starting with O No. can be called by the parameter.
<File name> : File name
When designating the file name, enclose the file name with brackets < >.
Ll1 : Number of repetitions
Argument : Variable data assignment

The macro program is executed with the word data of each block as the argument.

II - 182
M70V Series Specifications Manual
12 Program Support Functions

The following macro command functions are available.

#1=<Expression> ;
Arithmetic
Various arithmetic operations can be conducted between variables by the above.
commands
"<Expression>" is a combination of constants, variables, functions and operators.
Assignment of The portion in which the operator is to be given priority can be enclosed in [ ].
priority of Up to five pairs of square parentheses [ ] including the function [ ] can be used.
arithmetic The normal priority of operation is functions and multiplication/division followed by addition/
operations subtraction.
(1) IF[<Conditional
expression>]GOTO n ; The flow of the program can be controlled by these commands. "n"
Control (2) WHILE[<Conditional denotes the sequence numbers of the branching destination. "m"
commands expression>]Do m ; is an identification number, and 1 to 127 can be used. Note that
--- only 27 nestings can be used.
END m ;

(Note 1) The variable commands are provided under the optional specifications independently of the user macros. If
they are to be used, specify the optional specifications separately.

(2) Macro commands 2

Specific G commands and the miscellaneous commands (M, S, T, B) can be used for macro call.
(a) Macro call using G codes
Simply by assigning a G code, it is possible to call user macro programs with the prescribed program
number.
Format

G** Argument;
G** : G code for performing macro call
Argument : Variable data designation
The correspondence between the G** code which performs macro call and the program number for the
macro to be called is set by a parameter.

Up to 10 codes from G100 to G999 can be used for this command. (The G codes that are used in the
system also can be made available for this use by parameter setting.)
(Note 1) G101 to G110 and G200 to G202 are user macro I codes. However, if a parameter is set for the
G code call code, the G code call will have the priority, and these cannot be used as the user
macro I.

(b) Macro call using miscellaneous commands (M, S, T, B code macro call)
Simply by designating an M (or S, T, B) code, it is possible to call user macro programs with the
prescribed program number. (Entered M codes and all S, T and B codes can be used.)
Format

M** (or S**;, T**;, B**;)

M** (S**, T**, B**) : M (or S, T, B) code for performing macro call
The correspondence between the M** code which performs macro call and the program number for the
macro to be called is set by a parameter. Up to 10 M codes from M00 to M9999, M198 can be entered.
Select codes to be entered other than the codes basically required by the machine and M codes of M0,
M1, M2, M30 and M96 through M99.

(Note 1) G commands in G code macro programs are not subject to macro calls but normal G commands. M
commands in M code macro programs are not subject to macro calls but normal M commands. (The
same applies to S, T and B codes.)
(Note 2) The registration of the program number used for calling the G code macro or M (or S, T, B) code
macro can be done independently for each part system.

II - 183
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

12.1.2.2 Machine Tool Builder Macro

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

This function enables macro programs exclusively designed for use by the machine builders to be registered in addition
to the regular user macro programs.
As opposed to the conventional macro program, the macro program display, editing and input/output can be protected
with a password. This is suitable for maintaining the machine tool builder's original macro program confidentiality.
Machine tool builder macro programs are stored in a dedicated area which means that the user program registration
area is not reduced in the process.
When registering a machine tool builder macro, secure its space by formatting.
64 KB of registration area is secured in the machine tool builder macro program, and up to 100 programs can be
registered there.
The macro program registered as a machine tool builder macro is called out as "G65 command" or "G code macro
equivalent to G65". The macro program is described in the same manner as a conventional machining program.
Variables for the machine tool builder macros can be used within the machine tool builder macros. These variables can
be used commonly within the machine tool builder macro programs.

Call format 1

G65 Pp Ll Argument ;
p : Machine tool builder macro program No.(O100010000 to O199999998)
l : Number of repetitions
(Note) The machine tool builder macro program cannot be called with G66, G66.1 or M98. Note that a machine tool
builder macro program can be called from a machine tool builder macro program using M98.

Call format2

G*** Argument;
: G code defined in macro definition program
*** : Variable data designation
Argument Argument is used when a local variable must be delivered to the macro program. Designate a real value
after the address.
(Note) When calling the macro with the G code, the call program is defined with the macro definition program or setup
parameter. However, if the call program is defined in both the parameters and macro definition program, the
parameter definition will have the priority.

II - 184
M70V Series Specifications Manual
12 Program Support Functions

12.1.2.3 Macro Interruption

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

By inputting a user macro interrupt signal from the PLC, the program being currently executed is interrupted and other
programs can be called instead.
Retract or return operations when tools have been damaged, for instance, and other kinds of restoration operations to be
conducted when trouble has occurred are programmed in the interrupt programs.
There are two types of interrupts, type 1 and type 2, as described below, and they are selected using a parameter.
[Interrupt type 1] The block being executed is immediately interrupted, and the interrupt program is run
immediately.
[Interrupt type 2] After the block being executed is complete, the interrupt program is executed.

The command format is given below.

M96 Pp1 Hh1 ; or, M96 <File name> Hh1 ; User macro interrupt valid
M96 : Interrupt valid command
Pp1 : Interrupt program number
A four-digit or eight-digit program No. starting with O No. can be called by the parameter.
<File name> : File name
When designating a file name, enclose the file name in brackets <>.
Hh1 : Interrupt sequence No.

M97 ; User macro interrupt invalid

M97 : User macro interrupt end command

(c)

:
(e)
:
M 96 P p i ;
: :
: :
: :
(a)
: :
: :
(d) :
:
: :
M 97 ; :
: M9 9 ;
:
:
(b) (f)
:
:
:
:
:
M 02 ;

(a) The user macro interrupt signal is accepted during this period.
(b) The user macro interrupt signal is not accepted during this period.
(c) Machining program Opm:
(d) Interrupt signal
(e) Interrupt program Opi
(f) The modal information is restored to the status applying before interrupt.

II - 185
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

12.1.2.4 Variable Command

Programming can be given flexible and general-purpose capabilities by designating variables instead of directly
assigning numbers for addresses in programs and by supplying the values of those variables as required when running
the programs.
Arithmetic operations (adding, subtracting, multiplying and dividing) can also be conducted for the variables.

Number of variable sets specifications

Type Number Function

Common variables Common variables 1 Common variables 2
500 to 999 100 to 199 × number of
600 sets
100100 to 800199(Note 5) part systems
For 1-part system 700 sets 400 to 999 100 to 199
specifications 400 to 999
8000 sets 100100 to 800199(Note 5) 100 to 199 Can be used commonly for main,
900000 to 907399 sub and each macro program.
100 to 199 × number of
600+100 sets 400 to 999
part systems
For multi-part system
specifications 400 to 999
7900+100 100 to 199 × number of
100100 to 800199(Note 5)
sets part systems
900000 to 907399
Can be used as local in macro
Local variables 1 to 33
program.
System variables 1000 to Application is fixed in system.
Local variables in fixed cycle
Fixed cycle variables 1 to 32
program.

(Note 1) All common variables are held even when the power is turned OFF.
(Note 2) The common variables can be emptied by resetting or turning the power OFF when the parameters are set
accordingly.
(Note 3) The common variables are divided into the following two types.
Common variable 1: Variables that can be used commonly through the part systems.
Common variable 2: Variables that can be used commonly within that part system's program.
(Note 4) Variable names can be set for #500 to #519
(Note 5) The part system common variable which can be used is shown in the table below.
Variable sets Common variables 1
#100100 to #100199
600 sets #200100 to #200199
#300100 to #300199
Variable sets #400100 to #400199
specification #500100 to #500199
#600100 to #600199
8000 sets(7900 ＋ 100)
#700100 to #700199
#800100 to #800199

II - 186
M70V Series Specifications Manual
12 Program Support Functions

Variable expressions
Variable : #Numerical value #100
(Numerical value: 1,2,3, .....)
: # [Expression] #100
Expression : Numerical value
: Variable
: Expression Operator Expression #100 + #101
: - (minus) Expression -#120
: [Expression] [#110]
: Function [Expression] SIN [#110]
Variable definition
Variable = expression
(Note1) Variables cannot be used with addresses "O" and "N".

12.1.2.4.4 600 Sets

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ― ―
L system ○ ―

12.1.2.4.5 700 Sets

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ― ○

12.1.2.4.6 8000 Sets

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ― △ (*1)
L system ― △ (*1)

(*1) When HN754 is installed.

12.1.2.4.11 (600+100 × Number of Part Systems) Sets

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ― ○
L system ― ○

12.1.2.4.12 (7900+100 x Number of Part Systems) Sets

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ― △ (*1)
L system ― △ (*1)

(*1) When HN754 is installed.

II - 187
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

12.1.3 Fixed Cycle

List of fixed cycles

M system L system Remarks

Type of fixed cycle Gcode Gcode Gcode Gcode Gcode Gcode Gcode
list 1 list 2 list 3 list 4 list 5 list 6 list 7
G70 G80 G80 G80 G80 G80 G80
: : : : : : :
G89 G89 G89 G89 G89 G89 G89 Refer to 12.1.3.1.
Fixed cycle for drilling Refer to 12.1.3.2 (Type II).
G79 G83.2 G79 G83.2 G79 G83.2 Refer to 4.5.3.
G98 G98 G98 G98 G98 G98 G98
G99 G99 G99 G99 G99 G99 G99
G34
Special fixed cycles G35 - - - - - - Refer to 12.1.3.3.
G36
G90 G77 G90 G77 G90 G77
Fixed cycles for turning
- G92 G78 G92 G78 G92 G78 Refer to 12.1.3.4.
machining
G94 G79 G94 G79 G94 G79
G70 G70 G70 G70 G70 G70

Compound-type fixed : : : : : : Refer to 12.1.3.5.

cycles for turning - G76 G76 G76 G76 G76 G76 Refer to 12.1.3.6 (Type II).
machining G76.1 G76.1 G76.1 G76.1 G76.1 G76.1 Refer to 12.1.8.8.

G76.2 G76.2 G76.2 G76.2 G76.2 G76.2

Small-diameter deep-
G83 - - - - - - Refer to 12.1.3.7.
hole drilling cycle

II - 188
M70V Series Specifications Manual
12 Program Support Functions

12.1.3.1 Fixed Cycle for Drilling

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

(1) M system: G70 to G89, G88, G99

These functions enable drilling, tapping and other hole machining cycles to be assigned in a simple 1-block
program.

Gcode Function
G70
G71
G72
G73 Step cycle
G74 Reverse tapping cycle
G75 Perfect circle cutting cycle
G76 Fine boring
G77
G78
G79
G80 Fixed cycle cancel
G81 Drilling, spot drilling cycle
G82 Drilling, counterboring cycle
G83 Deep hole drilling cycle
G84 Tapping cycle
G85 Boring cycle
G86 Boring cycle
G87 Backboring cycle
G88 Boring cycle
G89 Boring cycle

There are two levels of hole machining axis return which apply upon completion of the fixed cycle machining
operation.

Gcode Function
G98 Initial point level return
G99 R point level return

The basic program format for the fixed cycle commands is shown below.

G81 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Rr1 Qq1 Pp1 Ll1 Ff1 ;

G81 : Hole drilling mode
Xx1,Yy1 : Hole position data; X-axis, Y-axis hole drilling position command (rapid traverse)
(incremental/absolute)
Zz1 : Hole machining data; Hole bottom position designation (incremental/absolute)
Rr1 : Hole machining data; Hole R point designation (incremental/absolute)
Qq1 : Hole machining data; Depth of cut per pass in G73, G83 cycle (incremental)
Shift amount in G76, G87 cycle
Depth of cut per pass in pecking tapping, deep hole tapping of G74, G84 cycle
Pp1 : Hole machining data; Dwell time at hole bottom
Ll1 : Hole machining data; Number of fixed cycle repetitions (Not executed when "0" is set.)
Ff1 : Cutting feed rate, Z-axis feed amount (tapping pitch) per spindle rotation
For details on the synchronous tapping cycle (including pecking tapping cycle and deep-hole tapping cycle), refer to
the section "4.5.3 Synchronous Tapping".

II - 189
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

G73 G74 G75 G76

Step cycle Reverse tapping cycle Perfect circle cutting cycle Fine boring cycle

G98 mode G98 mode Initial

Initial point
Initial G98 mode
point point Initial
R point / point S
R point
S P R point
R point S
Z point
S /

Z point Z point S
G98 mode M19 Shift
G99 mode G99 mode
G99 mode

Z point

G81 G82 G83 G84

Drilling, spot drilling cycle Drilling, counterboring cycle Deep hole drilling cycle Tapping cycle
G98 mode
G98 mode
Initial Initial G98 mode Initial
Initial
point point point
point
R point R point R point /
R point G98 mode S P
Z point
Z point G99 mode S Z point
G99 mode Dwell /
G99 mode

Z point

G85 G86 G87 G88

Boring cycle Boring cycle Back boring cycle Boring cycle

/
G98 mode
Initial / Initial /
Initial G98 mode Initial point
point point
point / R point
R point R point /
R point /
Z point Z point
Z point / / Z point
/ G98 mode
Dwell

G89
Boring cycle

G98 mode
Initial point

R point

Z point
Dwell

II - 190
M70V Series Specifications Manual
12 Program Support Functions

(2) L system: G83 to G89, G80

These functions enable drilling, tapping and other hole machining cycles to be assigned in a simple 1-block
program.

Retract
Gcode Drilling axis Drilling work start Motion at hole bottom Use
motion
G80 Cancel
Cutting feed In-position check Rapid
G83 Z Deep-hole drilling cycle1
Intermittent feed Dwell traverse feed
Tapping cycle
In-position check
(Reverse tapping cycle)
G84 Z Cutting feed Dwell Cutting feed
Pecking tapping cycle
Spindle CCW
Deep tapping cycle
In-position check
G85 Z Cutting feed Cutting feed Boring cycle
Dwell
Cutting feed In-position check Rapid
G87 X Deep-hole drilling cycle1
Intermittent feed Dwell traverse feed
Tapping cycle
In-position check
(Reverse tapping cycle)
G88 X Cutting feed Dwell Cutting feed
Pecking tapping cycle
Spindle CCW
Deep tapping cycle
In-position check
G89 X Cutting feed Cutting feed Boring cycle
Dwell
Cutting feed In-position check Rapid
G83.2 Z/X Deep-hole drilling cycle2
Intermittent feed Dwell traverse feed

The fixed cycle mode is canceled when G80 or some G command of the G01 group is issued. Data is also cleared
to zero simultaneously.
Command format

G83/G84/G85 Xx1 Cc1 Zz1 Rr1 Qq1 Pp1 Ff1 Kk1(Mm1) Ss1 ,Ss1 Dd1 ,Rr1 ;
G87/G88/G89 Xx1 Cc1 Zz1 Rr1 Qq1 Pp1 Ff1 Kk1(Mm1) Ss1 ,Ss1 Dd1 ,Rr1 ;
G83/G84/G85 : Fixed cycle mode of drilling (G83, G87), tapping (G84, G88), or boring (G85, G89)
G87/G88/G89 These commands are modal. Once one of them is given, it is effective until another command of the same
modal group or cancel command for drilling fixed cycle is given.
Xx1, Cc1 : Data for positioning X (Z) and C axes
The data is unmodal. To execute the same hole machining mode consecutively, specify the data for each
block.
Zz1, Rr1, Qq1, Pp1, Ff : Actual machining data in machining
Only Q is unmodal. Specify Q in G83 or G87 for each block whenever the data is required.
Kk1 : To repeat in a single cycle for hole machining at equal intervals, specify the number of repetitions in the
range of 0 to 9999 (no decimal point can be used).It is unmodal and is effective only in the block in which
the number of repetitions is specified.
If the number of repetitions is omitted, K1 is assumed to be specified.
If K0 is specified, hole machining data is stored, but hole machining is not performed.
Mm1 :If axis C clamp M command (parameter setting) is given, the M code is output at the initial point, and after
return motion, C axis unclamp M code (clamp M code + 1) is output and the dwell time set in a given
parameter is executed.
Ss1 : Designates spindle rotation speed
,Ss1 : Designates spindle rotation speed at retract
Dd1 : Designates tapping spindle No. for G84 (G88)
,Rr1 : Changes between synchronous/asynchronous in G84 (G88)

II - 191
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

The drilling cycle motions generally are classified into the following seven.

Motion 1 Motion 2
Initial point

Motion 3 Motion 7
R point

Motion 4
Motion 6

Motion 5

Motion 1: Rapid positioning up to the initial point of X (Z) and C axes.

If the "positioning axis in-position width" is designated, the in-position check is conducted upon completion of
the block.
Motion 2: Output if the C axis clamp M code is given.
Motion 3: Rapid positioning up to the R point.
Motion 4: Hole machining at cutting feed.
If the "drilling axis in-position width" is designated, the in-position check is conducted upon completion of the
block. However, in the case of deep-hole drilling cycles 1 and 2, the in-position check is not conducted with
the drilling of any holes except the last one. The in-position check is conducted at the commanded hole bottom
position (last hole drilling).
Motion 5: Motion at the hole bottom position. It varies depending on the fixed cycle mode.
Spindle CCW (M04), spindle CW (M03), dwell, etc., are included.
Motion 6: Return to the R point.
Motion 7: Return to the initial point at rapid traverse feed.
(Motions 6 and 5 may be conducted as a single motion depending on the fixed cycle mode.)

(Note) With a synchronous tap command, the in-position check is conducted in accordance with the parameters.

Whether the fixed cycle is complete with motion 6 or 7 can be specified by using either of the following G commands:
G98 : Initial level return
G99 : R point level return
These commands are modal. For example, once G98 is given, the G98 mode is entered until G99 is given. The G98
mode is entered in the initial state when the controller is ready.

II - 192
M70V Series Specifications Manual
12 Program Support Functions

Deep-hole drilling cycle (G83, G87)

G83/G87
Deep-hole drilling cycle (G83: Z-axis direction, G87: X-axis direction)

When Q command is given given

When Q command is not

S S

P

Z point / Initial point

X point R point
G99 mode
G98 mode

Initial point
Z / X point R point
G98 mode
G99 mode


G83.2
G84/88
G85/89
Deep-hole drilling cycle Tapping cycle Boring cycle

(C-axis clamp) (C-axis clamp)

Dwell
Dwell
H
Dwell Dwell
Dwell Reverse Dwell
Dwell rotation of H
spindle/rotary
Dwell tool
Z / X point
Dwell Z / X point
R point Initial point
R point Initial point
Z / X point G98 mode
(C-axis unclamp) G98 mode
Forward rotation of (C-axis unclamp)
spindle/rotary tool
Dwell
Output or no output can be set using a Output or no output can be set using a
parameter for the C-axis clamp/unclamp parameter for the C-axis clamp/unclamp
M code
M code

There are two levels of hole machining axis return which apply upon completion of the fixed cycle machining operation.

Gcode Function
G98 Initial point level return
G99 R point level return

II - 193
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

12.1.3.2 Fixed Cycle for Drilling (Type II)

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ― ―
L system ○ ○

In the longitudinal hole drilling fixed cycle, the X axis is designated as the hole drilling axis. However, in the longitudinal
hole drilling fixed cycle (type II), the Y axis can be designated as the hole drilling axis with the longitudinal hole drilling
axis selection function.

The relationship between the longitudinal hole drilling axis selection signal's ON/OFF state and the hole drilling axis of
the fixed cycle for drilling is shown below.

Y axis cross tap function

Gcode Details Hole drilling axis
selection signal state
G80 Cancel - -
ON
G83 Deep hole drilling cycle 1 Z
OFF
ON
G84 (G84.1) Tapping cycle Z
OFF
ON
G85 Boring cycle Z
OFF
ON Y
G87 Deep hole drilling cycle 1
OFF X
ON Y
G88 (G88.1) Tapping cycle
OFF X
ON Y
G89 Boring cycle
OFF X
ON
G83.2 Deep hole drilling cycle 2 Z/X
OFF

II - 194
M70V Series Specifications Manual
12 Program Support Functions

12.1.3.3 Special Fixed Cycle

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ― ―

These functions enable drilling, tapping and other hole machining cycles to be assigned in a simple 1-block program.
Special fixed cycles must always be used in combination with fixed cycles.

The special fixed cycles are as follows:

Gcode Function
G34 Bolt hole circle
G35 Line at angle
G36 Arc
G37.1 Grid

II - 195
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

(1) Bolt hole circle (G34)

The tool starts at the point forming angle θ with the X axis on the circumference of a circle with radius R
whose center is the coordinates designated by X and Y, and it drills "n" number of holes at "n" equal intervals
along the circumference of that circle. The drilling data for the standard fixed cycle of the G81 or other such
command is retained for the drilling operation at each hole position.
All movements between the hole positions are conducted in the G00 mode. The data is not retained upon
completion of the G34 command.

G34 Xx Yy Ir Jθ Kn ;
Xx,Yy : Center position of bolt hole circle; this is affected by the G90/G91 commands.
Ir : Radius "r" of circle; it is based on the least command increment and is provided using a positive number.
Jθ : Angle θ at point to be drilled initially; the counterclockwise direction is taken to be positive.
Kn : Number "n" of holes to be drilled; any number of holes from 1 through 9999 can be designated; 0 cannot be
assigned.
When 0 has been designated, the alarm will occur. A positive number provides positioning in the counterclockwise
direction;
a negative number provides positioning in the clockwise direction.

X1=200mm
(c)
(Example)
With 0.001mm least command increment
20° N001 G91 ;
N002 G81 Z-10.000 R5.000 L0 F200 ;
I =100mm N003 G90 G34 X200.000 Y100.000 I100.000 J20.000
Y1=100mm K6 ;
N004 G80 ;………………(G81 cancel)
W N005 G90 G0 X500.000 Y100.000 ;
( 500mm,100mm)
(b) (a)

(a) G0 command in N005

(b) Position prior to execution of G34 command
(c) n = 6 holes

As shown in the figure, the tool is positioned above the final hole upon completion of the G34 command. This
means that when it is to be moved to the next position, if the command is issued with incremental position, it
will be necessary to calculate the coordinate position. Thus, it is convenient to issue the command with
absolute position.

II - 196
M70V Series Specifications Manual
12 Program Support Functions

(2) Line at angle (G35)

With the starting point at the position designated by X and Y, the tool drills "n" number of holes each at interval
"d" in the direction forming angle θ with the X axis. A standard fixed cycle applies for the drilling operation at
each of the hole positions and so there is a need to retain beforehand the drilling data (drilling mode and
drilling data). All movements between the hole positions are conducted in the G00 mode. The data is not
retained upon completion of the G35 command.

G35 Xx Yy Id Jθ Kn ;
Xx,Yy : The starting point coordinates; they are affected by the G90/G91 commands.
Id : Interval "d"; it is based on the least command increment and when "d" is negative, drilling proceeds in the point
symmetrical direction centered on the starting point.
Jθ : Angle θ; the counterclockwise direction is taken to be positive.
Kn : Number "n" of holes to be drilled including the starting point; any number of holes from 1 through 9999 can be assigned.

Y
d=100mm (b)

(Example)
With 0.001 mm least command
θ =30 ° increment
G91;
X G81 Z-10.000 R5.000 L0 F100 ;
G35 X200.000 Y100.000 I 100.000
y1=100mm W J30.000 K5 ;

X1=200mm
(a)

(a) Position prior to execution of G35 command

(b) N=5 holes

II - 197
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

(3) Arc (G36)

The tool starts at the point forming angle θ with the X axis on the circumference of a circle with radius "r"
whose center is the coordinates designated by X and Y, and it drills "n" number of holes aligned at angle
interval △ θ. As with the bolt hole circle function, the drilling operation at each of the hole positions is based
on a hold drilling fixed cycle and so there is a need to retain the drilling data beforehand.
All movements between the hole positions are conducted in the G00 mode. The data is not retained upon
completion of the G36 command.

G36 Xx Yy Ir Jθ P △ θ Kn ;
Xx,Yy : Center coordinates of arc; they are affected by the G90/G91 commands.
Ir : Radius "r" of arc; it is based on the least command increment and is provided with a positive number.
Jθ : Angle θ at the point to be drilled initially; the counterclockwise direction is taken to be positive.
P△θ : Angle interval △ θ; when it is positive, the tool drills in the counterclockwise direction and when it is negative, it drills
in the clockwise direction.
Kn : Number "n" of holes to be drilled; any number of holes from 1 through 9999 can be assigned.

(a)

(Exampl)
With 0.001 mm least command increment
N001 G91;
Δθ =15 ° N002 G81 Z-10.000 R5.000 F100 ;
(b)
N003 G36 X300.000 Y100.000 I300.000 J10.000
θ =10 ° P15.000 K6 ;
Y1=100mm

W
X1=300mm

(a) n=6 holes

(b) Position prior to execution of G36 command

II - 198
M70V Series Specifications Manual
12 Program Support Functions

(4) Grid (G37.1)

With the starting point at on the position designated by X and Y, this function enables the tool to drill the holes
on the lattice with "nx" number of holes at parallel intervals of △ x to the X axis. Drilling proceeds in the X-axis
direction. The drilling operation at each of the hole positions is based on a standard fixed cycle and so there is
a need to command the drilling data (drilling mode and drilling data) beforehand. All movements between the
hole positions are conducted in the G00 mode. The data is not retained upon completion of the G37.1
command.

G37.1 Xx Yy I △ x Pnx J △ y Kny ;

Xx,Yy : The starting point coordinates; they are affected by the G90/G91 commands.
I△x : X-axis interval △ x; it is based on the least command increment; when △ x is positive, the intervals are provided in the
positive direction as seen from the starting point and when it is negative, they are provided in the negative direction.
Pnx : Number of holes "nx" in the X-axis direction; any number of holes from 1 through 9999 can be assigned.
J△y : Y-axis interval △ y; it is based on the least command increment; when △ y is positive, the intervals are provided in the
positive direction as seen from the starting point and when it is negative, they are provided in the negative direction.
Kny : Number of holes "ny" in the Y-axis direction; any number of holes from 1 through 9999 can be assigned.

(Example)
(c)
With 0.001 mm least command (a)
increment
G91;
G81 Z-10.000 R5.000 F20 ; W
y 1=100mm Δ y=100mm
G37.1 X300.000 Y-100.000
I50.000 P10
J100.000 K8 ;
Δ x=50mm
x1=300mm
(b)

(a) Position prior to execution of G37.1 command

(b) nx=10 holes
(c) ny=8 holes

II - 199
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

12.1.3.4 Fixed Cycle for Turning Machining

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ― ―
L system ○ ○

The shape normally programmed in several blocks for rough cutting, etc., in the turning machining can be commanded in
one block. This function is useful for machining program simplification. The fixed cycles are as follows.

G code Function
G77 Longitudinal cutting cycle
G78 Thread cutting cycle
G79 Face cutting cycle

Format

G △△ X/U ＿ Z/W ＿ I ＿ K ＿ R ＿ F ＿ (G18 plane)

Each fixed cycle command for turning machining is a modal G code and is effective until another command of the same
modal group or a cancel command is given.
The fixed cycle can be canceled by using any of the following G codes:
G00,G01,G02,G03
G09
G10,G11
G27,G28,G29,G30
G31
G33,G34
G37
G92
G52,G53
G65

II - 200
M70V Series Specifications Manual
12 Program Support Functions

(1) Longitudinal cutting cycle (G77)

(a) Straight cutting
Straight cutting in the longitudinal direction can be performed consecutively by the following block:

G77 X/U_ Z/W_ F_ ;

4 (R)
U
1 (R) 2
3 (F)
2 (F)

Z W
X
Z

(F) Cutting feed

(R) Rapid traverse feed

(b) Taper cutting

Taper cutting in the longitudinal direction can be performed consecutively by the following block:

G77 X/U_ Z/W_ R_ F_ ;

4 (R)
U
3 (F) 2
1 (R)
2 (F)

r
Z W
X

(F) Cutting feed

(R) Rapid traverse feed
r: Taper part depth (radius designation, incremental position, sign is required)

II - 201
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

(2) Thread cutting cycle (G78)

(a) Straight thread cutting
Straight thread cutting can be performed by the following block:

G78 X/U_ Z/W_ F/E_ ;

4 (R)
U
3 (R) 1 (R) 2
2 (a)

Z W
X

(a) F or E code designation

(R) Rapid traverse feed

(b) Taper thread cutting

Taper thread cutting can be performed by the following block:

G78 X/U_ Z/W_ R_ F/E_ ;

4 (R)
3 (R) 1 (R) U
2
2 (F)
r

Z W X

(R) Rapid traverse feed

(F) F or E code designation
r : Taper part depth (radius designation, incremental position, sign is required)

II - 202
M70V Series Specifications Manual
12 Program Support Functions

Chamfering

α:Thread cutting-up amount

Assuming that thread lead is L, the thread cutting-up amount can be set in a given parameter in 0.1L
steps in the range of 0 to 12.7L.
θ:Thread cutting-up angle
The thread cutting-up angle can be set in a given parameter in 1° steps in the range of 0 to 89°

II - 203
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

(3) Face cutting cycle (G79)

(a) Straight cutting
Straight cutting in the end face direction can be performed consecutively by the following block:

G79 X/U_ Z/W_ F_ ;

1(R)
2(F) U
4(R) 2

3(F)

Z W
X
Z

(R) Rapid traverse feed

(F) Cutting feed

(b) Taper cutting

Taper cutting in the end face direction can be performed consecutively by the following block:

G79 X/U_ Z/W_ R_ F_ ;

r
X

1( R)
U
2 ( F) 4( R)
2

3 (F)

Z W
X
Z

(R) Rapid traverse feed

(F) Cutting feed
r: Taper part depth (radius designation, incremental position, sign is required)

II - 204
M70V Series Specifications Manual
12 Program Support Functions

12.1.3.5 Compound Type Fixed Cycle for Turning Machining

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ― ―
L system ○ ○

The shape normally programmed in several blocks for rough cutting, etc., in the turning machining can be commanded in
one block. This function is useful for machining program simplification.
Compound type fixed cycle for turning machining are as follows:

G code Function
G71 Longitudinal rough cutting cycle
G72 Face rough cutting cycle
G73 Molding material in rough cutting cycle
G70 Finish cycle
G74 Face cutting-off cycle
G75 Longitudinal cutting-off cycle
G76 Multiple repetitive thread cutting cycle

II - 205
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

(1) Longitudinal rough cutting cycle (G71)

The finish shape program is called, and straight rough cutting is performed while intermediate path is being
calculated automatically.
The machining program is commanded as follows.

G71 Ud Re ;
G71 Aa Pp Qq Uu Ww Ff Ss Tt ;
Ud : Cutting amount (modal) ............... Reversible parameter
Increment : μm or 1/10000inch ... Radius value command
Re : Retract amount (modal) ................ Reversible parameter
Increment : μm or 1/10000inch ... Radius value command
Aa : Finish shape program No. (If omitted, the program being executed is designated.)
A four-digit or eight-digit program No. starting with O no. can specify the finish shape program by the parameter.
If the setting is to call the program with O No., it becomes the A command value program starting with O No.
If the A command is omitted, the program being executed are applied.
If A is omitted, the program following the end of this cycle will be executed at the block after Qq
(finish shape end sequence No.).
A file name can be designated instead of address A by enclosing the file name in brackets <>.
(The file name can have up to 32 characters, including the extension.)
Pp : Finish shape start sequence number (Head of program if omitted.)
Qq : Finish shape end sequence number (To end of program if omitted.)
If M99 precedes the Q command, up to M99.
Uu : Finishing allowance in X axis direction
(If omitted, finishing allowance in X axis direction is handled as 0.)
Increment : μm or 1/10000inch Diameter/radius value command follows changeover parameter.
Ww : Finishing allowance in Z axis direction
(If omitted, finishing allowance in Z axis direction is handled as 0.)
Increment : μm or 1/10000inch Radius value command
Ff : Cutting speed (If omitted, cutting speed (modal) before G71 is applied.)
Ss, Tt : Spindle command, tool command

(a)

(R)

X (R)
(F)
45° e
(F)
Z
u/2

(a) (Cycle commanded point)

d Cutting amount
u/2 Finishing allowance
W Finishing allowance
(R) Rapid traverse feed
(F) Cutting feed

II - 206
M70V Series Specifications Manual
12 Program Support Functions

(2) Face rough cutting cycle (G72)

The finish shape program is called, and rough cutting is performed in the end face direction while intermediate
path is being calculated automatically.
The machining program is commanded as follows

G72 Wd Re ;
G72 Aa Pp Qq Uu Ww Ff Ss Tt ;
Wd : Cut depth d. (When P,Q command is not given). (Modal)
Re : Retract amount e. (Modal)
Aa : Finish shape program No. (If it is omitted, the program being executed is designated.)
A four-digit or eight-digit program No. starting with O no. can specify the finish shape program by
the parameter.
If the setting is to call the program with O No., it becomes the A command value program starting
with O No.
If the A command is omitted, the P, Q commands in the program being executed are applied.
If the A command is omitted, the program being executed are applied.
If A is omitted, the program following the end of this cycle will be executed at the block after Qq
(finish shape end sequence No.).
A file name can be designated instead of address A by enclosing the file name in brackets <>.
(The file name can have up to 32 characters, including the extension.)
Pp : Finish shape start sequence number (Head of program if omitted.)
Qq : Finish shape end sequence number (To end of program if omitted.)
If M99 precedes the Q command, up to M99.
Uu : Finishing allowance in X axis direction
(If omitted, finishing allowance in X axis direction is handled as 0.)
Ww : Finishing allowance in Z axis direction
(If omitted, finishing allowance in Z axis direction is handled as 0.)
Ff : Cutting feedrate (If omitted, cutting feedrate (modal) before G72 is applied.)
Ss, Tt : Spindle command, tool command

S (a)

e
(F) (R)

45°
X (F)

u/2
Z
E

(a) Cycle commanded point

d Cut depth
u/2 Finishing allowance
W Finishing allowance
(F) Cutting feed
(R) Rapid traverse feed

II - 207
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

(3) Molding material in rough cutting cycle (G73)

The finish shape program is called. Intermediate path is automatically calculated and rough cutting is
performed conforming to the finish shape.
The machining program is commanded as follows.

G73 Ui Wk Rd ;
G73 Aa Pp Qq Uu Ww Ff Ss Tt ;
Ui :Cutting allowance in the X axis direction i - Cutting allowance when P, Q command is not given.
Wk :Cutting allowance in the Z axis direction k - Modal data
Rd :Split count d - Sign is ignored.
- Cutting allowance is given with a radius designation.
Aa :Finish shape program No. (If it is omitted, the present program is assumed to be
designated.)
A file name can be designated instead of address A by
enclosing the file name in brackets <>. (The file name can
have up to 32 characters, including the extension.)
Pp :Finish shape start sequence No. (If it is omitted, the program top is assumed to be designated.)
Qq :Finish shape end sequence No. (If it is omitted, the program end is assumed to be
designated.)
However, if M99 precedes the Q command, up to M99.
Uu :Finishing allowance in the X axis direction u - Finishing allowance for the finish shape commanded by the
Ww :Finishing allowance in the Z axis direction w address P or Q.
- Sign is ignored.
- Diameter or radius is designated according to the
parameter.
- The shift direction is determined by the shape
Ff :Cutting feed rate (F function) The F, S, and T commands in the finish shape program are
Ss :Spindle speed (S function) ignored, and the value in the rough cutting command or the
Tt :Tool selection (T function) preceding value becomes effective.

k+w
S1
X S2

S3 i + u/2
7
1
S
13
Z 2
19
6 8
14
12 5
E 18 11 4
17 10 3

16 9
15
A u/2
w

II - 208
M70V Series Specifications Manual
12 Program Support Functions

(4) Finish cycle (G70)

After rough cutting is performed by using G71 to G73, finish cutting can be performed by using the G70
command.
The machining program is commanded as follows.

G70 Aa Pp Qq ;
Aa : Finish shape program No.
(If it is omitted, the program being executed is assumed to be designated.)
A file name can be designated instead of address A by enclosing the file name in brackets <>.
(The file name can have up to 32 characters, including the extension.)
Pp : Finish shape start sequence No.
(If it is omitted, the program top is assumed to be designated.)
Qq : Finish shape end sequence No.
(If it is omitted, the program end is assumed to be designated.)
However, if M99 precedes the Q command, up to M99.

(a) The F, S, and T commands in the rough cutting cycle command G71 to G73 blocks are ignored, and the
F, S, and T commands in the finish shape program become effective.
(b) The memory address of the finish shape program executed by G71 to G72 is not stored. Whenever G70
is executed, a program search is made.
(c) When the G70 cycle terminates, the tool returns to the start point at the rapid traverse feed rate and the
next block is read.
(Example1) Sequence No. designation
~

N100 G70 P200 Q300 ; N200 . . . . . ;

~

N110
N300 . . . . . ;

N120
~

N200
(a)
~

N300
N310
~

(a) Finish shape program

(Example2) Program No. designation

~

N100 G70 A100 ;

N110 . . . . . ; O100
N120 . . . . . ;
G01 X100 Z50 F0.5 ;
~

M99 ;

In either example 1 or 2, after the N100 cycle is executed, the N110 block is executed.

II - 209
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

(5) Face cutting-off cycle (G74)

When the slotting end point coordinates, cut depth, cutting tool shift amount, and cutting tool relief amount at
the cut bottom are commanded, automatic slotting is performed in the end face direction of a given bar by G74
fixed cycle. The machining program is commanded as follows.

G74 Re ;
G74 Xx1/(Uu1) Zz1/(Ww1) Pi Qk Rd Ff ;
Re : Retract amount e (when X/U, Z/W command is not given) (Modal)
Xx1/Uu1 : B point coordinate (absolute/incremental position)
Zz1/Ww1 : B point coordinate (absolute/incremental position)
Pi : Tool shift amount (radius designation, incremental position, sign not required)
Qk : Cut depth k (radius designation, incremental position, sign not required)
(If sign is not provided, relief is made at the first cut bottom. If minus sign is provided,
Rd : Relief amount at cut bottom d
relief is made not at the first cut bottom but made at the second cut bottom and later.)
Ff : Feed rate

z w

(S)
12
i
e 2 1

i 3
4 9 and 12 just before the last cycle are
5
11 executed with the remaining distance.
i u/2 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 11 and 12 are executed
6 at the rapid traverse feed rate.
i 7
8
9

B
d 10
k x

(S) Start point

II - 210
M70V Series Specifications Manual
12 Program Support Functions

(6) Longitudinal cutting-off cycle (G75)

When the slotting end point coordinates, cut depth, cutting tool shift amount, and cutting tool relief amount at
the cut bottom are commanded, automatic slotting is performed in the longitudinal direction of a given bar by
G75 fixed cycle. The machining program is commanded as follows.

G75 Re ;
G75 Xx1/(Uu1) Zz1/(Ww1) Pi Qk Rd Ff ;
Re : Retract amount e (when X/U, Z/W command is not given) (Modal)
Xx1/Uu1 : B point coordinate (absolute/incremental position)
Zz1/Ww1 : B point coordinate (absolute/incremental position)
Pi : Cut depth i (radius designation, incremental position, sign not required)
Qk : Tool shift amount k (radius designation, incremental position, sign not required)
(If sign is not provided, relief is made at the first cut bottom. If minus sign is
Rd : Relief amount at cut bottom d provided, relief is made not at the first cut bottom but made at the second cut
bottom and later.)
Ff : Feed rate

z w

(S)
12
i
e 2 1

i 3
4 9 and 12 just before the last cycle are
5 executed with the remaining distance.
i 11 u/2 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 11 and 12 are executed
6 at the rapid traverse feed rate.

i 7
8
9

B
d 10
k x

(S) Start point

II - 211
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

(7) Compound type thread cutting cycle (G76)

When the thread cutting start and end points are commanded, cut at any desired angle can be made by
automatic cutting so that the cut section area (cutting torque) per time becomes constant in the G76 fixed
cycle.
Various longitudinal threads can be cut by considering the thread cutting end point coordinate and taper height
constituent command value.
Command Format

G76 Pmra Q △ dmin Rd ;

G76 Xx1/Uu1 Zz1/Ww1 Ri Pk Q △ d Fl ;
m : Cut count at finishing 01 to 99 (modal)
r : Chamfering amount 00 to 99 (modal). Set in 0.1-lead increments.
a : Nose angle (included angle of thread) 00 to 99 (modal) Set in 1-degree increments.
△ dmin : Least cut depth
When the calculated cut depth becomes smaller than △ dmin, the cut depth is clamped at △ dmin.
d : Finishing allowance (modal)
Xx1/Uu1 : X axis end point coordinate of thread part. --- Absolute/Incremental position
Zz1/Ww1 : Z axis end point coordinate of thread part. --- Absolute/Incremental position
Ri : Taper height constituent in thread part (radius value). When i = 0 is set, straight screw is made.
Pk : Thread height. Designate the thread height in a positive radius value.
Q△d : Cut depth. Designate the first cut depth in a positive radius value.
Fl : Thread lead

II - 212
M70V Series Specifications Manual
12 Program Support Functions

Configuration of one cycle

In one cycle, 1, 2, 5, and 6 move at rapid traverse feed and 3 and 4 move at cutting feed designated in F
command.

When Ri is negative

z w

S
6 1

u/2
4
2
3

( - i)
k

x r
a° /2

When Ri is positive

z w

S
6 1

5
2
u/2
4 k
3

i
a° /2

r
x

a°

(a)

k (b)

(c)
(d)

(a) First time Δd

(b) Second time Δd× √ 2
(c) nth time Δd× √ n
(d) Finishing allowanced (Cut "m" times at finishing)

II - 213
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

12.1.3.6 Compound Type Fixed Cycle for Turning Machining (Type II)
M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ― ―
L system ○ ○

Pocket shapes can be machined in the longitudinal rough cutting cycle (G71) and face rough cutting cycle (G72).

The cutting method differs according to whether pocket machining is ON or OFF.

Pocket machining OFF ....... Method to pull up the tool in a 45-degree direction from the workpiece
Pocket machining ON ......... Method that traces the shape (After executing the last trace, the tool is pulled up in the
X axis direction.)
Pocket machining is designated with the program (H address) or parameter.

Command format (This is a command format when the G71 is commanded. The G72 command is based on the G71
command.)

G71 Ud Re Hh ; <- (can be omitted when values set in parameters are used)
G71 Aa Pp Qq Uu Ww Ff Ss Tt ;
<H0:Used for finished shapes without pockets> <H1:Mainly used for finished shapes with pockets>

G71 Ud Re H 1; (R)
G71 Ud Re H 0; (R)
G71 Pp Qq .. ; (R)
G71 Pp Qq . . ; (R)
q (a)
q (a)
(R/f)
(R/f)
(f) d
d
(f) X
X
(f) (R)
(R) (b) p u/2
(f) 45° e p u/2
e w
(f) Z
Z w
(a) Rough cutting start point
(a) Rough cutting start point
(b) Hole bottom
Ud : Cut amount (modal) ........................ Reversible parameter
Increment : μm or 1/10000inch ..... Radius value command
Re : Retract amount (modal) .................. Reversible parameter
Increment : μm or 1/10000inch .... Radius value command
Hh : Pocket machining (modal) ............. Reversible parameter
0 : Select this only for finished shapes without hollow areas (pockets).
With the beginning of the pockets, the tool is pulled up in the 45-degree direction with each cycle until the
finished shape is finally traced.
1 : This can be selected regardless of whether the finished shape has hollow (pocket) parts or not.
A method that traces the finished shape with each cycle is used for the beginning of the pockets.
Depending on the parameter setting, pocket machining ON/OFF is automatically determined by the number
of axes in the finish shape start block.
Aa : Finish shape program No. (If omitted, the program being executed is designated.)
If the A command is omitted, the program being executed are applied.
If A is omitted, the program following the end of this cycle will be executed at the block after Qq
(finish shape end sequence No.).
A file name can be designated instead of address A by enclosing the file name in brackets <>.
(The file name can have up to 32 characters, including the extension.)
Pp : Finish shape start sequence number (Head of program if omitted.)
Qq : Finish shape end sequence number (To end of program if omitted.)
If M99 precedes the Q command, up to M99.
Uu : Finishing allowance in X axis direction (If omitted, finishing allowance in X axis direction is handled as 0.)
Increment : μm or 1/10000inch ....... Diameter/radius value command follows changeover parameter.
Ww : Finishing allowance in Z axis direction (If omitted, finishing allowance in Z axis direction is handled as 0.)
Increment : μm or 1/10000inch ......... Radius value command
Ff : Cutting feed rate (If omitted, cutting feed rate (modal) before G73 is applied.)
Ss, Tt : Spindle command, tool command

II - 214
M70V Series Specifications Manual
12 Program Support Functions

12.1.3.7 Small-diameter Deep-hole Drilling Cycle

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ― ―

In deep hole drilling, cutting and retract are repeated and the workpiece is machined multiple times. In addition, when
PLC signals are input during cutting, the cutting for the time concerned is skipped. In this way, this cycle reduces the
load applied to the tool.

Command format
The small-diameter deep-hole drilling cycle mode is established by designating the M code command which was set in
the parameter.
If the G83 command is designated in this mode, the small-diameter deep-hole drilling cycle is executed.
The mode is canceled by the following conditions.
- Designation of a fixed cycle cancel command (G80, G commands in Group 1)
- Resetting
The signal is not output in respect to the M command which changes the mode to the small-diameter deep-hole drilling
mode.

G83 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Rr1 Qq1 Ff1 Ii1 Pp1 ;

Xx1, Yy1 : Hole drilling position
Zz1 : Hole bottom position
Rr1 : R point position
Qq1 : Depth of cut in each pass (designated with incremental position)
Ff1 : Cutting feed rate
Ii1 : Feedrate from R point to the cutting start position, the speed for returning from hole bottom
Pp1 : Dwell time at hole bottom position

II - 215
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

12.1.4 Mirror Image

12.1.4.1 Mirror Image by Parameter Setting

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

A parameter is used to designate the axis for which the mirror image function is to be executed before the machining
program is run.
When mirror image is set to ON by the parameter, an operation which is symmetrical on the left and right or at the top or
bottom is performed.
Each axis has its own parameter.

12.1.4.2 Mirror Image by External Input

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

Signals from an external device (PLC) to request the mirror image operation either while a machining program is running
or before it is run.
When ON has been set for mirror image from an external device, an operation which is symmetrical on the left and right
or at the top or bottom is performed.
Each axis has its own request signal.

II - 216
M70V Series Specifications Manual
12 Program Support Functions

12.1.4.3 Mirror Image by G Code

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ― ―

Using a program for the left or right side of a shape, this function can machine the other side of the shape when a left/
right symmetrical shape is to be cut.
Mirror image can be applied directly by a G code when preparing a machining program.

Gcode Function
G50.1 G code mirror image cancel
G51.1 G code mirror image ON

The program format for the G code mirror image is shown below.

G51.1 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 ;

G51.1 : Mirror image on
Xx1,Yy1,Zz1 : Command axes and command positions

With the local coordinate system, the mirror image is applied with the mirror positioned respectively at x1, y1 and z1.

The program format for the G code mirror image cancel is shown below.

G50.1 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 ;

G50.1 : Mirror image cancel
Xx1,Yy1,Zz1 : Command axes

The x1, y1 and z1 indicate the axes for which the mirror image function is to be canceled and the coordinate position is
ignored.

In the case of G51.1 Xx1 ;

(a)
Y (b)

X
(c)

(a) Original shape (program)

(b) Shape achieved when machining program for the left side has been executed after the mirror command
(c) Mirroring axis

II - 217
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

12.1.4.4 Mirror Image for Facing Tool Posts

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ― ―
L system ― ○

With machines in which the base tool post and facing tool post are integrated, this function enables the programs
prepared for cutting at the base side to be executed by the tools on the facing side.
The distance between the two posts is set beforehand with the parameter.
The command format is given below.

Gcode Function
G68 Facing tool post mirror image ON
G69 Facing tool post mirror image OFF

When the G68 command is issued, the subsequent program coordinate systems are shifted to the facing side and the
movement direction of the X axis is made the opposite of that commanded by the program.
When the G69 command is issued, the subsequent program coordinate systems are returned to the base side.

The facing tool post mirror image function can be set to ON or OFF automatically by means of T (tool) commands without
assigning the G68 command.
A parameter is used to set ON or OFF for the facing tool post mirror image function corresponding to the T commands.

(c)
X
(a)
(G 6 9 )

Z (d)

(G 68 )
(b)

(e)

(a) Programmed path

(b) Facing side path (mirror image ON)
(c) Base post
(d) Parameter for distance between posts (radial value, X axis only)
(e) Facing post

II - 218
M70V Series Specifications Manual
12 Program Support Functions

12.1.4.5 T Code Mirror Image for Facing Tool Posts

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ― ―
L system ― ○

If, when tools that correspond to tool Nos. 1 to 64 are selected (T commands), these are tool Nos. for which the facing
tool post mirror image function has already been designated with a parameter, the status equivalent to G68 (facing tool
post mirror image ON) is established. When the commands apply to tool Nos. for which the facing tool post mirror image
function is not designated, the status equivalent to G69 (facing tool post mirror image OFF) is established.

12.1.5 Coordinate System Operation

12.1.5.1 Coordinate Rotation by Program

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ― ○

When it is necessary to machine a complicated shape at a position that has been rotated with respect to the coordinate
system, you can machine a rotated shape by programming the shape prior to rotation on the local coordinate system,
then specifying the parallel shift amount and rotation angle by means of this coordinate rotation command.
The program format for the coordinate rotation command is given below.

(1) M system

G68 Xx1 Yy1 Rr1 ; Coordinate rotation ON

G69 ; Coordinate rotation cancel
G68 : Call command
G69 : Cancel command
Xx1,Yy1 : Rotation center coordinates
Rr1 : Angle of rotation

(Example)

Y
Y’
(a) X’

(b)

(a) Actual machining shape

(b) (Programmed coordinate)

II - 219
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

(2) L system

G68.1 Xx1 Yy1 Rr1 ; Coordinate rotation ON

G69.1 ; Coordinate rotation cancel
G68.1 :Call instruction
Xx1,Zz1 :Rotation center coordinates
Rr1 :Angle of rotation

(Example)

X’
(b)

Z’

(a)

(a) Actual machining shape

(b) (Programmed coordinate)

II - 220
M70V Series Specifications Manual
12 Program Support Functions

12.1.6 Dimension Input

12.1.6.1 Corner Chamfering/Corner R

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

This function executes corner processing by automatically inserting a straight line or an arc by the commanded amount
between two consecutive movement blocks (G01/G02/G03).
The corner command is executed by assigning the ",C" or ",R" command for the block at whose end point the corner is
inserted.

(1) Corner chamfering I/ Corner R I

When ",C" or ",R" is commanded for linear interpolation, corner chamfering or corner R can be inserted
between linear blocks.
Corner chamfering I Corner R I
Example: Example:
N1 G01 Xx1 Zz1 ,Cc1 ; N1 G01 Xx1 Zz1 ,Rr1 ;
N2 Zz2 ; N2 Zz2 ;

N1 G01 Xx1 Zz1 ,Cc1 ;

N1 G01 Xx1 Zz1 ,Rr1 ;
N2 Zz2 ;
N2 Zz2 ;

c1
N 2
c1 N2

r1
N 1
N1

(Note 1) If a corner chamfering or corner R command is issued specifying a length longer than the N1 or N2 block,
a program error occurs.

II - 221
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

(2) Corner chamfering II/ corner R II

When ",C" or ",R" is commanded in a program between linear-circular, corner chamfering or corner R can be
inserted between blocks.
When the parameters are set, "I_", "K_", "C_" can be used to command chamfering instead of ",C", and "R_"
can be used to command rounding instead of ",R_". (L system only)
(a) Corner chamfering II (Linear - circular)

Example: G01 X_Z_ ,Cc1 ;

G02 X_Z_ Ii1
Kki ;

Hypothetical corner intersection %E

%E

Chamfering end point

Chamfering start point

(b) Corner chamfering II (Circular - linear)

Example: G03 X_Z_ Ii1 Kk1 ,Cc1 ;

G01 X_Z_ ;

Hypothetical corner intersection %E

%E

Chamfering start point Chamfering
end point

(c) Corner chamfering II (Circular - circular)

Example: G02 X_Z_ Ii1 Kk1 ,Cc1 ;
G02 X_Z_ Ii2 Kk2 ;

Hypothetical corner intersection

Cc1
Cc1

Chamfering Chamfering
end point start point

2 1

II - 222
M70V Series Specifications Manual
12 Program Support Functions

(d) Corner R II (Linear - circular)

Example: G01 X_Z_ ,Rr1 ;

G02 X_Z_ Ii1 Kk1 ;

Corner R start point

Hypothetical corner
intersection 1

Rr1
Corner R
end point

(e) Corner R II (Circular - linear)

Example: G03 X_Z_ Ii1 Kk1 ,Rr1 ;

G01 X_Z_
;
Corner R end point
Hypothetical corner
intersection 2

Rr1
Corner R start point

(f) Corner R II (Circular - circular)

Example: G02 X_Z_ Ii1 Kk1 ,Rr1 ;

G02 X_Z_ Ii2 Kk2 ;

Hypothetical corner intersection

1

Corner R
start point
Rr1
Corner R start point

II - 223
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

(3) Specification of corner chamfering Expansion/ corner R Expansion

An E address can be used to specify the speed for corner chamfering or corner R. This enables a corner to be
cut to a correct shape.

(Example)

G01 X_Z_ ,Cc1 Ff1 Ee1 ;

X_Z_ ;

G01 X_Z_ ,Rr1 Ff1 Ee1 ;

X_Z_ ;

X
F

An E address is a modal and remains effective for feeding in next corner chamfering or corner R.
An E address has two separate modals: synchronous and asynchronous feed rate modals. The effective feed
rate is determined by synchronous (G95) or asynchronous (G94) mode.
If an E address is specified in 0 or no E command has been specified, the feed rate specified by an F
command is assumed as the feed rate for corner chamfering or corner R.
An E address modal is not cleared even if the reset button is pressed.
It is cleared when the power is turned OFF. (In the same manner as F commands.)

II - 224
M70V Series Specifications Manual
12 Program Support Functions

(4) Corner chamfering / corner R (I, K designation) (L system only)

With this command format, by means of parameter settings, corners are chamfered using the "I", "K" or "C"
address without a comma, and corners are rounded using the "R" address.
The ",C" and ",R" addresses with commas can also be used.

(a) Corner chamfering (I, K designation)

Corners are chamfered using the "I_", "K_" or "C_" address with no comma.
Corners can be chamfered to any angle.
Signs, if they are provided for the corner chamfering commands, are ignored.
Command format

N100 Xx1/Uu1 Zz1/Ww1 Ii1/Kk1/Cc1 ;

N200 Xx1/Uu1 Zz1/Ww1 ;
Xx1/Uu1 : X-axis end point coordinate
Zz1/Ww1 : Z-axis end point coordinate
Ii1/Kk1/Cc1 : The length from the hypothetical corner intersection to the chamfering start point or
chamfering end point is designated using the I, K or C address.

N200
(b)

(a)
i, k, c

N100 (c)
i, k, c

0 Z

(a) Chamfering start point

(b) Chamfering end point
(c) Hypothetical corner intersection

- If multiple "I", "K" or "C" addresses or duplicated addresses have been designated in the same
block, the last address will take effect.
- If both corner chamfering and corner R commands are present in the same block, the last command
will take effect.
- If "C" is used as the name of an axis, corner chamfering commands cannot be designated using the
"C" address.
- If "C" is used as a 2nd miscellaneous function, corner chamfering commands cannot be designated
using the "C" address.
- Corner chamfering commands using the "I" or "K" address cannot be designated in an arc command
block. "I" and "K" are the arc center commands.

II - 225
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

(b) Corner R (I, K designation)

Corners are rounded using the "R_" address with no comma.
Corners can be rounded to any angle.
Signs, if they are provided for the corner R commands, are ignored.
Command format

N100 Xx1/Uu1 Zz1/Ww1 Rr1 ;

N200 Xx1/Uu1 Zz1/Ww1 ;
Xx1/Uu1 : X-axis end point coordinate
Zz1/Ww1 : Z-axis end point coordinate
Rr1 : Radius of corner R arc

(b)
N200

N100 (a)
(c)
0 Z

(a) Hypothetical corner intersection

(b) Corner R end point
(c) Corner R start point

- If both corner chamfering and corner R commands are present in the same block, the last address
will take effect.
- Corner R commands using the "R" address cannot be designated in an arc command block. "R" is
regarded as the arc radius command in such a block.

II - 226
M70V Series Specifications Manual
12 Program Support Functions

(5) Interrupt during corner chamfering / Interrupt during corner R

Shown below are the operations of manual interruption during corner chamfering or corner R.

(a) With an absolute value command and manual absolute switch ON:

X (d)

(b)

N1 G28 XZ; (c)

N2 G00 X40. Z120.;
N3 G03 X140.Z70. K-50. ,R20. F100 ;
N4 G01 X40. Z20. ;
: 140.

N4
N3

(a)
40.

Z
20. 70. 120. (mm)

(a) When interrupt is not applied

(b) When interrupt is applied
(c) X-axis interrupt
(d) Z-axis interrupt

(b) With an incremental value command or manual absolute switch OFF:

X (d)
(b)

N1 G28 XZ; (c)

N2 G00 U40. W120.;
N3 G03 U100. W-50. K-50. ,R20.
F100 ;
N4 G01 U-100.W-50. ; 140.
:

N4
N3

40. (a)

Z
20. 70. 120. (mm)

(a) When interrupt is not applied

(b) When interrupt is applied
(c) X-axis interrupt
(d) Z-axis interrupt

II - 227
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

12.1.6.2 Linear Angle Command

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

The end point coordinates are automatically calculated by assigning one element (one component of the selected plane)
of the end point coordinates and the linear angle.

G17 Xx1 Aa1 ; or G17 Yy1 Aa1 ;

G17 : Plane selection
Xx1,Yy1 : 1 element of the end point coordinate
Aa1 : Angle

Example

G17 G91 X100. A60. ;

Y (E)

60°

(S) X100.

(E) End point (Automatically calculated with operation)

(S) Start point

(Note 1) If the axis "A" or 2nd miscellaneous function "A" is used, address "A" is treated as the axis "A" command or the
2nd miscellaneous function, respectively.

II - 228
M70V Series Specifications Manual
12 Program Support Functions

12.1.6.3 Geometric Command

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

When it is difficult to find the intersection point of two straight lines with a continuous linear interpolation command, this
point can be calculated automatically by programming the command for the angle of the straight lines.
Example

N1 G01 Aa1 Ff1 ;

N2 Xx1 Zz1 Aa2 ;
X

x1 (E) ( x 1, z 1 )
2
N2
a: Angle (°) formed between straight line
a2 and horizontal axis on plane.
The plane is the selected plane at this time.
(b) a1
N1
(S)

Z
W1 z1

(a) Automatic intersection point calculation

(E) End point
(S) Start point

(Note1) This function cannot be used when using the A axis or 2nd miscellaneous function A.

II - 229
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

(1) Automatic calculation of two-arc contact

When two continuous circular arcs contact with each other and it is difficult to find the contact, the contact is
automatically calculated by specifying the center coordinates position or radius of the first circular arc and the
end point (absolute position) and center position or radius of the second circular arc.
Example
G18 G02 Ii1 Kk1 Ff1 ;
G03 Xxc Zzc Ii2 Kk2 Ff2 ;
OR
G18 G02 Ii1 Kk1 Ff1 ;
G03 Xxc Zzc Rr2 Ff2 ;
OR
G18 G02 Rr1 Ff1 ;
G03 Xxc Zzc Ii2 Kk2 Ff2 ;

A C (xc,zc)
r1 (p2,q2)
B' (?,?)

(p1,q1)

r2

I and K : Incremental position from arc end point

P and Q : Arc center position (absolute position)

I and K are the arc center position (incremental position); distances from the start point in the first block or
distances from the end point in the second block. P and Q (X, Z arc center position (absolute position)) can be
commanded instead of I and K commands.

(2) Automatic calculation of linear-arc intersection

When it is difficult to find the intersections of a given line and circular arc, the intersections are automatically
calculated by programming the following blocks.
Example
G18 G01 Aa1 Ff1 ;
G02 Xxc Zzc Ii2 Kk2 Hh2 (,Hh2) Ff2 ;

r1 B' (?,?)
H=0 H=1

B (?,?)
a1 (p2,q2)
A
C (xc,zc)
I and K : Incremental position from arc end point
P and Q : Arc center position (absolute position)
H = 0 : Intersection with shorter line (B point)
H = 1 : Intersection with longer line (B’ point)

The p2 and q2 can be commanded instead of Ii2 and Kk2.

The linear - arc contact is automatically calculated by designating R instead of I and K (P, Q).

II - 230
M70V Series Specifications Manual
12 Program Support Functions

(3) Automatic calculation of arc-linear intersection

When it is difficult to find the intersections of a given circular arc and line, the intersections are automatically
calculated by programming the following blocks.
Example
G18 G03 Ii1 Kk1 Hh1 Ff1 ;
G01 Xxc Zzc Aa1 Ff1 ;

(p1,q1)
B' (?,?)
B (?,?) a1
H=1
r1 H=0
C (xc, zc)

I and K : Incremental position from arc end point

P and Q : Arc center position (absolute position)
H = 0 : Intersection with shorter line (B point)
H = 1 : Intersection with longer line (B’ point)

The p1 and q1 can be commanded instead of Ii1 and Kk1.

The arc - linear contact is automatically calculated by designating R instead of I and K (P, Q).

(4) Automatic calculation of linear-arc contact

When it is difficult to find the contact of a given line and circular arc, the contact is automatically calculated by
programming the following blocks.
Example
G01 Aa1 Ff1 ;
G03 Xxc Zzc Rr1 Ff1 ;

C (xc,zc)

r1

B (?,?)
a1

A
The linear - arc intersection is automatically calculated by designating R instead of P and Q (I, K).

(5) Automatic calculation of arc-linear contact

When it is difficult to find the contact of a given circular arc and line, the contact is automatically calculated by
programming the following blocks.
Example

G02 Rr1 Ff1 ;

G01 Xxc Zzc Aa1 Ff1 ;

B (?,?)
A

r1
a1

C(xc, zc)

The arc - linear intersection is automatically calculated by designating R instead of P and Q (I, K).

II - 231
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

12.1.6.4 Polar Coordinate Command

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ― ―

With this function, the end point position is commanded with the radius and angle.

Command format

G16 ; Polar coordinate command mode ON

G15 ; Polar coordinate command mode OFF

Example of program

G1x ; Plane selection for polar coordinate command (G17/G18/G19)

G16 ; Polar coordinate command mode ON
Polar coordinate command
G9x : Center selection for polar coordinate command (G90/G91))
G90…The workpiece coordinate system zero point is the polar coordinate center.
G91…The present position is the polar coordinate center.
x1 : 1st axis for the plane…The radius commanded
y1 : 2nd axis for the plane…The angle commanded(C) Present position

(a)
G9x G01 Xx1 Yy1 F2000 ; x1
:
(c)

(d) (C)
y1

X
(b)
(a) Commanded position (end point)
(b) For G90/G17(X-Y plane)
(c) Plus
(d) Minus
G15 ; Polar coordinate command mode OFF

II - 232
M70V Series Specifications Manual
12 Program Support Functions

12.1.7 Axis Control

12.1.7.1 Chopping

12.1.7.1.1 Chopping
M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

This function continuously raises and lowers the chopping axis independently of the program operation when workpiece
contours are to be cut. It can be used for grinding operations using machining centers, for instance.
Which of the axes is to serve as the chopping axis is set by a parameter beforehand.

(1) Chopping action

(a) (b)

(c)

(a) Grindstone
(b) Chopping action
(c) Workpiece

II - 233
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

(d) (e)
(a)

(R) (R) The chopping operation is initiated by setting

the upper dead point position, lower dead point
(b) position and number of cycles (number of up/
down movements per minute) and pressing the
chopping start switch.

(c)
(a) Base position
(b) Upper dead point
(c) Lower dead point
(d) Start
(e) Stop
(R) Rapid traverse

(Note 1) The upper dead point position, lower dead point position and number of cycles are set and the start and
stop commands are designated by input signals from the user PLC.
(Note 2) The setting for the number of cycles differs according to the motor, inertia and other factors.

The chopping operation is performed as follows.

(a) The axis moves from the base position to the upper dead point by rapid traverse.
(b) Next, the axis moves repeatedly from the upper dead point to the lower dead point and then from the lower
dead point to the upper dead point. (Sinusoidal waveforms)
The feed rate is tailored to achieve the number of cycles set for the up/down motion.

Chopping override
Override in 1% increments from 0% to 100% can be applied to the chopping operation.
(Note) Bear in mind that the override increment differs according to the machine specifications.

II - 234
M70V Series Specifications Manual
12 Program Support Functions

12.1.7.2 Normal Line Control

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ― ○
L system ― ―

This function controls the swiveling of the C axis (rotary axis) so that the tool is always pointing in the normal line
direction for the X and Y axes movement commands during program operation. It can be used for machining hale, for
sewing operations involving sewing machines, carpets, etc. It is valid for only one C axis (rotary axis).
At the block seams, the C axis turning is controlled so that the tool faces the normal line direction at the next block's start
point.

(a)

(c)

(b)

(a) C-axis center (rotary axis)

(b) C axis swiveling
(c) Tool tip position

During arc interpolation, the C axis turning is controlled in synchronization with the operation of arc interpolation.

(a)

(b)

(c)

(a) C-axis center (rotary axis)

(b) Tool
(c) Tool end position

Gcode Function
G40.1 Normal line direction control cancel
G41.1 Normal line direction control left ON
G42.1 Normal line direction control right ON

II - 235
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

12.1.7.3 Circular Cutting

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ― ―

In circular cutting, a system of cutting steps are performed: first, the tool departs from the center of the circle, and by
cutting along the inside circumference of the circle, it draws a complete circle, then it returns to the center of the circle.
The position at which G12 or G13 has been programmed serves as the center of the circle.

The program format is given below.

G12/(G13) Ii Dd Ff ;
G12 : Circular cutting command CW (clockwise)
G13 : Circular cutting command CCW (counter clockwise)
Ii : Radius of complete circle
Dd : Compensation No.
Ff : Feed rate

When the G12 command is used (path of tool center)

0→1→2→3→4→5→6→7→0
When the G13 command is used (path of tool center)
0→7→6→5→4→3→2→1→0

(a)
1

0 2
X
4 6

(b) 3

(a) Radius of circle

(b) Compensation amount

(Note1) Circular cutting is carried out on the plane which has been currently selected (G17, G18 or G19).
(Note2) The (+) and (-) signs for the compensation amount denote reduction and expansion respectively.

II - 236
M70V Series Specifications Manual
12 Program Support Functions

12.1.8 Multi-part System Control

12.1.8.1 Timing Synchronization between Part Systems

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ― ○
L system ― ○

Timing synchronization between part systems (block start synchronization) is possible by programming.

! ; Part system 1 and part system 2 are waited for a synchronous When the part system number is to be
operation. omitted

This timing synchronization command makes it possible to control the simultaneous operation of two part systems and
the independent operation of part systems.

(c) (d)
$1 $2
Pi 1 Pn 1

Pi 1 Pn 1

! ;
(b)

! ;
(a)

Pi 2 Pn 2 Pi 2 Pn 2

(a) Simultaneously start

(b) Wait
(c) Part system 1 program
(d) Part system 2 program
$1 Part system 1
$2 Part system 2

(Note 1) When a part system to be waited for a simultaneous operation is not operating, the currently operating part
system will move on to the next block without executing timing synchronization.
This function is useful when conducting a program check on each part system.
(Note 2) The timing synchronization command is normally assigned as a separate command. However, if a movement
command and M, S or T command have been assigned in the same block, a parameter is set to decide
whether timing synchronization is executed upon executing of the movement command and M, S or T
command, or the movement command and M, S or T command are executed upon completion of timing
synchronization.

II - 237
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

12.1.8.2 Start Point Designation Timing Synchronization

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ― ○
L system ― ○

The timing synchronization can be placed in the middle of the block by designating the start point.
(1) Start point designation timing synchronization Type 1 (G115)
Command format

!Ll G115 Xx1 Zz1 Cc1 ;

!Ll : Timing synchronization command
G115 : G command
Xx1, Zz1, Cc1 : Own start point (designate other part system's coordinate position)
(a) The other part system starts first when timing synchronization is executed.
(b) The own part system waits for the other part system to move and reach the designated start point, and
then starts.

(a) ! G115
(c)
(b) !
(d)
(a) ! G115
(c)
(b) !
(d)

(a) Own part system

(b) Other part system
(c) Timing synchronization
(d) Designated start point

(c) When the start point designated by G115 is not on the next block movement path of the other part
system, the own part system starts once the other part system has reached each start point axis
coordinate position.

← : Movement
◎ : Command point
△ : Actual start point

II - 238
M70V Series Specifications Manual
12 Program Support Functions

(2) Start point designation timing synchronization Type 2 (G116)

Command format

!Ll G116 Xx1 Zz1 Cc1 ;

!Ll : Timing synchronization command
G116 : G command
Xx1, Zz1, Cc1 : Other start point (designate own part system's coordinate position)

(a) The own part system starts first when timing synchronization is executed.
(b) The other part system waits for the own part system to move and reach the designated start point, and
then starts.

(e)
(a) ! G116
(b)
(d) !
(e)
(a) ! G116
(b)
(d) !

(a) Own part system

(b) Timing synchronization
(d) Other part system
(e) Designated start point

(c) When the start point designated by G116 is not on the next block movement path of the own part system,
the other part system starts once the own part system has reached each start point coordinate position.

← : Movement
◎ : Command point
△ : Actual start point

II - 239
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

12.1.8.3 Mixed Control (Cross Axis Control)

This function enables any axis to be replaced by another axis between part systems.
This makes it possible to perform operations which are not possible with regular axis configurations: for instance, tools
which are provided only on part system 1 can be used for machining on part system 2.
This manual contains descriptions where part system Nos. have been added after the axis names in order to identify
which part system the axes belong to (such as X1). In terms of designating the program commands, however, a single
letter is used to designate the axis address just as before.

Switching C1 axis control from the 1st part system to the 2nd part system
$1
$1
X1 X1
Z1 Z1

C1 C1

Z2 Z2
X2 X2

$2
$2

12.1.8.3.1 Mixed Control (Cross Axis Control) I

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ― ―
L system ― ○

Performs the mixed control (cross axis control) by G command.

12.1.8.3.2 Mixed Control (Cross Axis Control) II

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ― ―
L system ― ○

Performs the mixed control (cross axis control) by PLC signal.

II - 240
M70V Series Specifications Manual
12 Program Support Functions

12.1.8.5 Control Axis Synchronization across Part Systems

Synchronization control enables an arbitrary control axis in the other part system to move in synchronization with the
movement command assigned to an arbitrary control axis.
The direction in which the axis is to move synchronously can also be reversed using a parameter.
Base axis ... Axis to which movement command to synchronize axes is assigned.
(X1 in the following figure)
Synchronization axis ... Axis whose movement is synchronized with base axis.
(Z2 in the following figure)
$1 (X1, Z1) $2 (Z2)

X1

Z2

Z1

12.1.8.5.1 Control Axis Synchronization Across Part System I

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ― ―
L system ― ○

Performs the control axis synchronization across part system by G command.

12.1.8.5.2 Control Axis Synchronization Across Part System II

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ― ―
L system ― ○

Performs the control axis synchronization across part system by PLC signal.

II - 241
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

12.1.8.6 Balance Cut

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ― ―
L system ― ○

When workpiece that is relatively long and thin is machined on a lathe, deflection may result, making it impossible for the
workpiece to be machined with any accuracy. In cases like this, the deflection can be minimized by holding tools
simultaneously from both sides of the workpiece and using them in synchronization to machine the workpiece (balance
cutting). This method has an additional advantage: since the workpiece is machined by two tools, the machining time is
reduced.
The balance cutting function enables the movements of the tool rests belonging to part system 1 and part system 2 to be
synchronized (at the block start timing) so that this kind of machining can easily be accomplished.

$1

$2

The command format is given below.

G14 Balance cut command OFF (modal)

G15 Balance cut command ON (modal)

G14 and G15 are modal commands. When the G15 command is assigned, the programmed operations of two part
systems are synchronized (at the block start timing) for all blocks until the G14 command is assigned or until the modal
information is cleared by the reset signal.

(a) (b)

T 0 1 01; T 01 02;
G00 X_ Z_; G00 X_ Z_;
G 1 5; G 15;
G01 Z_ F0. 4; G01 Z_ F0. 4;

: :
: :

(a) Part system 1 program

(b) Part system 2 program

Whereas synchronization is possible only with the next block when using the code "!" of timing synchronization between
part systems, the balance cutting function provides synchronization (at the block start timing) with multiple consecutive
blocks.

II - 242
M70V Series Specifications Manual
12 Program Support Functions

12.1.8.7 Common Memory for Part Systems

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ― ―
L system ― ○

For a machine with multiple part systems, the common variables and tool compensation memory which exist for each
part system can be made common for all part systems by setting the parameters.
(1) Common variables
In the multi-part system, normally the common variables #100 to #199 are used for each part system, and
variables #500 to #999 are common for the part systems. When this function is valid, the common variables
#500 to #999 also become variables for each part system.
To use part or all of the common variables #100 to #199 and #500 to #999 commonly for all part systems, set
the number of parameters to be used commonly for the part systems in variables #100 to #199 and #500 to
#999.
As for the variables designated to be common to part systems, the data for part system 1 is used.

(2) Tool compensation memory

When this specification is valid, the tool compensation memory used for operation in the 2nd or following part
system changes to be used with the part system 1 data. Thus, the 2nd part system and following data is not
used when the common data is used for the part systems.
This function is only for the lathe system and supported up to 2 part systems.

(Note) The setting (such as number of axes and axis names) for the tool compensation amount of part system 1 and
part system 2 must be the same.
If the settings differ, the setting of part system 1 will be applied.

II - 243
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

12.1.8.8 2-part System Synchronous Thread Cutting

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ― ―
L system ― ○

The 2-part system synchronous thread cutting allows 1st part system and 2nd part system to perform thread cutting
simultaneously for the same spindle.
The 2-part system synchronous thread cutting has two command; the command (G76.1) for simultaneously cutting
threads in two places, which is known as the "2-part system synchronous thread cutting cycle I" and the command
(G76.2) for simultaneously cutting a thread by two part systems, which is known as the "2-part system synchronous
thread cutting cycle II"

(1) 2-part System Synchronous Thread Cutting Cycle I (G76.1)

In the G76.1 cycle, G76.1 is issued simultaneously by 1st part system and 2nd part system, and the thread is cut in
synchronization at the start and end of thread-cutting.

Command for 1st part system

Command for 2nd part system

II - 244
M70V Series Specifications Manual
12 Program Support Functions

(2) 2-part System Synchronous Thread Cutting Cycle II (G76.2)

G76.2 assumes the same thread cutting, and deeply cuts in with the cutting amount using 1st part system and 2nd
part system alternately.

(f) (e)(f) (e)(f) (e) (f) (e) (f) (e)

a°
(b)
(c)
(d)
K

(a)

(a) Finishing allowance d

(b) △ d
(c) △ d× √ 2
(d) △ d× √ n
(e) Cutting with 1st part system
(f) Cutting with 2nd part system

II - 245
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

12.1.8.9 Multi-part System Program Management

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ― ○
L system ― ○

Separate programs, used in each part system, can be managed under a common name in the multi-part system.
This function facilitates the management of the process programs that are simultaneously executed in the multi-part
systems.
The multi-part system program management is turned valid/invalid with a parameter.
The followings are available when the multi-part system program management is valid:
- Executing the program search across all part systems in batch. (Note)
- Saving/editing the programs for each part system under one program name.
- Inputting/outputting programs of all part systems in batch.
(Note) While the multi-part system program management is valid, there is an option whether the operation search,
check search or restart search is executed across all part systems in batch or is executed for each part system
separately.

<Multi-part system program management INVALID>

(c) (c)
(b) MDI
(a)
(a)

100.PRG
200.PRG
(d)
300.PRG

(d)

(a) Common for part systems

(b) Machining programs
(c) Program management common for part systems
(d) Programs are shared and managed across part systems.

II - 246
M70V Series Specifications Manual
12 Program Support Functions

<Multi-part system program management VALID>

(a) (a)
(b) MDI
$1 $2 $n
$1 $2 $n
. . .
100.PRG 100.PRG 100.PRG
200.PRG 200.PRG 200.PRG
(c)
300.PRG 300.PRG . . . 300.PRG

(e)

(c)
(d)

(a) Program management for each part system

(b) Machining programs
(c) Programs are managed for each part system separately.
(d) Each part system can have its own program Nos.
(e) Same program Nos. can be managed across part systems in batch

II - 247
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

12.1.9 Data Input by Program

12.1.9.1 Parameter Input by Program

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

The parameters set from the setting and display unit can be changed in the machining programs.
The data format used for the data setting is as follows.

(1) L70 command format

G10 L70 ; Data setting start command

Pparameter No. Spart system No. Aaxis No. H □ data ; ................. Bit parameter;
Pparameter No. Spart system No. Aaxis No. Ddata ; ..................... Numerical value parameter
Pparameter No. Spart system No. Aaxis No. <character string> ; ... Character string parameter

G11 Data setting end command

(Note 1) The sequence of addresses in a block must be as shown above.

When an address is commanded two or more times, the last command will be valid.
(Note 2) The part system No. is set in the following manner: "1" for 1st part system, "2" for 2nd part system, and so
forth.
If the address S is omitted, the part system of the executing program will be applied.
As for the parameters common to part systems, the command of part system No. will be ignored.
(Note 3) The axis No. is set in the following manner: "1" for 1st axis, "2" for 2nd axis, and so forth.
If the address A is omitted, the 1st axis will be applied.
As for the parameters common to axes, the command of axis No. will be ignored.
(Note 4) Address H is commanded with the combination of setting data (0 or 1) and the bit designation ( □ ) (0 to 7).
(Note 5) Only the decimal number can be commanded with the address D.
The value that is smaller than the input setting increment (#1003 iunit) will be round off to the nearest
increment.
(Note 6) The character string must be put in angled brackets "<" and ">".
If these brackets are not provided, the program error (P33) will occur.
Up to 63 characters can be set.
(Note 7) Command G10L70, G11 in independent blocks. A program error (P33, P421) will occur if not commanded in
independent blocks.
(Note 8) The following data cannot be changed with the G10 L70 command:
Tool compensation data, workpiece coordinate data, PLC switch, and PLC axis parameter.
(Note 9) The settings of the parameters with (PR) in the parameter list will be enable after the power is turned OFF and
ON. Refer to the parameter list in your manual.

II - 248
M70V Series Specifications Manual
12 Program Support Functions

(2) L100 command format

Tool shape of 3D solid program check can be set and changed.

G10 L100; Data setting start command

P Line No. T Tool No. K Kind D Tool diameter/radius H Tool length I Shape data 1 J Shape data 2 C Tool color ;
G11； Data setting mode cancel

(Note1) Omitted addresses cannot be set or changed.

(Note2) When address T is set to 0, the designated line is deleted.
(Note3) In the following cases, program error (P421) occurs and the parameter in the block is not changed.
- When a block contains an address whose data are out of range
- When there is an illegal address
- When P or T is omitted
(Note4) Command G10L100, G11 in independent blocks. The program error (P421) will occur if not commanded in
independent blocks.
(Note5) The parameter “#1078 Decimal point type 2” is enabled.
(Note6) The parameter “#8044 Unit*10” is disabled.
(Note7) At graphic check, tool shape data will be rewritten.

II - 249
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

12.1.9.2 Compensation Data Input by Program

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

The value of the workpiece coordinate systems selected can be set or changed by program commands.
The tool offset amounts, which have been set from the setting and display unit, can be input by program commands.
(1) Workpiece coordinate system offset input
The position of the workpiece coordinate systems selected by the G54 to G59 commands can be set or
changed by program commands.

Gcode Function
External workpiece coordinate system setting
G10 L2 P0
Workpiece coordinate system 1 setting (G54)
G10 L2 P1
Workpiece coordinate system 2 setting (G55)
G10 L2 P2
Workpiece coordinate system 3 setting (G56)
G10 L2 P3
Workpiece coordinate system 4 setting (G57)
G10 L2 P4
Workpiece coordinate system 5 setting (G58)
G10 L2 P5
Workpiece coordinate system 6 setting (G59)
G10 L2 P6
Extended workpiece coordinate system setting (G54.1 P1 to
G10 L20 Pn (n=1 to 48)
P48)

The format for the workpiece coordinate system setting commands is shown below.

G10 L2(L20) Pp1 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 ;

G10 L2(L20) : Workpiece coordinate system setting command
Pp1 : Workpiece coordinate system No.
Xx1,Yy1,Zz1 : Setting values
(Note 1) L2 can be omitted. Omitting Pp1 results in a program error. [M system]
(Note 2) L20 is used to designate the extended workpiece coordinate system.

II - 250
M70V Series Specifications Manual
12 Program Support Functions

(2) Tool compensation input

The tool compensation amounts, which have been set from the setting and display unit, can be input by
program commands.
The command format differs between the [M system] and the [L system].

[M system]
Type I

G code Function
G10 L10 Tool compensation amounts

TypeII

Gcode Function
G10 L10 Tool length shape compensation amount
G10 L11 Tool length wear compensation amount
G10 L12 Tool radius shape compensation amount
G10 L13 Tool radius wear compensation amount

The tool compensation input format is as follows.

G10 Ll1 Pp1 Rr1 ;

G10 Ll1 : Command for setting compensation amount
Pp1 : Compensation No.
Rr1 : Compensation amount
(Note) When Ll1 has been omitted, the same operation will be performed as when L10 is selected. Omitting
Pp1 results in a program error.

[L system]

Gcode Function
G10 L10 Tool length compensation amount
G10 L11 Tool wear compensation amount

The tool compensation input format is as follows.

G10 L10(L11) Pp1 Xx1 Zz1 Rr1 Qq1 ;

G10 L10(L11) : Command for setting compensation amount
Pp1 : Compensation No.
Xx1 : X axis compensation amount
Zz1 : Z axis compensation amount
Rr1 : Nose R compensation amount
Qq1 : Hypothetical tool nose point
(Note) When Ll1 has been omitted, the same operation will be performed as when L10 is selected. Omitting
Pp1 results in a program error.

II - 251
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

12.1.10 Machining Modal

12.1.10.1 Tapping Mode

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

When tapping mode commands are issued, the NC system is set to the following internal control modes required for
tapping.
1. Cutting override is fixed at 100%.
2. Deceleration commands at joints between blocks are invalid.
3. Feed hold is invalid.
4. Single block is invalid.
5. "In tapping mode" signal is output.

G code Function
G63 Tapping mode ON

The tapping mode command will be canceled with the following commands:
- Exact stop check mode (G61)
- Automatic corner override (G62)
- Cutting mode (G64)
- High-accuracy control mode command (G61.1/G08P1) [M system]
The machine is in the cutting mode status when its power is turned ON.

12.1.10.2 Cutting Mode

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

When a cutting mode command is issued, the NC system is set to the cutting mode that enables smooth cutting surface
to be achieved. In this mode, the next block is executed continuously without the machine having to decelerate and stop
between the cutting feed blocks: this is the opposite of what happens in the exact stop check mode (G61).

G code Function
G64 Cutting mode ON

The cutting mode command will be canceled with the following commands:
- Exact stop check mode (G61)
- Automatic corner override (G62)
- Tapping mode (G63)
- High-accuracy control mode command (G61.1) [M system]
The machine is in the cutting mode status when its power is turned ON.

II - 252
M70V Series Specifications Manual
12 Program Support Functions

12.2 Machining Accuracy Support Functions

12.2.1 Automatic Corner Override

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

To prevent machining surface distortion due to the increase in the cutting load during cutting of corners, this function
automatically applies an override on the cutting feed rate so that the cutting amount is not increased for a set time at the
corner.
Automatic corner override is valid only during tool radius compensation.
The automatic corner override mode is set to ON by the G62 command and it is canceled by any of the G commands
below.
G40 .................... Tool radius compensation cancel
G61 .................... Exact stop check mode
G63 .................... Tapping mode
G64 .................... Cutting mode
G61.1/G08P1 ..... High-accuracy control mode [M system]

(d)
θ (b)
(a)
S
(e)
② ③
①
(f)

(b)

Ci

(c)

(a) workpiece
(b) Machining allowance
(c) Tool
(d) Programmed path (finished shape)
(e) Workpiece surface shape
(f) Tool center path
θ : Max. angle at inside corner
Ci : Deceleration range (IN)

Operation
(a) When automatic corner override is not to be applied :
When the tool moves in the order of (1) -> (2) -> (3) in the figure above, the machining allowance at (3) is
larger than that at (2) by an amount equivalent to the area of shaded section S and so the tool load increases.
(b) When automatic corner override is to be applied :
When the inside corner angle θ in the figure above is less than the angle set in the parameter, the override set
into the parameter is automatically applied in the deceleration range Ci.

II - 253
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

12.2.2 Deceleration Check

The deceleration check function leads the machine to decelerate and stop at the join between one block and another
before executing the next block. This is effective to alleviate the machine shock and prevent the corner rounding when
the feed rate of the control axis changes suddenly.
Without deceleration check With deceleration check

0): 0)):
0); 0);

Corner rounding occurs because A sharp edge is formed because

the N011 block is started before the N011 block is started after the
the N010 command is completely N010 remaining distance has
finished. reached the command
deceleration check width or the
in-position check width.

The conditions for executing deceleration check are described below.

(1) Deceleration check in the rapid traverse mode
In the rapid traverse mode, the deceleration check is always performed when block movement is completed
before executing the next block.

(2) Deceleration check in the cutting feed mode

In the cutting feed mode, the deceleration check is performed at the end of block when any of the conditions
below is applicable before executing the next block.
(a) When G61 (exact stop check mode) is selected.
(b) When the G09 (exact stop check) is issued in the same block.
(c) When the error detect switch (external signal) is ON.

II - 254
M70V Series Specifications Manual
12 Program Support Functions

(3) Deceleration check system

Deceleration check is a system that executes the next block only after the command deceleration check is
executed as shown below, and it has been confirmed that the position error amount, including the servo
system, is less than the in-position check width (designated with parameter or with ",I" in same block).
SV

(a) (b)

(c)

(d) (e)

SV: Servo
(a) Previous block
(b) Next block
(c) Command
(d) Block interpolation completion point
(e) In-position check width

12.2.2.1 Exact Stop Check Mode

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

A deceleration check is performed when the G61 (exact stop check mode) command has been selected.
G61 is a modal command. The modal command is released by the following commands.
G62 .................... Automatic corner override
G63 .................... Tapping mode
G64 .................... Cutting mode
G61.1/G08P1 .... High-accuracy control mode [M system]
Refer to "12.2.2 Deceleration Check" for details on the deceleration check.

12.2.2.2 Exact Stop Check

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

A deceleration check is performed when the G09 (exact stop check) command has been designated in the same block.
The G09 command should be issued in the same block as the cutting command. It is an unmodal command.
Refer to "12.2.2 Deceleration Check" for details on the deceleration check.

II - 255
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

12.2.2.3 Error Detection

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

To prevent rounding of a corner during cutting feed, the operation can be changed by turning an external signal switch
ON so that the axis decelerates and stops once at the end of the block and then the next block is executed.
The deceleration stop at the end of the cutting feed block can also be commanded with a G code.
Refer to "12.2.2 Deceleration Check" for details on the deceleration check.

12.2.2.4 Programmable In-position Check

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

",I" address is used to designate the in-position width for a linear interpolation command from the machining program.
The in-position width designated with a linear interpolation command is valid only in cases when the deceleration check
is performed, such as:
- When the error detect switch is ON.
- When the G09 (exact stop check) command has been designated in the same block.
- When the G61 (exact stop check mode) command has been selected.

G01 Xx1 Zz1 Ff1 ,Ii1 ;

Xx1, Zz1 : Linear interpolation coordinate position of each axis
Ff1 : Feed rate
,Ii1 : In-position width

As with linear interpolation, ",I" address is used to designate the in-position width for a positioning command from the
machining program.

G00 Xx1 Zz1 ,Ii1 ;

Xx1, Zz1 : Positioning coordinate position of each axis
,Ii1 : In-position width

In-position check operation

As for G01, after it is verified that the position error of the block in which the deceleration check is performed by
the linear interpolation command (G01) is less than the in-position width of this command, the execution of the
next block is commenced.
As for G00, after it is verified that the position error of the positioning command (G00: rapid traverse) is less
than the in-position width of this command, the execution of the next block is commenced.

II - 256
M70V Series Specifications Manual
12 Program Support Functions

12.3 High-speed and High-accuracy Functions [kBPM:k Block per Minute]

12.3.1 High-speed Machining Mode I (G05P1) Max.[kBPM]

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ 8.4 ○ 16.8
L system ― ―

This function runs a machining program that approximates a free curve with fine segments at a high speed.
This is effective in increasing the speed of machining dies with a free curve.
The command format is as follows.

G05 P1 : High-speed machining mode I start

G05 P0 : High-speed machining mode I cancel

In addition to the G05P0 command, the high-speed machining mode I is canceled with the following commands.
- High-speed machining mode II (G05P2)
- High-speed high-accuracy control I (G05.1Q1)
- High-speed high-accuracy control II (G05P10000)

Fine segment capacity

G1 block fine segment capacity (for 1mm segment)

Mode Command Maximum feed rate when 1mm segmentG1 block is executed
High-speed machining mode Ⅰ G05 P1 8.4m/min(TypeB) 16.8m/min(TypeA)
The above performance applies under the following conditions.
- 6-axis system (including spindle) or less
- 1-part system
- 3 axes or less commanded simultaneously in G01
- Block containing only axis name and movement amount (Does not contain macro or variable command)
- During G61.1 high-accuracy control mode or during cutting mode (G64)
It may not be possible to attain the specified feed rate if deviated from the above conditions.

(1) During the high-speed machining mode I, the blocks are pre-read. If the length of the block is sufficiently
short in respect to the command speed, and enough to be completed with one interpolation calculation,
several blocks may be combined and converted into a block length that can be completed with one
interpolation.

: (a)
: (b)

(c)

(a) Program command

(b) Command when program commands are combined and converted
(c) Command in high-speed machining mode I

(2) Override, maximum cutting speed clamp, single block operation, dry run, manual interruption, graphic
trace and high-accuracy control mode are valid even during the high-speed machining mode I.

II - 257
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

12.3.2 High-speed Machining Mode II (G05 P2) Max.[kBPM]

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ― ○ 33.7
L system ― ―

This function runs a machining program that approximates a free curve with fine segments at a high speed.
This is effective in increasing the speed of machining dies with a free curve.
The command format is as follows.

G05 P2 : High-speed machining mode II start

G05 P0 : High-speed machining mode II cancel

In addition to the G05P0 command, the high-speed machining mode II is canceled with the following commands.
- High-speed machining mode I (G05P1)
- High-speed high-accuracy control I (G05.1Q1)
- High-speed high-accuracy control II (G05P10000)
Fine segment capacity
G1 block fine segment capacity (for 1mm segment)

Mode Command Maximum feed rate when 1mm segmentG1 block is executed
Standard mode G05 P0 16.8 m/min
High-speed machining mode
Ⅱ (includes 2-part system
G05 P2 33.7 m/min
simultaneous high-accuracy is
valid)

(Note) The above performance applies under the following conditions.

- 6-axis system (including spindle) or less
- 1-part system
- 3 axes or less commanded simultaneously in G01
- Block containing only axis name and movement amount (Does not contain macro or variable
command)
- During G61.1 high-accuracy control mode or during cutting mode (G64)
- During tool radius compensation cancel (G40)
It may not be possible to attain the specified feed rate if deviated from the above conditions.

II - 258
M70V Series Specifications Manual
12 Program Support Functions

(1) During the high-speed machining mode II, the blocks are pre-read. If the length of the block is sufficiently
short in respect to the command speed, and enough to be completed with one interpolation calculation,
several blocks may be combined and converted into a block length that can be completed with one
interpolation.

: (a) : (b)

(c)

(a) Program command

(b) Command when program commands are combined and converted
(c) Command in high-speed machining mode II
(2) Override, maximum cutting speed clamp, single block operation, dry run, manual interrupt, graphic trace
and high-accuracy control mode are valid even during the high-speed machining mode II.
(3) When using the high-speed machining mode II, adjust the parameters to eliminate the speed fluctuation
at the arc and straight line and arc and arc joints.

II - 259
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

12.3.3 High-speed High-accuracy Control 1 (G05.1Q1) Max.[kBPM] (1st Part System Only)
M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ 16.8 ○ 16.8
L system ― ―

This function runs machining programs, in which free-form curved surfaces have been approximated by fine-segments,
at high speed and with a high accuracy.
It is effective in increasing the speed at which dies with free-form curved surfaces are machined.
If the high-accuracy simultaneous control in 2 part systems option is valid, 2nd part system can be performed at the
same time.
Command format

G05.1 Q1 ; High-speed high-accuracy control I ON

G05.1 Q0 ; High-speed high-accuracy control I OFF

The performance of simultaneous 3 axes and 1mm-length fine-segment execution is as follows.

High-speed high-accuracy Performance of fine-

Program restriction
control 1 mode segment execution
Invalid 8.4m/min None
Valid 16.8m/min Available

Program restrictions
The machining speed may drop depending on the number of characters in one block.
During high-speed high-accuracy control I operation using tape operation, the machining speed may be suppressed
depending on the program transmission speed and the number of characters in one block.

Modes which can be designated by commands

The modal statuses when the G05.1 Q1 command is assigned must be as shown in the table below.
If the conditions listed are not satisfied, a program error will result.

Function G code modal

Tool radius compensation mode G40
Tool length compensation mode G49
G code mirror image G50.1
Mirror image by parameter setting Cancel
Mirror image by external input Cancel
Cutting mode G64
Macro modal call mode G67
Coordinate conversion mode G69
Fixed cycle mode G80
Per-revolution feed G94
Constant surface speed control mode G97
Interrupt-type macro mode M97

II - 260
M70V Series Specifications Manual
12 Program Support Functions

12.3.4 High-speed High-accuracy Control 2 (G5P10000) Max.[kBPM] (Limited to 1-part System

Configuration)
M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ― ○ 33.7
L system ― ―
(Note) Maximum feedrate changes according to the axis configuration and operation condition.

This function runs machining programs, in which free-form curved surfaces have been approximated by fine-segments,
at high speed and with a high accuracy. It is effective in increasing the speed at which dies with free-form curved
surfaces are machined.
If the 2nd part system simultaneous high-accuracy option is valid, 2nd part system can be performed at the same time.

Command format

G05 P10000 ; High-speed high-accuracy control II ON

G05 P0 ; High-speed high-accuracy control II OFF

The simultaneous 3 axis 1mm fine-segment will be as follows.

High-speed High-accuracy Control 2 mode Performance of the fine segment execution

Invalid 16.8 m/min
Valid
(high-accuracy simultaneous control in 2 part 33.7 m/min
systems is valid)
(Note) The above performance applies under the following conditions.
- 6-axis system (including spindle) or less
- 3 axes or less commanded simultaneously in G01
- Block containing only axis name and movement amount (Macro and variable command are
not included.)
- Tool radius compensation cancel mode (G40)
When the above conditions are not satisfied, the given feedrate may not be secured.

Program restrictions
The machining speed may drop depending on the number of characters in one block.
During high-speed high-accuracy control II operation using tape operation, the machining speed may be suppressed
depending on the program transmission speed and the number of characters in one block.
When the fairing is valid (parameter setting), if the successive fairing is executed in the machining program, the
performance of fine-segment execution may decelerate less than the value described in the above table. In the network
connection, the value described in the above table may not be guaranteed depending on the state.

Modes which can be designated by commands

The modal statuses when the G05 P10000 command is assigned must be as shown in the table below.
If the conditions listed are not satisfied, a program error will result.

Function G code modal

Tool radius compensation mode G40
GMirror image by G code G50.1
Mirror image by parameter setting Cancel
Mirror image by external input Cancel
Cutting mode G64
Macro modal call mode G67
Coordinate conversion mode G69
Fixed cycle mode G80
Per-revolution feed G94
Constant surface speed control mode G97
Interrupt-type macro mode M97

II - 261
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

Additional functions when high-speed high-accuracy control 2 mode is ON

(1) Fairing
If the protruding path (zigzagging path) is shorter than the parameter setting values in the machining program
generated with a CAM, etc., this function can be used to eliminate the protruding paths smaller than the setting
value so that the front and back paths are smoothly connected.
This function is valid only for continuous linear commands (G1).

G1
G1 G1

(b) (a)

(a) After fairing

(b) Before fairing

If there is any protruding path after fairing, fairing is repeated.

(c) (b) (a)

(a) After final faring

(b) After first fairing
(c) Before fairing

(2) Acceleration clamp speed

With the cutting feed clamp speed during the high-speed high-accuracy control 2 mode, when the following
parameter is set to "1", the speed is clamped so that the acceleration generated by each block movement does
not exceed the tolerable value. This function clamps the speed optimally even at a section where" angle
change at each block is small but entire curvature is large" such as shown below. The tolerable acceleration
value is calculated from the parameter setting values.

R If the tool moves along the large curvature

section without deceleration, a large
acceleration is generated resulting in a path
error from the inner route.

II - 262
M70V Series Specifications Manual
12 Program Support Functions

(3) High-speed mode corner deceleration

Conventionally during high-accuracy control, if the angle is large between the adjacent blocks in the machining
program, this function automatically decelerates so that the acceleration generated when passing through the
corner is within the tolerable value.
If a small block is inserted at the corner section with the machining program generated with the CAM, etc., the
corner passing speed will not match the periphery. This can affect the machining surface.
If this type of small block is inserted when using high-speed mode corner deceleration, the corner will be
largely judged by the parameter settings.
The small block is excluded when the angle is judged, but it not excluded from the actual movement command.

If this function is valid, the axis

decelerates at the corner without being
affected by the small block.

II - 263
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

12.3.5 High-accuracy Control 1 (G61.1/G08) (1st Part System Only)

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ― ―

With this function, the error caused by the accuracy in control system during machining is to be improved. In order to
achieve a high-accuracy control mode, turn initial high accuracy control ON with either parameter method or G code
command method.
If the 2nd part system simultaneous high-accuracy option is valid, 2nd part system can be performed at the same time.

With the normal control method, there are problems as indicated below.
(1) Corner rounding occurs at the corner where two lines are connected because the next command movement
starts before the previous command finishes. (Refer to Fig. 1)
(2) When cutting with the circle command, an error occurs further inside the commanded path, resulting in a
smaller finish. (Refer to Fig. 2)

(b)
(b)

(c)

(c)

(a) (a)

(a) Fig.1 Roundness at linear corner (a) Fig.2 Error by radius reduction with arc command
(b) Commanded path (b) Commanded path
(c) Actual path (c) Actual path

This function uses the following six functions to reduce the shape error while minimizing the extension of machining time.
(1) Acceleration/deceleration before interpolation (linear acceleration/deceleration)
(2) Optimum speed control
(3) Vector accuracy interpolation
(4) Feed forward control
(5) Arc entrance/exit speed control
(6) S-pattern filter control

II - 264
M70V Series Specifications Manual
12 Program Support Functions

The high-accuracy control is commanded with ;

There are two types of command formats which can be changed with the parameters.

G61.1 Ff1 ;
G61.1 : High-accuracy control mode ON
Ff1 : Feedrate command

High-accuracy control mode is validated from the block containing the G61.1 command.
"G61.1" high-accuracy control mode is canceled with one of the G code group 13's functions.

G08 P1(P0) ;
G08 : High-accuracy control mode
P1 : High-accuracy control mode start
P0 : High-accuracy control mode end

"G08 P1" high-accuracy control mode is canceled with P0 in G08.

Command G08P_ in an independent block.
The decimal places below the decimal point are ignored for P address.
(Note) G code group in G08 is "0"; the priority is given to the function of the G code group 0 over that of the G code
group 13. After "G08 P1" is commanded, G code group 13 is changed automatically to G64 (cutting) mode.
Other command of "13" results in error. Even if high-accuracy control mode is canceled by "G08 P0"
command, G64 (cutting) mode will not be changed. If you want to return to the function of the G code group
"13" when "G08 P1" has been commanded, command again after high-accuracy control mode is canceled.

(1) Acceleration/deceleration before interpolation

By accelerating/decelerating before interpolation, the machining shape error generated by smoothing can be
eliminated, and a highly accurate path can be achieved.
With the arc commands, the radius reduction error can be significantly minimized.
Furthermore, since constant inclination acceleration/deceleration is performed, the time taken for positioning at
microscopically small distances in the G00 command is reduced.
(Note 1) Whether acceleration/deceleration before interpolation in the rapid traverse command (G00) is to be
performed always or not can be selected using a parameter setting independently from the high-
accuracy control assignment.

(2) Optimum corner deceleration

By calculating the angle of the seam between blocks, and carrying out acceleration/deceleration control in
which the corner is passed at the optimum speed, highly accurate edge machining can be realized.
When the corner is entered, that corners optimum speed (optimum corner speed) is calculated from the angle
with the next block. The machine decelerates to that speed in advance, and then accelerates back to the
command speed after the corner is passed.

V (a)

θ ΔV (b)

V
(c)
(a) Speed before entering the corner
(b) Speed change at the corner
(c) Speed after the corner is passed

II - 265
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

(3) Arc speed clamp

During circular interpolation, even when moving at a constant speed, acceleration is generated as the advance
direction constantly changes. When the arc radius is large enough compared to the commanded speed,
control is carried out at the commanded speed. However, when the arc radius is relatively small, the speed is
clamped so that the generated acceleration does not exceed the tolerable acceleration/deceleration speed
before interpolation calculated with the parameters.
This allows arc cutting to be carried out at an optimum speed for the arc radius.

∆θ

F F

F ∆V

F (a)
θ

F R×∆V×60×1000 (mm/min)

G1bF(mm/min)
∆V =
G1btL(ms)

F : Commanded speed (mm/min)

R : Commanded arc radius (mm)
Δθ : Angle change per interpolation unit
ΔV : Speed change per interpolation unit
(a) The tool is fed with the arc clamp speed F so that ΔV does not exceed the tolerable acceleration/
deceleration speed before interpolation ΔV.

(4) Vector accuracy interpolation

When a fine segment is commanded and the angle between the blocks is extremely small (when not using
optimum corner deceleration), interpolation can be carried out more smoothly using the vector accuracy
interpolation.

(b)

(a)

(a) Commanded path

(b) Vector accuracy interpolation

II - 266
M70V Series Specifications Manual
12 Program Support Functions

(5) Feed forward control

A stable servo control with an extremely small servo error can be achieved using the feed forward control
characteristic to this CNC system.

(a) (d)

(b)
+ +
+ - Kp - Kv M

(e)
(c)

(a) Command during acceleration/deceleration before interpolation

(b) Command during acceleration/deceleration after interpolation
(c) Machine error compensation amount
(d) Feed forward control
(e) Detector
Kp : Position loop gain
Kv : Speed loop gain
M : Motor
S : Derivative

(6) Arc entrance/exit speed control

There are cases when the speed fluctuates and the machine vibrates at the joint from the straight line to arc or
from the arc to straight line.
This function decelerates to the deceleration speed before entering the arc and after exiting the arc to reduce
the machine vibration. If this is overlapped with corner deceleration, the function with the slower deceleration
speed is valid.

(7) S-pattern filter control

This control interpolates further smoothing the changes in the segments distributed to each axis element by
vector accuracy interpolation. With this, the fluctuation amplified by feed forward control is reduced and the
effect onto the machine is reduced.

(8) Each axis arc radius reduction error compensation control

When the roundness at the machine end is, compared to the basic circle, expanded at an axis creating an
ellipsis state, compensation is carried out for each axis to make a perfect circle.

II - 267
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

12.3.6 High-accuracy Spline Interpolation1 (G61.2)(1st Part System Only)

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ― ○
L system ― ―

This function automatically generates spline curves that smoothly pass through rows of dots designated by a fine-
segment machining program, and performs interpolation for the paths along the curves. This enables high-speed and
high-accuracy machining to be achieved.
To use this function, the high-accuracy control function 1 (G08P1) is required.
Even if the 2nd part system simultaneous high-accuracy option is valid, it can be used in the 2nd part system, too.

G64/G61.1

G61.2

II - 268
M70V Series Specifications Manual
12 Program Support Functions

12.3.8 SSS Control

12.3.8.1 SSS Control (1st Part System Only)

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ― △ (*4)
L system ― ―
(*4) When HN722 is installed.

With normal high-accuracy control, because the angle between two blocks is compared with the corner deceleration
angle to determine whether to execute corner deceleration between the blocks, there may be a case where sudden
speed fluctuation occurs between blocks with an angle close to the corner deceleration angle.
With SSS (Super Smooth Surface) control, the large area path information is used instead of just the angle between the
blocks. Thus, optimum speed control that is not adversely affected by minute steps or waviness is possible. This enables
machining with fewer scratches and streaks on the cutting surface compared to the normal high-accuracy control
function.
If the 2nd part system simultaneous high-accuracy option is valid, it can be used in the 2nd part system, too.
Conventional optimum corner
SSS Control
deceleration
When corner deceleration angle is θ or less
(F) (F)

(a) (b)

(T) (T)

When corner deceleration angle is θ or more

(F) (F)

(T)
(T)

(F) Feedrate
(T) Time
(a) Do not decelerate
(b) Decelerate according to angle

II - 269
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

[Features of SSS control]

(1) This is valid for machining a mold with a smooth shape using a fine segment program.
(2) This speed control is not easily affected by the error found in the path.
(3) Even if corner deceleration is not required, the speed is clamped if the predicted acceleration is high.

The length of the path direction recognized with SSS control can be adjusted with the parameter. The range is increased
as the setting value increases, and the effect of the error is reduced.

(Note 1) When using this function, an option corresponding to the SSS-controlled high-accuracy control mode is
required, as well.
(Note 2) The performance of fine-segment execution during SSS control differs depending on the type of high-accuracy
control mode and machine model to be combined.

II - 270
M70V Series Specifications Manual
12 Program Support Functions

12.3.10 Machining Condition Selection I

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ― ―
The machining condition parameter set which is consists of parameters related to the high-accuracy control can be
configured in advance for each machining application (such as part machining or die machining) or machining process
(such as rough or finishing), and it can be switched according to the purpose.
This can easily perform the machining which meets the conditions for the intended machining.
If the high-accuracy simultaneous control in 2 part systems option is valid, the selected machine condition will apply to
"both 1st part system and 2nd part system".
The machine condition commanded by G code command will reflect only to commanded part system.

12.3.13 High-accuracy Control in 2 Part Systems

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ― △ (*4)
L system ― ―
(*4) When HN722 is installed.

The high-accuracy control can be operated in two part systems at the same time.
Refer to "High-accuracy Control 1 (G61.1/G08P1)", "High-speed High-accuracy Control 1 (G05.1 Q1)", and "High-speed
High-accuracy Control 2 (G05 P10000)" for details of each high-accuracy control.
(Note) The separate option of high-accuracy control etc., is required.

If this function is valid, it will effect to the following functions.

Functions When 2 part system simultaneous high-accuracy control is valid

High-speed High-accuracy Control 1 2 part system can be operated at the same time.
High-speed High-accuracy Control 2 2 part system can be operated at the same time.
High-accuracy Control 1(G61.1/G08P1) 2 part system can be operated at the same time.
High-accuracy Spline Interpolation
Spline interpolation can not be commanded during 2nd part system.
1(G61.2)
SSS Control It can be used by 2nd part system.
The selected machine condition will apply to "both 1st part system and 2nd part system".
Machining Condition Selection I The machine condition commanded by G120.1 or G121 will reflect only to commanded
part system.

II - 271
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

12.4 Programming Support Functions

12.4.1 Playback
M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ― ―

This function enables creation of a program while proceeding with sample machining by manual (handle or job) feed or
mechanical handle feed. A machining program can be edited by using the playback movement amount obtained by
manual operation as the program command values.
Playback edit is disabled for the machining program in the mass-editing mode.

12.4.3 Simple Programming

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

Create a part program by using NAVI MILL (for machining center system) or NAVI LATHE (for lathe system).

(1) The following machining processes can be edited.

M system L system
- Turning (Outside dia., inside dia., front face)
- Hole drilling (Drilling, deep hole drilling, step, boring,
- Copying (Outside dia., inside dia., front face)
tapping)
- Threading (Outside dia., inside dia., front face)
- Face cutting (Circle, square)
- Grooving (Outside dia., inside dia., front face)
- Contour cutting (Circle, square, arbitrary shape)
- Trapezoid grooving (Outside dia., inside dia., front face)
- Pocket machining (Circle, square, L pattern, U pattern)
- Hole drilling (Drilling, deep hole drilling, step, tapping)
- EIA
- EIA

(2) Cutting conditions are automatically determined from tool file and cutting condition file.
(3) The operation screen consists of LIST VIEW area (on the left) and OPERATION VIEW area (on the right). In
the LIST VIEW area, the entire part program can be viewed at all time. In the OPERATION VIEW area, there
are guide drawings related to each input item, which allows an easy data input.
(4) Program Checker enables the tool paths of a part program to be graphically traced. With this function, an input
error can be detected at an earlier stage.
(5) Guidance function provides an operator with error recovery information.
(6) Part program is a macro-program-based NC program. Process commands can be added in the edit screen.
(7) The macro program above can be customized by the machine tool builder.

12.4.4 G code Guidance

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

G code guidance is a function to display illustration of the contents or movements of the commanded format for the G
code currently under editing. This is used when creating or editing a machining program.
With this function, the G code contents under the editing process can be checked on the spot.

II - 272
13
Machine Accuracy Compensation

II - 273
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

13.1 Static Accuracy Compensation

13.1.1 Backlash Compensation

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

This function compensates for the error (backlash) produced when the direction of the machine system is reversed.
The backlash compensation can be set in the cutting feed mode or rapid traverse mode.
The amount of backlash compensation can be set separately for each axis. It is set using a number of pulses in
increments of one-half of the least command increments. The output follows the output unit system. The "output unit
system" is the unit system of the machine system (ball screw unit system).
The amount of compensation for each axis ranges from 0 to ±9999 (pulses).

13.1.2 Memory-type Pitch Error Compensation

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

The machine accuracy can be improved by compensating for the errors in the screw pitch intervals among the
mechanical errors (production errors, wear, etc.) of the feed screws.
The compensation positions and amounts are stored in the memory by setting them beforehand for each axis, and this
means that there is no need to attach dogs to the machine.
The compensation points are divided into the desired equal intervals.
1. Division intervals of compensation points : 1 to 9999999 (μm)
2. Number of compensation points : 1024
3. Compensation amount : -128 to 127 (output unit)
4. Number of compensation axes : 10 axes (including number of axes for memory-type relative position error
compensation)
(1) The compensation position is set for the compensation axis whose reference position serves as the zero (0)
point. Thus, memory-type pitch error compensation is not performed upon the compensation axis for which
return to reference position is not made after the controller power is turned ON and the servo is turned ON.
(2) When the compensation axis is a rotary axis, select the dividing intervals so that one rotation can be divided.

+
(c)
(b)
R#1

(a)

(a) Division interval

(b) Compensation basic axis coordinate
(c) Compensation amount
(3) As shown in the figure above, highly individualized compensation control is exercised using the least output
increment with linear approximation for the compensation intervals between the compensation points.

(Note 1) Compensation points 1,024 is a total including the points for memory-type relative position error
compensation.
(Note 2) A scale of 0 to 99-fold is applied on the compensation amount.

II - 274
M70V Series Specifications Manual
13 Machine Accuracy Compensation

13.1.3 Memory-type Relative Position Error Compensation

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

Machine accuracy can be improved by compensating a relative error between machine axes, such as a production error
or time aging.
The compensation base axis and compensation execution axis are set by using parameters.
The compensation points are divided at any desired equal intervals.
1. Compensation point dividing intervals : 1 to 9999999 (μm)
2. Number of compensation points : 1024
3. Compensation amount : -128 to 127 (output unit)
4. Number of compensation axes : 10 axes (including number of axes for pitch error compensation.)
(1) The compensation position is set for the compensation axis whose reference position serves as the zero (0)
point. Thus, memory-type relative position error compensation is not performed upon the axis for which return
to reference position is not made after the controller power is turned ON and the servo is turned ON.
(2) When the compensation base axis is a rotary axis, select the dividing intervals so that one rotation can be
divided.
(3) Since all coordinate systems of compensation execution axes are shifted or displaced by the compensation
amount when the relative position error compensation is made, the stroke check point and machine coordinate
system are also shifted or displaced.
(Note 1) Compensation points 1,024 is a total including the points for memory-type pitch error compensation.
(Note 2) A scale of 0 to 99-fold is applied on the compensation amount.

II - 275
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

13.1.4 External Machine Coordinate System Compensation

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

The coordinate system can be shifted by inputting a compensation amount from the PLC. This compensation amount will
not appear on the counter (all counters including machine position). If the machine's displacement value caused by heat
is input for example, this can be used for thermal displacement compensation.
Mc:Compensation vector according to external machine coordinate
system compensation
(a) Machine coordinate zero point when the external machine
(a)
coordinate system offset amount is 0.
(b) Machine coordinate zero point

Mc

(b)

13.1.5 Circular Error Radius Compensation

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

With commands designated during arc cutting, this function compensates for movement toward the inside of the arcs
caused by a factor such as servo delay.

II - 276
M70V Series Specifications Manual
13 Machine Accuracy Compensation

13.1.6 Ball Screw Thermal Expansion Compensation

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

This compensates the axis feed error caused by the ball screw thermal expansion, etc. using the values set in the R
register's thermal displacement compensation parameter.
The compensation amount at the end of the machine error compensation range (mdvno to pdvno) is set. The
compensation line is obtained from the set compensation amount, and is linearly distributed in the machine error
compensation range to attain smooth compensation. A compensation amount that changes during operation can also be
compensated.

(g)
(d)

(f)
(h)

R
(e)
(i)

(b) (c)
(a)

(j)
mdvno pdvno

(a) offset (with sign)

(b) Motor
(c) Hold
(d) Compensation amount
(e) Ball screw
(f) maxcmp (with sign) Referring to "offset" position
(g) Compensation line
(h) Compensation amount (legcmp)
(i) Machine position
(j) Machine error compensation range (= thermal expansion compensation range)
R Reference position

II - 277
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

(1) Conditions under which thermal displacement compensation is valid

- When function option is valid.
- When axis No. and parameter (offset, maxcmp) is set in R register.
- When pitch error compensation parameter is set correctly.

(2) Compensation operation

- The machine error compensation range is compensated with the thermal displacement compensation
amount (absolute position compensation amount) obtained with the compensation line.
- The compensation amount is immediately calculated when thermal displacement compensation is
validated.
- When the compensation amount is changed, the new compensation line is immediately obtained, and the
range is compensated again with that compensation amount.
- Thermal displacement compensation can be used with machine error compensation. In this case, the
sum of the machine error compensation amount and the thermal displacement compensation amount is
added to the machine position and issued as the NC command.

II - 278
M70V Series Specifications Manual
13 Machine Accuracy Compensation

13.1.8 Position-dependent Gradually Increasing-type Backlash Compensation

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

Usually, minute bumps are generated when the machine movement direction is reversed. (Lost motion) However, due to
various mechanical system factors, there may be cases where the bumps do not change in steps but gradually change
after the direction reversal. (Gradually increasing-type lost motion)
Depending on the mechanical structure, the gradually increasing-type lost motion includes the type where the bump
amount depends on "duration of time" from when the machine movement direction is reversed and the type where the
bump amount depends on "distance". When the bump amount depends on "duration of time", compensation is possible
with the OMR-II function. (13.2.4 OMR II(Backlash with Filter)).
With this function, the gradually increasing-type lost motion which depends on the distance from the point where the
machine movement direction is reversed can be compensated by controlling the variation of backlash compensation
amount according to the distance from the direction reversal point.

<When the bump amount changes according to speed>

(c)
(d)
F500 (a)

F1000

F2000

(b)
F5000

(a) Shapes at rising edge of bumps are steep when the speed is low. → Bumps depend on time.
(b) Compensation with OMR-II function
(c) Basic circle
(d) Measurement result

II - 279
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

<When the bump amount does not change according to speed>

(c)
(d)
F500
(a)
F1000

F2000

F5000
(b)

(a) Shapes at rising edge of bumps do not change even when the speed changes. → Bumps depend on
position
(b) Compensation with this function
(c) Basic circle
(d) Measurement result

13.1.9 Two-way Pitch Error Compensation

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

Two-way pitch error compensation function is used to compensate the pitch error in each direction by setting the pitch
error compensation amount when moving in the positive and negative direction.
This function reduces the difference of tool path between the positive and negative direction.

II - 280
M70V Series Specifications Manual
13 Machine Accuracy Compensation

13.2 Dynamic Accuracy Compensation

13.2.1 Smooth High-gain (SHG) Control

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

This is a high-response and stable position control method using the servo system. This SHG control achieves an
approximately three-fold position loop gain equally compared to the conventional control method.
The features of the SHG control are as follows.

(1) The acceleration/deceleration becomes smoother, and the mechanical vibration can be suppressed (approx.
1/2) during acceleration/deceleration. (In other words, the acceleration/deceleration time constant can be
shortened.)

(a) (b)

(f)

(h) 6.0
(c)

(d)
(i) 3.0
(e)

(j)
(g) (g)

(a) Conventional control (position loop gain = 33rad/S)

(b) SHG control (position loop gain = 50rad/S)
(c) Speed
(d) Current
(e) Machine vibration
(f) Step response
(g) Time
(h) Conventional control
(i) SHG control
(j) Machine vibration amount (μm)

II - 281
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

(2) The shape error is approx. 1/9 of the conventional control.

Y
(e)
(c) 22.5
(d) (a)
(b)
(c) (d)
X 2.5

(f) 1. 0

(g) ( μ m)

(a) Feed rate 3000mm/min.

(b) Radius 50mm
(c) Conventional control
(d) SHG control
(e) SHG control + FF (Feed forward)
(f) SHG control + FF
(g) Roundness error (μm)

(3) The positioning time is approx. 1/3 of the conventional control.

(e) (f)

(b) (a) 200

(c) (a)
(b) 70

(c) 60

(g)
(d)

(a) Conventional control

(b) SHG control
(c) SHG control + FF (Feed forward)
(d) Time
(e) Droop
(f) Droop during rapid traverse deceleration
(g) Positioning time (ms)

II - 282
M70V Series Specifications Manual
13 Machine Accuracy Compensation

13.2.2 Dual Feedback

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

If the motor and machine coupling or machine system's rigidity is low (ex. large machine, etc.) when using a closed loop
system, the response during acceleration/deceleration will vibrate and cause overshooting. This can cause the position
loop gain from increasing. The dual feedback function is effective in this case.
To validate the dual feedback function, use position feedback with a motor side detector in ranges with high acceleration
to enable stable control. In ranges with low acceleration, use position feedback with the machine side detector (scale).
This will make it possible to increase the position loop gain.
The machine side detector (scale) is required separately.

(g)
(d) (h)
(e)
(b) (c)
+
- (f)
(k) ENC
(i)
(l)
(m)
+
- +
(j)
- (i)

(a)
(a) Dual feedback control
(b) Position command
(c) Position control
(d) Position droop
(e) Servo motor
(f) Linear scale
(g) Table
(h) Speed command
(i) Position FB
(j) Primary delay filter
(k) High frequency FB element
(l) Low frequency FB element
(m) dead band

The state will approach the semi-closed loop system as the primary delay filter's time constant increases, so the position
loop gain limit will increase. Note that the limit of the position loop gain increased with the dual feedback function is the
same as the position loop gain limit for a semi-closed system that does not use a machine side detector (scale, etc.). In
addition, the positioning time will increase as the primary delay filter time constant increases.

II - 283
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

13.2.3 Lost Motion Compensation

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

This function compensates the error in the protrusion shape caused by lost motion at the arc quadrant changeover
section during circular cutting.

13.2.4 OMR II (Backlash with Filter)

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

The OMR (Optimal Machine Response) control function estimates the machine or motor model (moment of inertia, clone
friction, viscosity coefficient, etc.) that can cause a path error (error in actual tool path in respect to the path commanded
with the program). High-accuracy machining is achieved by carrying out feed forward control based on that model. This
allows error cased by quadrant protrusions during circular interpolation or quadrants on the inner side of the path to be
greatly reduced.
OMR-II is a function that focuses on the quadrant protrusions, and improves the path error with this. Quadrant path
compensation is included in OMR-II.

The quadrant protrusion compensation function improves quadrant protrusions by issuing compensation to the backlash
compensation amount to compensate the error when the machine system direction is reversed.
By adding the compensated backlash compensation amount to the position command and sending it to the servo, the
gradually increasing-type lost motion which occurs at quadrant changeover can be compensated.

(b)
(e) (d)

+
(a)
(c) SV
+

(a) Position command (Fdt)

(b) Backlash compensation amount
(c) Interpolation process
(d) Quadrant protrusion compensation
(e) Machine error compensation
SV Servo

II - 284
14
Automation Support Functions

II - 285
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

14.1 Measurement

14.1.1 Skip

14.1.1.1 Skip
M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

When the external skip signal is input during linear interpolation with the G31 command, the machine feed is stopped
immediately, the remaining distance is discarded and the commands in the next block are executed.

[M system]

G31 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 αα1 Rr1 Ff1 ; (α is the additional axis.)
G31 : Measurement command
Xx1,Yy1,Zz1,αα1 : Command values
Rr1 : Acceleration/deceleration command
Ff1 : Feed rate

[L system]

G31 Xx1/Uu1 Zz1/Ww1 Rr1 Ff1 ;

G31 : Measurement command
Xx1,Uu1,Zz1,Ww1 : Command values
Rr1 : Acceleration/deceleration command
Ff1 : Feed rate

(d)

(c)

(b)

(a)
(f) (e)

(g)

(a) Position
(b) Programmed end point
(c) Feed rate
(d) Skip signal input
(e) Remaining distance
(f) Actual movement distance
(g) Command value

II - 286
M70V Series Specifications Manual
14 Automation Support Functions

Command by G31 command basis for acceleration/deceleration command (R0/R1).

When R0 command is issued or R command is omitted, automatic acceleration/deceleration is not performed but step
acceleration/deceleration is performed after interpolation in G31 block.
If R1 command is issued, automatic acceleration/deceleration is performed after interpolation even when skip signal is
input.
A command is not issued or a command other than R0/R1 is issued, it will be the operation of acceleration/deceleration
time constant=0(R0) and automatic acceleration/deceleration is not performed after interpolation.

Acceleration/deceleration when R0 command is issued or R command is omitted

Skip signal

Speed F

Time

Acceleration/deceleration when R1 command is issued Skip signal

Speed
F

Time
Skip time constant Skip time constant

Changeover of acceleration/deceleration type with R command

There are two types of skip feed rate.

(1) Feed rate based on program command when F command is present in program
(2) Feed rate based on parameter setting when F command is not present in program

(Note 1) The approximate coasting distance up to feed stop based on the detection delay in the skip signal input is
calculated as below.

F
δ≒ × (Tp + t)
60

δ : Coasting distance (mm)

F : G31 rate (mm/min)
Tp : Position loop time constant (s) = (position loop gain)-1
t : Response delay time of 0.0035 (s)

(Note 2) Skipping during machine lock is not valid.

II - 287
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

14.1.1.2 Multiple-step Skip

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

This function realizes skipping by designating a combination of skip signals for each skip command.
(1) G31.n method
This function carries out skipping by designating a combination of skip signals for each skip command (G31.1,
G31.2, G31.3).
The combination of the skip signals are designated with parameters for each G code (G31.1, 31.2, 31.3), and
the skip operation is executed when all signals in the combination are input.

G31.n Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Ff1 ;

G31.n : Skip command (n=1, 2, 3)
Xx1,Yy1,Zz1 : Axis address and target position
Ff1 : Feedrate (mm/min)

(2) G31Pn method

As with the G31.n method, the valid skip signal is designated and skip is executed. However, the method of
designating the valid skip signal differs.
The skip signals that can be used are 1 to 8. Which is to be used is designated with P in the program. Refer to
Table 1 for the relation of the P values and valid signals.
Skip can be executed on dwell, allowing the remaining dwell time to be canceled during the dwell command
(G04) and the next block executed under the skip conditions (to distinguish external skip signals 1 to 8) set
with the parameters.

G31 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Pp Ff1 ;

G31 : Skip command
Xx1,Yy1,Zz1 : Axis address and target position
Pp : Skip signal command
Ff1 : Feedrate (mm/min)

(a) Specify the skip rate in command feedrate F. However, F modal is not updated.
(b) Specify skip signal command in skip signal command P. Specify the P value in the range of 1 to 255. If it
exceeds the specified range, a program error occurs.
(c) When the skip signals are commanded in combination, the skip operation takes place with OR result of
those signals.

Table 1 Valid skip signals

Valid skip signal

Skip signal command P
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 ○
2 ○
3 ○ ○
4 ○
5 ○ ○
: : : : : : : : :
253 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
254 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
255 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

II - 288
M70V Series Specifications Manual
14 Automation Support Functions

14.1.1.4 PLC Skip

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

This function enables skip operations to be performed by signals which are input from the user PLC.

14.1.2 Automatic Tool Length Measurement

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

This function moves the tool in the direction of the tool measurement position by assigning a distance between the
measurement start position to the measurement position. The machine stops when the tool reaches the sensor and
automatically calculates the difference between the coordinate position where the tool stopped and measurement
position. It registers this difference as the tool length compensation amount for that tool.

(1) Automatic Tool Length Measurement (M system)

This function moves the tool in the direction of the tool measurement position by commanding a distance
between the measurement start position to the measurement position, it stops the tool as soon as it contacts
the sensor and calculates the difference between the coordinate position when the tool has stopped and
commanded coordinate position. It registers this difference as the tool length compensation amount for that
tool.
If compensation has already been applied to the tool, it is moved in the direction of the measurement position
with the compensation still applied, and when the measurement and calculation results are such that a further
compensation amount is to be provided, the current compensation amount is further corrected.
If the compensation amount at this time is one type, the compensation amount is automatically corrected; if
there is a distinction between the tool length compensation amount and wear compensation amount, the wear
amount is automatically corrected.

G37 Zz1 Rr1 Dd1 Ff1 ;

: Measurement command
G37 ;
: Measurement axis address and measurement position X, Y, Z, α (α = optional axis)
Zz1
: The distance between the point at which tool movement is to start at the measurement speed
Rr1
and the measurement position
Dd1
: The range in which the tool is to stop
Ff1
: The measurement rate
When Rr1_, Dd1_ and Ff1_ have been omitted, the values set in the parameters are used.

II - 289
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

(a)

(d)
At this time, the tool length compensation
amount has a minus ("-") value.
Example of program
(b)
G28 Z0 ;
(e) T01 ;
M06 T02 ;
G43 G00 Z0 H01 ;
G37 Z-300. R10. D2. F10 ;
:
In this case, the distance (H01 = Za1 - z0)
(f)
from the tool T01 tip to the top of the
measurement sensor is calculated as the
tool length compensation amount which is
then registered in the tool compensation
table.

(c)

(a) Tool change position

(b) Tool
(c) Sensor
(d) Reference position (In case of machine coordinate system zero point.)
(e) Amount of movement based on tool length measurement
(f) Tool length measurement position (Za1)

(a)
(c)
A
Area A : Moves with rapid traverse feed rate.
Areas B1, B2 : Moves with the measurement speed (f1 or
B1 parameter setting)
r1 If a sensor signal is input in area B1, an error will occur.
If a sensor signal is not input in the area B2, an error will occur.
d1
B2 z 1 (b)
d1

(a) Start point

(b) Measurement position
(c) r1, d1, and f1 can also be set in parameters.

II - 290
M70V Series Specifications Manual
14 Automation Support Functions

(2) Automatic tool length measurement (L series)

This function moves the tool in the direction of the tool measurement position by commanding a distance
between the measurement start position to the measurement position, it stops the tool as soon as it contacts
the sensor and calculates the difference between the coordinate position when the tool has stopped and
commanded coordinate position. It registers this difference as the tool length compensation amount for that
tool.
If compensation has already been applied to the tool, it is moved in the direction of the measurement position
with the compensation still applied, and when the measurement and calculation results are such that a further
compensation amount is to be provided, the current wear compensation amount is further corrected.

G37 αα1 Rr1 Dd1 Ff1 ;

G37 : Measurement command
αα1 : Measurement axis address and measurement position coordinate ... X,Z
: The distance between the point at which tool movement is to start at the measurement speed and the
Rr1
measurement position (Radial value fixed / incremental position)
Dd1
: The range in which the tool is to stop (Radial value fixed: incremental position)
Ff1
: The measurement rate
When Rr1_, Dd1_ and Ff1_ have been omitted, the values set in the parameters are used.

(e)

(d)

A
(R)

B
r1
d1 (a)
(c)
(b) (f)
d1 (g)

(a) F feed
(b) Measuring instrument
(c) Measurement position
(d) Start position
(e) r1, d1, and f1 can also be set in parameters.
(f) Compensation amount
(g) Sensor ON
(R) Rapid traverse feed

When the tool moves from the measurement start position to the measurement position specified in G37 x1
(z1), it passes through the A area at rapid traverse. Then, it moves at the measurement rate set in F command
or parameter from the position specified in r1. If the measurement position arrival signal (sensor signal) turns
ON during the tool is moving in the B area, an error occurs. If the measurement position arrival signal (sensor
signal) does not turn ON although the tool passes through the measurement position x1 (z1) and moves by d1,
an error occurs.

II - 291
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

14.1.3 Manual Tool Length Measurement 1

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

Simple measurement of the tool length is done without a sensor.

(1) Manual tool length measurement I [M system]
When the tool is at the reference position, this function enables the distance from the tool tip to the
measurement position (top of workpiece) to be measured and registered as the tool length compensation
amount.

(a)

(b)

(c)

(a) Manual movement amount (tool length compensation amount)

(b) Workpiece
(c) Table

II - 292
M70V Series Specifications Manual
14 Automation Support Functions

(2) Manual tool length measurement I [L system]

This is the function to calculate the tool length compensation amount automatically by moving the tool to the
measurement point with manual feed. There are two types of measurement methods in manual tool length
measurement I: the basic point method and the measurement value input method. The method is selected by
setting parameter. For key operation there are normal operation mode/simple operation mode.

(a) Basic point method

Obtain the tool length with the tool nose placed on the measurement point.
To carry out the basic point method, a point to place the tool nose on (measurement point) is required.
When measurement position is set to parameter or workpiece coordinate offset (modal).

<Parameter designation method>

The tool length is automatically calculated using the following formula.
Tool length = Machine coordinates - Measurement point (#2015 tlml-)

(Note) Always set the measurement point with a radius value, regardless of the diameter/radius
command.

(b)

(a)

(e) (c)

(d)

(a) Measurement point

(b) Tool length basic point
(c) Z-axis tool length
(d) Z-axis machine position
(e) #2015 tlml-

II - 293
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

<Workpiece coordinate offset designation method>

Tool length is the coordinate value on the workpiece coordinate system.

(b)

(a)

(c)

(a) Measurement position(Workpiece coordinate origin (modal))

(b) Tool length basic point
(c) Workpiece coordinate position = Z-axis tool length

II - 294
M70V Series Specifications Manual
14 Automation Support Functions

(b) Measurement value input method

Actually cut the workpiece. Measure its dimensions, and obtain the tool length from the measured values.
The measurement basic point is characteristic for each machine (the center of the chuck face, etc.
designated by parameter),or workpiece coordinate offset (modal).

<Parameter designation method>

The tool length is automatically calculated by the equation below.
Tool length = Machine coordinate values - Measurement basic point (#2015 tlml-) - Measured
value

(Note) Always set the measurement point with a radius value, regardless of the diameter/radius
command.

(b)

(e)

(c)

(a) (d)

(f)

(a) Measurement basic point

(b) Tool length basic point
(c) X-axis tool lenght
(d) X-axis measured value
(e) X-axis machine position
(f) #2015 tlml-

II - 295
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

<Workpiece coordinate offset designation method>

The tool length is automatically calculated by the equation below.
Tool length = Workpiece coordinate position . Measured value

(b)
(a)

(e)

(c)

(d)

(a) Measurement basic point (Wk. coordinate origin (modal))

(b) Tool length basic point
(c) X-axis tool length
(d) X-axis measured value
(e) X axis WK. coordinate position

II - 296
M70V Series Specifications Manual
14 Automation Support Functions

14.1.4 Manual Tool Length Measurement 2

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

(1) Manual tool length measurement II [M system]

When the tool is positioned at the reference position, this function enables the distance from the reference
position to the tool tip to be measured and registered as the tool length compensation amount. In this case, the
position of the gauge block used as a reference must be set as the basic height.

M (a)

(b)
(f)

(d) (c)

(e)

(a) Tool length compensation amount

(b) Manual movement amount
(c) Basic height
(d) Gauge block
(e) Table
(f) TLM basic length (setup parameter)

If the height axis designation parameter is ON, the axis designated for plane selection basic axis K is the axis
targeted for measurement as the height axis.
Furthermore, if the tool length measurement check parameter is ON, an input OK/cancel confirmation
message appears after input key has been pressed.

II - 297
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

(2) Manual tool length measurement II [L system]

A device in which a touch sensor is built is used. Simply by causing the tool nose to touch the touch sensor in
manual feed, the tool compensation amount can be calculated and stored in tool compensation amount
memory.
Preset the machine coordinate position of the touch sensor touch face in parameter as the measurement basic
position.

X
(a)

Z
(a)
X (b)

Z (c) Z (b)

X (c)

(a) Tool length

(b) - touch face
(c) + touch face

II - 298
M70V Series Specifications Manual
14 Automation Support Functions

14.1.5 Workpiece Coordinate Offset Measurement

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ― ―
L system ○ ○

The external workpiece coordinate offset data for the Z axis can be set by cutting the workpiece face by means of
manual operations and inputting the workpiece measurement signal.
By pressing the menu key, data can be set in the Z axis of an arbitrary coordinate offset.
Coordinate offset setting for the Z axis (2nd axis) of the part system 1 to 4 is possible.
Note that the workpiece coordinate offsets for multiple part systems cannot be measured at the same time.
(Note) Measurement is disabled for the part system with one-axis structure.

Example of measurement of external workpiece coordinate offset data for Z axis

X

(b) (a)

(c)

Z
(d)

(a) Machine zero point

(b) Tool post
(c) Workpiece
(d) Workpiece coordinate zero point

(1) Measurement method with workpiece measurement signal

(a) Select the tool, and cut the workpiece face.
(b) When the workpiece measurement signal is input, the external workpiece coordinate offset data for the Z
axis is calculated from the machine coordinate position, length of the tool used and tool nose wear
compensation amount, and stored in the memory.

(2) Measurement method with "MeasVal take in" menu

(a) Select a tool, and cut the workpiece face.
(b) When the "MeasVal take in" menu is pressed, workpiece coordinate offset data is calculated from the
machine coordinate position, tool length and tool nose wear compensation amount of a used tool, and
external workpiece coordinate offset. The workpiece coordinate offset data is stored in the Z-axis of the
selected coordinate system offset.

II - 299
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

14.1.6 Workpiece Position Measurement

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ― ―

The workpiece position measurement function is used to measure each axis' coordinate point by installing a sensor on
the spindle and the sensor contacting the workpiece with the manual feed or handle feed.
The surface, hole center and width center coordinates are calculated from the measured coordinates, and those
calculated results are set in the workpiece coordinate offset.
The axis to be measured is designated with parameter.
The workpiece position measurement is available for all the part systems.

Here the measurement axes are explained as "X", "Y" and "Z".

(1) Surface workpiece offset measurement

The workpiece position measurement coordinates are calculated from the skip machine position of the X, Y
and Z axes.
Measurement position coordinate X = X axis' skip machine position + sensor diameter/2 ± center
compensation amount (horizontal) ± skip flow amount (horizontal)
Measurement position coordinate Y = Y axis' skip machine position + sensor diameter/2 ± center
compensation amount (vertical) ± skip flow amount (vertical)
Measurement position coordinate Z = Z axis' skip machine position - sensor length

The sensor diameter/2 and skip flow amount change between +/- with the tool movement direction during the
measurement.
The X and Y axes use the sensor diameter, center compensation amount (horizontal/vertical) and skip flow
amount (horizontal/vertical).
The Z axis uses the sensor length.

The measurement position coordinate of the X axis, Y axis or Z axis is set in the specified workpiece
coordinate offset.

(a)
To set the workpiece coordinate offset, the X axis
is measured and the X axis' offset coordinate is
set. Then, the Y axis' offset is measured and set.
Finally, the Z axis' offset is measured and set.
(c)
Y
(b)

(a) Workpiece coordinate zero point

(b) Y axis measurement constant position
(c) X axis measurement constant position

II - 300
M70V Series Specifications Manual
14 Automation Support Functions

(2) Hole center workpiece offset measurement

The measurement position coordinates of two axes (X, Y) are measured at three points, and the hole center is
calculated. The calculated result is set in the specified workpiece coordinate offset.
The workpiece position measurement coordinates are calculated from the skip machine position of the X and Y
axes.
Measurement position coordinate X = X axis' skip machine position + center compensation amount
(horizontal) ± skip flow amount (horizontal
Measurement position coordinate Y = Y axis' skip machine position + center compensation amount (vertical) ±
skip flow amount (vertical)

The +/- of the skip flow amount changes according to the tool movement amount during measurement.

X (d)
To set the workpiece coordinate offset, the
position X and Y of the measurement A point are
(b) measured, and the measured values are set in
the measurement A point. In the same manner as
the measurement A point, the measurement B
point and then C point are measured and set.
The hole center coordinate is calculated by
(a) setting the workpiece coordinate system after
(c) setting three points, and the calculated result is
set in the workpiece coordinate offset.
Y

(a) Workpiece coordinate zero point

(b) Measurement A point
(c) Measurement B point
(d) Measurement C point

II - 301
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

(3) Width center workpiece offset measurement

The two points among the measurement position coordinate of the X axis, Y axis or Z axis are measured, and
each axis' groove center is calculated. The calculated result is set in the specified workpiece coordinate offset.
The workpiece position measurement coordinates are calculated from the skip machine position of the X, Y
and Z axes.
Measurement position coordinate X = X axis' skip machine position + center compensation amount
(horizontal) ± skip flow amount (horizontal)
Measurement position coordinate Y = Y axis' skip machine position + center compensation amount (vertical) ±
skip flow amount (vertical)
Measurement position coordinate Z = Z axis' skip machine position - Sensor length

The +/- of the skip flow amount changes according to the tool movement amount during measurement

X (b)
To set the workpiece coordinate offset, the position
X (position Y, position Z) of the measurement A
(a) point is measured, and the measured value is set in
the measurement A point. In the same manner as
the measurement A point, the measurement B point
is measured and set.
The groove width center coordinate of the X axis (Y
axis, Z axis) is calculated by setting the workpiece
coordinate system after setting two points, and the
Y calculated result is set in the workpiece coordinate
offset

(a) Measurement A point

(b) Measurement B point

II - 302
M70V Series Specifications Manual
14 Automation Support Functions

14.1.7 Rotation Measurement

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ― ―

The offset (rotation center and rotation angle) of the rotary coordinate system is measured, and the results are set to the
workpiece coordinate system offset (rotation center) and the parameters.

<Measurement using touch sensor>

Measurement counter X = X axis skip position (Machine position)
Measurement counter Y = Y axis skip position (Machine position)

<Simple measurement (measurement without using touch sensor)>

Measurement counter X = X axis machine position + center compensation (H) + skip past amount (Horizontal axis)
(Note)
Measurement counter Y = Y axis machine position + center compensation (V) + skip past amount (Vertical axis) (Note)

(Note) The skip past amount is added for only the axis that moved last.
The sign ( + or - ) of the skip past amount depends on the movement direction of the axis.

II - 303
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

14.2 Tool Life Management

14.2.1 Tool Life Management

In this type, how long and how many times the program commanded tool is used are accumulated to monitor the usage
state.

14.2.1.1 Tool Life Management I

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

The following two method can be selected.

- Management by the time of use
The cutting time after specification of a tool selection (T) command (G01, G02, and G33) is added to the
tool use time for the specified tool.
- Management by the frequency of use
The tool use counter corresponding to the specified tool No. is incremented each time a tool selection (T)
command is specified for the tool.

(1) M system
The life of up to 1000 tools can be managed. The maximum number of tools to be registered varies depending
on options.
When the number of uses has reached the limit, the "Tool life over" signal will turn ON.

(2) L system
The life for up to 80 tools (tool numbers 1 to 80) can be managed.
When a T command is issued after it has reached the limit, the "Tool life over" signal will turn ON.

14.2.1.2 Tool Life Management II

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

(1) M system
A spare tool change function is added to tool life management I. This function selects a usable tool out of the
spare tools of the group determined by the value specified by the user PLC, then outputs data of such usable
spare tool. The spare tool can be selected in two ways: the tools are selected in order they were registered in
the group or the tool whose remaining life is the longest of all in the group is selected.
- Number of groups: Max. 200 sets (each part system)/ For 1 part system: 200 sets
- Number of tools in group: Max. 200 tools

(2) L system
The life of each tool (time and frequency) is controlled, and when the life is reached, a spare tool that is the
same type is selected from the group where the tool belongs and used.
- Number of groups: Max. 40 sets (each part system)/ For 1 part system: 80 sets
- Number of tools in group: Max. 16 tools

II - 304
M70V Series Specifications Manual
14 Automation Support Functions

14.2.1.3 Tool Life Management III

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ― ―

For the user PLC designated tool, that tool's usage time (0 to 4000 hours) or frequency of use (0 to 65000 times) is
accumulated, and the tool usage state is monitored. The life for up to 200 tools can be managed.
This function is not controlled by the group No.

14.2.2 Number of Tool Life Management Sets

The number of tools that can be managed for their lives are shown below.

[M system]

Common for part systems or 1-part Independent for systems and

Function name
system multi-part system
Number of tool life management tools
200 sets 100 sets/part system
(200 sets)

[L system]

Common for part systems or 1-part Independent for systems and

Function name
system multi-part system
Number of tool life management tools
80 sets 40 sets/part system
(80 sets)

14.2.2.1 80 Sets
M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ― ―
L system ○ ○

14.2.2.2 200 Sets

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ― ―

II - 305
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

14.3 Others

14.3.1 Programmable Current Limitation

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

This function allows the current limit value of the NC axis to be changed to a desired value in the program, and is used
for the workpiece stopper, etc.
The commanded current limit value is designated with a ratio of the limit current to the rated current. The current limit
value can also be set from the setting and display unit.
The validity of the current limit can be selected with the external signal input.
However, the current limit value of the PLC axis cannot be rewritten.

G10 L14 X dn ;
G10 : Current limit input command
L14 : Current limit value setting (+ side/- side)
X : Axis address
dn : Current limit value 1% to 999%

(1) If the current limit is reached when the current limit is valid, the current limit reached signal is output.
(2) The following two modes can be used with external signals as the operation after the current limit is reached.
- Normal mode
The movement command is executed in the current state.
During automatic operation, the movement command is executed to the end, and then the next block is
moved to with the droops still accumulated.
- Interlock mode
The movement command is blocked (internal interlock).
During automatic operation, the operation stops at the corresponding block, and the next block is not
moved to.
During manual operation, the following same direction commands are ignored.
(3) During the current limit, the droop generated by the current limit can be canceled with external signals.
(Note that the axis must not be moving.)
(4) The setting range of the current limit value is 1% to 999%. Commands that exceed this range will cause a
program error.
(5) If a decimal point is designated with the G10 command, only the integer will be valid.
(Example) G10 L14 X10.123 ; The current limit value will be set to 10%.
(6) For the axis name "C", the current limit value cannot be set from the program (G10 command). To set from the
program, set the axis address with an incremental axis name, or set the axis name to one other than "C".

II - 306
15
Safety and Maintenance

II - 307
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

15.1 Safety Switches

15.1.1 Emergency Stop

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

All operations are stopped by the emergency stop signal input and, at the same time, the drive section is stopped and the
movement of the machine is stopped.
At this time, the READY lamp on the setting and display unit goes OFF and the servo ready signal is turned OFF.

15.1.2 Data Protection Key

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

With the input from the user PLC, it is possible to prohibit the parameter setting or deletion, and the program edit on
setting and display unit.
Data protection is divided into the following groups.
Group 1 : For protecting the tool data and protecting the coordinate system presettings as based on origin
setting (zero)
Group 2 : For protecting the user parameters and common variables
Group 3 : For protecting the machining programs

II - 308
M70V Series Specifications Manual
15 Safety and Maintenance

15.2 Display for Ensuring Safety

15.2.1 NC Warning
M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

The warnings which are output by the NC system are listed below. When one of these warnings has occurred, a warning
number is output to the PLC and a description of the warning appears on the screen. Operation can be continued without
taking further action.

Type of warning Description

Servo warning The servo warning is displayed.
Spindle warning The spindle warning is displayed.
System warning The system warning is displayed. (State such as temperature rise, battery voltage low, etc.)
Absolute position
A warning in the absolute position detection system is displayed.
warning
Auxiliary axis warning The auxiliary axis warning is displayed.

15.2.2 NC Alarm
M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

The alarms which are output by the NC system are listed below. When one of these alarms has occurred, an alarm
number is output to the PLC, and a description of the alarm appears on the screen. Operation cannot be continued
without taking remedial action.

Type of alarm Description

This alarm occurring due to incorrect operation by the operator during NC operation and that by
Operation alarm
machine trouble are displayed.
Servo alarm This alarm describes errors in the servo system such as the servo drive unit motor and encoder.
This alarm describes errors in the spindle system such as the spindle drive unit motor and
Spindle alarm
encoder.
MCP alarm An error has occurred in the drive unit and other interfaces.
This alarm is displayed on the screen with the register at the time when the error occurred if the
System alarm
system stops due to a system error.
Absolute position detection system
An alarm in the absolute position detection system is displayed.
alarm
Auxiliary axis alarm The auxiliary axis alarm is displayed.
Computer link error The computer link alarm is displayed.
User PLC alarm The user PLC alarm is displayed.
This alarm occur during automatic operation, and the cause of this alarm is mainly program errors
Program error which occur, for instance, when mistakes have been made in the preparation of the machining
programs or when programs which conform to the specification have not been prepared.
Network service error The network service alarm is displayed.

II - 309
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

15.2.3 Operation Stop Cause

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

The stop cause of automatic operation is displayed on the setting and display unit.

15.2.4 Emergency Stop Cause

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

When "EMG" (emergency stop) message is displayed in the operation status display area of the setting and display unit,
the emergency stop cause can be confirmed.

II - 310
M70V Series Specifications Manual
15 Safety and Maintenance

15.2.5 Thermal Detection

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

When overheating is detected in the control unit, an overheat signal is output at the same time as the alarm is displayed.
If the system is in automatic run at the time, run is continued, but it cannot be started after reset or completion by M02/
M30. (It can be started after block stop or feed hold.)
When the temperature falls below the specified temperature, the alarm is released and the overheat signal is turned
OFF.
The overheat alarm occurs at 80 C or more in the control unit.

(b)
(a)
(c) (f)
(d)
(m)
(l) (k)

(g)
(h)
(e)
(i)
(j)

(a) Overheat detection

(b) Control unit
(c) Parameter
(d) Temperature alarm
(e) User PLC
(f) Message display
(g) Cooling fan rotation
(h) Lamp alarm
(i) Emergency stop
(j) Others
(k) Bit device
(l) (a temperature of 80 C)
(m) (Default: valid)

(Note 1) If the parameter is used to set the temperature rise detection function to invalid, overheating may occur,
thereby disabling control and possibly resulting in the axes running out of control, which in turn may result in
machine damage and/or bodily injury or destruction of the unit. It is for this reason that the detection function is
normally left "valid" for operation.

II - 311
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

15.2.6 Battery Alarm/Warning

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

When it is time for changing batteries, alarm or warning is displayed.

When a warning is displayed, immediately backup all the necessary data and change batteries.
When an alarm is displayed, there is a possibility that memory has been lost.

II - 312
M70V Series Specifications Manual
15 Safety and Maintenance

15.3 Protection

15.3.1 Stroke End (Over Travel)

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

When limit switches and dogs have been attached to the machine and a limit switch has kicked a dog, the movement of
the machine is stopped by the signal input from the limit switch.
At the same time, the alarm output is sent to the machine.
The stroke end state is maintained and the alarm state is released by feeding the machine in the reverse direction in the
manual mode to disengage the dog.

15.3.2 Stored Stroke Limit

The areas where tool entry is prohibited can be set.
The stored stroke limits I, II, IIB, IB and IC are handled as follows.

Prohibited
Type Explanation
range
- Set by the machine tool builder.
I Outside
- When used with II, the narrow range designated by the two types becomes the movement valid range.
II Outside - Set by the user.
- By using the program command, the parameter can be changed and the function can be switched to ON/
IIB Inside OFF.
- Select II or IIB with the parameters.
IB Inside - Set by the machine tool builder.
IC Outside - Set by the machine tool builder.

II - 313
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

15.3.2.1 Stored Stroke Limit I/II

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

(1) Stored Stroke Limit I

This is the stroke limit function used by the machine tool builder, and the area outside the set limits is the
entrance prohibited area.
The maximum and minimum values for each axis can be set by parameters. The function itself is used
together with the stored stroke limit II function described in the following section, and the tolerable area of both
functions is the movement valid range.
The setting range is -99999.999 to +99999.999mm.
The stored stroke limit I function is made valid not immediately after the controller power is turned ON but after
reference position return.
The stored stroke limit I function will be invalidated if the maximum and minimum values are set to the same
data.

(b) 1

(M) M

(b)
(b) (a) The position of points 1 and 2 are
set using the machine coordinate.
: Prohibited area

2 (b)
(d)
(e) (c)

(a) Machine movement valid range

(b) Prohibited area
(c) "+" setting
(d) "-" setting
(e) Feedrate
(M) Machine coordinate system
1: Point 1
2: Point 2

All axes will decelerate and stop if an alarm occurs even for a single axis during automatic operation. Only the
axis for which the alarm occurs will decelerate and stop during manual operation. The stop position must be
before the prohibited area.
The value of distance "L" between the stop position and prohibited area differs according to the feed rate and
other factors.

II - 314
M70V Series Specifications Manual
15 Safety and Maintenance

The range of the stored stroke limit Ⅰ can be changed to the value set to R register for each axis. When
"Stored stroke limit I change request" signal is turned ON, the range of stored stroke limit changes. Changing
the area for the stored stroke limit Ⅰ is also possible during automatic operation. Also, the current settings for
the stored stroke limit Ⅰ can be checked by with the R register values.
This feature allows an operator to switch the range of the stored stroke limit I during axis movement for the
purpose of tool exchange, for example.

(2) Stored Stroke Limit II

This is the stroke limit function which can be set by the user, and the area outside the set limits is the
prohibited area.
The maximum and minimum values for each axis can be set by parameters. The function itself is used
together with the stored stroke limit I function described in the foregoing section, and the tolerable area of both
functions is the movement valid range.
The setting range is -99999.999 to +99999.999mm.
The stored stroke limit II function will be invalidated if the maximum and minimum parameter values are set to
the same data.

(b) 1

3
(M) M
(f) (b)
(b)
(a) The position of points 3 and 4 are set
with the machine coordinate.
The area determined by points 1 and
2 is the prohibited area set with
stored stroke limit I.
4
: Prohibited area
2
-(d) +
(c)
(e)
L

(a) Machine movement valid range

(b) Prohibited area
(c) "+" setting
(d) "-" setting
(e) Feed rate
(f) Area prohibited by stored stroke limit function II
(M) Machine coordinate system
1: Point 1
2: Point 2
3: Point 3
4: Point 4

All axes will decelerate and stop if an alarm occurs even for a single axis during automatic operation. Only the
axis for which the alarm occurs will decelerate and stop during manual operation. The stop position must be
before the prohibited area.
The value of distance "L" between the stop position and prohibited area differs according to the feed rate and
other factors.
The stored stroke limit II function can also be invalidated with the parameter settings.

II - 315
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

15.3.2.2 Stored Stroke Limit IB

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

Three areas where tool entry is prohibited can be set using the stored stroke limit I, stored stroke limit II, IIB and stored
stroke limit IB functions.

(M) M
The area determined by points 1 and 2 is
3 the prohibited area set with stored stroke
limit I.
(a) The area determined by points 3 and 4 is
(b) (b) (b)
the prohibited area set with stored stroke
5 limit IIB.
The area determined by points 5 and 6 is
(b)
the prohibited area set with stored stroke
6 limit IB.
4

(a) Machine movement valid range

(b) Prohibited area
(M) Machine coordinate system
1: Point 1
2: Point 2
3: Point 3
4: Point 4
5: Point 5
6: Point 6

When an attempt is made to move the tool beyond the set range, an alarm is displayed, and the tool decelerates and
stops.
If the tool has entered into the prohibited area and an alarm has occurred, it is possible to move the tool only in the
opposite direction to the direction in which the tool has just moved.
This function is an option.

(Note 1) Bear in mind that the following will occur if the same data is set for the maximum and minimum value of the
tool entry prohibited area:
(1) When zero has been set for the maximum and minimum values, tool entry will be prohibited in the whole area.
(2) If a value other than zero has been set for both the maximum and minimum values, it will be possible for the
tool to move in the whole area.

II - 316
M70V Series Specifications Manual
15 Safety and Maintenance

15.3.2.3 Stored Stroke Limit IIB

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

A parameter is used to switch between this function and stored stroke limit II. With stored stroke limit IIB, the range inside
the boundaries which have been set serves as the tool entry prohibited area.

15.3.2.4 Stored Stroke Limit IC

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

The boundary is set for each axis with the parameters. The inside of the set boundary is the additional movement range.
This cannot be used with stored stroke limit IB.

1
M
The position of points 3 and 4
(M)
are set with the machine
(b) (b) coordinate.
(a) The area determined by points 1
and 2 is the prohibited area set

with stored stroke limit I. :

3
Prohibited area
2 (c)

(a) Machine movement valid range

(b) Prohibited area
(c) Additional movement range
(M) Machine coordinate system
1: Point 1
2: Point 2
3: Point 3
4: Point 4

II - 317
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

15.3.3 Stroke Check before Travel

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ― ―

By commanding, from the program, the boundary for prohibiting machine entry as a coordinate position on the machine
coordinate system, entry into the inner side of that boundary can be prohibited. Only the three basic axes can be set.
As compared to the normal stored stroke limit with which the movement stops just before the set prohibited range, with
this function, if a command exceeding the valid movement range is issued, a program error will occur before moving in
that block.

G code Function
G22 Stroke check before movement function ON
G23 Stroke check before movement function OFF

II - 318
M70V Series Specifications Manual
15 Safety and Maintenance

15.3.4 Chuck/Tailstock Barrier Check

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ― ―
L system ○ ○

By limiting the tool nose point move range, this function prevents the tool from colliding with the chuck or tailstock
because of a programming error. When a move command exceeding the area set in a given parameter is programmed,
the tool is stopped at the barrier boundaries.
Program format

G22 ; ..... Barrier ON

G23 ; ..... Barrier OFF (cancel)

(1) When the machine is about to exceed the area, the machine is stopped and an alarm is displayed. To cancel
the alarm, execute reset.
(2) The function is also effective when the machine is locked.
(3) This function is valid when all axes for which a barrier has been set have completed reference position return.
(4) The chuck barrier/tailstock barrier can be set per each part system.
(5) Chuck barrier/tailstock barrier setting.

X P4
X P4 P1
(P0) P5
P1 (P0) P5 P2
P2 P6
P6
P3
P3
P0 Z
P0 Z

(a)
(a)

(a) ( Form 1) (a) (Form 2)

The chuck barrier and tailstock barrier are both set with the machine coordinate by inputting one set of three-point data in
the parameter. Points P1, P2 and P3 are the chuck barrier, and points P4, P5 and P6 are the tailstock barrier. The X axis
is set with the coordinate position (radius value) from the workpiece center, and the Z axis is set with the basic machine
coordinate system coordinate.
Point P0 is the chuck barrier and tailstock barrier's basic X coordinates, and the workpiece center coordinate in the basic
machine coordinate system is set.
The barrier area is assumed to be symmetrical for the Z axis, and if the X axis coordinate of barrier point P_ is minus, the
sign is inverted to plus and the coordinate is converted for a check.
Set the absolute values of the X axis coordinates of the barrier points as shown below:
P1 >= P2 >= P3, P4 >= P5 >= P6
(However, this need not apply to the Z axis coordinates.)

II - 319
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

15.3.5 Interlock
M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

The machine movement will decelerate and stop as soon as the interlock signal, serving as the external input, is turned
ON.
When the interlock signal is turned OFF, the machine starts moving again.
(1) In the manual mode, only that axis for which the interlock signal is input will stop.
(2) In the automatic mode, all axes will stop when the interlock signal is input to even one axis which coincides with the
moving axis.
(3) Block start interlock
While the block start interlock signal (*BSL) is OFF (valid), the execution of the next block during automatic
operation will not be started. The block whose execution has already commenced is executed until its end.
Automatic operation is not suspended. The commands in the next block are placed on standby, and their execution
is started as soon as the signal is turned ON.
(Note 1) This signal is valid for all blocks including internal operation blocks such as fixed cycles.
(Note 2) This signal (*BSL) is set ON (invalid) when the power is turned ON. If it is not used, there is no need to make a
program with the PLC.
(4) Cutting start interlock
While the cutting start interlock signal (*CSL) is OFF (valid), the execution of all movement command blocks except
positioning during automatic operation will not be started. The block whose execution has already commenced is
executed until its end. Automatic operation is not suspended. The commands in the next block are placed on
standby, and their execution is started as soon as the signal is turned ON.
(Note 1) The signal is valid for all blocks including internal operation block such as fixed cycles.
(Note 2) This signal (*CSL) is set ON (invalid) when the power is turned ON. If it is not used, there is no need to make a
program with the PLC.

15.3.6 External Deceleration

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

This function reduces the feed rate to the deceleration speed set by the parameter when the external deceleration input
signal, which is the external input from the user PLC, has been set to ON. External deceleration input signals are
provided for each axis and for each movement direction ("+" and "-"), and a signal is valid when the signal in the direction
coinciding with the direction of the current movement has been input. When an axis is to be returned in the opposite
direction, its speed is returned immediately to the regular speed assigned by the command.
When non-interpolation positioning is performed during manual operation or automatic operation, only the axis for which
the signal that coincides with the direction of the current movement has been input will decelerate.
However, with interpolation during automatic operation, the feed rate of the axis will be reduced to the deceleration rate if
there is even one axis for which the signal that coincides with the direction of current movement has been input.

The external deceleration input signal can be canceled using a parameter for the cutting feed only.

II - 320
M70V Series Specifications Manual
15 Safety and Maintenance

15.3.9 Door Interlock

15.3.9.1 Door Interlock I

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

(Outline of function)
Under the CE marking scheme of the European safety standards (machine directive), the opening of any protection
doors while a machine is actually moving is prohibited.
When the door open signal is input from the PLC, this function first decelerates and stops all the control axes,
establishes the ready OFF status, and then shuts off the drive power inside the servo drive unit so that the motors are no
longer driven.
When the door open signal has been input during automatic operation, the suspended machining can be resumed by
first closing the door concerned and then initiating cycle start again.

(Description of operation)
When a door is open
The NC system operates as follows when the door open signal is input:
(1) It stops operations.
(a) When automatic operation was underway
The machine is set to the feed hold mode, and all the axes decelerate and stop.
The spindle also stops.
(b) When manual operation was underway
All the axes decelerate and stop immediately.
The spindle also stops.
(2) The complete standby status is established.
(3) After all the NC axes and the spindle have stopped, the ready OFF status is established.
(4) The door open enable signal is output.
Release the door lock using this signals at the PLC.

When a door is closed

After the PLC has confirmed that the door has been closed and locked, the NC system operates as follows when the
door open signal is set to OFF.
(5) All the axes are set to ready ON.
(6) The door open enable signal is set to OFF.

Resuming operation
(7) When automatic operation was underway
Press the AUTO START button.
Operation now resumes from the block in which machining was suspended when the door open signal was
input.
(8) When manual operation was underway
Axis movement is commenced when the axis movement signals are input again.
(9) Spindle rotation
Restore the spindle rotation by inputting the forward rotation or reverse rotation signal again: this can be done
either by operations performed by the operator or by using the user PLC.

II - 321
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

15.3.9.2 Door Interlock II

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

Outline of function
Under the CE marking scheme of the European safety standards (machine directive), the opening of any protection
doors while a machine is actually moving is prohibited.
When the door open signal is input from the PLC, this function first decelerates and stops all the control axes,
establishes the ready OFF status, and then shuts off the drive power inside the servo amplifiers so that the motors are no
longer driven.
With the door interlock function established by the door open II signal, automatic start can be enabled even when the
door open signal has been input. However, the axes will be set to the interlock status.

Description of operation
When a door is open
The NC system operates as follows when the door open II signal is input:
(1) It stops operations.
All the axes decelerate and stop.
The spindle also stops.
(2) The complete standby status is established.
(3) After all the NC axes and the spindle have stopped, the ready OFF status is established.
However, the servo ready finish signal (SA) is not set to OFF.

When a door is closed

After the PLC has confirmed that the door has been closed and locked, the NC system operates as follows when the
door open signal is set to OFF.
(4) All the axes are set to ready ON.
(5) The door open enable signal is set to OFF.

Resuming operation
(6) When automatic operation was underway
The door open signal is set to OFF, and after the ready ON status has been established for all the axes,
operation is resumed.
(7) When manual operation was underway
Axis movement is commenced when the axis movement signals are input again.
(8) Spindle rotation
Restore the spindle rotation by inputting the forward rotation or reverse rotation signal again: this can be done
either by operations performed by the operator or by using the user PLC.
(Note) Concerning the handling of an analog spindle
The signals described in this section are valid in a system with bus connections for the NC control unit and
drive units. When an analog spindle is connected, the NC system cannot verify that the spindle has come to a
complete stop. This means that the door should be opened after the PLC has verified that the spindle has
come to a complete stop. Since the spindle may resume its rotation immediately after the door has been
closed, set the forward and reverse rotation signals to OFF when opening the door so as to ensure safety.

II - 322
M70V Series Specifications Manual
15 Safety and Maintenance

Differences from door interlock I

(1) The method used to stop the machine during automatic operation is the same as with the axis interlock
function.
(2) The servo ready finish signal (SE) is not set to OFF.
(3) Automatic start is valid during door interlock. However, the interlock takes effect for the axis movements.
(4) When this door interlock function (door open signal ON) is initiated during axis movement, the axes decelerate
and stop.
(5) When this door interlock function (door open signal) is set to OFF, the axis movement resumes.

15.3.10 Parameter Lock

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

This function is used to prohibit changing the machine parameter.

15.3.11 Program Protection (Edit Lock B, C)

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

The edit lock function B or C inhibits machining program B or C (group with machining program numbers) from being
edited or erased when these programs require to be protected.

(a)
1 ~ 7999
(b)

8000 ~ 8999 (e) (f)

(c)
(d)

9000 ~ 9999
(a)
10000 ~ 99999999

(a) Machining program A

(b) Machining program B (User-prepared standard subprogram)
(c) Machining program C (Machine tool builder customized program)
(d) Editing is inhibited by edit lock C.
(e) Editing is inhibited by edit lock B.
(f) Editing is inhibited by data protect.

II - 323
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

15.3.12 Program Display Lock

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

This function allows the display of only a target program (label address 9000) to be invalidated for the program display in
the monitor screen, etc.
The operation search of a target program can also be invalidated.
The validity of the display is selected with the parameters. The setting will be handled as follows according to the value.

0: Display and search are possible.

1: Display of the program details is prohibited.
2: Display and operation search of the program details are prohibited.

II - 324
M70V Series Specifications Manual
15 Safety and Maintenance

15.3.13 Safety Observation

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

With the safety observation function, access to the working part of the machine without turning the motor drive power
OFF is possible even when the machine door is open. Operation speed will be the pre-set safety speed or lower while
the door is open.

Function Description
The control unit and the drive unit separately observe the input of emergency stop. In case of an emergency
Dual emergency stop stop, both the control unit and the drive unit (power supply unit) will independently control the contactors to
shut the drive power OFF.
The control unit and the drive unit (servo/spindle drive unit) separately observe the following. When an error
is detected during observation, the main power for the drive will be shut OFF.
Speed monitor (1) That the command speed should not exceed the speed set by the parameter (the "safety speed").
(2) That the motor rotation speed should not exceed the rotation speed set by the parameter (the "safety
rotation speed").
Door state signal monitor The control unit and the drive unit separately observe the door state signal (open or closed).

(a)

(b) (n)
(c) (p)
(d) (o)
(b)

(e) (e)
(n)

(g)
(f) (f)
(j)
(h)
(i)

(k)
(j) (l)

(m)

(a) Door open/close check sensor (b) NC-side door state signal
(c) External emergency stop A (d) NC
(e) Door state signal monitor (f) Speed monitor
(g) Commanded position (h) Feedbacked position
(i) Feedbacked rotation speed (j) Contactor control
(k) MC (l) Contactor
(m) Main power (n) Drive-side door state signal
(o) Drive (p) External emergency stop B

II - 325
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

15.3.14 Vertical Axis Pull-up

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

When emergency stop or power interruption occurs, motor brake and vertical axis drop prevention function is supposed
to work to prevent vertical axis (such as Z axis of vertical machining center) from dropping. However, there might be a
case that the vertical axis drops by several μm because of decrepitude of motor brake.
Therefore, emergency stop or the power interruption during finish machining at low speed might cause damage to the
cutting tool in operation.
Vertical axis pull-up function prevents the tool from breakage, through pulling up the cutting tool during emergency stop
or instantaneous power interruption at low cutting speed.

II - 326
M70V Series Specifications Manual
15 Safety and Maintenance

15.4 Maintenance and Troubleshooting

15.4.1 Operation History

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

This is a maintenance function which is useful for tracing down the history and NC operation information and analyzing
trouble, etc. This information is saved in the history data file, and can be displayed on the screen and output to a file.
The machine tool builder password is required to use this function.

The following two types of history data files are used.

- All history: The key history, alarm/warning history, PLC signal history, and AC input power OFF history is recorded in
date/time order.
- Key history: Only the key history is recorded in date/time order.

The data sorting order of　the all history data files can be changed by the　parameter.
- In chronologically ascending order for each log type
- In chronologically ascending order for all the log types

(Note) If the date and time are the same, the history will be displayed in the following order.
Key history
Alarm/warning history
PLC signal history
AC input power OFF history

II - 327
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

15.4.2 Data Sampling

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

The NC data sampling function samples the NC internal data (speed output from NC to drive unit, and feedback data
from the drive unit, etc.). This data can be output as text data.

Item Specifications
Sampling cycle 1.7ms × setting value
NC axis : 1 to 9 axes
Number of sampled axes
Spindle : 1 to 4 axes
Number of sampled channels 1 to 8 points
Maximum 1,310,720 points
(Note 1) This is the entire data size. The data size per channel will decrease when the
Sampling data size
number of sampled channels increases.
(Note 2) If the open DRAM memory is insufficient, the maximum data size will decrease.

- The data set with this function is not output to the parameters.
- The state returns to "Sampling stop" when the power is turned ON.

15.4.3 NC Data Backup

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

The NC data back up function backs up the NC parameters, etc., on an IC card.

The data can also be restored.

II - 328
M70V Series Specifications Manual
15 Safety and Maintenance

15.4.5 Servo Tuning Support Tool

15.4.5.1 MS Configurator
M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

With this function, the servo parameters can be automatically adjusted by connecting CNC and MS Configurator, which
is an application that runs on a regular PC.
MS Configurator measures and analyzes the machine characteristics to automatically adjust the servo parameters while
having the motor run by test NC programs or vibration signals.
(Note) This tool is free of charge. Please contact us.

The servo is adjusted with the MS Configurator according to the following flow.

Start servo adjustment

Set standard parameters Save/Change the NC parameters and servo parameters.

NC.
Set the communication path between MS Configurator and
Set environment Adjust the size of vibration signals.
Create a program for adjustment.
These must be done before adjustment.
Set the optimum speed loop gain with which
Adjust speed loop gain mechanical vibration should not occur.

Set the position loop gain with which vibration

Adjust position loop gain and overshooting should not occur.

Set the acceleration/deceleration time constant.

Adjust time constant

Adjust lost motion Set the lost motion compensation amount.

Display adjustment result Display the adjustment result.

End of servo adjustment

II - 329
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

MS Configurator supports the following servo parameter automatic adjustment function and data measurement function.

<Waveform measurement function>

Frequency response Measures the frequency response (speed command - speed FB) of speed loop for the
:
measurement designated axis. The result will be presented as Bode diagram.
Frequency response Measures the frequency response (torque command - speed FB) of machine system for the
:
measurement of machine designated axis. The result will be presented as Bode diagram.
Measurement function (with Measures the Chronological data measurement, Arc shape error measurement,
:
program creation function) Synchronous tapping error measurement, Measuring arbitrary path.

<Automatic adjustment function>

Initial notch filter setup : Automatically adjusts the notch filter when the initial resonance is large.
Velocity loop gain adjustment : Automatically adjusts the notch filter and the speed loop gain.
Time constant adjustment : Automatically adjusts the acceleration/deceleration time constant.
Position loop gain adjustment : Automatically adjusts the position loop gain.
Lostmotion adjustment : Automatically adjusts the quadrant protrusion amount of the designated axis.
Automatically adjusts the lost motion type 3 for the quadrant protrusion amount of the
Lostmotion 3 adjustment :
designated axis.

<Environment setup>
Communication path setup : Sets the path to communicate with NC. The model of connected NC is selected.
Program creation : Creates machining programs for adjustment.

<Assistance setup function>

Parameter setup : Saves/changes the servo parameters.

II - 330
M70V Series Specifications Manual
15 Safety and Maintenance

15.4.5.2 NC Analyzer
M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

(Note) Please contact us to purchase this tool.

Servo parameters can be automatically adjusted by activating the motor using machining programs for adjustment or
vibration signals, and measuring/analyzing the machine characteristics.

15.4.6 Automatic Backup

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

With this function, system data, ladder program and custom software can be automatically backed up in case of system
failure. Up to the three most recent backup data can be stored.
The backup execution timing can be set with parameters.

15.4.7 System Setup

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

System setup function enables automatic settings for the NC's initial startup just by inputting the minimally required
items.
With this function, settings required for preliminary operation of the motors (servo motor, spindle motor and auxiliary axis
motor) can be provided easily, resulting in shortening of the time required for the NC initial startup.

The required setting items for this function are as follows.

(1) Number of spindle connections, number of auxiliary axis connections
(2) Number of axis and command type in each part system
(3) Setting of the servo interface connection channel and rotary switch for each axis drive. Also, converter /motor
type connected with each spindle drive.
(4) Setting of the servo interface connection channel and rotary switch for each NC axis. Also, the motor type,
encoder type, and the converter type that is connected with the servo drive.

By setting above items, the following setting required for the NC's initial startup can be executed.
(1) SRAM clear and file format
(2) Various parameter settings (machine parameter and user parameter)
Note that there are two methods of setting spindle parameters: using spindle parameter files provided by
Mitsubishi, and setting in system setup screen.
(3) PLC ladder writing settings required for the manual operation (JOG mode only)
Note that a menu has to be selected again.

II - 331
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

15.4.13 Parameter Setup Support Tool

15.4.13.1 NC Configurator2
M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

The NC data file necessary for NC control and machine operation (such as parameters, tool data and common variables)
can be edited on a personal computer.
Please contact us to purchase a full function version. A limited function version is also available free of charge.

II - 332
16
Drive System

II - 333
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

16.1 Servo/Spindle

Refer to "II Functional Specifications MITSUBISHI CNC M70V Series Specifications List".
Refer to the following manuals for details on the servo and spindle system.
DRIVE SYSTEM DATA BOOK (MDS-D/DH/DM/D-SVJ3/SPJ3 Series) (IB-1500273(ENG))
MDS-D/DH Series Specifications Manual (IB-1500875(ENG))
MDS-D-SVJ3/SPJ3 Series Specifications Manual (IB-1500158(ENG))
MDS-DM Series Specifications Manual (IB-1500891(ENG))
DRIVE SYSTEM DATA BOOK (MDS-D2/DH2/DM2/DJ Series) (IB-1501142(ENG))
MDS-D2/DH2 Series Specifications Manual (IB-1501124(ENG))
MDS-DJ Series Specifications Manual (IB-1501130(ENG))
MDS-DM2 Series Specifications Manual (IB-1501136(ENG))

II - 334
17
Machine Support Functions

II - 335
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

17.1 PLC

17.1.1 Built-in PLC Processing Mode

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

An exclusive sequence program that controls the various signals between the controller and machine to realize operation
applicable to each machine can be created and built in.
The sequence execution modes include high-speed processing and main processing.

(1) High-speed processing

This mode provides repeated execution at 3.5ms cycles. It is used to process signals requiring high speeds.
The max. number of program steps for high-speed processing (1 period) is 1000 steps when using basic
commands.
(2) Main processing
This mode provides normal sequence processing. The processing cycle depends on the number of sequence
steps.

17.1.2 PLC Functions

17.1.2.1 Built-in PLC Basic Function

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

(1) Ladder commands

Basic commands (bit processing commands)
43 commands including LD, LDI, OR, ORI, AND, ANI, OUT, PLS, etc.
Function commands
188 commands including data transfer, 4 basic arithmetic operations, logic arithmetic operations, large/
small identification, binary/BCD conversion, branching, conditional branching, decoding, encoding, etc.

II - 336
M70V Series Specifications Manual
17 Machine Support Functions

17.1.2.2 PLC Exclusive Instruction

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

PLC dedicated instruction is provided for certain limited applications, enabling a complex machining process, which is
difficult to carry out only by the basic instructions and function instructions.

PLC dedicated instructions include:

(1) ATC dedicated instruction (ATC)
This is an instruction to function ATC, or magazine index control, tool exchange with arm, etc.
ATC dedicated instructions are as follows.
- Tool No. search
- Tool change
- Tool table forward/reverse run
- Pointer (which indicates magazine index position) forward/reverse run
- Tool data read/write

(2) Rotary body control instruction (ROT)

This is an instruction to determine the rotary body's target position or rotation direction, or to function as a ring
counter.
This is used when calculating the rotation direction or number of index steps of the magazine or turret based on the
output data figured from ATC dedicated instruction tool No. search processing, or when controlling the rotary body
position.

II - 337
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

Using the ATC and ROT instructions

The order for using the ATC and ROT instructions when T is commanded or tool exchange is commanded is
shown below.

(a) (b) (d)

ATC K1 (e) (f)
(t) (c)
ATC K2

(l)
(g) (h) (j) (m)
ROT K1 ROT K3
(i) (k)
(n)
ATC K5, K6
(o)
ATC K7, K8
(p) (r)
ATC K3
(q)
(s)
ATC K4

(a) T command
(b) Tool No. search
(c) Tool No. logical search
(d) Matching place No.
(e) Number of matches
(f) Error process
(g) Rotary body index
(h) Turning direction
(i) Number of steps, etc.
(j) Magazine turn
(k) Variable pointer method
(l) Fixed pointer method
(m) Ring counter control
(n) Pointer forward run/reverse run
(o) Tool table forward run/reverse run
(p) Magazine stop
(q) Tool change command
(r) Tool change
(s) Arbitrary position tool change
(t) Pointer or ring counter value

II - 338
M70V Series Specifications Manual
17 Machine Support Functions

(1) Devices
The table below lists the devices which can be used by the PLC. (PLC4B)

Device Device No. Unit Details

X* X0 to X1FFF (8192 points) 1 bit Input signal to PLC: Machine input, etc.
Y* X0 to Y1FFF (8192 points) 1 bit Output signal from PLC: Machine output, etc.
M M0 to M10239 (10240 points) 1 bit Temporary memory
F F0 to F1023 (1024 points) 1 bit Temporary memory. Alarm message interface
L L0 to L511 (512 points) 1 bit Latch relay (back up memory)
SB SB0 to SB1FF (512 points) 1 bit Link special relay
B B0 to B1FFF (8192 points) 1 bit Link relay
SM* SM0 to SM1023 (1024 points) 1 bit Special relay
V V0 to V255 (256 points) 1 bit Edge relay
SW SW0 to SW1FF (512 points) 16 bit Link special relay
SD SD0 to SD1023 (1024 points) 16 bit Special register
Timer
T T0 to T703 (704 points) 1 bit/16 bit
(The variable/fixed boundary is set with a parameter.) (Note 2)
ST ST0 to ST63 (64 points) 1 bit/16 bit Integrated timer (100ms unit)
C C0 to C255 (256 points) 1 bit/16 bit Counter (The variable/fixed boundary is set with a parameter.)
D D0 to D2047 (2048 points) 16 bit/32 bit Data register. Register for calculation
R* R0 to R13311 (13312 points) 16 bit/32 bit File register. CNC word interface
W W0 to W1FFF (8192 points) 16 bit/32 bit Link register
Z Z0 to Z1 (2 points) 16 bit Address index
N N0 to N7 (8 points) Master controller nesting level
(2048
P0 to P2047
P* points) Label for conditional jump, subroutine call command
P4000 to P4005
(Note3)
K-32768 to K32767 Decimal constant for 16-bit command
K
K-2147483648 to K2147483647 Decimal constant for 32-bit command
HO to HFFFF Hexadecimal constant for 16-bit command
H
HO to HFFFFFFFF Hexadecimal constant for 32-bit command

(Note 1) Devices marked with * in the device column have designated applications. Do not use devices other than
those corresponding to the input/output signals with the machine side (input/output signals of the remote I/O
unit), even if it is an undefined vacant device.
(Note 2) Distinction of 10ms timer and 100ms timer is performed by command. (10ms timer is performed by OUTH
command, 100ms timer is performed by OUT command.)
(Note 3) There are two types of P-device: common pointer and local pointer. The points above is the sum of the two.

II - 339
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

(2) Timer / counter setting display

(a) PLC timer
The setting value of the timer used by the built-in PLC can be set from the screen on the setting and
display unit.
The timer types include the 10ms, 100ms and 100ms integral types.
Whether to validate the timer in the PLC program or to validate the setting value from the screen can be
selected with the parameters.
Whether to hold the integral timer when the power is turned OFF can also be selected.
(b) PLC counter
The setting value of the counter used by the built-in PLC can be set from this screen.
Whether to validate the constants in the PLC program or to validate the setting value from the screen can
be selected with the parameters.
Whether to hold the counter value when the power is turned OFF can also be selected.

(3) External key input

By inputting the key data from the built-in PLC, the same operation as when the operator operates the
operation board can be done.

(4) Real spindle speed output

The real spindle speed is converted by the signals of the encoder installed on the spindle and is output to the
PLC. The output increment is 0.001r/min.

(5) High speed input/output signal

There are signals that can be input and output at a 3.5ms cycle for high-speed processing.
(a) Input signal ON time

tson
tson ≧ 3.5ms

(b) After the signal output is set in the interface, it can be output to the machine side with a max. 3.5ms delay.
The input also appears on the interface with a 3.5ms delay.
(c) The signals used for high-speed processing are assigned with the parameters. Assignment is possible in
a continuous 16-point unit.

II - 340
M70V Series Specifications Manual
17 Machine Support Functions

(6) PLC analog voltage control

(a) Analog output
When the specified data is put in the file register, the corresponding analog voltage is output from the
analog output external connector.
<Relationship between file register contents and analog output voltage>

10V

- 4095
0
(a)
4095

- 10V

(a) Contents of file register

Output voltage 0 to ± 10V( ± 5%)

Resolution Full scale (10V)/4095
10kΩ resistance load
Load condition
(standard)
Output impedance 220Ω

(Note) The remote I/O unit DX120/DX121 is required for analog output.

II - 341
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

17.1.3 PLC Support Functions

17.1.3.1 Alarm Message Display

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

The contents of the alarms which have occurred during sequence (user PLC) processing can be displayed on the setting
and display unit.
Up to four alarm message displays can be displayed simultaneously on the alarm diagnosis screen. The maximum
length of one message is 46 characters.

17.1.3.2 Operator Message Display

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

When a condition has arisen in which a message is to be relayed to the operator, an operator message can be displayed
separately from the alarm message.
The maximum length of an operator message on the alarm diagnosis screen is 60 characters. The number of messages
displayed at the same time is one.

17.1.3.3 Memory Switch (PLC Switch)

17.1.3.3.1 PLC Switch 32 Points

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○
32 points of PLC switches can be set on the setting and display unit screen, and the ON/OFF control executed.
The switches can be used as part of the machine operation switches. The switch applications can be freely determined
with the sequence program, and each switch name can be created with the PLC and displayed on the setting and display
unit.

17.1.3.4 Load Meter Display

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

A load meter can be displayed on the setting and display unit.

Up to two axes designated with the built-in PLC such as the spindle load and Z axis load can be displayed as bar graphs
on the screen.

II - 342
M70V Series Specifications Manual
17 Machine Support Functions

17.1.3.5 User PLC Version Display

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

The user PLC version can be displayed in the software list on the Software Configuration screen.

17.1.3.6 Multi-ladder Program Register and Execution

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

Up to 20 sequence programs can be registered. Only one execution type can be set in one program. The following five
execution types are available
- "Initial" (Initialization process) : Started only once when power is turned ON.
- "Scan" (High-speed process) : Started at the standard interrupt cycle.
- "Scan" (Main process) : Constantly started in process other than high-speed process.
- "Standby" (Standby process) : Called from the high-speed process or main process.
- "Low-speed" : This execution type is not used.

17.1.3.7 Ladder Program Writing during RUN

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○
Ladder program can be edited while PLC is running. This function is available, either by GX Developer or PLC onboard
edit.

17.1.3.8 PLC Protection

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

A keyword can be set to protect the sequence programs stored in CNC.

The following two types of conditions can be selected at the keyword registration.
- Write protection: Writing and editing are restricted.
- Read/Write/Display protection: Writing, reading, verification and list display are restricted.

For details, refer to the PLC Programming Manual.

II - 343
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

17.1.4 Built-in PLC Capacity [Steps]

17.1.4.1 Standard PLC Capacity

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ 20000 ○ 32000
L system ○ 20000 ○ 32000

17.1.5 Machine Contact Input/Output I/F

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

CAUTION

Follow the remote type machine contact input/output interface described in this manual. (Connect a diode in
parallel with the inductive load or connect a protective resistor in serial with the capacitive load, etc.)

Refer to the "Hardware Specifications" in the "General Specifications" for details.

Up to 2 channels and 3 handles can be used for the remote type machine contact input.

17.1.6 Ladder Monitor

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

This function enables the operating status of the sequence circuit to be checked on the controller's setting and display
unit.
The monitor functions include the following.
(1) Circuit monitoring
(2) Screen stop by monitor stop trigger point
(3) Entry monitoring
(4) Decimal-hexadecimal conversion present value monitoring

II - 344
M70V Series Specifications Manual
17 Machine Support Functions

17.1.7 PLC Development

17.1.7.1 On-board Development

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

On-board refers generically to the PLC related operations carried out with the CNC unit.
The Mitsubishi CNC M70V Series on-board realizes functions and operations similar to the MELSEC Series ladder
development tool (GX Developer).
This improves the user's ladder editing operations, and provides an easy-to-use onboard with powerful ladder monitoring
functions.

17.1.7.2 MELSEC Development Tool (GX Developer)

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

This function enables the data of the PLC contained inside the NC system to be developed and debugged using the GX
Developer installed in a personal computer (OS:Windows).
Many and varied functions of the GX Developer make it possible to reduce the PLC data development and debugging
time.

17.1.8 PLC Parameter

The PLC constants set with the data type and the bit selection parameters set with bit types can be set from the screen
as parameters used by the built-in PLC.

17.1.8.1 PLC Constant (150 Points)

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

17.1.11 Additional PLC Engine

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ― ○
L system ― ○

II - 345
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

17.2 Machine Construction

17.2.1 Servo OFF

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

When the servo OFF signal (per axis) is input, the corresponding axis is set in the servo OFF state.
When the moving axis is mechanically clamped, this function is designed to prevent the servomotor from being
overloaded by the clamping force.
Even if the motor shaft should move because of some reason in the servo OFF state, the movement amount will be
compensated in the next servo ON state by one of the following two methods. (You can select the compensation method
using a parameter.)
(1) The counter is corrected according to the movement amount (follow up function).
(2) The motor is moved according to the counter and compensated.

When follow up function is designated, the movement amount will be compensated even in the emergency stop state.
The axis is simultaneously set to servo OFF state and the interlock state.

Mechanical handle
Even if the servo OFF axis is moved with the mechanical handle with the application of the servo OFF function and follow
up function, the position data can be constantly read in and the machine position updated. Thus, even if the axis is
moved with the mechanical handle, the coordinate position display will not deviate.

II - 346
M70V Series Specifications Manual
17 Machine Support Functions

17.2.2 Axis Detachment

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

This function enables the control axis to be freed from control. Conversely, an axis which has been freed from control
can be returned to the control status.
This function enables the rotary table or attachments to be removed and replaced. Automatic operation is disabled until
the axis for which the axis detach command has been released completes its dog-type reference position return.

(a)

This shows the configuration of

a machine for which switching
between the C axis and turning
(b) (c) table is performed. When the
spindle motor is connected, the
C axis is placed in the detached
(d) status.
As a result, the position
feedback of the detector is
(g)
(f) ignored.

(e)

(h) (i)

(a) C-axis/turning table

(b) Rotary magnetic scale
(c) (Position feedback)
(d) (OFF with C-axis control )
(e) (Coupled with C-axis control)
(f) Spindle motor
(g) C-axis motor
(h) Spindle drive unit
(i) C-axis drive unit

POSITION The detached status > < is indicated on the right of the POSITION display on the
X 123.456 POSITION screen and at the same time the servo ready for the controller output
Z 0.000#1 signal is set to OFF. The POSITION counter retains the value applying when detach
C 345.678>< was assigned.

(Note) Axis detach can be executed even for the absolute position detection specifications axis, but when the axis is
reinstalled, the zero point must be set.

II - 347
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

17.2.3 Synchronous Control

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

The synchronous control is a control method that both primary and secondary axes are controlled with the same
movement command by designated the movement command for the primary axis also to the secondary axis. This
function is assumed to be used in the large machine tool, etc. which drives one axis with two servo motors.
The axis for the base of the synchronization is called the primary axis, and the axis according to the primary axis is called
the secondary axis.
The axis detach function cannot be added to the axes used in the synchronous control.
The control axis synchronization across part systems and the synchronous control cannot be used simultaneously. (L
system)

- The secondary axis is controlled with the movement command for the primary axis.
- One secondary axis can be set to one primary axis.
- Up to 3 sets of primary axis /secondary axis can be set in total for all the part systems.

The structure of the synchronous control is as follows.

Synchronous Synchronous Synchronous

control control mode operation method
Independent operation
method
Correction mode

Y V
(a) (b)

(a) (Primary axis)

(b) (Secondary axis)

II - 348
M70V Series Specifications Manual
17 Machine Support Functions

(1) Synchronous control mode

The following two operation methods are available in the synchronous control mode.
(a) Synchronous operation
This is a method that both primary and secondary axes are moved simultaneously with the movement
command for the primary axis.

CNC system Axis motor

X X axis control Servo control X

Machining
Program Y Y axis control Servo control Y

S
V axis control Servo control V
V
M
Z Z axis control Servo control Z

NC control section Position control section

Calculation of movement
directions, movement amount Reference position return
Calculation of feed rate Backlash compensation

There is a function that checks the correlation between the positions of the primary axis and secondary
axis at all times while the synchronous operation method is selected to stop the feed as alarm when the
error between the positions exceeds the allowable synchronization error value set in the parameter.
However, when the zero point is not established, the synchronous error is not checked.
Even during synchronous operation, pitch error compensation, backlash compensation and external
machine coordinate compensation are performed independently for each primary axis and secondary
axis.
Designation/cancellation of synchronous operation is executed at "all axes in-position".

(b) Independent operation

This is a method that either the primary or secondary axis is moved with the movement command for the
primary axis.

CNC system Axis motor

X X axis control Servo control X

Machining program Y Y axis control Servo control Y

S

V axis control Servo control V

V
M
Z Z axis control Servo control Z

NC control section Position control section

Calculation of movement Reference position return
directions, movement amount Backlash compensation
Calculation of feed rate

Even during independent operation, pitch error compensation, backlash compensation and external
machine coordinate compensation are performed independently for each primary axis and secondary
axis.
Designation/cancellation of independent operation is executed at "all axes in-position".

II - 349
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

(2) Correction mode

The synchronization is temporary canceled to adjust the balance of the primary and secondary axes during the
synchronous control mode in the machine adjustment. Each axis can be moved separately with the manual
handle feed or the arbitrary feed in manual mode. If the operation mode other than the manual handle feed
and arbitrary feed in manual mode is applied during the correction mode, the operation error will occur.

II - 350
M70V Series Specifications Manual
17 Machine Support Functions

17.2.4 Inclined Axis Control

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ― ―
L system ○ ○

Even when the control axes configuring that machine are mounted at an angle other than 90 degrees, this function
enables it to be controlled by the same program as that for an orthogonal axis.
The inclination angle is set using a parameter, and axes are controlled using the movement amounts of the axes which
are obtained through conversion and compensation using this angle.

<Example of use> When the X axis serves as the basic axis and the Y axis serves as the inclined axis
X

Yp*tan θ Xa

θ Yp
y
θ

Yp/cos θ
Ya
Y

X: Actual X axis
Y: Actual Y axis
y: Programmed Y axis
θ: Inclination angle

Yp, the Y-axis position on the programmed coordinates (on the orthogonal coordinates), is the position of Xa and Ya
which are produced by synthesis of X axis and Y axis.
Therefore, the Y-axis (inclined axis) movement amount is expressed by the following formula:
Ya=Yp/cosθ …… (1)
The X-axis (basic axis) movement amount is compensated by the inclined movement of the Y axis, and it is expressed
as follows:
Xa=Xp-Yp*tanθ … (2)
The Y-axis (inclined axis) speed is as follows:
Fa=Fp/cosθ

Xa, Ya and Fa are the actual movement amounts and speed.

Xp, Yp and Fp are the movement amounts and speed on the program
coordinates.

II - 351
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

17.2.5 Position Switch

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ 24 ○ 24
L system ○ 24 ○ 24

The position switch (PSW) function provides hypothetical dog switches in place of the dog switches provided on the
machine axes by setting the axis names and coordinate positions indicating the hypothetical dog positions as
parameters beforehand so that signals are output to the PLC interface when the machine has reached these
hypothetical dog positions. The hypothetical dog switches are known as position switches (PSW).

The coordinate position indicating the hypothetical dog positions (dog1, dog2) on the coordinate axes whose names
were set by parameters ahead of time in place of the dog switches provided on the machine axes are set using position
switches. When the machine has reached the hypothetical dog positions, a signal is output to the device supported by
the PLC interface.

Position switch area checking can be performed at high-speed by parameter setting.

In high-speed checking, the parameter determines which is used between the command type machine position or
detector feedback position for area checking by each position switch.

Example of dog1, dog2 settings and execution

dog1, dog2 settings dog1, dog2 positions Description

dog1 < dog2 dog1 dog2 Signal is output between dog1 and dog2

dog1 > dog2 dog2 dog1 Signal is output between dog2 and dog1

dog1 = dog2 dog1 = dog2 Signal is output at the dog1 (dog2) position

(a)

(b)
dog1 (c)
dog2

(a) Basic machine coordinate system zero point

(b) Hypothetical dog
(c) Position switch area (PSW width)

II - 352
M70V Series Specifications Manual
17 Machine Support Functions

17.2.7 Index Table Indexing

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

The indexing of the index table can be performed by setting the index axes.
Programming is facilitated because, in terms of the index commands, only the indexing angle need to be designated
using the address of the programmed axis serving as the index setting axis, and there is no need to designate special M
codes for clamping and unclamping the table.

The following operations are performed for the index table indexing function.
(1) Set "1" to the "index axis selection" parameter for the axis along which the indexing table is to be indexed.
(2) Designate the movement commands (absolute or incremental) for the selected axis using a program.
(3) The unclamp command signal is now output prior to the axis movement.
(4) When the axes are unclamped, the unclamp finish signal is set (ladder used for processing).
(5) After checking the unclamp finish signal, the designated axis starts moving.
(6) Upon completion of the movement, the unclamp command signal is set to OFF.
(7) Clamp the axes and set the unclamp finish signal to OFF (ladder used for processing).
(8) After checking that the unclamp finish signal is OFF, processing of the next block is initiated.
<Operation timing chart>

Programmed command G0 B90.;

Unclamp command

Unclamp finish

B-axis movement

T10 Standing by for completion 0800 T10 Standing by for completion 0800

II - 353
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

17.3 PLC Operation

17.3.1 Arbitrary Feed in Manual Mode

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

This function enables the feed directions and feed rates of the control axes to be controlled using commands from the
user PLC.
The arbitrary feed function controls the movement of the axes at the specified rates while the start signal is output from
the PLC to the NC system.
PLC operations can be performed even during manual operation or automatic operation, but they cannot be performed
when an axis for which arbitrary feed has been assigned is executing a command from the NC system (that is, while the
axis is moving).

II - 354
M70V Series Specifications Manual
17 Machine Support Functions

17.3.3 PLC Axis Control

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

Over and above the NC control axes, this function enables axes to be controlled independently by commands based on
the PLC.

PLC (a) ATC

(a) PLC axis control

Item Description
Number of control axes Max. 6 axes
PLC control axis is controlled independently from NC control axes.
Simultaneously controlled axes
A multiple number of PLC axes can be started simultaneously.
Least command increment 0.001 mm (0.0001 inch)
Command increment 0.0001 mm (0.00001 inch)
(Same as command increment for NC control axes)
0 to 1000000mm/min (0 ～ 100000 inch/min)
Feed rate
(Speed is fixed regardless of the unit system.)
Incremental commands from current position
Movement commands Absolute commands for machine coordinate system
0 to ± 99999999 (0.001mm/0.0001inch)
Operation modes Rapid traverse, cutting feed, jog feed (+) (-), reference position return feed (+) (-), handle feed

Rapid traverse, jog feed Linear acceleration/deceleration

Acceleration/deceleration
Reference position return feed

Cutting feed ｝Exponential function acceleration/deceleration

Handle feed ｝Step
Backlash compensation Available
Stroke end None
Soft limit Available
Available
For absolute commands……amount within 1 rotation
Rotary axis command
(rotation by amount remaining after division into 360)
For incremental commands……rotation by assigned amount
None
Inch/mm changeover
Set to the command that corresponds to the feedback unit.
Position detector Encoder (Absolute position can also be detected.)

II - 355
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

17.3.5 PLC Axis Indexing

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

This function is used to move the PLC axis to the position (station) registered on the table.
The destination (station) can be determined by equally dividing the valid axis stroke or by using an arbitrary coordinate
that has been stored in advance. The PLC program can also be used to specify arbitrary values of the coordinate.

(1) Command methods

Station method (for rotary axis) : One rotation (360°) of the rotary axis is equally divided to determine the stations
(positioning destinations). The maximum number of divisions is 360.

(a)
1
8
2

7
(a) Station
3

6
4
5

Figure 1. Setting 8 stations (8 divisions)

Station method (for linear axis) : A valid stroke is equally divided to determine the stations (positioning destinations). The
maximum number of divisions is 359.

(a) (b) (c) (a) Zero point

(b) Valid stroke length
(c) Station
1 2 3 4 5 (d) Station No.
(d)

Figure 2. Setting 5 stations

The zero point is station 1, and the final end of the valid
stroke is station 5.
When using a linear axis, the No. of equal divisions is
"number of stations - 1".

(2) Feed functions

Feed rate selection : Four different feed rates are set to be selected with the PLC program.

Acceleration/deceleration pattern : Four different acceleration/deceleration patterns are set to be selected with the PLC
program. The patterns are all constant inclination acceleration/deceleration, which have
options of linear or soft acceleration/deceleration.

Short-cut control : A least movement distance is automatically judged when a rotary axis is rotated.

II - 356
M70V Series Specifications Manual
17 Machine Support Functions

(3) Operation functions

The following operation modes are available. Send a command from PLC to change the operation mode.
Automatic mode : The axis is positioned at the station No. designated by the start signal. When the start
signal has turned OFF before the positioning is completed, the axis is positioned at the
nearest station position.
The arbitrary position command operation is also available: the positioning can be carried
out to any position other than a station by directly commanding the positioning coordinates
from the PLC.

Manual mode : While the start signal is ON, the axis is rotated at a constant speed in the designated
direction. When the start signal has turned OFF, the axis is positioned at the nearest
station position.

JOG mode : While the start signal is ON, the axis is rotated at a constant speed in the designated
direction.

Manual handle mode : The axis is moved by the manual PLG.

(4) Operation support function

Position switch : A signal is output to the PLC interface when the machine has reached within the specified
range.

II - 357
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

17.4 PLC Interface

17.4.1 CNC Control Signal

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

Control commands to the CNC system are assigned from the PLC. Input signals with an A/D conversion function and
skip inputs that respond at high speed can also be used.

(1) Control signals

- Control signals for operations in automatic operation mode
- Control signals for operations in manual operation mode
- Control signals for program execution
- Control signals for interrupt operations
- Control signals for servo
- Control signals for spindle
- Control signals for mode selection
- Control signals for axis selection
- Control signals for feed rates

(2) Analog voltage control [M system]

When an analog voltage is input to an external connector used to connect CNC analog inputs, the data
corresponding to the input voltage can be read out in the prescribed file register. This data can be used for
load meter displays, thermal deformation compensation, etc. (Maximum 4 points)

(3) Skip signals

When signals are input to the skip input interface, they are processed by interrupt processing. This enables
functions requiring a high response speed to be implemented. (Maximum 8 points)

For further details, refer to the PLC Interface Manual.

II - 358
M70V Series Specifications Manual
17 Machine Support Functions

17.4.2 CNC Status Signal

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

The status signals are output from the CNC system. They can be utilized by referencing them from the PLC.
These signals can also be output as analog data by setting the data from the PLC in the R register.

Status output functions

(1) Controller operation ready

When the controller power is turned ON and the controller enters the operation ready status, the "Ready"
signal is output to the machine.
Refer to the PLC Interface Manual for details of the sequences from when the controller power is supplied to
when the controller ready status is entered.

(2) Servo operation ready

When the controller power is turned ON and the servo system enters the operation ready status, the "Servo
ready" signal is output to the machine.
Refer to the PLC Interface Manual for details of the sequences from when the power is supplied to when the
"Servo ready" signal is turned ON.

(3) In automatic operation

Generally, if the "cycle start" switch is turned ON in the automatic operation mode (memory, MDI), this signal is
output until the reset state or emergency stop state is entered by the M02, M30 execution or the reset & rewind
input to the controller using the reset button.

(4) In automatic start

The signal that denotes that the controller is operating in the automatic mode is output from the time when the
cycle start button is pressed in the memory or MDI mode and the automatic start status has been entered until
the time when the automatic operation is terminated in the automatic operation pause status entered by the
"feed hold" function, block completion stop entered by the block stop function or resetting.

(5) In automatic pause

An automatic operation pause occurs and this signal is output during automatic operation from when the
automatic pause switch is pressed ON until the automatic start switch is pressed ON, or during automatic
operation when the mode select switch is changed from the automatic mode to the manual mode.

(6) In rapid traverse

The "In rapid traverse" signal is output when the command now being executed is moving an axis by rapid
traverse during automatic operation.

(7) In cutting feed

The "In cutting feed" signal is output when the command now being executed is moving an axis by cutting feed
during automatic operation.

(8) In tapping
The "In tapping" signal is output when the command now being executed is in a tapping modal which means
that one of the statuses below is entered during automatic operation.
(a) G84, G88 (fixed cycle: tapping cycle)
(b) G84.1, G88.1 (fixed cycle: reverse tapping cycle)
(c) G63 (tapping mode)

II - 359
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

(9) In thread cutting

The "In thread cutting" signal is output when the command now being executed is moving an axis by thread
cutting feed during automatic operation.

(10) In rewinding
The "In rewinding" signal is output when the reset & rewind signal is input by M02/M30, etc., during memory
operation and the program currently being executed is being indexed.
The rewinding time is short, so there may be cases when it cannot be confirmed with the sequence program
(ladder).

(11) Axis selection output

The "Axis selection output" signal for each axis is output to the machine during machine axis movement.
(a) Automatic mode
The signal is output in the movement command of each axis. It is output until the machine stops during
stop based on feed hold or block stop.
(b) Manual mode (including incremental feed)
The signal is output while the axis is moving from the time when the jog feed signal is turned ON until the
time when it is turned OFF and the machine feed stops.
(c) Handle feed mode
The signal is output at all times when the axis selection input is on.

(12) Axis movement direction

This output signal denotes the direction of the axis now moving, and for each axis a "+" (plus) signal and a "-"
(minus) signal are output respectively.

(13) Alarm
This signal indicates the various alarm statuses that arise during controller operation. It is divided into the
following types and output.
(a) System errors
(b) Servo alarms
(c) Program errors
(d) Operation errors

(14) In resetting
The "Reset" signal is output during the reset process when the reset & rewind command is input to the
controller with the "reset" button on the setting and display unit is pressed or when the "Reset" signal is input
from the machine operation panel, etc.
This signal will also be output when the controller READY status is OFF, when the Emergency stop signal is
input or when a servo alarm is occurring, etc.

(15) Movement command finish

In the memory or MDI automatic operation, the "Movement command finish" signal is output when the
command block in the machining program features a movement command and when that block command has
been completed.
When the movement command and M, S, T or B command have been assigned in the same block, then the
movement command signal can be used as a sync signal for either executing the processing of the M, S, T or
B command at the same time as the command or executing it upon completion of the movement command.

II - 360
M70V Series Specifications Manual
17 Machine Support Functions

17.4.3 PLC Window

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○
This function uses the "read window" or "write window" assigned to the R register's user area to read and write the CNC
operation status, axis information, parameters and tool data, etc.

The area used for the "read window" and "write window" has 1500 points for the backup area and 100 points for the non-
backup area.
Up to three window areas can be specified simultaneously for both "read window" area and "write window" area. 16 R
registers are used for one read window or write window.
The read window is further divided into the "read control window" and "read data window". The write window is also
divided into the "write control window" and "write data window".
Up to four data items can be successively read or written from the data designated in one read window or write window.

(a)
(g)
(h)
(c) (2)
(i) (1)
(d) (2)
NC (3) PLC
(e)
(3) (j)
(f)

(k)
(b) (g)
(l)
(c) (5)
(m) (4)
(d) (5) NC (6) PLC
(e)
(n)
(f) (5)

(a) <Reading>
(b) <Writing>
(c) Operation status
(d) Axis information
(e) Parameters
(f) Tool data
(g) R register (user area)
(h) Read window
(i) Read control window
(j) Read data window
(k) Designate arbitrary position with parameter (R register)
(l) Write window
(m) Write control window
(n) Write data window

II - 361
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

(1) PLC turns control signal ON.

(2) NC receives control signal, and reads designated data in control window.
(3) Results of NC read are set in read control window and read data window.
(4) PLC turns control signal ON.
(5) NC receives control signal, and writes contents of write data window corresponding to designated data in control
window.
(6) Results of NC write are set in write control window.

17.4.4 External Search

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

The program which is automatically operated can be searched from PLC. The program No., sequence No. and block No.
can be assigned. Also the content currently searched can be read.

II - 362
M70V Series Specifications Manual
17 Machine Support Functions

17.5 Machine Contact I/O

17.5.1 Additional DI/DO (DI: 32/DO: 32)

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system □ □
L system □ □

17.5.2 Additional DI/DO (DI: 64/DO: 64)

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system □ □
L system □ □

17.5.3 Remote IO 32/32

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system □ □
L system □ □

17.5.4 Remote IO 64/48

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system □ □
L system □ □

II - 363
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

17.5.5 MITSUBISHI CNC Machine Operation Panel

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system △ △
L system △ △

MITSUBISHI CNC machine operation panel can change its keyboard layout according to the specifications of the
machine.
Also, a sample of the PLC program supporting the basic key board layout is available. By adding an interface to the
machine, a PLC program which fits the machine can easily be created.
Wirings have been reduced as a result of directly connecting with the NC via the remote I/O link communication.

HN232 Card
(Placed on the back of the panel A)
Only when relaying the power G071
DCOUT
F070
DC24V DCIN RIOIN DC24V
FCUA-R211/SH41
When directly providing
SUBP the power
FG DCIN
KEYSW EXT F070

G054 G460

RIO3
CG71
CG71
Control Unit
G011

Machine operation panel A Operation panel I/O Unit

EMG
(FCU7-KB921)

F120

Machine operation panel B

(FCU7-KB926)

II - 364
M70V Series Specifications Manual
17 Machine Support Functions

17.6 External PLC Link

17.6.3 CC-Link (Master/Local)

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system □ (*7) □ (*7)
L system □ (*7) □ (*7)

(*7) When HN746 is installed.

NC unit can be directly connected to the network to serve as the master/local station of the MELSEC CC-Link.
CC-Link unit is required for this connection.
With this function, the GOT connection and the transient instruction with MELSEC A series cannot be used.
(1) Outline of CC-Link
- Distributing and installing each unit to the equipments such as conveyor line and mechanical device can
simplify the wiring of the whole system.
- The ON/OFF data and numerical data such as input/output treated by each unit can be communicated
easily and at high speed.
- The simple distribution system can be established by connecting several sequencer CPUs or NCs.
- Connecting the device equipments made by the partner manufacturer can flexibly support various
systems.

II - 365
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

(2) Outline drawing

(a) (d)

(b) (c)

(e)

(f)
(i)
CC-Link

(e)
(h) (g)

(b) (c)

(a) Master station (NC unit)

(b) or
(c) Sequencer CPU
(d) Master station
(e) Remote I/O station
(f) Remote device station
(g) Local station
(h) Local station (NC unit)
(i) Partner manufacturer product

This station controls the remote station and local station.

Master station
One master station is required for one system.
This station contains the CPU and can communicate with the master and
Local station
the other local stations.
Remote I/O station Remote station that handles only bit information.
Remote device station Remote station that handles bit information and word information.
Intelligent device station This station allows the transient transmission. (Including local station)

II - 366
M70V Series Specifications Manual
17 Machine Support Functions

(3) Performance specifications

The M70V Series is compliant with CC-Link Ver.2.00.
<CC-Link Ver.2.00 specification>

Item CC-Link master/local unit

Remote input/output (RX,RY) 8192 points each
Remote register (RWw)
Max. number of link points per 2048 points
(Master St. → Remote/Local St.)
one system (Note 1)
Remote register (RWr)
2048 points
(Remote/Local St. → Master St.)
Extended cyclic setting 1 time setting 2 times setting 4 times setting 8 times setting
128 points
Remote input/output (RX,RY) 32 points each 32 points each 64 points each
each
1 station Remote register (RWw)
4 words 8 words 16 words 32 words
occupied (Master St. → Remote/Local St.)
Remote register (RWr)
4 words 8 words 16 words 32 words
(Remote/Local St. → Master St.)
192 points 384 points
Remote input/output (RX,RY) 64 points each 96 points each
each each
2 stations Remote register (RWw)
8 words 16 words 32 words 64 words
occupied (Master St. → Remote/Local St.)
Number of link Remote register (RWr)
8 words 16 words 32 words 64 words
points per one (Remote/Local St. → Master St.)
remote/local 160 points 320 points 640 points
station Remote input/output (RX,RY) 96 points each
each each each
3 stations Remote register (RWw)
12 words 24 words 48 words 96 words
occupied (Master St. → Remote/Local St.)
Remote register (RWr)
12 words 24 words 48 words 96 words
(Remote/Local St. → Master St.)
128 points 224 points 448 points 896 points
Remote input/output (RX,RY)
each each each each
4 stations Remote register (RWw)
16 words 32 words 64 words 128 words
occupied (Master St. → Remote/Local St.)
Remote register (RWr)
16 words 32 words 64 words 128 words
(Remote/Local St. → Master St.)
Number of occupied stations
Station 1 to station 4 (The station No. can be switched with parameters.)
(Number of local stations)
156kbps / 625kbps / 2.5Mbps / 5Mbps / 10Mbps can be selected.
Baud rates
(Baud rate can be selected with parameters.)
Communication method Polling method
Synchronization method Flame synchronization method
Encode method NRZI method
Transmission path method Bus (EIA RS485 compliant)
Transmission format HDLC compliant
Illegal control method CRC(X16 ＋ X12 ＋ X5 ＋ 1)

II - 367
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

Item CC-Link master/local unit

64 units
Note that the following two conditions must be satisfied.
Condition 1:
- (a+a2+a4+a8)+(b+b2+b4+b8) × 2+(c+c2+c4+c8) × 3+(d+d2+d4+d8) × 4 ≦ 64
- (a × 32+a2 × 32+a4 × 64+a8 × 128)+(b × 64+b2 × 96+b4 × 192+b8 × 384)+(c × 96+c2 ×
160+c4 × 320+c8 × 640)+(d × 128+d2 × 224+d4 × 448+d8 × 896) ≦ 8192
- (a × 4+a2 × 8+a4 × 16+a8 × 32)+(b × 8+b2 × 16+b4 × 32+b8 × 64)+(c × 12+c2 × 24+c4 ×
48+c8 × 96)+(d × 16+d2 × 32+d4 × 64+d8 × 128) ≦ 2048
a : Number of units when 1 station is occupied in 1 time extended cyclic setting
b : Number of units when 2 stations are occupied in 1 time extended cyclic setting
c : Number of units when 3 stations are occupied in 1 time extended cyclic setting
d : Number of units when 4 stations are occupied in 1 time extended cyclic setting
a2: Number of units when 1 station is occupied in 2 times extended cyclic setting
b2: Number of units when 2 stations are occupied in 2 times extended cyclic setting
Max. number of connection
c2: Number of units when 3 stations are occupied in 2 times extended cyclic setting
units
d2: Number of units when 4 stations are occupied in 2 times extended cyclic setting
a4: Number of units when 1 station is occupied in 4 times extended cyclic setting
b4: Number of units when 2 stations are occupied in 4 times extended cyclic setting
c4: Number of units when 3 stations are occupied in 4 times extended cyclic setting
d4: Number of units when 4 stations are occupied in 4 times extended cyclic setting
a8: Number of units when 1 station is occupied in 8 times extended cyclic setting
b8: Number of units when 2 stations are occupied in 8 times extended cyclic setting
c8: Number of units when 3 stations are occupied in 8 times extended cyclic setting
d8: Number of units when 4 stations are occupied in 8 times extended cyclic setting
Condition 2:
- {(16 × A)+(54 × B)+(88 × C)} ≦ 2304
- A:Number of remote I/O stations ≦ 64 units
- B:Number of remote device stations ≦ 42 units
- C:Number of local stations, standby master stations and intelligent device stations ≦ 26 units
Remote station No. 1 to 64
CC-Link Ver.1.10 compliant cable (When a 110Ω of terminating resistance is used.) (Note 2)
Baud rates Cable length between stations Max. total cable length
156kbps 1200m
Max. total cable length and each
625kbps 900m
cable length between stations
2.5Mbps 20cm or more 400m
5Mbps 160m
10Mbps 100m
Connection cable CC-Link Ver.1.10 compliant cable (3-core twisted pair cable with shield) (Note 3)
- Automatic link refresh function
RAS function (Note 4) - Sub-station isolation function
- Link special relay/error detection by register

(Note 1) If the points which can be reserved as the device for the CC-Link in the NC side does not reach 8192 points,
the number of points which can be reserved in the NC side is the max. number of link points per one system.
This applies for the remote register (RWw, RWr), as well.
(Note 2) When CC-Link Ver.1.00 compliant cables are mixed, the cable length between stations and the maximum total
length of the cable should follow the specifications for CC-Link Ver.1.00.
(Note 3) This can be used with the cables made by different manufacturers as long as they are Ver.1.10 compliant
cables.
(Note 4) "RAS" is short for "Reliability", "Availability" and "Serviceability".

II - 368
M70V Series Specifications Manual
17 Machine Support Functions

(4) Usable functions

Of all the CC-Link functions, the following functions can be used with the NC.
( ○ : Available ×: Not available － : Not relevant)

MELSEC NC unit
Function item
Master station Local station Master station Local station
Ver.1.00 ○ ○ ○ ○
Method
Ver.2.00 ○ ○ ○ ○
Communication between master station and remote I/O
station ○ － ○ －

Communication between master station and remote

device station ○ － ○ －

Communication between master station and local station ○ ○ ○ ○

Mixed system communication ○ ○ ○ ○
Reserved station function ○ － ○ －
Error cancel station function ○ － ○ －
Setting of data link status when trouble occurs in CPU of
master station ○ ○ ○ ○
Master
function Registration of parameters in E2PROM ○ － ○ (Note 2) －
Setting of input data status from data link trouble station ○ ○ ○ ○
Unit resetting by sequence program ○ ○ ○ ○
Data link stop/restart ○ ○ ○ ○
Parameter registration function ○ ○ ○ (Note 2) ○ (Note 2)
Automatic refresh function ○ ○ ○ ○
Synchronous
mode ○ － ○ －
Scan synchronization function
Asynchronous
mode ○ ○ ○ ○

16-point display
LED diagnosis status 16-point display
(A1SJ61QBT11)
Setting & Station number setting
display
Baud rate setting Parameters (Note 2)
function Unit front panel switches
Mode setting switch
Condition setting H/W switches
Automatic link refresh function ○ ○ ○ ○
Sub-station isolation function ○ － ○ －
Data link status check (SB/SW) ○ ○ ○ ○
RAS Off-line test ○ ○ ○ ○
function On-line test ○ ○ ○ ○
Monitor diagnosis ○ ○ × ×
Standby master function (Note 3) ○ － ○ －
Temporary error cancel station designation function ○ － ○ －
Dedicate READ instruction / SREAD instruction (Note 1) ○ ○ ○ ○
d WRITE instruction / SWRITE instruction (Note 1) ○ ○ ○ ○
instructio
n RIRD instruction / RIWT instruction (Note 1) ○ ○ × ×

(Note 1) The transient instruction cannot be used.

(Note 2) The parameter for the CC-Link is set with the GX Developer.
(Note 3) With this function, when an error occurs in the master station, switch to the standby master station so that data
link can be continued. (The NC unit cannot be used as the standby master station.)

II - 369
(5) Communication data flow

II - 370
The flow of data communicated by the CC-Link's link scan is as follows.
(The master station and local station of MELSEC CPU can be also mixed.)
MITSUBISHI CNC

(c) (f) (j) (c)

(a) (g) (h) (i) (a)

II Functional Specifications

(b) RX (1) RY (1) (1) (1) RY (d)

RX RX

…
…
…

…
…

(d) RY (2) RX (2) RY (2) RY (2) RX (b)

…
…
…
…

(e) RWw (e)

RWr (3) (3) RWr (3) (3) RWw

…
…
…

…
…
RWr RWw (4) (4)
(e) RWw (4) (4) RWr (e)
…

…
…
…

…
(l)

(k) (m)
(n)
M70V Series Specifications Manual
17 Machine Support Functions

(a) Devices
(b) X device, etc.
(c) Built-in PLC
(d) Y device, etc.
(e) R register, etc.
(f) NC (Master station)
(g) Local station
(h) Remote device station
(i) Remote I/O station
(j) NC (Local station)
(k) Transmission data
(l) <Flow of data>
(m) Risk scan
(n) Automatic refresh (When master station/local station is NC.)

(1) By executing a link scan, data in the remote I/O station and remote device station's remote input (RX) and in
the local station's remote output (RY) is transmitted to the master station's remote input (RX) and the local
station's remote output (RY).
(2) By executing a link scan, data in the master station's remote output (RY) is transmitted to the remote I/O
station and remote device station's remote output (RY) and the local station's remote input (RX).
(3) By executing a link scan, data in the remote device station's remote register (RWr) and the local station's
remote register (RWw) is transmitted to the master station's remote register (RWr) and the local station's
remote register (RWw).
(4) By executing a link scan, data in the master station's remote register (RWw) is transmitted to the remote
device station's remote register (RWw) and the local station's remote register (RWr).

II - 371
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

17.7 Installing S/W for Machine Tools

17.7.1 Customization (NC Designer)

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

Custom release is an optional function and allows the user-original window to display as an HMI screen or another
application.
(Note) Please contact us to purchase this tool.
Custom release includes, mainly, F0 release and menu release:
F0 release : Custom release screen (Note 1) can be assigned to function keys (F0, SEP, window display, window
selection).
When a function key is pressed, the assigned custom release screen will be displayed.
"NC Designer interpreter method", "NCDesigner compilation method" and "Executing file registration method" can be
used for registration.
Menu release : Custom release window (Note 2) can be registered in the main menu of the monitor screen, setup screen
and edit screen.
Main menu contents of the monitor, setup and edit screen can be rearranged.
When the main menu in which custom release window is registered is pressed, the custom release window will be
displayed.
"NC Designer interpreter method", "NC Designer compilation method" and "Executing file registration method" can be
used for registration.
Depending on the conditions, display/non-display of the custom menu can be changed.
(Note 1) An HMI screen originally created with NC Designer by the user or an execution file prepared by the user.
(Note 2) An HMI window originally created with NC Designer by the user or an execution file prepared by the user.

(1) NC Designer Inte rpreter method

Automatic
generation of
interpretation
data Macro
Project Data
file
(*GRP)
Automatic
generation of
source code (2) NC Designer compilation method

Original
Source
source code
code Compilation link
(C++)
(C++)

(3) Executing file registration method

Commercially Original
available application Source
development tool code source code Compilation link
(VB, VC, etc.)

Commercially
available
application

II - 372
M70V Series Specifications Manual
17 Machine Support Functions

17.7.1.1 Customization Data Storage Capacity [MByte]

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
3 3
M system
△ 6(*1) △ 6(*1)
3 3
L system
△ 6(*1) △ 6(*1)

(*1) When HN754 is installed.

17.7.1.2 Customization Workpiece Data Size [MByte]

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system 3 3
L system 3 3

17.7.3 EZSocket I/F

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

(Note) Please contact us to purchase this tool.

This middleware makes it easy to develop applications having a Windows interface.
The various functions of the NC unit can be used from a Windows application using VC++ language, VB language and
VBA macro language.

II - 373
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

17.7.4 APLC Release

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

(Note) Please contact us to purchase this tool.

APLC (Advanced Programmable Logic Controller) release is a function that allows the user-generated C language
module to be called from NC.
Control operations that are difficult to express in ladder language can be created with C language.
PLC ladder can easily be customized by converting a part of PLC ladder that has grown complex and bulky into C
language module.

There are three methods where APLC is executed. It is possible to use the three in combination.

- Type 1 : By registering the start address of the module to be processed asynchronously with PLC, C language module
will be executed in a constant frequency. The processing frequency is 7.1 (ms).

- Type 2 : By registering the start address of the module to be processed synchronously with PLC, C language module
will be started synchronizing with PLC. Note that C language will not be called if PLC is incorrect, even if the process has
been registered.
- Type 3: By registering the start address of the module to be called from the sequence program and processed, C
language module will be started from the sequence program upon S.CALL instruction.

II - 374
M70V Series Specifications Manual
17 Machine Support Functions

[Hardware configuration]
This function will be activated by installing C language module into a compact flash or built-in F-ROM.
Compact flash interface is located on the control unit. Up to 120KB data can be stored in built-in F-ROM. When
C language module is installed in compact flash, C language inside the compact flash is executed. (The
module inside the built-in F-ROM is not executed.)

There is a list of compact flash cards which are tested by us in "5 Hardware Specifications" of "Precautions for
Use of Commercially Available CF Cards".

(a)

(a) Compact flash interface

[Software configuration]
The names of directory, file and initialize function, where C language modules are stored, are fixed.

(Note) Incorrect hardware or software configuration disables operations regardless of option function.

17.7.5 Custom API Library

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

(Note) Please contact us to purchase this tool.

Reading/writing of each information within NC unit is possible by using custom API library.

II - 375
MITSUBISHI CNC
II Functional Specifications

17.8 Others

17.8.1 System Lock

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

System lock is a function that allows machine tool builders to set the expiration date for use of their machines.
If the cancel code is not entered by the specified deadline, the system forcibly turns OFF the Servo ready completion
signal to place the machine in an inoperable status.
(Note) We do not compensate for any detriment that may be caused when the lock is cancelled illegally.

17.8.2 CNC Remote Operation Tool

17.8.2.1 NC Monitor
M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

(Note) Please contact us to purchase this tool.

NC Monitor is a PC compatible software tool that monitors information in NC unit connected with the Ethernet.

17.8.2.2 NC Explorer
M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

(Note) This tool is free of charge. Please contact us.

NC Explorer is a software tool to operate the machining data files of each NC unit connected with a host personal
computer by Ethernet connection from the Explorer on the host personal computer.

17.8.3 Automatic Operation Lock

M70V TypeB M70V TypeA
M system ○ ○
L system ○ ○

Automatic operation lock function prevents the falsification of APLC(C language module: herein after called APLC) by a
third party.
Automatic operation will be prohibited when illegal APLC is installed by authenticating APLC with the password for APLC
authentication which is registered to NC unit beforehand using this function.
Refer to "17.7.4 APLC Release" for details on the APLC.

II - 376
Revision History

Date of
Manual No. Revision details
revision
Mar. 2010 IB(NA)1500954-A First edition created. (MITSUBISHI CNC M70V Series S/W version G0)
Revisions were made to support MITSUBISHI M70V S/W version H0.
The following chapters were added.
- 3.3 Curve Interpolation
- 3.3.3 Spline Interpolation (1st Part System Only)
- 7.2.6 USB Memory I/F [Up to 2GByte]
- 11.2.4.2 3D Solid Program Check
- 11.2.4.3 Graphic Check Rotary Axis Drawing
- 11.2.5.2 Graphic Trace Rotary Axis Drawing
Nov. 2011 IB(NA)1500954-B
- 12.1.2.4.6 8000 Sets
- 12.1.2.4.12 (7900+100 x Number of Part Systems) Sets
- 12.3.6 High-accuracy Spline Interpolation1 (G61.2)(1st Part System Only)
- 12.3.10 Machining Condition Selection I (1st Part System Only)
- 17.7.1.1 Customization Data Storage Capacity [MByte]
- 17.7.1.2 Customization Workpiece Data Size [MByte]
- 17.8.3 Automatic Operation Lock
Other contents were added/revised/deleted according to specification.
Revisions were made to support M70V S/W version J1.
"General Specifications"
MDS-D2/DH2, MDS-DJ, MDS-DM2 are supported.
"Functional Specifications"
The following chapters were added.
- 6.2.20　MTB Selectable Menu Configuration
- 15.4.5 Servo Tuning Support Tool
- 15.4.5.1 MS Configurator (Need to purchase separate S/W)
- 15.4.5.2 NC Analyzer (Need to purchase separate S/W)
- 15.4.12 NC Maintainer (Need to purchase separate S/W)
- 15.4.13 Parameter Setup Tool
- 15.4.13.1 NC Configurator2 (Need to purchase separate S/W)
The following chapters were revised.
Jun.2013 IB(NA)1500954-C - 4.4.2 Rapid Traverse Constant Inclination Acceleration/Deceleration
- 4.5.3.2 Pecking Tapping Cycle
- 4.5.3.3 Deep-hole Tapping Cycle
- 11.1.1 Optional Block Skip
- 11.4.3 Manual Absolute Switch
- 12.1.6.1 Corner Chamfering/Corner R
- 12.1.9.1 Parameter Input by Program
- 14.1.3 Manual Tool Length 1
- 15.3.13 Safety Observation
- 16.1 Servo/Spindle
- 17.2.5 Position Switch
The following chapter was deleted.
- 15.4.4 MELDASNET
Other contents were added/revised/deleted according to specification.
Revisions were made to support M70V S/V version K0.
The following chapters were added.
"II Functional Specifications"
-8.3.6 Miscellaneous function command high-speed output
-12.1.8.3.1 Mixed control (cross axis control) I
-12.1.8.3.2 Mixed control (cross axis control) Ⅱ
-12.1.8.5.1 Control axis synchronization across part systems I
Dec. 2013 IB(NA)1500954-D -12.1.8.5.2 Control axis synchronization across part systems Ⅱ
-12.3.13 High-accuracy control in 2 part systems
The following chapters were revised.
-4.4.1 Automatic acceleration/deceleration after interpolation
-9.3.2.1 Tool shape/wear offset amount
-12.1.1.1 Subprogram control
-12.1.2.1 User macro
-12.1.2.3 Macro interruption
(Continued to next page)
Date of
Manual No. Revision details
revision
(Continued from last page)
-12.1.3.5 Compound type fixed cycle for turning machining
-12.1.6.1 Corner chamfering/Corner R
-12.1.9.2 Compensation data input by program
-12.3.2 High-speed Machining Mode II (G05 P2) Max.[kBPM]
-12.3.3 High-speed High-accuracy Control 1 (G05.1Q1) Max.[kBPM]
-12.3.4 High-speed High-accuracy Control 2 (G5P10000) Max.[kBPM]
-12.3.5 High-accuracy Control 1 (G61.1/G08)
-12.3.6 High-accuracy Spline Interpolation1 (G61.2)
-12.3.8.1 SSS control
-12.3.10 Machining condition selection I
-14.2.1.1 Tool life management I
-15.3.2.1 Stored stroke limit I/II
-15.4.1 Operation history
Other contents were added/revised/deleted according to specification.
Dec. 2013 IB(NA)1500954-D1 Mistakes were corrected.
　
　

　
Global Service Network

AMERICA EUROPE

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION INC. (AMERICA FA CENTER) MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V.
Central Region Service Center GOTHAER STRASSE 10, 40880 RATINGEN, GERMANY
500 CORPORATE WOODS PARKWAY, VERNON HILLS, ILLINOIS 60061, U.S.A. TEL: +49-2102-486-0 / FAX: +49-2102-486-5910
TEL: +1-847-478-2500 / FAX: +1-847-478-2650
Germany Service Center
Michigan Service Satellite KURZE STRASSE. 40, 70794 FILDERSTADT-BONLANDEN, GERMANY
ALLEGAN, MICHIGAN 49010, U.S.A. TEL: + 49-711-770598-123 / FAX: +49-711-770598-141
TEL: +1-847-478-2500 / FAX: +1-847-478-2650
France Service Center DEPARTEMENT CONTROLE NUMERIQUE
Ohio Service Satellite 25, BOULEVARD DES BOUVETS, 92741 NANTERRE CEDEX FRANCE
LIMA, OHIO 45801, U.S.A. TEL: +33-1-41-02-83-13 / FAX: +33-1-49-01-07-25
TEL: +1-847-478-2500 / FAX: +1-847-478-2650
CINCINATTI, OHIO 45201, U.S.A. France (Lyon) Service Satellite DEPARTEMENT CONTROLE NUMERIQUE
TEL: +1-847-478-2500 / FAX: +1-847-478-2650 120, ALLEE JACQUES MONOD 69800 SAINT PRIEST FRANCE
TEL: +33-1-41-02-83-13 / FAX: +33-1-49-01-07-25
Minnesota Service Satellite
ROGERS, MINNESOTA 55374, U.S.A. Italy Service Center
TEL: +1-847-478-2500 / FAX: +1-847-478-2650 VIALE COLLEONI, 7 - CENTRO DIREZIONALE COLLEONI PALAZZO SIRIO INGRESSO 1
20864 AGRATE BRIANZA (MB), ITALY
West Region Service Center TEL: +39-039-6053-342 / FAX: +39-039-6053-206
16900 VALLEY VIEW AVE., LAMIRADA, CALIFORNIA 90638, U.S.A.
TEL: +1-714-699-2625 / FAX: +1-847-478-2650 Italy (Padova) Service Satellite
VIA G. SAVELLI, 24 - 35129 PADOVA, ITALY
Northern CA Satellite TEL: +39-039-6053-342 / FAX: +39-039-6053-206
SARATOGA, CALIFORNIA 95070, U.S.A.
TEL: +1-714-699-2625 / FAX: +1-847-478-2650 U.K. Branch
TRAVELLERS LANE, HATFIELD, HERTFORDSHIRE, AL10 8XB, U.K.
Pennsylvania Service Satellite TEL: +49-2102-486-0 / FAX: +49-2102-486-5910
PITTSBURG, PENNSYLVANIA 15644, U.S.A.
TEL: +1-732-560-4500 / FAX: +1-732-560-4531 Spain Service Center
CTRA. DE RUBI, 76-80-APDO. 420
Connecticut Service Satellite 08173 SAINT CUGAT DEL VALLES, BARCELONA SPAIN
TORRINGTON, CONNECTICUT 06790, U.S.A. TEL: +34-935-65-2236 / FAX: +34-935-89-1579
TEL: +1-732-560-4500 / FAX: +1-732-560-4531
Poland Service Center
South Region Service Center UL.KRAKOWSKA 50, 32-083 BALICE, POLAND
1845 SATTELITE BOULEVARD STE. 450, DULUTH, GEORGIA 30097, U.S.A. TEL: +48-12-630-4700 / FAX: +48-12-630-4701
TEL +1-678-258-4529 / FAX +1-678-258-4519
Mitsubishi Electric Turkey A.Ş Ümraniye Şubesi
Texas Service Satellites Turkey Service Center
GRAPEVINE, TEXAS 76051, U.S.A. ŞERIFALI MAH. NUTUK SOK. NO.5 34775
TEL: +1-678-258-4529 / FAX: +1-678-258-4519 ÜMRANIYE, ISTANBUL, TURKEY
HOUSTON, TEXAS 77001, U.S.A. TEL: +90-216-526-3990 / FAX: +90-216-526-3995
TEL: +1-678-258-4529 / FAX: +1-678-258-4519
Czech Republic Service Center
Tennessee Service Satellite KAFKOVA 1853/3, 702 00 OSTRAVA 2, CZECH REPUBLIC
Nashville, Tennessee, 37201, U.S.A. TEL: +420-59-5691-185 / FAX: +420-59-5691-199
TEL: +1-678-258-4529 / FAX: +1-678-258-4519
Russia Service Center
Florida Service Satellite 213, B.NOVODMITROVSKAYA STR., 14/2, 127015 MOSCOW, RUSSIA
WEST MELBOURNE, FLORIDA 32904, U.S.A. TEL: +7-495-748-0191 / FAX: +7-495-748-0192
TEL: +1-678-258-4529 / FAX: +1-678-258-4519
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. (SCANDINAVIA)
Canada Region Service Center Sweden Service Center
4299 14TH AVENUE MARKHAM, ONTARIO L3R OJ2, CANADA HAMMARBACKEN 14 191 49 SOLLENTUNA, SWEDEN
TEL: +1-905-475-7728 / FAX: +1-905-475-7935 TEL: +46-8-6251000 / FAX: +46-8-966877

Canada Service Satellite Bulgaria Service Center

EDMONTON, ALBERTA T5A 0A1, CANADA 4 A.LYAPCHEV BOUL., POB 21, BG-1756 SOFIA, BULGARIA
TEL: +1-905-475-7728 FAX: +1-905-475-7935 TEL: +359-2-8176009 / FAX: +359-2-9744061

Mexico Region Service Center Ukraine (Kharkov) Service Center

MARIANO ESCOBEDO 69 TLALNEPANTLA, 54030 EDO. DE MEXICO APTEKARSKIY LANE 9-A, OFFICE 3, 61001 KHARKOV, UKRAINE
TEL: +52-55-3067-7500 / FAX: +52-55-9171-7649 TEL: +380-57-732-7774 / FAX: +380-57-731-8721

Monterrey Service Satellite Ukraine (Kiev) Service Center

MONTERREY, N.L., 64720, MEXICO 4-B, M. RASKOVOYI STR., 02660 KIEV, UKRAINE
TEL: +52-81-8365-4171 TEL: +380-44-494-3355 / FAX: +380-44-494-3366

Belarus Service Center

BRAZIL OFFICE 9, NEZAVISIMOSTI PR.177, 220125 MINSK, BELARUS
TEL: +375-17-393-1177 / FAX: +375-17-393-0081
MELCO CNC do Brasil Comércio e Serviços S.A
Brazil Region Service Center South Africa Service Center
ACESSO JOSE SARTORELLI, KM 2.1 CEP 18550-000, BOITUVA-SP, BRAZIL 5 ALBATROSS STREET, RHODESFIELD, KEMPTON PARK 1619, GAUTENG, SOUTH AFRICA
TEL: +55-15-3363-9900 / FAX: +55-15-3363-9911 TEL: +27-11-394-8512 / FAX: +27-11-394-8513
ASEAN CHINA

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ASIA PTE. LTD. (ASEAN FA CENTER) MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION (CHINA) LTD. (CHINA FA CENTER)
Singapore Service Center China (Shanghai) Service Center
307 ALEXANDRA ROAD #05-01/02 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC BUILDING SINGAPORE 159943 1-3,5-10,18-23/F, NO.1386 HONG QIAO ROAD, CHANG NING QU,
TEL: +65-6473-2308 / FAX: +65-6476-7439 SHANGHAI 200336, CHINA
TEL: +86-21-2322-3030 / FAX: +86-21-2308-3000
Malaysia (KL) Service Center China (Ningbo) Service Dealer
60, JALAN USJ 10 /1B 47620 UEP SUBANG JAYA SELANGOR DARUL EHSAN, MALAYSIA China (Wuxi) Service Dealer
TEL: +60-3-5631-7605 / FAX: +60-3-5631-7636 China (Jinan) Service Dealer
China (Hangzhou) Service Dealer
Malaysia (Johor Baru) Service Center China (Wuhan) Service Satellite
17 & 17A, JALAN IMPIAN EMAS 5/5, TAMAN IMPIAN EMAS, 81300 SKUDAI, JOHOR MALAYSIA.
TEL: +60-7-557-8218 / FAX: +60-7-557-3404 China (Beijing) Service Center
9/F, OFFICE TOWER 1, HENDERSON CENTER, 18 JIANGUOMENNEI DAJIE,
Philippines Service Center DONGCHENG DISTRICT, BEIJING 100005, CHINA
UNIT NO.411, ALABAMG CORPORATE CENTER KM 25. WEST SERVICE ROAD TEL: +86-10-6518-8830 / FAX: +86-10-6518-8030
SOUTH SUPERHIGHWAY, ALABAMG MUNTINLUPA METRO MANILA, PHILIPPINES 1771 China (Beijing) Service Dealer
TEL: +63-2-807-2416 / FAX: +63-2-807-2417
China (Tianjin) Service Center
UNIT 2003, TIANJIN CITY TOWER, NO 35 YOUYI ROAD, HEXI DISTRICT,
VIETNAM TIANJIN 300061, CHINA
TEL: +86-22-2813-1015 / FAX: +86-22-2813-1017
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC VIETNAM CO.,LTD China (Shenyang) Service Satellite
Vietnam (Ho Chi Minh) Service Center China (Changchun) Service Satellite
UNIT 01-04, 10TH FLOOR, VINCOM CENTER 72 LE THANH TON STREET, DISTRICT 1,
HO CHI MINH CITY, VIETNAM China (Chengdu) Service Center
TEL: +84-8-3910 5945 / FAX: +84-8-3910 5946 ROOM 407-408, OFFICE TOWER AT SHANGRI-LA CENTER, NO. 9 BINJIANG DONG ROAD,
JINJIANG DISTRICT, CHENGDU, SICHUAN 610021, CHINA
Vietnam (Hanoi) Service Satellite TEL: +86-28-8446-8030 / FAX: +86-28-8446-8630
SUITE 9-05, 9TH FLOOR, HANOI CENTRAL OFFICE BUILDING, 44B LY THUONG KIET STREET,
HOAN KIEM DISTRICT, HANOI CITY, VIETNAM China (Shenzhen) Service Center
TEL: +84-4-3937-8075 / FAX: +84-4-3937-8076 ROOM 2512-2516, 25/F., GREAT CHINA INTERNATIONAL EXCHANGE SQUARE, JINTIAN RD.S.,
FUTIAN DISTRICT, SHENZHEN 518034, CHINA
TEL: +86-755-2399-8272 / FAX: +86-755-8218-4776
INDONESIA China (Xiamen) Service Dealer
China (Dongguan) Service Dealer
PT. MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC INDONESIA
Indonesia Service Center
GEDUNG JAYA 11TH FLOOR, JL. MH. THAMRIN NO.12, JAKARTA PUSAT 10340, INDONESIA KOREA
TEL: +62-21-3192-6461 / FAX: +62-21-3192-3942
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION KOREA CO., LTD. (KOREA FA CENTER)
Korea Service Center
THAILAND 1480-6, GAYANG-DONG, GANGSEO-GU, SEOUL 157-200, KOREA
TEL: +82-2-3660-9602 / FAX: +82-2-3664-8668
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FACTORY AUTOMATION (THAILAND) CO.,LTD
Thailand Service Center Korea Taegu Service Satellite
12TH FLOOR, SV.CITY BUILDING, OFFICE TOWER 1, NO. 896/19 AND 20 RAMA 3 ROAD, 4F KT BUILDING, 1630 SANGYEOK-DONG, BUK-KU, DAEGU 702-835, KOREA
KWAENG BANGPONGPANG, KHET YANNAWA, BANGKOK 10120,THAILAND TEL: +82-53-382-7400 / FAX: +82-53-382-7411
TEL: +66-2-682-6522-31 / FAX: +66-2-682-6020

TAIWAN
INDIA
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC TAIWAN CO., LTD. (TAIWAN FA CENTER)
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC INDIA PVT. LTD. Taiwan (Taichung) Service Center (Central Area)
India Service Center NO.8-1, INDUSTRIAL 16TH RD., TAICHUNG INDUSTRIAL PARK, SITUN DIST.,
2nd FLOOR, TOWER A & B, DLF CYBER GREENS, DLF CYBER CITY, TAICHUNG CITY 40768, TAIWAN R.O.C.
DLF PHASE-III, GURGAON 122 002, HARYANA, INDIA TEL: +886-4-2359-0688 / FAX: +886-4-2359-0689
TEL: +91-124-4630 300 / FAX: +91-124-4630 399
Ludhiana satellite office Taiwan (Taipei) Service Center (North Area)
Jamshedpur satellite office 10F, NO.88, SEC.6, CHUNG-SHAN N. RD., SHI LIN DIST., TAIPEI CITY 11155, TAIWAN R.O.C.
TEL: +886-2-2833-5430 / FAX: +886-2-2833-5433
India (Pune) Service Center
EMERALD HOUSE, EL-3, J-BLOCK, MIDC BHOSARI. PUNE – 411 026, MAHARASHTRA, INDIA Taiwan (Tainan) Service Center (South Area)
TEL: +91-20-2710 2000 / FAX: +91-20-2710 2100 11F-1., NO.30, ZHONGZHENG S. ROAD, YONGKANG DISTRICT, TAINAN CITY 71067, TAIWAN, R.O.C
Baroda satellite office TEL: +886-6-252-5030 / FAX: +886-6-252-5031
Mumbai satellite office

India (Bangalore) Service Center

PRESTIGE EMERALD, 6TH FLOOR, MUNICIPAL NO. 2,
LAVELLE ROAD, BANGALORE - 560 043, KAMATAKA, INDIA
TEL: +91-80-4020-1600 / FAX: +91-80-4020-1699
Chennai satellite office
Coimbatore satellite office

OCEANIA

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUSTRALIA LTD.

Australia Service Center
348 VICTORIA ROAD, RYDALMERE, N.S.W. 2116 AUSTRALIA
TEL: +61-2-9684-7269 / FAX: +61-2-9684-7245
Notice

Every effort has been made to keep up with software and hardware revisions in the contents described in
this manual. However, please understand that in some unavoidable cases simultaneous revision is not
possible.
Please contact your Mitsubishi Electric dealer with any questions or comments regarding the use of this
product.

Duplication Prohibited

This manual may not be reproduced in any form, in part or in whole, without written permission from
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation.

COPYRIGHT 2010-2013 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION

ALL RIGHTS RESERVED